Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 305

DONNA EDEN’S ENERGY MEDICINE MINDVALLEY

COURSE NOTES
(Incorporating transcripts of all the videos, some extracts from
‘Energy Medicine’, and advice and tips from EEM Practitioners on
TribeLearn and Facebook)

September 2017 to April 2018

Associated websites are:

- Learnenergymedicine.com
- edenenergymedicine.com
- innersource.net
- journey.edenenergymedicine.com

NB From the MindValley Energy Medicine Team:


“This programme does not substitute for the diagnosis and treatment of medical conditions by physicians or other qualified
healthcare providers. Rather, it is intended to offer information to help participants promote their own good health and to co-
operate with healthcare professionals in a mutual quest for optimum well-being.”

Julie Bissmire
Version 3 (May 2018)

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 1


© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 2
MODULE 1 - USING ENERGY MEDICINE TO FUEL YOUR VITALITY ........................................................ 19
About Energy Medicine, measuring energy, the energy body ............................................................. 19
Energy Medicine exercises (page 6 of the Glossary) ........................................................................ 20
Can you overdo Energy Medicine work? .......................................................................................... 20
What illnesses and conditions can be healed through Energy Medicine? ....................................... 21
Can you use Energy Medicine to heal an old injury? ........................................................................ 22
What Energy Medicine exercises would you suggest using to solve xyz pain? ................................ 22
Is a regular medical diagnosis necessary before using Energy Medicine? ....................................... 23
Is there a condition you should not try Energy Medicine techniques on? ....................................... 24
Can you use Energy Medicine techniques on people who are fragile and so cannot do the
techniques on themselves? .............................................................................................................. 24
Does Energy Medicine work for people who have had an organ removed?.................................... 24
Children’s energy .............................................................................................................................. 25
Babies and Energy Medicine ............................................................................................................. 26
What exercises can you do to quickly and easily restore balance and energy flow? ....................... 26
Is it possible to experience something akin to detox symptoms as you release energies? ............. 27
The best Energy Medicine exercises to strengthen joints ................................................................ 27
How to prevent illness using Energy Medicine techniques .............................................................. 28
Precision required to do Energy Medicine Techniques and what can go wrong ............................. 29
How energy works ............................................................................................................................ 30
Muscle-testing ...................................................................................................................................... 30
Meridians .............................................................................................................................................. 31
Acupoints/acupuncture points (page 9 of the Glossary) .................................................................. 32
Acupressure strengthening and sedating points (page 11 of the Glossary) ..................................... 32
Central and Governing Meridians ..................................................................................................... 33
How Central and Governing Meridians get their energy .................................................................. 33
Bladder Meridian and some of the things it governs ....................................................................... 34
Central Meridian and some of the things it governs ........................................................................ 34
Circulation Sex Meridian and some of the things it governs ............................................................ 34
Gall Bladder Meridian and some of the things it governs ................................................................ 35
Governing Meridian and some of the things it governs ................................................................... 35
Heart Meridian and some of the things it governs ........................................................................... 35
Kidney Meridian and some of the things it governs ......................................................................... 36
Large Intestine and some of the things it governs ........................................................................... 36

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 3


Liver Meridian and some of the things it governs ............................................................................ 37
Lung Meridian and some of the things it governs (mostly from balancedconcepts.net) ................. 37
Small Intestine Meridian and some of the things it governs ............................................................ 38
Spleen Meridian and some of the things it governs ......................................................................... 38
Stomach Meridian and some of the things it governs ...................................................................... 39
Triple Warmer Meridian and some of the things it governs ............................................................ 40
Which meridian governs blood and brain ........................................................................................ 41
Tracing a meridian backwards so it takes energy out of the flow .................................................... 41
Energy-testing ....................................................................................................................................... 41
Energy-testing guidelines (pages 6 and 7 of the Module 4 handout)............................................... 42
What to do if a person does not test strong on the General Indicator Test or Spleen Meridian Test
(page 7 of the Module 4 handout) .................................................................................................... 43
To energy-test someone using the General Indicator Test (ie to demonstrate energy, to let you
know what’s going on in their body) ................................................................................................ 43
To energy-test someone using the Spleen Meridian Test (ie how to do the Spleen Meridian Energy
Test - see page 9 of the module 4 handout) ..................................................................................... 44
How to get more reliable results when energy-testing (page 11 of the Module 4 handout) .......... 44
Ways to restore healthy energy flow (page 4 of the Module 1 handout) ............................................ 47
Trace Stomach Meridian (page 4 of the Module 1 handout) ........................................................... 47
Tap stomach points (page 4 of the Module 1 handout) ................................................................... 47
Tap K27 points (page 4 of the Module 1 handout) ........................................................................... 47
Energy test to determine if a person has a weak energy flow in the Kidney Meridian, resulting in
them feeling a little tired or a little ‘off’ ........................................................................................... 47
Benefits of massaging or tapping K27 and when to do this ............................................................. 48
How to locate the K27 points ........................................................................................................... 48
If someone is not shifting energy enough ........................................................................................ 48
Balancing energy systems ................................................................................................................. 48
Standard breath in Energy Medicine and the Microcosmic Orbit ........................................................ 49
What to do if brain energies are feeling scrambled ............................................................................. 50
How to test if someone’s brain energies are scrambled .................................................................. 50
To fix the problem of scrambled brain energies - the Wayne Cook posture, or alternative posture
and Crown Pull .................................................................................................................................. 51
When to do the Wayne Cook posture and Crown Pull ..................................................................... 52
The Daily Energy Routine (DER) ............................................................................................................ 52
How often you should do the DER in one day .................................................................................. 53

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 4


How long will it take the DER to work and is it safe? ....................................................................... 53
Should you do the DER if you are feeling unwell? ............................................................................ 55
Can children do the DER?.................................................................................................................. 55
Questions and answers about the DER from course participants .................................................... 55
The benefits of the Daily Energy Routine ......................................................................................... 58
The Crossover Shoulder Pull (page 10 of the Module 1 handout).................................................... 59
The Crossover Shoulder Pull - how to test if someone needs to do it.............................................. 59
The Crossover Shoulder Pull - how to fix it if someone’s energies are not crossing over ................ 60
The Four Thumps (page 11 of the Module 1 handout)..................................................................... 60
The Four Thumps - how to test if someone needs to restore energy to their Spleen Meridian ...... 61
The Cross Crawl (page 12 of the Module 1 handout) ....................................................................... 61
Wayne Cook Posture and alternative method (pages 13 and 14 of the Module 1 handout) .......... 62
The Crown Pull (page 15 of the Module 1 handout) ........................................................................ 62
The Crown Pull - how to test if someone needs to do this exercise ............................................. 63
The Zip-Up/Central Meridian (page 18 of the Module 1 handout and page 14 of the Module 7
handout)............................................................................................................................................ 63
The Hook-Up (page 19 of the Module 1 handout) ........................................................................... 64
Connecting Heaven and Earth (page 11 of the Module 2 handout) ................................................. 65
How to test if someone needs to do the Connecting Heaven and Earth Exercise ....................... 65
Connecting Heaven and Earth - how to do it (page 11 of the Module 2 handout) ...................... 66
Massaging your gaits............................................................................................................................. 67
The Electrics and the Electric Points (from both the Glossary and Energy Medicine) .......................... 67
Neurolymphatic Reflex Points and Neurolymphatic Clearing (pages 16 and 17 of the Module 1
handout)................................................................................................................................................ 68
Benefits of massaging the Central Neurolymphatic Points .............................................................. 70
Benefits of massaging the Lung Neurolymphatic Reflex Point ......................................................... 71
Benefits of massaging the Small Intestine Neurolymphatic Reflex Points ....................................... 71
Benefits of massaging the Liver and Stomach Neurolymphatic Reflex Points ................................. 71
Benefits of massaging the Large Intestine Neurolymphatic Reflex Points ....................................... 71
The main Neurolymphatic Reflex Points to massage ....................................................................... 72
Using a tool to massage the Neurolymphatics ................................................................................. 72
The Spinal Flush, or Lymphatic Massage (see page 12 of the Module 6 handout) .......................... 73
Testing the Spinal Flush .................................................................................................................... 74
Energy localising.................................................................................................................................... 74

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 5


Pets and Energy Medicine..................................................................................................................... 75
MODULE 2 - THE IMPORTANCE OF CLEARING, CENTERING, BALANCING AND GROUNDING YOUR
ENERGIES............................................................................................................................................... 75
Neurovascular Reflex Points ................................................................................................................. 75
The Main Neurovascular Reflex Points on the Forehead ................................................................. 76
Energy test to determine if someone is stressed ............................................................................. 77
How to restore blood to your forebrain to reverse a stress response (page 5 of the Module 2
handout)............................................................................................................................................ 77
The Blow Out Technique (page 6 of the Module 2 handout and Donna also demonstrates the
technique 23 minutes into the Module 2 video) .................................................................................. 79
How to do the Blow Out (page 6 of the Module 2 handout) ............................................................ 79
Grounding yourself (pages 7 and 8 of the Module 2 handout) ............................................................ 80
How to test if someone is ungrounded ............................................................................................ 81
Grounding and aligning with the energies of the Earth techniques ................................................. 81
Tapping the cheekbones ............................................................................................................... 81
Grounding with the Darth Vader Breath exercise ........................................................................ 82
Aligning with the energies of the Earth (page 8 of the Module 2 handout)................................. 82
Aligning with the energies of the Earth - Smoothing Energy down your Legs (page 8 of the
Module 2 handout) ....................................................................................................................... 82
Massage the gaits ......................................................................................................................... 82
How to test if a person’s polarities are off ................................................................................... 83
Aligning with the energies of the Earth - Spooning your Feet (and hands) and Polarities ........... 83
Aligning with the energies of the Earth - Walk Barefoot in the Grass .......................................... 84
Taking Down the Flame ................................................................................................................ 84
Homolateral Crossover Re-patterning (page 10 of the Module 2 handout) ........................................ 84
How to test if someone is homolateral ............................................................................................ 85
How do you know if you are homolateral?....................................................................................... 85
Homolateral Crossover Re-Patterning Exercise (page 10 of the Module 2 handout) ...................... 85
Alternative technique for balancing a homolateral condition/re-patterning a homolateral
condition ........................................................................................................................................... 86
More homolateral information......................................................................................................... 87
What it means if you test strong on both the X and the parallel lines ............................................. 90
What if Homolateral Re-Patterning doesn’t seem to be working? .................................................. 90
Figure 8s ................................................................................................................................................ 91
Inadvertently crossing yourself! ........................................................................................................... 92

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 6


MODULE 3 - BEFRIENDING TRIPLE WARMER AND SPLEEN MERIDIANS TO RELIEVE STRESS ............... 92
The Meridian Flow Wheel (page 5 of the Module 3 handout) ......................................................... 92
Tracing, flushing, balancing, sedating and strengthening meridians ............................................... 94
Tracing your meridians (extract from the Energy Medicine book) ................................................... 98
Tracing your meridians course notes (at the 6-minute point of the Module 6 video and page 4 of
the Module 5 handout) ..................................................................................................................... 99
How to trace your meridians and the Meridian Cycle (pages 4 and 5 of the Module 6 handout) . 100
Tracing Meridians (to activate, strengthen & balance the energy flow - but do DER or 4 Thumps
first!)................................................................................................................................................ 101
How to balance a meridian ............................................................................................................. 102
What time of day to work on a specific meridian........................................................................... 102
The meridians and why we get jet lag ............................................................................................ 103
To negate the effect of jet lag and get your meridians on the right time zone ............................. 103
Meridian beginning and end points ................................................................................................ 104
Meridian strengthening and sedating points.................................................................................. 105
Sedating Heart Meridian ............................................................................................................. 106
Strengthening Triple Warmer Meridian...................................................................................... 106
Another way of accessing, strengthening and balancing meridians - the Neurolymphatics ......... 107
Flushing meridians .......................................................................................................................... 107
How to Flush a Meridian ................................................................................................................. 107
Triple Warmer ..................................................................................................................................... 108
Triple Warmer and Spleen Meridians being out of balance ............................................................... 110
Conditions associated with Triple Warmer Meridian being out of balance ................................... 110
Restoring Triple Warmer/Spleen Balance....................................................................................... 110
Changing a chronically overactive stress response ........................................................................ 111
How to energy-test Spleen Meridian and Triple Warmer Meridian (at the 20 minute point on the
video) .............................................................................................................................................. 111
To test Spleen Meridian .............................................................................................................. 111
What to do if you test weak on Spleen Meridian ....................................................................... 112
To test Triple Warmer Meridian ................................................................................................. 112
How to energy-test Heart Meridian................................................................................................ 113
Techniques to calm Triple Warmer................................................................................................. 113
Triple Warmer Smoothie (page 10 of the Module 3 handout) ................................................... 113
Partial Triple Warmer Smoothie ................................................................................................. 114
Triple Warmer Neurovasculars ................................................................................................... 114

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 7


Technique to relieve stress and balance Triple Warmer - YouTube Energy Minute .................. 114
Tapping to calm Triple Warmer .................................................................................................. 114
Triple Warmer Hug...................................................................................................................... 114
Reactive Pose .............................................................................................................................. 115
Figure 8 around the eyes/over the forehead.............................................................................. 115
Tracing Triple Warmer Meridian backwards (page 11 of the Module 3 handout) ..................... 115
Sedating Triple Warmer Meridian (page 12 of the Module 3 handout) ..................................... 115
Scapula Squeeze Exercise............................................................................................................ 116
Techniques to Strengthen Spleen ................................................................................................... 117
The Triple Warmer Smoothie...................................................................................................... 117
Flushing Spleen Meridian (page 13 of the Module 3 handout) .................................................. 117
Tapping Spleen Neurolymphatic Reflex Points (page 13 of the Module 3 handout) ................. 118
Cross my Heart exercise (page 14 of the Module 3 handout) .................................................... 118
How to balance Triple Warmer and Spleen - Triple Warmer/Spleen Hug (page 15 of the Module 3
handout).......................................................................................................................................... 118
More Energy Medicine Tools to Counter Stress ............................................................................. 118
Overview of Triple Warmer and Spleen Meridian and their relationship; the evolution of Triple
Warmer; and the immune and stress response ............................................................................. 119
Energy points ...................................................................................................................................... 121
MODULE 4 - USING ENERGY TESTS TO MAKE HEALTHY CHOICES ...................................................... 122
How to strengthen Spleen Meridian eg prior to energy-testing using the Spleen Meridian Energy
Test (page 8 of the module 4 handout) .......................................................................................... 124
Different ways to strengthen Spleen Meridian: ......................................................................... 124
How to energy-test Spleen Meridian and how to self-test Spleen Meridian ................................. 125
Testing food, supplements and personal items - how to do it ....................................................... 125
Surrogate energy-testing ................................................................................................................ 126
How to get more reliable results when energy-testing (page 11 of the Module 4 handout) ........ 126
Energy-testing medication .............................................................................................................. 126
Energy-testing shoes, glasses, beds or mattresses, jewellery ........................................................ 127
Small Intestine Meridian Test (to test food) ................................................................................... 129
How accurate and reliable is energy-testing and can we trust it? ................................................. 130
Self-Testing (page 14 of the Module 4 handout) ............................................................................ 132
Self-testing using your body as a pendulum (page 14 of the Module 4 handout) ..................... 132
Self-testing using a weight (page 14 of the module 4 handout)................................................. 134
Self-testing using a water jug ...................................................................................................... 134

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 8


Self-testing using the leg muscles (page 14 of the module 4 handout) ..................................... 136
TribeLearn responses to a query re self-testing ......................................................................... 136
Developing healthy habits (page 18 of the Module 4 handout) ..................................................... 137
What to do if energy-testing doesn’t work for you ........................................................................ 137
Ileocecal and Houston Valves (page 15 of the Module 4 handout).................................................... 138
How to reset the Ileocecal and Houston Valves (page 15 of the Module 4 handout) ................... 139
Freeing the Diaphragm (page 16 of the module 4 handout) .............................................................. 139
How to test if someone needs to free their diaphragm ................................................................. 139
How to free the diaphragm (page 16 of the Module 4 handout) ................................................... 139
MODULE 5 - WORKING WITH PAIN..................................................................................................... 140
Pain and Pain Techniques ................................................................................................................... 140
Which hand should we lead with when doing energy work? ......................................................... 143
Preliminaries ................................................................................................................................... 144
Siphoning (page 6 of the Module 5 handout) ................................................................................. 144
Counter-Clockwise Clearing (page 6 of the Module 5 handout) .................................................... 145
Rubbing Neurolymphatic Reflex Points associated with the meridian involved in the pain (page 7
of the Module 5 handout)............................................................................................................... 147
Techniques for healing emotional pain .......................................................................................... 147
Tracing Figure 8s (page 7 of the Module 5 handout) ..................................................................... 147
Main Neurovasculars (page 7 of the Module 5 handout)............................................................... 147
Breathing out the Pain (page 7 of the Module 5 handout) ............................................................ 148
How the mind can move your energies (page 9 of the Module 5 handout) .................................. 148
Tapping (page 10 of the Module 5 handout) .................................................................................. 149
The Spindle Cell Pinch (page 8 of the Module 5 handout) ............................................................. 150
Demonstration of how the Spindle Cell Pinch works with energy which is stuck in the fingers, arms
or shoulders .................................................................................................................................... 150
Stretching ........................................................................................................................................ 151
Neck stretching and how to test if the neck needs stretching ................................................... 151
When to use Zone Tapping, rather than meridian sedating points ................................................ 152
Zone Tapping................................................................................................................................... 152
How to do Zone Tapping ............................................................................................................. 153
Sedating pain .................................................................................................................................. 155
Identifying and sedating the meridian involved with the pain using the Muscle Meridian Chart
.................................................................................................................................................... 156

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 9


Headache Isometric Press (page 17 of the Module 5 handout and just past the 1 hour point on the
video) .............................................................................................................................................. 159
How to do the Headache Isometric Press (just past the 1 hour mark on the video) ................. 160
Pain Chasing (page 18 of the Module 5 handout) .......................................................................... 161
How to do pain chasing (page 18 of the Module 5 handout) ..................................................... 161
Use of Magnets to Lift Away Pain (pages 21 to 23 of the Module 5 handout) .............................. 164
How to find out which is the north or south of a magnet, using a person ................................. 165
Magnet cautions - be careful! (page 23 of the Module 5 handout) ........................................... 166
Magnet sensitivity test (page 22 of the Module 5 handout) ...................................................... 167
How to use magnets to relieve pain (page 21 of the Module 5 handout) ................................. 167
How to use magnets on broken bones ....................................................................................... 168
Using crystals instead of magnets (see page 22 of the Module 5 handout) .............................. 168
How to use a cut-glass crystal on a string (see page 22 of the Module 5 handout) ................... 169
MODULE 6 - THE CHAKRAS ................................................................................................................. 169
The 7 primary chakras..................................................................................................................... 170
Physiological functions of the chakras - ie the way they function (page 8 of the Module 6 handout)
........................................................................................................................................................ 170
Psychological function of the chakras (page 8 of the Module 6 handout) ..................................... 171
Spiritual function of the chakras (page 8 of the Module 6 handout) ............................................. 172
Special properties of the Root Chakra and Crown Chakra (page 8 of the Module 6 handout) ...... 172
Working with the chakras as an energy .......................................................................................... 173
Primary themes of the major chakras (page 9 of the Module 6 handout) ..................................... 173
Each chakra layer carries a different kind of information (page 10 of the Module 6 handout) ..... 176
Chakra clearing preliminaries (page 12 of the Module 6 handout and 30 minutes into the video)
........................................................................................................................................................ 177
The Spinal Flush (page 12 of the Module 6 handout) ................................................................. 177
Energy Sweep (page 12 of the Module 6 handout and 30 minutes into the video) ................... 178
Power and Electric/Central Point Stretch (page 12 of the Module 6 handout and 32 minutes into
the video) .................................................................................................................................... 178
Energy-testing individual chakras (page 13 of the Module 6 handout) ......................................... 178
Energy-testing chakra connections (page 13 of the Module 6 handout) ....................................... 179
Chakra clearing and balancing - background information (page 14 of the Module 6 handout) .... 180
Working on your own chakras ........................................................................................................ 181
To balance and bring oxygen to the chakras (Darth Vadar Breath) ............................................... 182
How to clear, balance and strengthen chakras (page 15 of the Module 6 handout) ..................... 182

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 10


How long does it take to clear chakras? ......................................................................................... 185
Miscellaneous questions and answers re chakras .......................................................................... 185
Techniques to strengthen chakra connections (page 16 of the Module 6 handout) ..................... 189
The Belt Flow Pull/Clearing the Belt Flow/Belt Flow Energy Test .............................................. 189
Figure 8s ...................................................................................................................................... 189
Clear the Chambers of the Throat Chakra (page 17 of the Module 6 handout)......................... 189
Taking Down the Flame Exercise (page 18 of the Module 6 handout and 1 hour 11 minutes on
the video) .................................................................................................................................... 190
Energies released as chakras clear (page 19 of the Module 6 handout) ........................................ 191
Donna’s insights into chakras ......................................................................................................... 192
Clearing a room after doing chakra work ....................................................................................... 193
Circulation Sex Meridian and the chakras ...................................................................................... 193
MODULE 7 - THE AURA ....................................................................................................................... 193
Your energetic space suit or antenna ............................................................................................. 194
Summary of what the Aura is and why it is important (page 2 of the Module 7 handout) ........... 195
Sensing the Aura as you do the Daily Energy Routine .................................................................... 196
The layers of the Aura (page 6 of the Module 7 handout) ............................................................. 196
More information on the sixth, Life Colour, layer of the aura........................................................ 198
When to work with the Aura (page 7 of the Module 7 handout)................................................... 199
Energy-test to show how far a person’s Aura extends ................................................................... 200
How to recognise and correct a detached Aura (page 8 of the Module 7 handout)...................... 200
Signs of a detached auric field (page 8 of the Module 7 handout) ............................................ 201
Testing for a detached auric field (page 8 of the Module 7 handout) ........................................ 201
How to correct an over-expanded or detached Aura (page 8 of the Module 7 handout) ......... 201
How to recognise and correct a collapsed Aura (page 9 of the Module 7 handout) ..................... 201
Signs of a collapsed auric field (page 9 of the Module 7 handout) ............................................ 202
Testing for a collapsed auric field (page 9 of the Module 7 handout)........................................ 202
How to correct a collapsed auric field (page 10 of the Module 7 handout) ............................... 202
What to do if you have nobody to test you for a detached or collapsed Aura .............................. 202
The Butterfly Exercise - to expand a collapsed auric field and make the Aura go out further (page
10 of the Module 7 handout and 22 minutes into the video) ........................................................ 203
The Reverse Butterfly Exercise - to pull in or reattach the auric field ie reattach the Aura to the
body (page 9 of the Module 7 handout and 23 minutes into the video) ....................................... 203

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 11


The Celtic Weave Exercise to repair and revitalise the Aura, to correct an over-expanded,
detached or collapsed Aura, for if you have holes or tears in your Aura, or if the Aura needs
reattaching (page 11 of the Module 7 handout) ............................................................................ 204
To test if you need to do the Celtic Weave Exercise (page 11 of the Module 7 handout) ......... 204
How to do the Celtic Weave Exercise (pages 11 and 12 of the Module 7 handout) .................. 205
More Ways to Clear, Strengthen and Balance your Aura (page 13 of the Module 7 handout) ..... 205
Pushing the Aura out Exercise (page 13 of the Module 7 handout) ........................................... 205
Fluffing the Aura Exercise (page 13 of the Module 7 handout) .................................................. 205
Trace Figure 8s (page 13 of the Module 7 handout) .................................................................. 206
Spoon your feet........................................................................................................................... 206
Darth Vader Breath ..................................................................................................................... 206
Spin a magnet or crystal (page 13 of the Module 7 handout) .................................................... 206
The Hook-Up and the Zip-Up (page 13 of the Module 7 handout)............................................. 208
Working with Central Meridian to protect from other energies .................................................... 208
Energy test for Central Meridian ................................................................................................ 208
The Lock-up technique combined with the Zip-Up..................................................................... 210
Summary of how to protect yourself from other energies and keep your Aura strengthened . 210
Miscellaneous questions re working with Central Meridian ...................................................... 210
Energy Dance for Module 7 ............................................................................................................ 211
How to develop the ability to see Auras ......................................................................................... 212
MODULE 8 - RADIANT CIRCUITS - THE ENERGIES OF VITALITY AND JOY ............................................ 212
What Radiant Circuits Do for You (page 4 of the Module 8 handout)............................................ 213
Ways you naturally tap into your Radiant Circuits (page 5 of the Module 8 handout) .................. 214
Triple Warmer Radiant Circuit Test (Cupping Hand) (8 minutes in on the video) .......................... 214
Quick and easy ways to activate Radiant Circuits (pages 7 to 10 of the Module 8 handout) ........ 214
Scapula Squeeze Exercise to Activate Triple Warmer as a Radiant Circuit (page 7 of the Module
8 handout and 8 minutes into the video) ................................................................................... 214
6-Word meditation: Notice Breath, Soften Belly, Open Heart (see page 7 of the Module 8
handout and 9 minutes into the video) ...................................................................................... 215
Yin Bridge Flow Radiant Circuit Energy-Test (14 minutes into the video) .................................. 216
Trace Hearts to strengthen and activate the Yin Bridge Flow Radiant Circuit - the Nine Hearts
Exercise (page 8 of the Module 8 handout and at 14 minutes on the video) ............................ 216
Happy Baby Pose to Activate Radiant Circuits (page 9 of the handout and 16 minutes into the
video) .......................................................................................................................................... 217
Smile deep down into your soul - a wonderful way to activate your Radiant Circuits (page 10 of
the Module 8 handout) ............................................................................................................... 218

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 12


5 more quick easy turn-ons for your Radiant Circuits (page 10 of the Module 8 handout)....... 219
What individual Radiant Circuits Do (pages 12 and 13 of the Module 8 handout) ........................ 219
The Yin (front) and Yang (back) Regulator Circuits and energy-test (page 12 of the module 8
handout)...................................................................................................................................... 220
The Yin (front) and Yang (back) Bridge Circuits and energy-test (page 12 of the module 8
handout and 26 minutes into the video) .................................................................................... 220
The Penetrating Flow Radiant Circuit and energy-test (page 13 of the module 8 handout and 29
minutes into the video) ............................................................................................................... 221
The Belt Flow Radiant Circuit and energy-test (page 12 of the Module 8 handout and 33
minutes into the video) ............................................................................................................... 221
Central and Governing Radiant Circuits (page 13 of the Module 8 handout) ............................ 222
Triple Warmer Radiant Circuit (page 13 of the Module 8 handout)........................................... 222
Spleen Radiant Circuit (page 14 of the Module 8 handout) ....................................................... 222
How to trace Radiant Circuits (page 14 of the Module 8 handout)................................................ 223
Tracing the Yin Regulator Radiant Circuit: Classic Tracing (page 15 of the Module 8 handout and
24 minutes into the video) .......................................................................................................... 224
Tracing the Yin Regulator Radiant Circuit: Funky Flow (page 15 of the Module 8 handout and 25
minutes into the video) ............................................................................................................... 224
Tracing the Yin Bridge Radiant Circuit: Classic Tracing (page 16 of the Module 8 handout and 27
minutes into the video) ............................................................................................................... 225
Tracing the Yin Bridge Radiant Circuit: Funky Flow (page 16 of the Module 8 handout and 28
minutes into the video) ............................................................................................................... 226
Tracing the Penetrating Flow: Classic Tracing (page 17 of the Module 8 handout and 30 minutes
into the video) ............................................................................................................................. 226
Tracing the Penetrating Flow: Funky Flow (page 17 of the Module 8 handout and 30 minutes
into the video) ............................................................................................................................. 227
Tracing the Penetrating Flow: children’s version (30 minutes into the video)........................... 227
Front to Back Figure 8s to connect Yin and Yang Bridge Flow and energy-test (32 minutes into
the video) .................................................................................................................................... 227
Tracing the Belt Flow Video Tracing (36 minutes into the video)............................................... 227
Tracing the Belt Flow: Classic Tracing (page 18 of the Module 8 handout) ............................... 228
Tracing the Belt Flow: Funky Flow (page 18 of the Module 8 handout and 37 minutes into the
video) .......................................................................................................................................... 228
Building the habit of radiant joy: techniques to activate the Radiant Circuits (pages 20 and 21 of
the Module 8 handout) ................................................................................................................... 229
Breathing through the heart ....................................................................................................... 229
Tracing hearts over your heart ................................................................................................... 229

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 13


Connect with nature ................................................................................................................... 229
Triple Warmer Smoothie ............................................................................................................ 229
Triple Warmer/Spleen Regulator Balancing - which may help you lose weight! (page 20 of the
Module 8 handout and 41 minutes into the video, demonstrated by Donna’s daughter, Titanya)
.................................................................................................................................................... 230
Heaven Rushing In (page 21 of the Module 8 handout and 45 minutes into the video) ........... 231
Back scratch ................................................................................................................................ 231
Tracing each other’s Belt Flow while lying down (38 minutes into the video) ........................... 231
Miscellaneous questions and answers re Radiant Circuits ............................................................. 232
Darth Vader Breath exercise ............................................................................................................... 232
Parlour tricks ....................................................................................................................................... 233
Tracing Stomach Meridian backwards ........................................................................................ 233
Tracing Central Meridian backwards .......................................................................................... 234
Resources for continued learning of Energy Medicine ....................................................................... 234
How do all of the energy medicine techniques rank in helping the energy flow and strengthening the
energy? ............................................................................................................................................... 239
Energy Medicine Practice Checklist .................................................................................................... 240
Miscellaneous Questions and Answers .............................................................................................. 243
Energy-testing your meridians ............................................................................................................ 255
Alarm points .................................................................................................................................... 255
How to use alarm points to test meridians..................................................................................... 256
Correcting imbalances in your meridians ....................................................................................... 257
How to build a stronger energy field and strengthen your overall health ..................................... 257
Stretching and twisting ............................................................................................................... 258
Flushing the meridian ................................................................................................................. 258
Massaging the meridian’s Neurolymphatic Reflex Points .......................................................... 258
Holding or tapping the meridian’s acupressure strengthening and sedating points ................. 258
Specific conditions and how to alleviate them with Energy Medicine ............................................... 259
How to loosen up when you are feeling stiff (Spinal Suspension exercise) ................................... 259
To strengthen the joints to facilitate exercise and activity and clear congested energy in the joints
(eg arthritis) and to help with joint pains ....................................................................................... 260
To nip an illness in the bud ............................................................................................................. 260
To help infections and fevers .......................................................................................................... 260
To prevent yourself getting a cold .................................................................................................. 260
When you have a cold or if you feel you are coming down with flu .............................................. 261

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 14


To stop a coughing attack ............................................................................................................... 262
To help a chronic cough .................................................................................................................. 262
To help congested sinuses .............................................................................................................. 262
If you are feeling hot ....................................................................................................................... 262
If you have a headache ................................................................................................................... 263
If you have a migraine..................................................................................................................... 263
If you have an optic migraine.......................................................................................................... 264
To help with menstrual migraines .................................................................................................. 264
Energy Medicine for your eyes ....................................................................................................... 264
Donna’s own daily routine for eye health .................................................................................. 266
If you have concussion .................................................................................................................... 266
To help calm lively brain activity ..................................................................................................... 267
To help with problems with your brain .......................................................................................... 267
To help with vertigo ........................................................................................................................ 267
If you feel dizzy or faint ................................................................................................................... 267
To help with hair issues................................................................................................................... 267
If you have pain in the neck ............................................................................................................ 268
To help with thyroid issues ............................................................................................................. 268
To help impaired hearing (TribeLearn) ........................................................................................... 268
To help tinnitus ............................................................................................................................... 269
For swelling in the face (eg after root canal work or for a jaw infection) ...................................... 269
To help with acne ............................................................................................................................ 269
To help with skin ailments like psoriasis, acne and eczema ........................................................... 269
To help with rashes on your skin .................................................................................................... 269
To help with eczema on the face .................................................................................................... 270
To help asthma................................................................................................................................ 270
To make it easier for your throat to swallow pills .......................................................................... 270
To move and clear energy stuck around the neck and jaw (TribeLearn)........................................ 270
If you have shoulder pain................................................................................................................ 270
Under-wired bras ............................................................................................................................ 271
If you have heart/chest pain ........................................................................................................... 271
To regulate blood pressure ............................................................................................................. 271
If you have high blood pressure...................................................................................................... 271
To help with circulation - and your heart generally........................................................................ 271

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 15


Strengthening the Heart Meridian to try to prevent a heart attack............................................... 272
If you have palpitations................................................................................................................... 272
To help with Atrial Fibrillation ........................................................................................................ 272
If you have tennis elbow ................................................................................................................. 272
If you have pain in your wrists, close to the thumb joint ............................................................... 273
If your waist hurts ........................................................................................................................... 273
To help shingles pain....................................................................................................................... 273
If you feel nauseous ........................................................................................................................ 273
To help with stomach issues eg indigestion, bloating and pain due to gas .................................... 274
If you have eaten too much or need help digesting food............................................................... 274
If you have diarrhoea ...................................................................................................................... 275
If you have constipation.................................................................................................................. 275
To help the muscles in the abdominal area .................................................................................... 275
To help menstruation pains ............................................................................................................ 275
To help endometriosis .................................................................................................................... 275
To help with the menopause .......................................................................................................... 276
To keep your spine straight ............................................................................................................ 276
To help upper back pain.................................................................................................................. 276
To help middle back pain ................................................................................................................ 276
To help lower back pain, or tension or tightening in your back ..................................................... 276
To help with sciatica ....................................................................................................................... 277
Sciatic pain from bulging discs/pain from bulging discs ................................................................. 277
To support kidneys and adrenals .................................................................................................... 278
To help with kidney stones ............................................................................................................. 279
To help an overactive bladder ........................................................................................................ 279
To help a bladder infection ............................................................................................................. 279
If you have pain/inflammation in the rectum................................................................................. 279
To help the prostate gland/ prostatitis ........................................................................................... 279
If you have a pain in your hip .......................................................................................................... 279
To help haemorrhoids ..................................................................................................................... 279
If you have knee problems or problems in the upper thighs ......................................................... 280
For bone on bone knee and/or hip pain ......................................................................................... 280
To get some energy flow going into your legs ................................................................................ 280
If you have restless legs syndrome ................................................................................................. 280

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 16


If you have pain or soreness in your legs ........................................................................................ 281
To help varicose veins ..................................................................................................................... 281
If you get cramp in your calves ....................................................................................................... 282
If you have pain in your calves ........................................................................................................ 282
If you have gout in your big toe ...................................................................................................... 282
If you have plantar fasciitis ............................................................................................................. 282
If your feet are tired ........................................................................................................................ 282
If your feet and ankles are swollen ................................................................................................. 283
If your shoes are making your feet hurt ......................................................................................... 283
Helping numb parts of your body ................................................................................................... 283
To help with acid reflux................................................................................................................... 283
To help the gag reflex ..................................................................................................................... 283
To help boost your metabolism for weight loss - and weight loss generally ................................. 284
To prevent hay fever ....................................................................................................................... 284
To build bone strength.................................................................................................................... 285
To help osteoporosis ....................................................................................................................... 285
To help with insomnia..................................................................................................................... 285
To help with problems with your blood.......................................................................................... 286
To help with autoimmune illnesses ................................................................................................ 286
To help with ME .............................................................................................................................. 288
To help with Fibromyalgia............................................................................................................... 288
If someone is having a seizure or is unconscious ........................................................................... 289
To help with severe and less severe allergy attacks eg asthma, anaphylactic shock, bee stings etc
........................................................................................................................................................ 289
To help osteoporosis ....................................................................................................................... 290
If you have neuropathy ................................................................................................................... 290
If you are going into hospital to have surgery ................................................................................ 290
If you are too ill to work with your energies................................................................................... 291
If you are feeling ungrounded ........................................................................................................ 291
To help change a habit and to clear limiting beliefs ....................................................................... 292
To help with short-term memory loss ............................................................................................ 292
To help with Alzheimer’s Disease ................................................................................................... 293
To help with anxiety........................................................................................................................ 294
If you are stressed ........................................................................................................................... 294

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 17


To help with the stress of an emotional shock (as opposed to physical stress) ............................. 296
To help if you have had devastating news ...................................................................................... 296
To help with negativity ................................................................................................................... 296
To help with depression.................................................................................................................. 296
If your head has got crammed or stuffed, or if you have ‘brain fog’ .............................................. 297
To help with dyslexia, or if you are feeling ‘scrambled’ (ie the energies in the brain are all
scrambled up), or if you feel you are not connecting with someone, or you need help before giving
a presentation or teaching a class or chairing a meeting etc ......................................................... 297
If you can’t think of words that you are looking for or you can’t think of something ................... 297
To help you remember your dreams .............................................................................................. 297
To help with negativity ................................................................................................................... 297
If you have mood swings, or are feeling frazzled, or feel like crying or feel you are falling apart . 297
If you are feeling tired or ‘off’ ......................................................................................................... 298
To rectify energy slumps at certain times of the day ..................................................................... 299
If you need more breath or energy................................................................................................. 299
To help if you feel overloaded eg as a result of world issues that have shocked you .................... 299
If you feel like you are coming apart .............................................................................................. 299
If you need longevity eg to get your strength/energy back in a race or swimming competition .. 299
To help with self-esteem issues eg self-doubt of not being lovable............................................... 299
To help with procrastination........................................................................................................... 300
To help if someone is annoying or frustrating you, or when your energies are full ...................... 300
To protect yourself from the energies of a person who is ill while you are working on them ...... 300
To remove unwanted energies, clear excess or stuck energy, anger, or the residue of your
response to stress ........................................................................................................................... 300
If your heart has been broken in a relationship ............................................................................. 300
To keep yourself centred and focused............................................................................................ 300
If you are faced with a social event or interaction that seems unappealing or threatening ......... 301
To clear energy that belongs to others or to protect yourself from violent energy (eg the energy of
someone who has dementia), or to clear negative energies you don’t want to pick up from
someone else (eg if you work in an energetically toxic environment) ........................................... 301
To pass energy onto another loved one who needs it, or who is not around you (Question from
Module 1 Question and Answer coaching call) .............................................................................. 302
If somebody is extremely sick, sometimes Triple Warmer thinks that things are so bad that you are
going to die so, in that circumstance, if a person has got that bad, strengthen Triple Warmer.... 302

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 18


MODULE 1 - USING ENERGY MEDICINE TO FUEL YOUR VITALITY

About Energy Medicine, measuring energy, the energy body

Energy is the language that your body speaks and it’s a language that every person in this
world can learn and speak. Your own energy is as unique as a thumb print.

Energy Medicine recognises energy as a vital, living, moving force that determines much
about health and happiness. Energies - both electromagnetic energies and more subtle
energies - form the dynamic infrastructure of the physical body. The flow, balance, and
harmony of these energies are reflected in the health of the body. When the body is not
healthy, corresponding disturbances in its energies can be identified and treated.
In Energy Medicine, you heal the body by activating its natural healing energies, and by
restoring energies that have become weak, disturbed or out of balance.

Our subtle energy has intelligence and this has been understood by traditional healing and
spiritual traditions for thousands of years in recorded records. But it’s strange for our culture
because we don’t know how to measure these energies.

We can measure electrical and thermal energy, but we don’t know how to measure an
intelligent energy in the body. We don’t know how to have instruments that can track that
intelligence, instruments that can show you how it’s working. But Western science is now
coming out very close to the Eastern understanding of energy.

One of the ways to really recognise that it’s been well known is how we are really largely
made of space. If you take a carbon molecule from the body and you expand it so that the
nucleus is the size of a golf ball, the nearest electron is 22 miles away. All the rest is space.
The electron is recognised as energy. But the nucleus, that is thought of as matter. That’s
where the mass is.

But what’s happening now is that scientists are getting more and more sophisticated
instruments where they can look at the nature of that, of the protons and neutrons that are in
that nucleus and break them down when they go further and further down. What’s the
smallest particle? They get to the point where there are no particles. These basic particles
are made up of energy. That’s all there is. There are no particles, there is no matter. We
experience it as matter but, another way to think of that is that we are all a very dense form
of energy.

So everything is energy, so what Energy Medicine is about is working with some of the
energies that are not well known in Western thought, but that still make a difference because
they govern what is happening in your body. They govern what is happening in the physical
plain.

These energies are actually very complex, in the same way that your body has so many
different systems eg the cardiovascular system, the respiratory system, the immune system.
There is a different energy governing each of these systems. There’s a different energy that
corresponds with each of these systems. So the energy body is a very, very, sophisticated
kind of system. In Western medicine we don’t really think of the energy dimension of all
these systems, yet if you understand the energy dimension, you can go right to the root and
heart of problems, because the energy is governing what’s happening on the physical.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 19


In this course, we look at 5 different energy systems in depth:
- the Meridians
- Triple Warmer Meridian, which governs the immune response
- the Chakra system
- the Radiant Circuits
- the Aura

In response to a question on the Module 1 Question and Answer Coaching Call regarding if
Donna and David believe that computers, mobile phones and microwaves etc, affect our
health, their answer was as follows:

They absolutely do. We evolved for a natural world, which we no longer live in. We
have to adapt or else we get more and more worn out and tired. Every inch of our
atmosphere is now filled with man-made electromagnetics, which we have to learn to
adapt to or throw off, so that they don’t bother us. So that’s what Energy Medicine
does - it teaches your body, your energy systems, to be able to deal with these
energies. In Energy Medicine, you are teaching your body to manage these
energies, in relation to your environment

In response to a question on the Module 1 Question and Answer Coaching Call regarding
what energy shifting feels like and what are some of the common sensations in the body, the
answer was as follows:

It’s different for everybody, although the result is the same for everybody. We are
different types of people. Some people don’t feel it as much, although in time that
can change. Everybody feels more, over time. You need to tune into your
experience and stay alert for shifts and sensations

Energy Medicine exercises (page 6 of the Glossary)

The movement of energy in the body is governed by habits. Optimum flows and connections
may become blocked or scrambled due to stress or illness and these damaged patterns may
become habitual. Energy Medicine exercises can change energy habits and restore healthy
energy flow, easing everyday discomfort, acute or chronic illnesses and mental or emotional
distress.

The exercises in this course are designed to:

- reinforce Eden Energy Medicine as a learning process that increases awareness of


your body’s energies and energetic needs
- empower you with tools you can use right away to help yourself feel better
- build healthy habits through exercises that are easy to do at home
- translate complex Energy Medicine principles into easily-learned activities that invite
your consistent practice and continued learning
- help you communicate with and influence your body’s energy systems
- support your own healing through direct dialogue with your body and a better
understanding of what is happening energetically

Can you overdo Energy Medicine work?

In response to a question on the Module 1 Question and Answer Coaching Call regarding if
you can overdo energy work, the answer was as follows:

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 20


Only if you are working on someone with a fairly far-advanced auto immune illness.
In that circumstance you have to go very slowly as their body won’t assimilate it fast
enough - it overloads their circuits

But, generally, your body will tend to love it. If it doesn’t feel good, don’t do it - leave
it a while and come back to it. If you don’t like it, it’s generally because you are
homolateral, so switch gears and get out of homolateral and do Crossovers.

What illnesses and conditions can be healed through Energy Medicine?

In response to a question on the Module 2 Question and Answer live call with Janel and
Michelle, regarding what illnesses and conditions can be healed through Energy Medicine,
the answer was as follows:

A lot of people don’t understand the differences between what happens when you
are working with energies and when you are working with conventional medicine.
In conventional medicine, it’s all about the illnesses, the symptoms and what’s wrong
with you - and so conventional medicine gives you drugs to work with that

When you are working with Energy Medicine it is not about the symptoms and it is
not about the illness, it’s about finding out where the body has an imbalance and then
helping the body to fix that

Donna talks about the energies being both the patient and the medicine. So, firstly,
the patient, so whichever energy has the priority for the body to be able to work with
will show up first and then that gets corrected and that corrected energy goes back
into the body and actually becomes the medicine for the body and helps the body to
actually heal itself

Because remember it’s all self-healing. When you are working with your energies,
you are helping your body to get back to that state of wholeness that it already knows
it has, it’s just kind of forgotten and got confused along the way

So Energy Medicine can work with everything, because everything is about working
with the energies - it’s not specific to the symptoms and the illness

It’s also important to mention that we are so unique with each of our own energies
that what may show with one diagnosis for one person could be very different for
another person. Our energies are as unique as our thumbprint

In response to questions on the Module 7 Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David
regarding questions about specific health conditions, David’s response was as follows:

There were about 40 different health conditions that people asked about in this
session, which gave me the opportunity to explain that Energy Medicine differs from
conventional medicine. When you are working with the body’s energies, that is your
focus - you are focusing on where the energies are blocked, where they are deficient,
where they are over-charged, where they are out of harmony with the other energies
in the body. That is what the energy-testing is able to get at and that is what the
techniques do

There is a relationship to that with physical ailments but, unlike Western medicine,

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 21


that is not where we focus. We don’t diagnose illness. What we can do is to use the
knowledge about the illness to tell us where to focus. So, if the illness is in the
kidneys, you would look at Kidney Meridian, for instance

So there is a definite relationship between what is going on in the energies and what
is going on in the person’s physical body, but the attention, and what we really want
you to learn, is how to work with the body’s energies. When you balance the body’s
energies there are positive effects - and those positive effects may be the healing of
an illness, or increased energy, or increased mental agility, or better mood etc, but
that is not what we aim for - we aim for getting the energies into harmony and
balance. Then, whatever additional benefits that has, is great - and there are often
many benefits. But that is not where we are looking - we are looking at the energies

Can you use Energy Medicine to heal an old injury?

Yes! One of the things that make old injuries a problem is that the energy isn’t moving
through the area of the injury. So when you do the DER and you trace your meridians, you
get that energy to move through the old injury site and, little by little, it starts to get more
supple and more alive again.

What Energy Medicine exercises would you suggest using to solve xyz pain?

In response to a question from the live Q&A Coaching Call after Module 5 with Donna and
David, regarding what Energy Medicine exercises should be used to solve a particular pain
(there were an enormous amount of questions asking for help with different types of pain!),
the answers were as follows:

David: It’s the same answer as when we were talking about diagnosis. You don’t
diagnose an illness. So, when someone says, “what Energy Medicine technique do I
use to solve xyz illness..” there is no recipe. You take the illness as a clue as to
where to look at that imbalance

Donna: Regardless of what illness you have, the first thing you want to do is to
balance your energies - do the DER to get the energies flowing so that they can hit
their mark of where you want them to go. That is the most basic thing of all - do that
before you do any other thing. The DER really builds the foundation

NB The answer to this question is also covered in the Pain Module, as follows:
Western medicine has paid a lot of attention to pain. And a lot of what Western
medicine does is based around the symptoms people come in with - eg where they
hurt, what’s going on. So pain is diagnostic. But a lot of what the treatments are, are
to stop the signals of pain from consciousness using medication (which may have
side effects). However, when you take a pharmaceutical, you are ‘just’ blocking pain

This is very different from how Energy Medicine approaches pain. Energy Medicine
approaches pain by going to the energetic roots of what’s causing the pain. It
doesn’t try to block the pain and mask the symptoms in the way that conventional

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 22


medical treatments and medication do. But by going to the root of what is at the
basis of the pain, you also are addressing what’s causing the pain - you are
addressing the underlying issues. This is a healthier approach and one that works
with your body’s innate wisdom and ability to heal

Also, unlike medication, energy techniques have no side effects and there is no worry
about becoming addicted. So, in Energy Medicine, you are not focused on, ‘let’s stop
it from hurting’. You are focused on why is it hurting, what is going on energetically,
how can we shift that? In fact, when you take pain away energetically, that is also
healing your body - you are going to the root of it

Is a regular medical diagnosis necessary before using Energy Medicine?

In response to a question from the live Q&A Coaching Call after Module 5 with Donna and
David, regarding if a regular diagnosis is necessary before using Energy Medicine, the
answers were as follows:

Donna: No! Energy Medicine, for one thing, is a wonderful way to start hearing what
your body is saying to you. You will not harm yourself at all by just moving the energy
and it gives you empowerment in your own life and is an excellent thing to do

David: Regular (Western) diagnosis is from a different model really, where you
diagnose illness. That is the Western medical model and it has worked very well in
many ways. Energy Medicine diagnosis comes from a very different angle, which is
that you are assessing the energies and how they are flowing, where they are
flowing, where they are not flowing, where they are blocked, where they are over-
charged or where they are under-charged. From those problems, come symptoms.
The same symptoms such as, say, symptoms of fibromyalgia, might in one person be
a very different energy signature than it is in another person’s - so same symptom,
but a different energy situation. When you work within Energy Medicine protocol you
are working with the way the energies are out of balance or out of harmony and,
ultimately that will resolve symptoms - but symptoms are not your target. Symptoms
are just giving you information, they are telling you where to look and whether other
places need attention

The other thing to understand about the concept of symptoms is that much of what
we teach, particularly in this MindValley course, is self-help techniques that are for
enhancing your vitality, enhancing your overall wellness. They don’t have to be
oriented towards specific symptoms

So the answer is that you can proceed with these methods without having any
diagnosis at all or, if there is a diagnosis, it’s not your target. For instance, if the
problem is in the lungs, you might want to make sure that the energy is moving and
flowing well in the Lung Meridian. But the problem may not be in the Lung Meridian
at all, it may be in one of the meridians that feeds the Lung Meridian. So it is an
assessment of the energies

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 23


Is there a condition you should not try Energy Medicine techniques on?

In response to a question from the live Q&A Coaching Call after Module 5 with Donna and
David, regarding if there is a condition that you should not try Energy Medicine techniques
on, the answers were as follows:

Donna: No, there is absolutely nothing that you can’t try Energy Medicine on first.
Very often, because you have tried Energy Medicine, you don’t have to go to
Western medicine. You will find that, once you start moving the energies in your
body, everything starts getting better

David: What you do need to do is be very sensitive to what the person’s condition is.
For instance, for an auto immune illness, you want to make sure that you don’t move
the energies too fast - because if you move them too fast, the person may end up
with nausea or a headache

Donna: But you are not going to hurt anybody. It essentially helps, no matter what,
but you get more and more attuned with people’s energies and have a sense of how
fast or how slow to do it

Can you use Energy Medicine techniques on people who are fragile and so
cannot do the techniques on themselves?

Yes! Show them the exercises (eg the DER) and have them repeat the exercises in their
mind, healthily visualising themselves going through the exercises one by one. Very often,
people who are that fragile have the opportunity to spend time doing that and it’s very
effective. You can’t hurt them. You can also do Figure 8s (see page 91) all over their body -
you don’t need to touch them, or you can go in close to their energy field, whichever they
prefer. You can try any of the techniques without touching the person eg tracing their
meridians. Either do it in their energy field or even in your own mind.

Does Energy Medicine work for people who have had an organ removed?

If someone has lost an organ, they will benefit hugely from working with the meridians or
Neurolymphatic Points of that organ. Every organ has an energy field, which still exists even
if the organ is gone - that is why people feel phantom limb pain. Treat it as an energy that
needs extra support.

In Energy Medicine Donna explains how holding the sedating points on the ‘missing’ leg of
an amputee brought him instant pain relief.

In response to a question from the live Q&A Coaching Call after Module 5 with Donna and
David regarding if Energy Medicine works for people who have had an organ removed (eg
the spleen), their answers were as follows:

Donna: It’s more important then than ever. Very often people will go into hospital to
have an organ removed and then something will be off with them and they don’t

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 24


know why. When you have an organ removed, the energy still travels in that area
and so you have to get the energy straightened out so that you can get your vitality
and health back. If you don’t straighten the energy out after an organ removal, things
can get ‘screwy’

David: Surgery is amazing. In my lifetime I have had my gall bladder and appendix
removed - those were life-savers. It’s amazing how the body will readjust
energetically. But it’s still a big invasion, and the body’s energies don’t know that this
is a friendly invasion, so it is disruptive. Prepare the body before surgery by
balancing all the energy systems and then, after surgery, balance all the energy
systems, so that the body really knows that there are friendly hands here helping it
and it gets those energies flowing naturally where the organ had been

Donna: At this stage, you don’t necessarily have to know all the energy systems, but
it’s a really good thing to do a chakra clearing really, really well, especially over the
area where the surgery is, both before and after the surgery. Also, make sure the
person is out of homolateral, keeping the energies crossing over, and do the DER

David: Another thing about chakras is that, in addition to the 7 major chakras, there
are many other smaller centres in the body that have the same property as chakras
and, very interestingly, when there is a wound (such as after surgery), that chakra
spiralling energy comes over that area to try to heal it. So during the chakra circling
over the area, that again is supporting the energy in that area

Children’s energy

In response to a question from the Module 7 Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David
regarding if children have more energy than adults, their answers were as follows:

Donna: Generally, children have a lot of energy. Their energies haven’t been
distorted or thrown off by the world as much as adults’ energies have and they are
very resilient. But you will always find children who don’t have a lot of energy and
you can begin to build that energy for them. You can teach them these exercises

Often when children go to school they start losing energy. They lose energy if they
are having trouble learning or if they feel overwhelmed by the adults, or by other kids
in school. Children take to these exercises so beautifully and it helps them learn in
school. So if you find children are losing their energy, they should use these tools

David: As vibrant and resilient as children are, when they are not in ideal
circumstances, their energies can get drawn out. But they are resilient and it comes
back. Children respond very well to energy work

Donna: I have a recent example of this. I know someone who was scared for her 7-
year old son, who was in school. English was his second language, Mexican was his
first. He got sicker and sicker, he had asthma and he couldn’t be on any team in the
school because he just didn’t have any energy. I taught him simple energy exercises
and Figure 8s crossing over and over in front of his body. I told him to do Figure 8s

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 25


all the time! Very quickly he began to get his energy back. He had been on asthma
medication for about 3 years and after doing the energy exercises and Figure 8s, the
doctor said the oxygen level had really grown in his lungs. He has become a happy
little boy and he feels empowered to take himself apart from the class and do the
exercises if he needs them. His teacher could not believe the change in him and
now the teacher is interested in learning about energy work so that she can help the
other children in the school

Babies and Energy Medicine

In response to a question in the Module 8 Q&A session regarding if you can use Energy
Medicine on your babies, Kelmie’s response was as follows:

Yes! Babies respond to energy quite easily. They don’t need a lot - often they just
need to be opened up with Figure 8s and you can trace their Triple Warmer
backwards with your little fingers. NB Titanya is currently writing a book about
Energy Medicine for children, which should be published in 2019

In response to a question from someone with a 13-month old baby, who has had a weak
digestive system since was born (he was 5 weeks premature), and he is also a restless
sleeper, Sarah Owen, EEM Practitioner, replied:

With babies and children, energy is much more open and not in entrenched patterns
yet, so it takes very little to help them balance. With one so young you could do
simple crossovers on his body or in his energy field and Figure 8s over his body.
You can also clear over his torso - counter-clockwise circles, then clockwise. All of
this really briefly. I’d also smooth behind his ears to relax Triple Warmer, again either
on his body or in his field

What exercises can you do to quickly and easily restore balance and energy
flow?

In response to a question on the Module 7 Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David
regarding how energies can shift so easily (as demonstrated when wearing a shoulder bag
and walking backward and forward) and what can be done easily throughout the day to
balance, Donna and David’s answers were as follows:

Donna: You can do a Cross Crawl - every time you pick up your leg, hit the opposite
knee with your hand and do it several times a day, just to keep that energy crossing
over. Hooking-Up helps. I do the Wayne Cook Posture, which really works for me,
and so do the tapping points. Over time, you will learn what really works for you

David: Some of the simplest ones that you can do any time are the Cross Over, the
Zip-Up, the Hook-Up and the 4 Thumps. They are naturals to be able to do, they
take almost no time or effort and yet they get your energy really flowing really quickly

NB Since this question was asked, we have learned that tracing meridians and working on
the Neurolymphatic Reflex Points etc also balances energy flow.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 26


Is it possible to experience something akin to detox symptoms as you
release energies?

In response to a question from the Module 7 Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David
regarding if it is possible to experience some kind of detox symptoms as we release
energies, Donna’s answer was as follows:

Yes. There are people who have been in energy fields that have been throwing them
off for a long time. When they start to release, it is detoxing. So, for instance, when
you massage your Neurolymphatic Reflexes, I would suggest you don’t do them all at
once - do just a few, because you are releasing toxins into your blood stream. So
just take care of yourself and find out what is your pace, what is your rhythm to be
doing this in - and then, over time, you can do more

This question came up again after Module 3 from someone who was always feeling tired and
had digestion and sleep issues after doing the DER. The responses from Deborah and
Kelmie were as follows:

Sometimes it takes time for the habits and energy to be re-trained by the repetition of
the exercises over time. If you still feel a lot of fatigue, it could be that your adrenals
are pretty tired. So just take it slowly, make sure you are getting plenty of water.
Sleep is often considered to be ruled by Heart, Small Intestine and Liver, especially if
you have a lot of dream-disturbed sleep. So use the Neurolymphatic Points for
Heart, Small Intestine or Liver. Make sure that you are getting your energies
crossing over – they may be running homolateral. So, beyond the Crossover
Shoulder Pull, do the Homolateral Re-Patterning, or the alternative re-patterning
exercise of doing the Figure 8 crossing over your eyes.

The best Energy Medicine exercises to strengthen joints

In response to a question from the Module 7 Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David
regarding people living longer and more active lives and putting excessive stress on their
joints, and what Energy Medicine exercises would be best to strengthen the joints to
facilitate exercise and activity, Donna and David’s answers were as follows:

Donna: I would say that with any of these exercises - and just doing the DER first
before anything else you do, and building that habit into your body - the energies will
begin to flow more and more and your joints will begin to release the energy. But
things like Connecting Heaven and Earth will help the energies move through the
joints. I would also suggest energy-testing Joint MSM which really helps the energy
just move. If you have knee problems, or problems in your upper thighs, the energy
can get stuck there, so sedate Small Intestine Meridian - that will often really help

David: That also brings up another issue, which is that Donna really encourages
people to work out what vitamins and herbs are going to be helpful for you and you
do that by energy-testing. Remember, though, that we tell people not to energy-test
medications because they are a whole different thing

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 27


How to prevent illness using Energy Medicine techniques

There was a question on the Q&A Live Coaching Call with Donna and David after Module 8
regarding how you know whether there is an illness present in your energy field before it
manifests into your body. For example, you may feel normal today, and then the next day
you have a cold or fever. Can you do something to the illness within the energy so that it
never manifests physically? Donna and David’s answers were as follows:

Donna: That is precisely one of the main reasons for the DER and getting out of
homolateral. Do all the energy exercises - but especially the DER. Do the DER
every day, or more than once a day if you have a lot that you are dealing with, or you
have been with people that are getting colds and flu. Your body will be able to easier
move toxins out of your body, or out of your field, before it even comes into your body

I have had a people tell me, also, that doing the Celtic Weave moves that energy out
of the Aura

David: For a more technical answer, there are ways to anticipate problems before
they occur. What Donna is talking about does not require you to assess your body’s
energies - these are just some of the common ways that you keep your energies
humming and healthy. But it is possible to test every one of the 14 meridians. It
wasn’t taught in this course, but there are 14 energy tests for the 14 meridians. NB I
have added the energy tests for all the meridians to these course notes! See
‘Energy-testing your meridians (from Energy Medicine)’ on page 255

However, what was covered in the class was the energy test for the Aura, so you can
test, it’s just not something that people have the time to do, or have the right person
there to do the testing for them

Theoretically, I think it’s really important to understand that you can determine which
meridians and which chakras are out, and what organ they are connected to, and
that organ is vulnerable because it’s not getting the energy that it needs. You can
prevent illness by strengthening that meridian, strengthening that chakra

Illness shows up in your energies before it manifests in physical symptoms. In some


provinces of ancient China, where the doctor’s primary job was seen as maintaining
health by keeping people’s energies balanced and flowing, so that people didn’t get
sick, the physician was paid only as long as the person was well. If the doctor had to
treat an illness, he had failed, so the patient didn’t pay. Western medicine’s practice
of waiting for physical symptoms to appear before intervening in a person’s health is
rather crude by comparison. It is much easier and wiser to treat the imbalance while
it is still only a disturbance in the energy field than to wait until it has progressed into
a physical symptom that is far more traumatic, entrenched and difficult to reverse

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 28


Precision required to do Energy Medicine Techniques and what can go
wrong

In response to a question on the Module 1 Question and Answer Coaching Call regarding if
there are any wrong moves to be aware of, how precise you have to be in the location of the
tapping points, and if something bad will happen if you don’t do the Energy Medicine
techniques precisely as shown, the answer was as follows:

Don’t worry about this at all and nothing bad will happen! When you have an
intention of healing yourself and doing something good for yourself, or anyone else,
your body, on that meridian, takes the intention of something good. It takes it in as
an energy

If there is an exercise in this routine that doesn’t feel right to you, shift it a little bit
until it does feel right! If it doesn’t feel right to you, that is your body talking to you
through your energies. Listen to your body and adjust the technique so that it feels
good

You don’t have to be so precise with tapping points. Don’t just tap with one finger,
tap with three or four. When you are holding on points, hold with all your fingertips.
If you miss the points slightly, your hands are electromagnetic and your body is
electromagnetic, so you don’t have to worry about being too precise

(As Kelmie, from the EEM Support Team says, “Remember, intention always trumps
precision!”)

Also, along with the electromagnetic energies that can be measured, there are also
several energies that we don’t measure - and subtle energies are influenced by the
mind. One of the effects of that is that intention does influence itself. So an
acupuncture point has a lower electrical resistance than the rest of the body so it’s a
window into the energy system and the energy is there when you are bringing your
hand there to hold these points. Those energies will move to meet your hand if your
hand is not on the exact place you intended. So it’s a very forgiving system, you
don’t have to do it exactly

In response to a question from the Live Q&A Coaching Call after Module 5 with Donna and
David, regarding what happens if, when practising Energy Medicine techniques, you are
doing it in the wrong place, as you might not be able to find the correct position, Donna and
David’s answers were as follows:

Donna: That’s one of the great things about Energy Medicine. Don’t worry about the
exact point. If you use your whole hand, you will not miss it - you have more energy
coming off your whole hand than if you were just using a finger. Also, if you have the
intention to heal, but you are not absolutely sure of the exact point, stop worrying and
just have the intention to move that energy. This is just not something that you need
to worry about!

David: You can use your mind to influence energy so if the correct acupressure point
is in one particular place and you are holding the point a little way away from that
point, but your intention is to have the healing impact on your body, the energies will

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 29


actually move over to accommodate that intention. I find it quite miraculous

Donna: It’s not only because of the intention, but the energies coming off our hands
are electromagnetic, your body is electromagnetic, so if you lay your hand in that
area, it’s like a magnet and will just pull it along to the right place

How energy works

We know from physics that energy is neither created nor destroyed. The body is less of a
‘closed system’ than it is a series of waves appearing solid. We are continually receiving
energy (from the Earth, the sky, the plants etc) and we are continually discharging energy.
The Blow Out exercise, for example, is a focused discharge of energy that was making us
uncomfortable (so we think of it as ‘bad’ sometimes - but it is just energy). Because ‘Nature
abhors a vacuum’ new energy pours in that enlivens us and restores the balance. When you
calm Triple Warmer, the energy that was ‘congested’ in that meridian is free to go back into
the general supply and seek out a place in the body or the energies where more energy is
needed and create balance. Sometimes if we get an injury, for example, the trauma to the
tissues and the physiological responses of heat and swelling can keep the energy from
flowing freely for a time. If we work with the meridians in the area, flow is restored and pain
lessens.

NB You may experience a feeling like an electric current or a tingling sensation when
practising energy medicine. If it brings discomfort, spoon your hands and/or feet and make
sure you are drinking enough water. As you become more consistently grounded this will
regulate. That doesn’t mean the energy has ‘gone away’, just that you have begun to
integrate it more effectively.

Muscle-testing

Energy tests were figured out by George Goodheart, who was a kinesiologist (the study of
the mechanics of motion with respect to human anatomy) of muscles. He worked with
muscles and helped athletes to better perform and also to get over their injuries. John Thie
also worked with George Goodheart on energy-testing - John’s father had worked as a
Western medical doctor in China. George and John began to work with the energies and the
muscles. They understood how energy flows and that muscles are on different meridians -
and so they worked out a way to test the muscles. So it was originally muscle tests and not
energy tests with these two. However, you can tell the muscles that are being challenged
when you energy-test - they are the muscles you use to resist the pushing. For example, it
makes the heart work when you do the Heart Meridian test.

The difference between energy-testing and muscle-testing is that energy-testing has to do


with how the energy flow is actually flowing through a muscle and muscle-testing refers to
how strong a muscle is.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 30


Meridians

The meridians are energy pathways that serve as the body’s energy ‘bloodstream’. Each
meridian runs both along the surface of the skin (where its flow can be readily influenced)
and deep into the body, where it takes energy to at least one major organ system.

The way the energy body is designed is that there are 14 ‘meridians’ - using the term from
Chinese medicine - or pathways, or energy flows. Half of these go up the body and half of
them go down the body. These 14 meridians flow constantly, in a consistent pattern and
direction. Most are named for one of the organs they flow through. For instance, the Liver
Meridian is an energy pathway that flows through and feeds the liver organ (as well as other
physical systems and organs in the vicinity).

The meridians, by name, are the Spleen, Heart, Small Intestine, Bladder, Kidney, Circulation
Sex, Triple Warmer, Gall Bladder, Liver, Lung, Large Intestine, Stomach, Central, and
Governing Meridians.

K27 is the juncture point for all the meridians in the whole body - that’s why, when you tap or
massage K27, you should tap or massage hard, so that you reach all of them!

Meridians affect every organ and every physiological system in the body, including the
immune, nervous, endocrine, circulatory, respiratory, digestive, reproductive, skeletal,
muscular and lymphatic systems. Each system is fed by at least one meridian.

In the same way that an artery carries blood, a meridian carries energy. If you think of the
meridians as an energy transportation system, a complex traffic network, you have a model
of how meridian energies interact. When a motorway becomes congested, it may be
necessary to divert some of the traffic onto a different road. A slip road may need to be
cleared or widened. If a meridian becomes backed up with too much energy, as occurs in
the hubbub of daily life, a bottleneck forms and the resources needed to support the body
are also blocked. It becomes difficult to provide food and remove waste products.

Likewise, if a road is damaged in an earthquake, even the critical support services that form
the community’s ‘immune system’ - the police, fire brigade and ambulance service - cannot
function properly. Because your body is in use 24 hours every day, 365 days a year, and
because it is under continual stress and has periodic ‘earthquakes’, its pathways need
regular maintenance and repair as well as an occasional major renovation.

The Central and Governing Meridians form an important circuit called the ‘Microcosmic
Orbit’, which supports the entire meridian system.

Within a 24-hour cycle, each of the other 12 meridians has a 2-hour period of ‘high tide’ and,
12 hours later, a 2-hour period of ‘low tide’. High tide is its most highly fuelled state and low
tide is when it is at rest. The Meridian Flow Wheel (page 5 of the Module 3 handout) shows
times of high and low tide for each meridian and key relationships between them.

The meridians bridge mind, body and spirit. They bring vitality and balance, remove
blockages, adjust metabolism and even determine the speed and form of cellular change.
Their flow is as critical as the flow of blood. If a meridian’s energy is obstructed or
unregulated, the system it feeds is jeopardised. Working with the meridians can activate
healing for the physical body and support the mental and emotional realms as well.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 31


All the meridians belong to an element (eg Stomach Meridian is an Earth element).

Each meridian has a different energy associated with it, based on which muscle the meridian
goes through. So when you energy-test (see ‘Energy-testing’ on page 41) you are testing
whether the muscle is operating at full efficiency. If it has the energy going through it, then
the energy test will show as strong. However, if the energy is not going through that
meridian, it means the muscle is not being fed, and so the energy test will show as weak.

We are designed so that, when we walk, run, or swim, or do the kinds of activities that our
ancestors did, it’s good for us. It’s like massaging the energy body. The direction of the flow
of the meridians is co-ordinated with the movement of the muscles, so that it has that
positive effect.

But nature had a design problem: how to let us know that it’s time to rest before we drop
from exhaustion.

These 14 meridians have a specific direction that is aligned with your muscles and your
anatomy. However, these meridians reverse their direction when you reach a certain level of
being tired and long before you are actually exhausted - they all go in the opposite direction.
So then, when you walk or do any of your regular activities, you’re going against the flow -
it’s draining you really fast. You can override it, but your body is now telling you it’s time to
rest. That’s a brilliant system if you live according to your body clock - ie you’re tired, so you
rest. But many of us live according to the time on our watches and so what happens is that
we are out of rhythm with our bodies, with our energies.

A separate energy-test has been devised for assessing the flow of energy in each of the 14
major meridians. These tests are referred to as the ‘meridian energy tests’. They can be
used in a variety of ways to assess the flow of energy in meridians as well as other energy
systems. See ‘Energy-testing your meridians’ on page 255.

One of the things Energy Medicine does is to give you tools to get your energies into
harmony with your lifestyle, so you are able to manoeuvre what’s happening in your body so
that it works with the life that you are living.

Tracing meridians activates, strengthens and balances the energy flow.

Acupoints/acupuncture points (page 9 of the Glossary)

Just as there are locations along the blood vessels where the pulse is most clearly felt, or
where transfusions can most easily be given, there are points on the body that act as portals
to the various energy flows.

Acupoints (also called acupuncture points) are hundreds of tiny, distinct reservoirs of heat
and electromagnetic energy on the surface of the skin, located along your meridian
pathways. These points can be stimulated with physical pressure (or needles) to release or
redistribute energy through their meridian.

Acupressure strengthening and sedating points (page 11 of the Glossary)

Located along each meridian are specific points that can be held to calm or strengthen the
flow of that meridian’s energies. Holding these points in an exact order can stimulate
redistribution of the body’s meridian energies to bring balance. (NB I have printed out all the

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 32


strengthening and sedating points for each meridian and they are at the end of this book.)
See Pain: Sedating Pain for how to do this.

Central and Governing Meridians

Central and Governing Meridians are the mother and father of the entire meridian system.
They are in the middle of the Meridian Flow Wheel (see page 5 of the Module 3 handout)
and are both meridians and Radiant Circuits. We are evolving, and they are moving back
and forth between a regular meridian pathway and energies that will go anywhere in your
whole body.

Central Meridian flows up the front centre of the body and feeds energy to the brain.
Governing Meridian flows up the back centre of the body and supports the spine and
nervous system energetically. Where the 2 meridians meet at the back of the throat, they
create a single force field and begin to behave like Radiant Circuits.

Doing the Hook-Up strengthens both Central and Governing Meridians. When Central and
Governing Meridian are Hooked-Up, you create a ‘feel’ that goes around your body and it’s
really important for vitality, stability and for being centred.

Central Meridian affects everything. The lymphatics on the outside of the top of your arm
are on that meridian and it’s also a Radiant Circuit. This energy protects you. If this energy
is running strong in your body, you’re protected from stuff out there that could get you.

Central Meridian deals with self-esteem and how empowered you are feeling (eg shyness,
fear etc) and it also deals with self-hypnosis and hypnosis of any kind.

Keeping the Central Meridian strong, which is the Zip-Up part of the DER (see page 63), is
the inner version of keeping your Aura strong. The Central Meridian goes through 5 of the
major chakras which go out to the Aura.

NB The shoulder muscles are on Central Meridian so, if you have shoulder pain, rubbing the
Central Meridian Neurolymphatic Reflex Points (ie where the arm joins the body) will help to
release the energy and so take the pain away.

How Central and Governing Meridians get their energy

In response to a question from the Module 3 Questions regarding how Central and
Governing Meridians receive fuel/energy/juice, the answer was as follows:

Central and Governing Meridians receive energy if you are Hooked-Up ie if you have
that Microcosmic Orbit going, Central and Governing keep getting fuelled and your
spine will stay straight throughout all your life if you keep that up

Central and Governing Meridians are always on 24 hours a day, different than the
other meridians that are on, but they have a peak high tide and low tide. Central and
Governing are central channels rather than situated on both sides of the body like the
other meridians. All the other meridians connect to Central and Governing as they
run along the core of the trunk of the body

The following is a list of the meridians and some of the things they each govern.
Care! Some things are governed by more than one meridian - so check if what you
are looking for appears under more than one meridian!

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 33


Bladder Meridian and some of the things it governs
- Bladder
- Your nervous system
- Balancing Bladder Meridian helps support the ear and all the moving parts
- The muscles in the back of your legs (also Triple Warmer Meridian, depending on
which muscle it is)
- Bladder Meridian is associated with sciatic back pain (however, it could also be
Circulation Sex and/or Large Intestine Meridian)
- From balancedconcepts.net:
 Infections in the head and sinuses
 Sinusitis
 Eye infections and diseases
 The pelvic area, including the sexual organs and sexual organ dysfunctions
 Problems with the spine
 Lumbago and sciatica
 Headaches
 Chronic cystitis
 Haemorrhoids
- The Muscle Meridian Chart also shows the areas that each individual meridian
governs

NB The Bladder Meridian is the longest meridian in the body

Donna used to work with runners and they would get cramp in their calves. If they sedated
Triple Warmer or Bladder (whichever of these meridians the pain was on), then they would
not get cramps before they ran in marathons and races.

NB Anything that a meridian governs will also be governed by that particular Neurolymphatic Point, so working on
that Neurolymphatic Point will help that condition. For example, viruses are governed by the Liver Meridian, so
working on the Liver Neurolymphatic Point will help if you have a virus. It’s the same with the Neurovasculars -
they are in the front of your forehead, but you also have them all over your head and those govern different
meridians in the body. So holding the different Neurovasculars on the head will affect the flow of the energy in
your whole body.

Central Meridian and some of the things it governs


- Feeds energy to the brain
- Self-esteem and how empowered you are feeling eg shyness, fear etc
- Self-hypnosis and hypnosis of any kind
- Keeping the Central Meridian strong (the Zip-Up part of the DER), is the inner version
of keeping your Aura strong. The Central Meridian goes through 5 of the major
chakras which go out to the Aura
- Central Meridian can function as a meridian or a Radiant Circuit

NB Anything that a meridian governs will also be governed by that particular Neurolymphatic Point, so working on
that Neurolymphatic Point will help that condition. For example, viruses are governed by the Liver Meridian, so
working on the Liver Neurolymphatic Point will help if you have a virus. It’s the same with the Neurovasculars -
they are in the front of your forehead, but you also have them all over your head and those govern different
meridians in the body. So holding the different Neurovasculars on the head will affect the flow of the energy in
your whole body.

Circulation Sex Meridian and some of the things it governs


- Circulation Sex Meridian carries stress
- Gluteus maximus (your bottom!) and Gluteus Medius (your hip) - as per the Muscle
Meridian Chart

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 34


- Circulation Sex Meridian is associated with sciatic back pain (however, it could also
be Bladder Meridian and/or Large Intestine Meridian)
- Circulation Sex has a big impact on the vascular system
- The Muscle Meridian Chart also shows the areas that each individual meridian
governs

NB Anything that a meridian governs will also be governed by that particular Neurolymphatic Point, so working on
that Neurolymphatic Point will help that condition. For example, viruses are governed by the Liver Meridian, so
working on the Liver Neurolymphatic Point will help if you have a virus. It’s the same with the Neurovasculars -
they are in the front of your forehead, but you also have them all over your head and those govern different
meridians in the body. So holding the different Neurovasculars on the head will affect the flow of the energy in
your whole body.

Gall Bladder Meridian and some of the things it governs


- Gall Bladder
- Balancing Gall Bladder Meridian helps support the ear and all the moving parts
- Ligaments and tendons (as does Liver Meridian)
- From balancedconcepts.net:
 Eye problems
 Migraine
 Tinnitus
 Ear and nose problems such as sinusitis
 Mouth ulcers
 Tooth illnesses
 Tonsillitis
 Cramps and stiffness of the neck
 Pain in shoulder joints, hand joints and finger joints
 Illnesses of the hip joints
 Diseases of the external genital organs of men
 Knee and ankle problems
- The Muscle Meridian Chart also shows the areas that each individual meridian
governs

NB Anything that a meridian governs will also be governed by that particular Neurolymphatic Point, so working on
that Neurolymphatic Point will help that condition. For example, viruses are governed by the Liver Meridian, so
working on the Liver Neurolymphatic Point will help if you have a virus. It’s the same with the Neurovasculars -
they are in the front of your forehead, but you also have them all over your head and those govern different
meridians in the body. So holding the different Neurovasculars on the head will affect the flow of the energy in
your whole body.

Governing Meridian and some of the things it governs


- Supports the spine (your spine will stay straight all your life if you keep it Hooked-Up
- see ‘Daily Energy Routine: the Hook-Up’)
- Supports the nervous system
- Can function as a meridian or a Radiant Circuit

NB Anything that a meridian governs will also be governed by that particular Neurolymphatic Point, so working on
that Neurolymphatic Point will help that condition. For example, viruses are governed by the Liver Meridian, so
working on the Liver Neurolymphatic Point will help if you have a virus. It’s the same with the Neurovasculars -
they are in the front of your forehead, but you also have them all over your head and those govern different
meridians in the body. So holding the different Neurovasculars on the head will affect the flow of the energy in
your whole body.

Heart Meridian and some of the things it governs


- Heart
- Blood (as well as Spleen Meridian)

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 35


- Sleep/sleeplessness (along with Small Intestine, Liver and Triple Warmer Meridians)
- From balancedconcepts.net:
 Oxygen supply of the body
 Blood vessels (arteries)
 Laryngitis
 Neuralgias of the shoulder and arm
 Upper wisdom teeth

NB Anything that a meridian governs will also be governed by that particular Neurolymphatic Point, so working on
that Neurolymphatic Point will help that condition. For example, viruses are governed by the Liver Meridian, so
working on the Liver Neurolymphatic Point will help if you have a virus. It’s the same with the Neurovasculars -
they are in the front of your forehead, but you also have them all over your head and those govern different
meridians in the body. So holding the different Neurovasculars on the head will affect the flow of the energy in
your whole body.

Kidney Meridian and some of the things it governs


- Kidney
- Bones
- The adrenals (with Triple Warmer Meridian)
- Kidney Meridian does a lot to support eye health (so Kidney Meridian energy may be
involved when there are dark circles under the eyes, for instance), although Liver is
the primary meridian for the eyes
- Kidney Meridian highly influences the ears and is often one of the most important
meridians in working with ringing in the ears.
- Kidney Meridian is highly involved with the prostate gland
- Balancing Kidney Meridian helps support the ear and all the moving parts
- The function of the Kidney Meridian is purification and so it filters toxic energy,
allowing energies that have been obstructed to begin to move, filtering the body’s
energies, leaving them fresh
- Fear
- From balancedconcepts.net:
 Muscles (including their cramping)
 Lower spine problems (in particular the loins)
 Bone marrow disturbances
 Brain - loss of memory
 Rheumatic diseases
 Prostate
 Fallopian tubes
 Ears and ear infections
- The Muscle Meridian Chart also shows the areas that each individual meridian
governs

NB Anything that a meridian governs will also be governed by that particular Neurolymphatic Point, so working on
that Neurolymphatic Point will help that condition. For example, viruses are governed by the Liver Meridian, so
working on the Liver Neurolymphatic Point will help if you have a virus. It’s the same with the Neurovasculars -
they are in the front of your forehead, but you also have them all over your head and those govern different
meridians in the body. So holding the different Neurovasculars on the head will affect the flow of the energy in
your whole body.

Large Intestine and some of the things it governs


- Large Intestine Meridian is associated with sciatic back pain (however it could also
be Circulation Sex and/or Bladder Meridian)
- Large Intestine rules the hamstrings

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 36


- Large Intestine rules the quadratus lumborum muscle - which is a muscle of the
posterior abdominal wall, the deepest abdominal muscle and commonly referred to
as a back muscle
- Grief and loss and letting go
- Skin (along with Lung Meridian)
- From balancedconcepts.net:
 Disturbances of bowel movements
 Disturbances of the lymphatic system of the intestines
 Teeth and jaws
NB Anything that a meridian governs will also be governed by that particular Neurolymphatic Point, so working on
that Neurolymphatic Point will help that condition. For example, viruses are governed by the Liver Meridian, so
working on the Liver Neurolymphatic Point will help if you have a virus. It’s the same with the Neurovasculars -
they are in the front of your forehead, but you also have them all over your head and those govern different
meridians in the body. So holding the different Neurovasculars on the head will affect the flow of the energy in
your whole body.

Liver Meridian and some of the things it governs


- The liver
- Muscles, ligaments and tendons (as does Gall Bladder)
- Viruses are governed by the Liver Meridian, so massaging the Liver Neurolymphatic
is really good for a cold or flu, because they are viruses
- Liver Meridian does a lot to support eye health. (As do Kidney and Stomach, but to a
lesser degree.)
- Sleep/sleeplessness (along with Heart and Small Intestine and Triple Warmer)
- Anger directed inward, so anger at self
- From balancedconcepts.net:
 Metabolism
 Veins of the legs
 Haemorrhoids
 Sinusitis
 Tooth illnesses
 Illnesses of the breasts
 Illnesses of the external genital organ of men and women
 Disturbances of the thigh area and skin
 Prostate disorders
 Disturbances of the uterus
 Muscle and tendon illnesses of the lower extremities
- The Muscle Meridian Chart also shows the areas that each individual meridian
governs

NB Anything that a meridian governs will also be governed by that particular Neurolymphatic Point, so working on
that Neurolymphatic Point will help that condition. For example, viruses are governed by the Liver Meridian, so
working on the Liver Neurolymphatic Point will help if you have a virus. It’s the same with the Neurovasculars -
they are in the front of your forehead, but you also have them all over your head and those govern different
meridians in the body. So holding the different Neurovasculars on the head will affect the flow of the energy in
your whole body.

Lung Meridian and some of the things it governs (mostly from


balancedconcepts.net)
- The skin (as well as Large Intestine)
- The bronchi
- Respiration
- The immune system (protection from infections)
- Allergies
- The oxygen content of the body

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 37


- A disturbance in the lungs can cause a disturbance in the abdomen and the pelvis
area
NB Anything that a meridian governs will also be governed by that particular Neurolymphatic Point, so working on
that Neurolymphatic Point will help that condition. For example, viruses are governed by the Liver Meridian, so
working on the Liver Neurolymphatic Point will help if you have a virus. It’s the same with the Neurovasculars -
they are in the front of your forehead, but you also have them all over your head and those govern different
meridians in the body. So holding the different Neurovasculars on the head will affect the flow of the energy in
your whole body.

Small Intestine Meridian and some of the things it governs


- Small Intestine decides whether the food you eat is going to become you or not, or
whether it’s not so good for you
- Sleep/sleeplessness (along with Heart and Liver and Triple Warmer)
- The abdominal muscles
- From balancedconcepts.net:
 Mucous membrane of the small intestine
 Mucous membranes of the nose and the throat area
 Food allergies
 Sinusitis, tooth illnesses, infections of teeth
 Pain from repetitive strain injury; shoulder and elbow pain
 Rheumatic disorders
 Bronchitis
 Tinnitus
 Ear infections
- The Muscle Meridian Chart also shows the areas that each individual meridian
governs

NB Anything that a meridian governs will also be governed by that particular Neurolymphatic Point, so working on
that Neurolymphatic Point will help that condition. For example, viruses are governed by the Liver Meridian, so
working on the Liver Neurolymphatic Point will help if you have a virus. It’s the same with the Neurovasculars -
they are in the front of your forehead, but you also have them all over your head and those govern different
meridians in the body. So holding the different Neurovasculars on the head will affect the flow of the energy in
your whole body.

Spleen Meridian and some of the things it governs


- Spleen
- Metabolism: Spleen Meridian runs through the pancreas and helps you metabolise,
break down, and move food, thoughts, experience, emotions and feelings out of the
body
- Lymph
- Blood (as well as Heart Meridian)
- Pancreas (so, also, blood sugar and diabetes)
- Throat Chakra (as well as Triple Warmer Meridian)
- Gums
- Spleen Meridian is very vulnerable to heat, so if you are feeling hot, tapping the
Spleen Meridian Neurolymphatic Points will help
- For most people, Spleen is their strongest vulnerability and so it is good to flush
Spleen often. You flush by going backwards once on it and then forward 3 times. It’s
like back-washing pipes - flushing out energy that was stuck, and bringing fresh new
energy in. See ‘Meridians: How to flush a meridian’
- Spleen Meridian carries stress
- How happy you are
- How your body adapts to anything new
- From balancedconcepts.net:
 Lymph organs and lymphatic drainage
 Mouth ulcers

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 38


 Tooth illnesses
 Skin diseases
 Sinusitis
 Dysfunction of thyroid and parathyroid
 Illnesses of the chest
 Disturbances of the external genital organs of men and women
 Eczema
 Disturbances in knee and ankle joints
- The Muscle Meridian Chart also shows the areas that each individual meridian
governs
- Can function as a meridian or a Radiant Circuit

NB Anything that a meridian governs will also be governed by that particular Neurolymphatic Point, so
working on that Neurolymphatic Point will help that condition. For example, viruses are governed by the
Liver Meridian, so working on the Liver Neurolymphatic Point will help if you have a virus. It’s the same with
the Neurovasculars - they are in the front of your forehead, but you also have them all over your head and
those govern different meridians in the body. So holding the different Neurovasculars on the head will affect
the flow of the energy in your whole body.

Stomach Meridian and some of the things it governs


- The stomach
- The heart
- The neck
- The mouth
- Tracing the Stomach Meridian restores healthy energy flow
- Stomach Meridian does a lot to support eye health (although Liver is the primary
meridian for the eyes)
- Balancing Stomach Meridian helps support the ear and all the moving parts
- Stomach is a worrier and carries stress
- From balancedconcepts.net:
 Acid and enzyme production
 Teeth (as well as some other meridians)
 Gums of the upper jaw and the related teeth
 Nose
 Ears
 Immune system
 Sinusitis
 Facial palsy
 Illnesses of the female breast
 Illnesses located in the thighs and affecting the skin along the Stomach
Meridian
 Varicose veins
 Joint problems affecting knees and ankles
 Disturbances of blood circulation in the legs and feet
 Tonsillitis
- The Muscle Meridian Chart also shows the areas that each individual meridian
governs

NB Anything that a meridian governs will also be governed by that particular Neurolymphatic Point, so working on
that Neurolymphatic Point will help that condition. For example, viruses are governed by the Liver Meridian, so
working on the Liver Neurolymphatic Point will help if you have a virus. It’s the same with the Neurovasculars -
they are in the front of your forehead, but you also have them all over your head and those govern different
meridians in the body. So holding the different Neurovasculars on the head will affect the flow of the energy in
your whole body.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 39


Triple Warmer Meridian and some of the things it governs
- Body temperature (so also hot flushes!)
- The adrenals (with Kidney Meridian)
- Thyroid
- The immune system
- The muscles in the back of your legs (also Bladder Meridian, depending on which
muscle it is)
- Throat Chakra
- The fight or flight response (which is one of the things anxiety is all about)
- Habits
- Balancing Triple Warmer Meridian helps support the ear and all the moving parts
- If you are homolateral, Triple Warmer Meridian is involved. If Triple Warmer Meridian
is overactive in your body, often you have gone into homolateral. If you get out of
homolateral, Triple Warmer Meridian gets a little boost - it can relax a little bit
- Sleep, particularly quality of sleep (along with Heart, Small Intestine and Liver)
- From balancedconcepts.net:
 Hormone glands
 Fevers
 Shivers
 Headache
 Sore throats
- The Muscle Meridian Chart also shows the areas that each individual meridian
governs
- Can function as a meridian or a Radiant Circuit

Donna used to work with runners and they would get cramp in their calves. If they sedated
Triple Warmer or Bladder (whichever of these meridians the pain was on), then they would
not get cramps before they ran in marathons and races.

Some conditions associated with Triple Warmer Meridian being out of balance are:
 Inability to adapt to hot and cold temperatures
 Problems related to temperature imbalances, including colds, fevers, sweats,
night sweats and hot flushes
 Cold hands or feet
 Autoimmune diseases (including MS), weight problems, asthma, diabetes,
hypoglycaemia, morning fatigue
 Adrenal exhaustion
 Edema, irritable bowel, colitis, stomach ulcers, indigestion, rapid heartbeat,
hyper/hypo-thyroidism
 Feelings of overwhelm, anxiety, panic, hysteria and mood swings
 Addictions
 Sleep difficulties
 Chronic muscle tension
 Stress and post-traumatic stress disorders

NB Anything that a meridian governs will also be governed by that particular Neurolymphatic Point, so working on
that Neurolymphatic Point will help that condition. For example, viruses are governed by the Liver Meridian, so
working on the Liver Neurolymphatic Point will help if you have a virus. It’s the same with the Neurovasculars -
they are in the front of your forehead, but you also have them all over your head and those govern different
meridians in the body. So holding the different Neurovasculars on the head will affect the flow of the energy in
your whole body.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 40


Which meridian governs blood and brain

In response to a question from the Q&A Live Coaching Call with Donna and David after
Module 8 regarding “every organ is governed by a meridian and, if there is an imbalance in a
particular organ, then there can be a problem with this organ. But what about if there is a
problem in the blood and brain - are those affected by more than just one meridian”, Donna’s
response was as follows:

Yes, you have several meridians going through your head, but you also have
Neurovasculars. The Neurovasculars are in the front of your forehead, but you also
have them all over your head and those govern different meridians in the body. So
holding the different Neurovasculars on the head will affect the flow of the energy in
your whole body. As for blood, it’s usually Spleen Meridian - Spleen Meridian
governs the blood - and, of course, the Heart, because it pumps it. Actually,
everything does a little bit, but it’s mostly Spleen and Heart

Tracing a meridian backwards so it takes energy out of the flow

Tracing a meridian backwards from the end point to the beginning point will sedate its
energy flow or release trapped energy. Remember that you NEVER trace Heart Meridian
backwards, or flush it, or sedate it.

To energy-test someone, move to the edge of their auric field, rub your hands together and
then shake them off, then trace a meridian backwards. NB This will only work if you are
standing in the person’s auric field. (So, depending on the person, their auric field may
extend 6 feet from them, or 2 feet from them etc!)

Now repeat the energy-test. Even if you use just one finger, they will be weak. This will
happen with every person in the world because our energies are electromagnetic. So if you
align your energies up with somebody else’s, you will move their energy.

Now, go back to the edge of their auric field and trace the same meridian forward, so the
person will be strong again. It’s like you have a magnet in your hand and the other person’s
energy just follows it and it gives them strength.

Energy-testing

Each person’s energies are as unique as a fingerprint. Energy-testing is a great biofeedback


tool to let you know what is going on in the body. With energy-testing, you can reliably
assess, in any given moment, the body’s unique energies and energy fields and their ever-
oscillating fluctuations. Energy-testing is a focused way to tune into the language of the
body and the flow of the body’s energies. You are checking on the flow of energy through a
muscle, not on the muscle’s strength. This is the difference between energy-testing and
muscle-testing - energy-testing has to do with how the energy flow is actually flowing through
a muscle and muscle-testing refers to how strong a muscle is.

Using a meridian energy-test can help you determine whether the flow of energy in the
muscle is disturbed or undisturbed, interrupted or steady. This type of energy-testing is
generally quite reliable and can give you accurate information about the flows, blockage and

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 41


patterns of energy movement in the body. It can also be used to test whether substances
can be metabolized or if they will trigger undesirable reactions if eaten.

Daily practice of energy-testing can also help you understand and strengthen the flow of
energy through the meridians and become more aware of your body’s response to food,
activities and your environment.

When you energy-test a meridian, you are determining whether the energy in the meridian
has a strong enough natural flow to ‘lock’ an indicator muscle.

There are various ways to do an energy test. A separate energy test has been devised for
assessing the flow of energy in each of the 14 major meridians. These tests are referred to
as the ‘meridian energy tests’. They can be used in a variety of ways to assess the flow of
energy in meridians as well as other energy systems. (See ‘Energy-testing your meridians’
on page 255.)

The General Indicator Test (see page 43) is designed to get a basic reading on the entire
body without looking at specific meridians. In this test, an individual holds an arm out parallel
to the floor and the tester presses down gently to see if the arm stays steady (locked) or
collapses downward under relatively gentle pressure (unlocked).

The Spleen Meridian energy test is used to test something as personal as our food or our
vitamins and even things that we might put on (like our glasses or jewellery). The Spleen
Meridian Test tests whether you can metabolize food or vitamins etc, which the General
Indicator Test cannot do. How to do the Spleen Meridian energy test is detailed on page
125. (Heart Meridian and Triple Warmer Meridian energy tests are also detailed elsewhere -
see ‘Triple Warmer’ section starting on page 92.)

In Module 4 we also learn that energy-testing is a tool that can help you find out if a
particular food or supplement is in harmony with your body’s energies and that you can also
test items that you keep close to your body eg glasses or jewellery. This can be an
invaluable source of information to learn what works for you as an individual and to help
keep your body’s energies in balance.

Energy-testing guidelines (pages 6 and 7 of the Module 4 handout)

- Ask the person being tested if you can touch them, if they have a preference for
which arm you use, or if they have any shoulder injuries. If their shoulders are
compromised, use the Spleen Meridian test, rather than the General Indicator Test
- Explain that you are not testing the strength of the muscle, that’s not important, you
are testing to see how the energy moves through the body and if something that you
are holding or testing is good for your body. So what that means is the energy will
stay strong in muscles if everything is status quo, but if the thing that you are holding
is not good for the body, it will pull energy away from the muscles and go to support
the centre of the body - and that is how you lose energy. Start by asking the person
to say their name while you are holding their arm and tell them that you are having
nothing to do with this - it is their responsibility to feel what it feels like when you have
them say their name ie is it easy for them to hold their arm there while saying what
their name is? Then ask them to say that their name is something that is not their
name and ask them to figure out what they feel inside and if there is any difference in
how easy it is to hold their arm up there and, if they notice a little difference when
they say something that they are totally not connected to, to let their arm drop. So the
person being tested has a job - they have to notice inside how it feels. It is not about

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 42


strength, it is about energy flowing through the body and pulling something back if
the muscles are not energised
NB Your spouse is probably the hardest person to test because you already have a
lot of energy and emotional dynamics between you!
- Remember when you are energy-testing someone to always put one hand on the
person’s shoulder so that you are creating a circuit. If you don’t do that, the person
you are energy-testing may be picking up your energy and not their own - putting
your hand on their shoulder closes that circuit
- Show the person you are testing the position to be held and the direction you will be
exerting pressure. Ask the person to hold (without hurting them), give notice that you
are about to begin, then apply gradual, even, pressure and ask them to meet your
pressure and, if it feels like they want to release, then they should release
- Press for only one to 2 seconds. Do not force the muscle; this is an energy test, not
a test of muscle strength. Stop if there is any pain
- By starting with only minimal pressure and only gradually increasing the pressure,
you should be able to sense within 2 seconds that the muscle is staying locked or
giving way with only a light touch. It is never necessary to use more than 2 pounds
of pressure and 2 ounces will often do. There should, however, be enough pressure
that both you and your partner feel the muscle response
- If the limb moves 2 inches or so and bounces back, the energy is moving through the
muscle and the response is rated as strong

What to do if a person does not test strong on the General Indicator Test or
Spleen Meridian Test (page 7 of the Module 4 handout)

If the person does not rate ‘strong’ on the General Indicator or Spleen Meridian Tests, rub
the K-27 points deeply for a few minutes and then re-test. If they still do not test strong, try
vigorously thumping the K-27, Thymus and Spleen Neurolymphatic Reflex Points.

To energy-test someone using the General Indicator Test (ie to


demonstrate energy, to let you know what’s going on in their body)

- Cross your energies or do the Blow Out or the DER to ensure that your own energies
are crossing well
- First check with them that their arm is not damaged
- Set the intention that the energy test will be accurate and beneficial. You might also
invite the person you are testing to set an intention to allow the body’s energies to
dialogue with you, the tester
- Stand to the person’s side
- Have them put their arm out straight, elbow locked, fingers extended (ie not in a fist -
this isn’t a muscle test - we want the energy to flow freely to the end of your fingers)
- Always put one hand on the person’s shoulder, so that you are creating a circuit. If
you don’t do that, the person you are energy-testing may be picking up your energy
and not their own - and so putting your hand on their shoulder closes that circuit
- Tell the person not to look at you, because you might be giving them energy just by
smiling at them!
- Using your other hand, as you exhale, push down on their arm for 2 seconds, by
putting your thumb under their wrist and your 2 fingers on top of their wrist
- If their energy is strong and good their arm will be able to resist you pushing down
- If their energy is weak, their arm will go down to their side when you push down on it

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 43


NB Unless the person being energy-tested is ill, or has a lot of stress, you would expect
people to energy-test strong.

To energy-test someone using the Spleen Meridian Test (ie how to do the
Spleen Meridian Energy Test - see page 9 of the module 4 handout)

There are several things to remember when you are doing an energy test on Spleen
Meridian:
- Cross your energies or do the Blow Out or the DER to ensure that your own energies
are crossing well
- Make sure the person’s arm hasn’t been injured in any way
- Tell the person not to look at you, because you might be giving them energy just by
smiling at them!
- A beginner’s mistake is to jump the gun - ie to pull the arm out before the volunteer is
ready. So ask the volunteer to keep their arm next to their body before you start the
test!
- Always put one hand on the person’s shoulder, so that you are creating a circuit. If
you don’t do that, the person you are energy-testing may be picking up your energy
and not their own - putting your hand on their shoulder closes that circuit
- Ask the person to ‘hold’ or ‘meet my pressure’ before you begin to apply the pressure
- Have the person keep their straight arm hanging down at their side, with their elbow
straight and their fingers open, thumb facing down (otherwise the test won’t be
accurate), while you try to pull their arm away from their body, with your hand open
and flat when you pull their arm (otherwise it will block the energy, so you should not
circle the person’s wrist with your hand when you are pulling the arm away from the
body)
- Even though you can pull for a long time, what you really want to do is just pull for
one or 2 seconds, as that is how fast you will know, so it’s not a long pull. You know
if a wall is strong, you don’t have to keep pushing it to know that! Within that one to 2
seconds, you start off slow and increase the pressure, so that you are not jumping
the gun
- Another thing to remember is that it’s not a test of strength - you are simply finding
out how the person’s arm is, whether it stays strong or whether it moves. Sometimes
people, men in particular, do this as a test of strength and put all their other muscles
into it! So stay calm, centred and see if the arm pulls out

There will be 3 possibilities when you do the Spleen Meridian energy test - the arm will stay
strong like steel, or it will be very weak and just move out easily, or it will pull out a little bit
and then bounce back. The latter also counts as strong.

For more details on Spleen Meridian energy-tests, see ‘Triple Warmer’ and ‘Using Energy-
tests to Make Healthy Choices’.

How to get more reliable results when energy-testing (page 11 of the


Module 4 handout)

Many factors can influence the accuracy of energy-testing. Here are a few things to check
and do to improve the reliability of the tests:

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 44


- Does the energy in the muscle respond to true/false statements?
Just as a lie detector test measures fluctuations in the electrical activity of the skin
that occurs when a person tells a lie, making false statements also impacts the
energy flows of the body and can be detected by an energy-test. If true or false
statements cannot be distinguished by the test, the person’s energy system needs
attention before any further energy tests can be relied upon

Ask the person you are testing to repeat a statement that is clearly false eg “I’m
wearing a red dress” (when it is actually blue), or “my name is Bob” (when it’s Mike).
Make sure the ‘false’ statement is unambiguously false for the person

If a false statement does not result in a weak energy-test, or a true test shows weak,
press/buzz the K27 points deeply for a few seconds and re-test. If a true statement
still yields a weak energy test, or a false statement a strong test, the person being
tested (or the tester!) may have a problem with homolateral patterning or scrambled
energies. Have both parties do the Cross Crawl and Wayne Cook exercises and
then re-test. If the true/false statements are still not accurately distinguished by
energy-testing, have both do the Homolateral Crossover

- Are expectations or emotions influencing the outcomes of your tests? Are you
attuned to the person you are testing?
Clear your mind and ask the person you are testing to do the same

As you practise the relaxed and open curiosity of ‘beginner’s mind’, take a deep in-
breath together and exhale together as you re-test

Hold the Electric Points at the back of your head, at the top where the head meets
the neck, and about half an inch out from the middle, on either side. Hold your
fingers there and that also gets your mind out of the way. So hold the points while
testing the person

- Is eye contact influencing results?


Eye contact can ‘test’ the relationship between you and the person you are testing,
rather than the energy flow you want to assess, so avoid direct eye contact

- More tips
Removing watches, mobile phones and certain types of jewellery can improve
accuracy of results as can testing in an area free of fluorescent lights and electronics.
If you notice that either person is tightening muscles, lighten the pressure you are
using to test and make sure that the person being tested keeps his or her hand open
flat with fingers loose. Remember that the results of energy-testing improve with
practice!

In response to a question from the Module 7 Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David
regarding if the energy field of the tester affects the result of the energy test, Donna and
David’s answers were as follows:

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 45


Donna: One of the things that we teach people to do is to first of all be clear yourself,
before you energy test. Even if it is just to Blow Out your own energy, or to cross
your energies over, so that you make sure your own energy is crossing well. Some
people like to do the DER before testing anybody else. Because you can affect and
what you want to do is to learn not to affect the energy test at all. If you believe that
the energy test has an outcome, you affect the outcome. It’s like the mind affects
energy tests and you want to get to the place where your mind does not affect the
energy test

David: There are a number of more advanced ways that you can keep your mind out
of the way and you can help the energy test to be more accurate because, as we
said in the class, it’s an art as well as a science and the research on energy testing is
very mixed. The reason is that there are so many variables that aren’t controlled for
in many of the research studies. But one of the things that you can do that makes it
easier to get your mind out of the way is, right before you do the test, you and the
person you are testing take a deep breath together. Another is to hold the Electric
Points at the back of your head, at the top where the head meets the neck, and about
half an inch out from the middle, on either side. Hold your fingers there and that also
gets your mind out of the way. So hold the points while testing the person. Another
is that you are going into the test with the intention of finding the truth in the situation.
Do not go into it with an expectation or a hope of how the result will be, but go into it
with the intent to find the truth of the situation. This will increase the chances of an
accurate test. Also, practise, practise, practise - this is the main way to know that it is
reliable. Another hint is to not look at each other when you are testing

In response to a question from the Module 1 Question and Answer coaching call regarding if
the person doing the energy-testing should have an intention of what is being tested, or how
do you know what you are testing, the answer was as follows:

Before you do energy-testing, both take a deep breath and do the test as you let your
breath out. Don’t have any intention - just that you want the truth

In response to a question from the Module 2 Question and Answer video regarding if, when
you energy-test someone, for example you touch an organ like the heart or stomach, and the
person tests weak, whether that means there is something wrong with the person’s heart of
stomach, or if it doesn’t have anything to do with the actual body part, the answer was as
follows:

All it means is, long before anything happens to you physically, it happens in your
energy body. If you can handle something in your energy field, it won’t happen in
your physical body. So you can start with things before things happen to you and it
just makes it a lot easier. You can also start when you are really in trouble,
physically, and then turn it around

In response to a question from the live Question and Answer call with Lisa and Marjorie,
following Modules 3 and 4, regarding if a person tests strongly at both the General Indicator
Test and the Spleen Meridian Test, does that mean the energy systems are all at that
moment in balance and, if not, how would we determine where and what to test next in order
to see the overall health status, the answer was as follows:

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 46


This is really an introductory programme so, if you are doing a General Indicator Test
and it’s strong, and you do the Spleen Meridian Test and it’s strong, then that system
is telling you, “I’m doing OK right now”

If there’s weakness in the system, then that General Indicator Test, the energy
feeding those muscles, is not going to feed it well and you are going to get a weak
test from that. So the simple answer is yes, if you do both of those tests and they are
strong, then those systems are good

However, we call the General Indicator Test that, because we can then use it to test
other things. So the test by itself means overall in the system, things are going good
enough for a strong result to the test. But I might press a nose and the arm will go
down which says the hook up is not great, or I can test homolateral with the parallel
lines or any other number of things. So we are really using that test, it means I can
use this arm to now explore someone’s energies and then you are going to get all
sorts of information coming from that

Ways to restore healthy energy flow (page 4 of the Module 1 handout)

Trace Stomach Meridian (page 4 of the Module 1 handout)

Place both hands underneath your eyes, drop down to your jawbone, circle up the outside of
your face to your forehead, move both hands down over your eyes and your face and neck
to your collar bone, over your breasts, inwards towards the edges of your navel, flare out at
your hips, then straight down the front of your legs and off the second toes.

Tap Stomach Meridian points (page 4 of the Module 1 handout)

Tap your cheekbones under each eye vigorously with 2 or 3 fingers.

Tap K27 points (page 4 of the Module 1 handout)

K27 are the 27th points on the Kidney Meridian and they flip the meridians around. Tapping
on them restores a healthy energy flow. See page 4 of the Module 1 handout.

NB Don’t tap K27 before bedtime as, for most people, this will wake them up!

Energy test to determine if a person has a weak energy flow in the Kidney
Meridian, resulting in them feeling a little tired or a little ‘off’

Do the General Indicator energy-test (see ‘Energy testing’).

Ask the person to walk backwards, away from you for a few steps, while you are walking
forwards towards them, then energy-test them again. Now ask the person to walk forwards
towards you while you are walking backwards away from them and then energy-test them
again. If the person energy-tests strong after walking backwards and weak after walking
forwards, they have a weak energy flow in their Kidney Meridian.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 47


This is what happens to everyone when we get tired, or if we have taken on too many
projects, of if we are dividing ourselves up between too many things and too many people.
Our meridians literally flip around and go backwards. So, when you walk forwards, you are
not in alignment with your energies anymore, so that you start losing energy as you move
through your day. To remedy this, massage or tap K27 and that will flip the energies around
so they go forward, so you are in sync with your energy and your energies are all going in
the right direction. This is powerful and helps you get your energies into harmony with your
lifestyle.

After you, or they, have massaged or tapped their K27, ask the person you energy-tested to
walk forwards going a few steps away from you and then walk forwards towards you a few
steps and then do the energy test again - and they should now be strong.

Benefits of massaging or tapping K27 and when to do this

Massaging or tapping K27 will flip the energies around so they go forward, so you are in
sync with your energy and your energies are all going in the right direction. This is powerful
and helps you get your energies into harmony with your lifestyle. You have to massage or
tap K27 hard and do the standard energy medicine breathing (see ‘Standard breath in
Energy Medicine’ on page 49). The K27 points don’t work if you massage or tap them softly.
So massage them hard and breathe.

- It will help you to massage or tap K27 if you are a little tired, or a little ‘off’
- It will help you to massage or tap K27 if you are walking into a situation and you
know you are a little ‘off’
- If it’s 3 pm and you’re at work, you’re dragging, you’re pushing through, you’re
struggling, it will help you to massage or tap K27

How to locate the K27 points

Find the side edges of your collarbone, come towards the middle, before you reach the
centre, there are little knobs for most people. Everybody’s anatomy is a little different, but
for most people, there’s a little knob at the end before you get to the centre, then drop under
the knobs and, for most people, there’s a soft spot, an indent. These are the K27 points. If
you knead or tap it, it may hurt a little bit. These are the points that you want to massage or
tap, on both sides. These points work when you massage or tap them hard. They don’t
work if you massage or tap them softly - in fact it will have the reverse effect! So massage
them hard and breathe (see ‘Standard breath in Energy Medicine’ on page 49).

If someone is not shifting energy enough

If massaging/tapping K27 doesn’t work on someone, it doesn’t mean the technique doesn’t
work. It may mean something is blocking it, or something else is going on, or that the
massaging or tapping wasn’t hard enough. Get them to go deeper and harder on K27! K27
is the juncture point for all the meridians in the whole body so you want to be able to really
reach them!

Balancing energy systems

In response to a question from the live Q&A Coaching Call after Module 5 with Donna and
David, regarding what balancing all the energy systems encompasses, their answers were:

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 48


Donna: This is really important because as we go through our daily lives, things
throw us off eg pollutants in the air, someone else’s bad energy, or eating something
that disagrees with us etc. All the things in our day could throw our energies off. So
when you balance your energies, that means everything starts flowing smoothly.
You feel as if you are in sync in yourself, you feel full and complete, you know your
words, everything works better and life is better when you balance your energies

David: There are different levels. People going through our Certification Programme
learn how to do what we call Tracker, where they are able to assess all of the body’s
energy systems and find where a system is out and which system needs the most
attention. So that is a much more sophisticated system than what we are able to
present in this course

But, you can start with the DER and that is designed to get the major systems into a
flow and harmony and if you are at a place where you do need more than what you
can do on a self-help basis, we have trained 1,300 practitioners so far who are all
over the world, so hopefully you will be able to find one from our website who is close
enough to you

NB At the time of this question being asked, the course had not yet covered Tracing
your Meridians and Clearing your Chakras and we now know that these 2 techniques
also balance the energy flow!

Standard breath in Energy Medicine and the Microcosmic Orbit

The standard breath in Energy Medicine is in through your nose, with your tongue touching
the roof of your mouth, and out through your mouth, with your tongue touching the floor of
your mouth. This encourages the Hook-Up, which is so important for so many things. (The
Hook-Up is usually the first thing that EEM practitioners do when they wake up and the last
thing they do before they go to sleep!)

There are approximately 60 little points inside your mouth that you are affecting as you
breathe, as you take energy in and release energy out - you are opening everything up. You
have your mouth closed because you are bringing energy in through your nasal capacity,
which is Stomach Meridian, too. As you exhale you are moving the energy back out of the
body to complete the circuit. This breathing technique utilises the different parts of your
structure and your face to make the energy continue to move.

In response to a question from the Module 7 Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David
regarding if there is a specific reason for breathing in through the nose and out through the
mouth and also, why we should take big breaths when we do Energy Medicine activities,
Donna and David’s answers were as follows:

Donna: There are many wonderful ways to breathe. The reason why you breathe in
through your nose and out through your mouth is because, when you do, you
connect up Central Meridian, which runs up the front of your body, and Governing
Meridian, which runs up your spine, over your head, down your nose and to your lip
and that connects to the back of your throat

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 49


So if you breathe in through your nose, your tongue goes to the roof of your mouth,
and when you breathe out, your tongue goes down and it makes that connection

So, suddenly, once they have connected, you have a Microcosmic Orbit that goes
around your body. It will go both ways and you will be more protected and more
connected up energetically-wise. Everything will work better and that is why I really
like people doing these exercises with that kind of a breath

David: The Microcosmic Orbit is an energy that goes through, and is very much
central, to your entire energy system. So this particular way of breathing is a way
that you are continually reinforcing that. This is not the only way to breathe in Energy
Medicine, but it is the way Donna suggests. If it feels better to breathe only through
your nose or only through your mouth, that’s fine. The reason for taking bigger
breaths is that it gives your body more oxygen as you move the energies

Donna: And you are building habits, so the more you can breathe in through your
nose and out through your mouth, the more you will attain that habit. So then you will
have that Microcosmic Orbit going around you without always doing the exercise

In response to a question from the Module 7 Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David
regarding if you can clear your energy through breathing, Donna and David’s answers were
as follows:

Donna: Yes. You can do K27 in traffic jams, or thump your cheekbones, so that the
energy goes down your legs. You can cross your hands over the front of your body,
and you can Hook-Up

David: All these things are very simple and can be done any time. Simply breathing
in through the nose and out through the mouth (with your tongue automatically going
to the roof of your mouth on the in-breath and the floor of the mouth on the out-
breath) is keeping your Microcosmic Orbit in a flow

Donna: Another tip on breathing if, say, you are stressed out, and you need to clear
yourself, is to take a quick breath in, not too deep, and then breathe out much slower.
Then you have released carbon dioxide and stress build up - just by letting go. That
is also a good thing to do when you have asthma, when there is a tendency to want
to take a deep in breath to catch your breath. It is counter-intuitive but it works -
instead of trying to catch your breath, let it go by breathing out as slow as you can.
In this way, you create a vacuum and you get more oxygen

What to do if brain energies are feeling scrambled


How to test if someone’s brain energies are scrambled

First, energy-test them and check that they are strong. Now, ask them to open a book at
any page, holding the book with their right hand, and ask them to read out loud from the

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 50


book. As they are reading, do the energy test on their left arm - and it will be weak if their
brain energies are scrambled! Anything the person would try to do in a linear way would
make them lose their energy, because their energy is not aligned up with reading, for
instance.

When your energies get scrambled, when they start crossing over in ways that are different
from how you are designed, it makes it harder to function at your best.

One person’s energies will also impact other people. To demonstrate this, energy-test
another person(s). Then get the original person - the one who tested weak - to read to them
out loud. While the person is reading to them, energy-test the other person(s) - and their
arms will now all be weak!

That’s what happens to all of us when our energies have got scrambled and we’re trying to
reach somebody or say something or listen, or be present, or whatever it is, you will not be
able to convince any of them of anything. Our energy so affects everybody else’s, so that if
you fix yourself, then you don’t even have to fix the other person(s)!

To fix the problem of scrambled brain energies - the Wayne Cook posture,
or alternative posture and Crown Pull

To fix the problem of scrambled brain energies, do the Wayne Cook posture, or the
alternative posture (ie crossing legs - or, alternatively, arms) then the cathedral position up to
the Third Eye, then Crown Pull across the front of the forehead, all the time breathing in and
out deeply. This exercise is amazing to get the right and left brain and front and back brain
connected.

See also the ‘Wayne Cook Posture’ on page 62 and page 5 of the Module 1 handout.

Now test the person while they are reading again - and they should be strong now. The
person(s) listening to them reading aloud will also test strong.

It is very important to grasp that, when you are healed, you heal the people around you,
because you give out good energy and it doesn’t confuse them.

Everybody has been in some situation or another where you are maybe with somebody and
you find yourself losing your energy. That has a lot to do with it because that other person’s
energy might be scrambled.

In response to a question from the Module 7 Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David
regarding if both the Wayne Cook and the alternative postures are too difficult to get into, is
there something else you can do, Donna’s answer was as follows:

Yes - cross whatever you can on your body. Cross your arms, cross your ankles,
cross whatever you can, and do the same breathing - in through your nose and out
through your mouth. You can even cross your hands by clasping your fingers
together as if in a prayer and placing them up underneath your chin. If you happen to
be in a meeting, you can keep those fingers clasped under the table, cross your
ankles and breathe deeply. Cross whatever you can!

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 51


When to do the Wayne Cook posture and Crown Pull

The Wayne Cook posture is a really good exercise to do whenever you feel like you are not
connecting with someone, or you need to be present, or maybe you’ve got to give a
presentation, or teach a class etc. It also helps with dyslexia.

If you do this exercise before anything, everything else works better. If you are scrambled
and you’re giving a talk or running a meeting, it will affect your performance and affect the
way that other people are going to respond to you. So get your energies balanced, as that is
going to impact how you are received.

When you are healing someone, you want the energy to hit its mark - you want the healing
energy to really do what you want it to do. And if a person is scrambled, or maybe their
energies are running backwards - whatever it is - you want to straighten that out first
because then, the energy will do what you want it to do.

When people do this exercise, and do it regularly, to build a habit in their body, so they don’t
immediately scramble, everything changes and people start getting well faster.

If your energies are scrambled, that acts like static that keeps all the rest of the exercises
from working as well as they should. This exercise opens a doorway so that you can work
with other energy systems in your body effectively. You’ll find more and more things that this
exercise will help you with.

The Daily Energy Routine (DER)

The exercises in the DER help to balance many of the 9 energy systems that are key to our
vitality. The exercises can benefit nearly anyone. (The exception is people with an auto
immune disorder, who will need to be very careful with the DER as it may be too much of a
shock to their system if they do all the exercises in one go or do them too fast.)

The DER exercises are short and fun and this routine refreshes our energies and builds
positive habits into our energy field. They are a quick way to get all other energy systems in
a flow, to get all other energy systems optimised. The DER exercises comprise the energy
exercises that work for everyone, are the most powerful, and can be done in a short period
of time every day. They will get all the energy systems into a flow so they have a really
positive effect on one another. Because energies run in habits, if people do the DER every
day, it will begin to establish positive energy habits.

The exercises are covered on pages 9 to 15 of the Module One handout.

The more we do the techniques in the DER, the more they will build up habits in our body.
Donna feels it’s critical to build up new habits because we live in a world we didn’t evolve to
be in. We didn’t evolve to be in an unnatural world. So every square inch of our atmosphere
is filled with man-made electromagnetic energies that your body has to contend with. Those
energies often throw our energies off - or it might be the additives in our food, or whatever
toxins are in the air – but all those things throw our energies off.

However, if we can build some new habits with the DER, our body can counter the energies
that are coming in and they learn how to not be affected. Our body learns not to be so
vulnerable to things and to overcome. So this is really wonderful stuff to learn!

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 52


NB Anytime we are consciously focused on the body and the energy in an exercise, it greatly
enhances its action.

All the DER exercises are great for children. It helps them with their vitality and health and
also helps them to learn better.

NB If you feel hot as you are massaging the Neurolymphatic Reflex Points, it’s because you
are releasing some energy that really needs to be released.

How often you should do the DER in one day

In response to questions on the Module 1 Question and Answer Coaching Call with Donna
and David and the Module 2 Live Question and Answer Call with Janel and Michelle
regarding how many times do Donna and David recommend you practise the DER, the
answers were as follows:

The most important thing is to do it consistently every day. It’s about installing a new
habit. It depends on how healthy you are right now, or how much stress you are
going through, because you want to change a habit. Energy flows in habits so, if you
have some old energy habits that are not serving you (eg if you have become a
couch potato, or if you don’t exercise, or if you feel frightened about life, or if you are
negative), do the DER 2 or 3 times a day

One of the principles of energy that we are teaching through the work we are learning
here is about how energy changes through repetition, so you can do it multiple times
a day. However, you don’t want to overdo it! Sometimes people get too excited and
too vigorous in the beginning and the Triple Warmer system (see Module 3) can be a
little reactive and on alert if it’s too much change too fast

Use your own judgement on how it feels and make sure you are always grounded.
Maybe do it 2 or 3 times a day

In response to a question from the live Q&A session with Donna and David after Module 5
asking if there is another simple technique or routine that you could do in addition to the
DER eg something in the afternoon or evening, Donna’s response was as follows

I would do the DER again in the afternoon or evening, because the more you do that
routine, the more you will build up the habit so that your body starts doing it on its
own and you won’t be so vulnerable to being thrown off. In the afternoon, a lot of
people get sleepy around 3 pm, so I would make sure I was crossing my energies
over (do the Shoulder Pull) then. I would do the homolateral routine. I would also do
Connecting Heaven and Earth, which releases energy I may have taken on during
the day. But I would always come back to the DER

How long will it take the DER to work and is it safe?

In response to a comment from the Live Question and Answer Call with Lisa and Marjorie
after module 3 and 4, regarding the DER and how long it takes to work etc, the answer was
as follows:

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 53


The more you train your energies with the DER, the quicker you will notice the effects
and the longer the effects will stay

The DER gives us an energetic foundation in which to really heal and to bridge all the
other work that we are doing, as it usually makes it work better. Donna created the
DER as something that is absolutely safe for anyone, regardless of what their issue
is, and it is dangerous for nobody. So it’s kind of like a multi vitamin - it’s good for
everyone. When clients come to me, whether for a hang nail or cancer, I always do
the DER first - and very often some improvement happens from that

But, for some people, there are more specific things that need to happen for the DER
to really work. So, if your energies are not crossing, then it’s a lot less effective.
Sometimes energies become what are called ‘irregular’ - and that has to be cleared,
before the routine is fully effective

So we have to take the DER for what it is, which is a general thing. It’s like when you
do a 10-minute general exercise routine. It’s not going to hurt you, but it might not
address your specific issue.

If you’ve been doing the DER for a few months and feeling absolutely no results I
would suggest that you try to find a practitioner who can assess your energy
specifically and find out what is the key in the lock that is keeping the DER from really
helping you. However, all that you have done is not for nought, even if you are not
seeing the benefit of it. Energetically, it’s still there and at some point it will kick in

In response to a question from the Module 7 Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David from
someone who said they don’t feel any different after doing these energy clearing sessions
and is it possible they are doing them wrong, Donna and David’s answers were as follows:

Donna: Often if people feel that nothing is happening, it is because their energies
are very homolateral, so you want to make sure before you do the exercises, that you
have pulled the energies across your shoulders to the opposite hip several times.
Also, do the Homolateral Re-patterning exercise several times before you do the
exercises. Also, do the exercises slower. Sometimes, if you do them too fast,
energy can’t catch up with you. You are probably not doing anything wrong, just do
the Homolateral Re-patterning first

David: The Homolateral Re-Patterning exercise is very important, but there are also
other possibilities for this. Some people are more kinaesthetic and so they feel
everything that is going on in their body very clearly, while others are more
intellectual and in their head and don’t register the changes, even if there are
changes in the energy flow. So there is a learning process where overtime you get
more sensitised to the energies and you recognise when they are blocked or when
something is helping them to flow. So this could just be a learning process for you

Donna: If you are doing the exercise, you are doing something right for the body. As
David said, for some people it might register quickly and for some people it might

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 54


register more slowly. One of our favourite teachers, many years ago, couldn’t get out
of homolateral and so she couldn’t feel any energy. So I gave her a homework
assignment to do the Homolateral Re-Patterning over and over again until she could
feel the exercises. It took her time before she began to feel, but she is one of our
best teachers now and I often think that great teachers are those who it didn’t come
easily to - they have to really learn it and learn it on their own body. So give yourself
a break and know that you are going to learn it!

David: There are certain basics. One is that the energies need to be crossing over,
not homolateral. Another is that the energies go backwards - the remedy for this is
rubbing K27. Our practitioners are taught that they start, before they do anything
else, by ensuring the person’s energies are going in the right direction and that the
person is not homolateral

Should you do the DER if you are feeling unwell?

In response to a question from the Module 2 Live Question and Answer Call with Janel and
Michelle, regarding whether you can do the DER if you feel sick ie if you have a cold, sore
throat or cough etc, the answer was as follows:

That is probably the best time to do the DER, because something is off with your
energies, you are not feeling well, and so some of the energy systems are having a
challenge. Doing the DER will help to bring them back on board, but do them gently
and slowly. Start with the basics (ie grounding yourself) and then go through the
routine slowly, listening to your body to see what it needs. But the DER, since it
brings the energies into harmony, is a wonderful thing to do when you are not feeling
well. Remember you can do it sitting down or when you are lying down in bed - you
don’t have to do it standing

Can children do the DER?

In response to a question from the live Q&A Coaching Call after Module 5 with Donna and
David regarding what is the earliest age that you can start your children doing the DER and
could the questioner do it with her 2-year old son, Donna answered as follows:

If that 2-year old can follow and do a few of the things, all the better. If I had my way,
every school and every kindergarten would start with children knowing how to do the
DER, because they will be able to learn better, they will feel more socially connected
and everything will work better. Do it as early as possible. I used to work on babies
as soon as they were born. My daughter adopted a baby when he was 4 months old
and he starts getting excited now when she starts doing it on him. He knows it is
coming and he just calms down and receives. It’s a great thing to do for kids, even a
2-year old!

Questions and answers about the DER from course participants

In response to a question from the Q&A Live Coaching Call with Donna and David after
Module 8 regarding what order the questioner should do the DER, Radiant Circuits, and
tracing meridians every day, or if that matters, Donna and David’s answers were as follows:

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 55


Donna: The only one that I will be absolute about is that you want to do homolateral.
Even if you are not sure, it doesn’t take but a few seconds to cross your energies
over your body from your shoulders to the opposite hip. Just make sure that you are
out of homolateral. There are no absolutes about energy - energy is simply not linear

It doesn’t really matter, except, if you are feeling stressed out, if you do the DER first,
all the energies will strengthen out and then, what follows, will work a lot better, so I
guess that’s my answer - I would do the DER first, after homolateral

David: Then it makes sense to do your meridians and get them into a good flow so
that, when you get to Radiant Circuits, you are already as balanced as possible and
you can really move with those

In response to a question on the Module 1 Question and Answer Coaching Call regarding if
doing the DER can evoke a temporary healing crisis eg headaches, aches, feeling toxic, the
answer was as follows:

Once in a while, when people are not used to shifting their own energy, in the
beginning there might be one routine or one exercise in the DER that your body
cannot adapt to, or cannot metabolise, and can’t shift to be in alignment with it - and,
if that happens, it can throw you off in some way. It won’t last, though - by the
second day it will be gone. The body learns - it’s just something it’s never done
before. If you do feel off, or nauseated, or you get a headache, immediately do the
Hook-up and stay that way for three deep breaths. And/or rub your fingers around
your ears

NB In response to a question to the Facebook Support Team regarding getting


headaches after doing the DER, the Support Team said that it could mean that you
have a lot of energy moving in your head and so you might want to add more Crown
Pulls and make sure you are drinking enough water. When you get the energies
moving, especially if you are activating the Neurolymphatic Reflex Points, things start
to move in the tissues - the ‘trash’ needs to be taken out. If you are not well
hydrated, it’s hard to get the ‘trash’ out of the door! If you feel strange sensations
doing the DER it is like when you move furniture around the house - the energy of the
room changes and you notice it and you can’t move through the room in the
automatic way you are used to. Your body has to accustom itself to the new patterns
and you might stub your toe in the dark! It is similar when you do the DER - things
start to move and change. The tissues respond. You are changing interior habits
and you notice the differences. After a while, it will even out and you will not notice
this phenomenon any more, but you will notice better function

In response to a question on the Module 2 Live Call with Janel and Michelle from someone
who had been doing the DER for about 30 days and who sometimes felt great and on other
days her emotions ran ragged, and who asked what sort of exercise could help to get her
emotions under control, the answer was as follows:

You are going to see fluctuations like this - some days you are great and some days
you are running ragged. You are going to have that variation because energies do
vary. The exercises we learned in Module 2 are great - the Neurovascular Hold and
the Grounding Techniques

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 56


Being grounded is so key when you have a lot of emotional discharge, or a lot of
emotions going on all at one time. We’re like an electrical wire where we de-ground
down into the earth and when we are grounded we can feel less anxious and our
emotions have a little more stability. So do one of the grounding exercises you
learned eg Smoothing down the Legs, where you are pulling the energy off your legs
and down your hips into the earth, or Spooning the Feet. Hook-Up is also a great
grounding exercise. Do any of those exercises to start with

From there, do some of the Neurovascular Holds - hold the front and the back of your
head. You may, or may not, feel the blood flow, so don’t worry whether you are
feeling it or not when you are doing this on yourself. Just know that you are shifting
the way that the blood is flowing from the reactive brain up into the prefrontal cortex
and you will have less emotional activity

In response to a question from the Module 2 Live Question and Answer Call with Janel and
Michelle, regarding if there is a particular energy routine to be done in a particular season of
the year, as energy levels differ depending on which season it is, the answer was as follows:

The DER has its own intelligence within your own body’s wisdom and it knows and
responds to the rhythm of the body, whatever rhythm we are in. So it senses the
Earth’s rhythm and the change of seasons and adapts itself. In Donna’s book there
are specific exercises for each season. We have already learned the Blow Out,
which is one of the clearing exercises, and that happens to be the exercise for Spring

In the meantime, the DER adapts and adjusts and takes you where you need to be
without any further ado. Also, just pay attention to how you feel when you are doing
the DER. Some days, for example, you may feel like doing it slower and some days
you may feel like doing it faster. And that’s your body adjusting to the energy of the
day and to the season as well

In response to a question from the Module 2 Live Question and Answer Call with Janel and
Michelle, regarding someone who, after doing the DER, if she sits to relax or meditate,
things start spinning and what does that mean, the answer was as follows:

Maybe you need a little more grounding, so take some time before doing the DER to
do some additional grounding. Some people are also not used to taking such deep
breaths and that might make them feel a little dizzy. Also, if we are used to having a
slow flow of energy and then we are now starting to open that pattern up, it’s kind of
a surprise to the body and your body is acclimatising to that. It’s probably a
combination of all those things and over time your body will acclimatise to it all. The
Hook-Up helps your body to integrate, so do the Hook-Up after the DER too.

In response to a question from the Module 3 Questions and Answers, regarding if you
should soothe Triple Warmer before or after doing the DER, the answer was as follows:

Soothe Triple Warmer before the DER

In response to a question from the Live Question and Answer Call with Lisa and Marjorie
after module 3 and 4 from someone who feels worse after practising the DER for 2 weeks
and is it possible to be too blocked for Energy Medicine to work, the answer was as follows:

Marjorie: Nobody’s energies are too stuck that this work cannot help. That’s why we
are doing this work - because energy wants to move and energy needs to move. If

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 57


energy is blocked and you do the DER exercises, that will start to gently encourage it
to move. Sometimes energies are so stuck that they cannot be encouraged to move.
It might be a tiny bit at a time, it might be a big bang. In my experience as a
practitioner, people often feel worse when more energy moves than when less
energy moves. When you are moving energies that might have been stuck for a long
time, it can be a little hard on the system to figure out how to integrate it. Imagine
how it feels if, for example, you don’t exercise for a long time, then you do a big
workout - you feel pretty awful the next day. Or, you’ve not been eating well and then
go on a cleansing regime, you feel worse before you feel better. Your body has to
figure out how to integrate. So, because you are moving from a less healthy pattern
to a healthier pattern, there sometimes can be bumps in the road along the way. If I
move energies that haven’t moved for a while and I don’t feel great, I ease off a tiny
bit to let my body integrate more easily, but I definitely stick with it. I know then that I
have hit somewhere juicy, that I need to go further with

Lisa: It takes 40 days to change a habit. The first thing I would check if you are not
feeling better is homolateral. If you are homolateral, none of the things we have
been teaching you is going to work - you are not going to experience the benefit of it.
And so homolateral and Wayne Cook are the first 2 orders of business to ease the
confusion in the body. But homolateral is the critical one. If you are homolateral, you
are only operating at 50% and we just had the whole module on Triple Warmer and
Spleen, and Triple Warmer is not quality control – it is survivor control. And it says,
life might be hard, we might not be so well, but we know what it is. So to move
towards something else is to move towards something unknown, so sometimes
Triple Warmer will kick off and really rebel against change happening. So, do your
Smoothie, do your hold, cover your eyes etc. Really talk to Triple Warmer and say,
“hey look, this Triple Warmer Smoothie is really good for us”. At a certain point,
Triple Warmer will settle down, because it realises all these things that it’s been
checking, you’ve just taken a load off by having your energy cross over, by having
the Hook Up etc. So at a certain point it will really kick in for you, but I would do the
Homolateral Re-Patterning and if you don’t have a way to test for homolateral, just
slow it down and when you use the same arm to the same leg, it should feel heavier.
It’s more work to move one side of your body at a time, than it is to cross over. So
keep doing it until you can feel the distinction between same side versus crossing
over. As soon as that becomes a noticeable thing, I bet you will be feeling better

The benefits of the Daily Energy Routine

The DER boosts and restores energy, increases vitality and resilience, strengthens the
immune system, raises your stress threshold and helps with grounding. It gives you clarity
of mind, better energy and is a way of refreshing yourself. It can lift your spirits, add fresh
perspective to your thinking, as well as boost your physical energy. Some of its other effects
are more subtle, but no less important. The DER can loosen blocks and reinforce healthy
energy flow in and between key energy systems. This enables systems such as the
meridians and chakras to do their work with greater ease and efficiency

Before and after doing the DER, tune into how your body feels. Afterwards, do your body
parts feel like they have a different weight? Is there a different flow of energy? What do you

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 58


feel inside? The feelings after you have done the DER will get stronger and stronger, as
your body builds up this ‘knowing’.

The Crossover Shoulder Pull (page 10 of the Module 1 handout)

The Crossover Shoulder Pull balances and harmonises energy and improves co-ordination
and clears thinking. It gives you energy and clarity in your mind. If you have been a little
sick, or you are sick, it will help you get well.

It’s important to do this exercise before any other energy exercises because the other
energy exercises won’t work if your energy is not crossed over. You have less than 50%
capacity to heal yourself if your energies are not crossed over.

If doing the Cross Crawl (see page 61), or simply taking a walk, tires you or is hard to co-
ordinate, this could indicate that your energies are not easily crossing over. Called a
Homolateral Pattern (see page 84), this will happen when your body needs to rest, heal or
regroup. While this is a less efficient way of moving energy, it is your body’s scheme for
telling you to slow down. It is a brilliant strategy when rest is needed, but it can become an
established pattern and, in that case, the brilliant strategy has become a bad habit,
interfering with your body’s ability to function optimally. The Crossover Shoulder Pull can
restore energies if the Homolateral Pattern is not deeply ingrained.

In response to a question from the Live Question and Answer Call with Lisa and Marjorie
after Modules 3 and 4 regarding how the Crossover Shoulder Pull and the Cross Crawl differ
in their benefits, the answer was as follows:

The Crossover Shoulder Pull (ie dragging from the shoulder) gets more the top of
your body, helps to relieve muscle tension in your shoulders and is kidney energy,
which helps with getting the crossover in your head and your torso

The benefit of the Cross Crawl is getting the energies to cross over more in the whole
body and help with balance and co-ordination in the whole body

One of the signature features of Donna’s work is how we are all unique beings.
That’s why, for any given thing that she gives you to help you balance your energies,
you are usually going to get a couple of different ways to do it. So the best way to
work is to experiment and see what works best for you. For someone else, it could
be the exact opposite. That’s why we give 4 or 5 ways to balance Triple Warmer, for
instance

The Crossover Shoulder Pull - how to test if someone needs to do it

To find out if someone needs to do this exercise, have them stand in front of you, hold their
hands, and ask someone else to stand behind you and make an X above your own head by
crossing their fingers, for the person standing in front of you to see - or fix an ‘X’ to a wall for
them to look at. Ask the person to not look at anything else except the X. Then energy-test
the person.

Then ask the person standing behind you to make 2 vertical lines using the index fingers of
each hand and hold them above your head - or fix an ‘l l’ to a wall for the person to look at.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 59


Now energy-test the person again. If they are now strong, it’s exactly the opposite of how
people are supposed to be!

Looking at the vertical lines should make a person weak and a crossover should make a
person strong. The reason for that is, when you look at your Third Eye, the bridge of your
nose, there’s energy that crosses ie from the edge of the right eyebrow down to under the
left eye and from the edge of the left eyebrow down to under the right eye. And when you
align your energies up, if you are looking at the X, and you are aligned, you will be strong. If
you are not strong you lose your energy and you have gone homolateral.

The Crossover Shoulder Pull - how to fix it if someone’s energies are not
crossing over

To fix it if a person was weak when they were looking at the X, stand behind them and put
your right hand on their shoulder and push in above the shoulder and then drag your hand
down and across to the opposite hip, 3 or 4 times each side. Or, the person can do it on
themselves - ie put your right hand at the back of your left shoulder, push in hard and then
drag across the shoulder to the opposite hip (the front of their body) and then do the same
on the other side. This gets the energy crossing over - and another benefit, if a person
carries a lot of tension in their shoulder, is that the tension will start to go away.

Energy-test the person again, after they have done the Crossover Shoulder Pull and they
should now be strong.

The Four Thumps (page 11 of the Module 1 handout)

While breathing in through the nose and out through the mouth, firmly thump, for 15 to 20
seconds each:

- The cheekbones in line with the pupils - ie Stomach Meridian’s first point, in line with
the pupils. Tapping on your cheekbones helps the energies go down and ensures
you are getting grounded - as Stomach Meridian flows down the body and connects
with the Earth. It will also often take congestion down if you have a cold and it sends
energy to the eyes and the stomach and helps clear sinuses. There are acupressure
points on your cheekbones and, if you breathe in deeply while thumping on your
cheekbones, you will ground yourself. You may be able to feel it pulsing down your
body

- Then thump the K27 - Kidney Meridian - points. Thumping K27 ensures that you are
getting grounded and that your energies are going in the right direction, which means
a healing force can also get to the right place. Thumping K27 will help you have
more vitality (so don’t do it before bedtime because, for most people, this will wake
them up!)

- Then, with one or both hands, thump your fingertips or knuckles on the sternum at
the centre of the chest, which is where the thymus gland is (think Tarzan thumping!).
The thymus gland is responsible for protecting the body from infection. Thumping it
turns on your immune system and so this is really important to keep you well. The
thymus creates the T-cells, which is a big part of our immune system. It’s very good
for your whole energy system and it gives you vitality. Whenever you get stressed,
your thymus gets in trouble because it’s putting out so much to handle the stress, so
you really need to re-invigorate your thymus gland periodically. If you have some

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 60


sort of congestion, massaging your sternum is good for your lungs

- Then tap, using a 3-finger notch, on the Spleen Meridian Neurolymphatic Reflex
Points, which are beneath the breasts, in line with the nipple, and down one rib, for at
least 15 seconds OR tap the Spleen Acupuncture Points, located on the side of the
body about 4 inches down from the arm pits - this is the last acupuncture point on
Spleen Meridian ie Spleen 21. (If either set is tenderer than the other, use the more
tender points as they will have a stronger beneficial effect on your Spleen Meridian.)
This helps you metabolize anything that might not be good for you - eg it’s outside
your body and you’re breathing it in, or you have eaten something that doesn’t agree
with you, or it’s somebody else’s negativity, or you feel like you are coming down with
the flu. The spleen test is Neurolymphatic Reflexes to your spleen system which also
governs your pancreas, so it’s really good for blood sugar. Spleen Meridian is also
very vulnerable to heat, so if you are feeling hot, tapping the Spleen Meridian
Neurolymphatic Points will help

The Four Thumps - how to test if someone needs to restore energy to their
Spleen Meridian

To energy-test this, ask the person to hold their right arm down by their side, fingers facing
downwards (no fist!), thumb against their thigh, and then ask them to try to keep their arm
close in to their body while you try to pull it out. They should be strong. Now, while they are
keeping their arm in that position, ask them to put their left hand flat under their chest,
towards the side where their arm is hanging and then energy-test again. This time the
person may be weak. Now ask them to do the spleen thump and then energy-test them
again, with their arm under their chest, and this time they should be strong.

The Cross Crawl (page 12 of the Module 1 handout)

The Cross Crawl balances and harmonises energy, improves co-ordination and clears
thinking.

The body’s energies run in patterns. A particularly important configuration is the ‘Crossover’
or ‘Figure 8’ pattern. This pattern can be found in all the body’s energy systems, from large
figure 8s (such as the energies that run from the left shoulder to the right foot and the left
foot to the right shoulder), down to the scale of the organs, the cells and even the double-
helix of DNA. When we do the Cross Crawl in the DER, we are reinforcing these crossover
patterns at all levels of the body.

When you do the Cross Crawl, make sure your arms are up high enough so that you are
crossing them over in front of your eyes, so that you get that brain/body crossover
connection - see ‘Homolateral Crossover Re-patterning: alternative technique’ for a detailed
explanation.

Page 12 of the Module 1 handout shows you how to do this exercise.

It’s easy for something to throw off this energy. For women, even if they energy-test strong
before doing the exercise, if you ask them to put a shoulder bag on their shoulder and walk
around a few steps, then take the bag off their shoulder and energy-test them again, they will
be weak - a shoulder bag takes your energies away! So, if you are carrying a shoulder bag,
when you get to your destination, stop and do the Cross Crawl. If you have been carrying a
bag all day long like that, you have probably gone into a Homolateral Pattern, which is that
state of being when your energies are not crossing over.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 61


Wayne Cook Posture and alternative method (pages 13 and 14 of the
Module 1 handout)

The Wayne Cook Posture (and the alternative method, which has similar benefits, though
usually not quite as potent) focuses your mind, allows you to untangle inner chaos, see with
a better perspective, think more clearly and learn more proficiently. It is an amazing
exercise to get the right and left brain and front and back brain connected. It also helps to
ground you and it helps with your emotions. Doing this exercise gets you balanced again.

To see how to do both the Wayne Cook Posture and the alternative method, look at pages
13 and 14 of the Module 1 handout. NB You can do the alternative Wayne Cook Posture
while lying down.

It’s important to stretch/sit up while doing the Posture. Energy needs space to move and,
every time we stretch, or breathe deeply, we are creating more space so that energy can
move throughout the body. When doing the Posture, our hands are in contact with a number
of meridians on the feet and ankles: Bladder, Gallbladder, Kidney, Liver, Spleen and
Stomach. As you pull the leg towards you and the shoulders up on the deep breath in, you
are creating a subtle stretch, further enhancing the space in those meridians so energy can
move more easily, as well as creating more space in the spinal column to help calm the
nervous system.

The second part of the Wayne Cook Posture, when you go into a steeple position with your
hands between the eyebrows, is focused on the Corpus Callosum, which is the central tissue
of the brain that facilitates the movement of information from one side of the brain to the
other.

In response to a question from the Module 7 Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David
regarding if both the Wayne Cook and the alternative postures are too difficult to get into, is
there something else you can do, Donna’s answer was as follows:

Yes - cross whatever you can on your body. Cross your arms, cross your ankles,
cross whatever you can, and do the same breathing - in through your nose and out
through your mouth. You can even cross your hands by clasping your fingers
together as if in a prayer and placing them up underneath your chin. If you happen to
be in a meeting, you can keep those fingers clasped under the table, cross your
ankles and breathe deeply. Cross whatever you can!

In response to a question from the Module 7 Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David
regarding whether, when doing an exercise such as the Wayne Cook posture, it matters if
you start on the right or the left side, Donna and David’s answers were as follows:

Do whichever way feels best to you. Some people do it both ways, but what really
works the best, is the way that feels right to you

The Crown Pull (page 15 of the Module 1 handout)

The Crown Pull relieves mental congestion and headaches, clears and refreshes the mind,
sharpens memory and opens you to higher inspiration. It also helps to ground you. If you
do this exercise regularly it will help to prevent headaches.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 62


This exercise pumps up the cerebral spinal fluid, which is very important, as this fluid comes
up your spine and washes out your skull and brain.

When you do this exercise you are making space in your skull, literally. Energy, blood and
lymph are all meant to flow through your head and give you space to help you think better. If
you have a stuffy head or headache, doing this exercise will help to clear it.

If you have any small intestine problems, this exercise is one of the best things you can do.
It helps you digest the food that you’ve been taking in.

To see how to do the Crown Pull, look at page 15 of the Module 1 handout.

NB The response to a TribeLearn comment from someone who said doing the Crown Pull
was painful, was that pain is usually stuck energy. Usually the pain leaves when the energy
is moving and fresh energy cycles through. They were advised to keep on doing the Crown
Pull and follow it with a Hook-Up to help lock in the changes.

The Crown Pull - how to test if someone needs to do this exercise

To find out if someone needs to do this exercise, energy-test them as normal (General
Indicator Test) and they should be strong. Then energy-test them again - while pushing
down on their arm, put your middle finger in the centre of their forehead, then press your
finger just a bit above their hair line and push down, then move your finger over the top of
their head to the back of their neck in incremental stages while pressing down - and they
may now be weak.

If they are weak, this could mean several things. It could mean that they have gone through
a lot in their head and their head has got crammed. You’re meant to breathe on the suture
lines on your head and oxygen is meant to flow through.

Ask the person to do the Crown Pull exercise and then energy-test the person again, while
pressing on their head, and they should now be strong.

The Zip-Up/Central Meridian (page 18 of the Module 1 handout and page


14 of the Module 7 handout)

The Zip-Up boosts confidence, clears your mind and protects you from negative energies
that may be around you. The Zip-Up exercise is also an excellent Aura-strengthener.

To see how to do it, look at page 18 of the Module 1 handout or page 14 of the Module 7
handout: take a deep breath in, place your hands at your pubic bone, inhale deeply as you
draw your hands slowly and deliberately up the centre of your body to the bottom lip, then
breathe out. While you are doing this, you can say an affirmation eg ‘I’m going to have a
fabulous day’ or ‘I radiate health and vitality’! ‘Lock in’ your energies by holding fingers and
thumbs together at the lower lip and twisting off as though turning a key in a lock.

The Zip-Up exercise is actually tracing the Central Meridian, which runs up the front of your
body and it is really important for many reasons. For very much more information see
‘Meridians: Central and Governing Meridians’ on page 33.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 63


In response to a question on the Module 7 Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David
regarding if the Zip-Up and Hook-Up should only be done once at the end of the DER or if
they should be done more than once, Donna and David’s answers were as follows:

Donna: There is no absolute guidance. It’s a good thing to do at the end, because it
takes all of the different energy techniques you have done and made it into a real
flow and then by Zipping-Up at the end and then connecting with the Hook-Up, you
have that Microcosmic Orbit at the end. But I know people who start with those
exercises

David: And they are not just for the DER. Zipping-Up is something that athletes who
have learned Energy Medicine do all the time. They will Zip-Up and they will work
their K27 while they are on the field or on the court. These are not techniques that
have to be done in an orderly way or as part of the DER. They are tools that are
quick fixes

Donna: Yes, they can be separate. When I get up in the morning, I Hook-Up, real
fast, so that I know that that Microcosmic Orbit is going around my body and it makes
everything else work better

The Hook-Up (page 19 of the Module 1 handout)

Donna won’t get out of bed without doing a long (ie holding the position for a minute or 2)
Hook-Up! Doing this is also a great way to fall asleep.

The Hook-Up creates a connection between your Central Meridian (which sends energy up
the front of your body) and Governing Meridian (which sends energy up your spine), bridging
the energies between the front and back of your body and between your head and your
torso.

It is one of the most powerful tools for quickly centring you and it has immediate neurological
consequences. Several of Donna’s students have reported using it on someone who has
started to seizure and seen the seizure stop within 15 to 20 seconds. You can also do it on
someone who has become unconscious.

This technique hooks up Central and Governing Meridians and connects up these forces at
the back of your throat, so you have a microcosmic orbit that goes around your body and it’s
very protective. It creates a strong force that helps every other energy system.

It increases your co-ordination, calms you, centres you and connects many of the body’s
energy circuits. It may help if you are feeling dizzy or faint and it also helps to ground you.

Doing a long (ie holding for 1 or 2 minutes) Hook-Up is also an excellent Aura strengthener -
it does this by engaging Central and Governing Meridians as Radiant Circuits. When that
happens, you get the Microcosmic Orbit ie an egg of great energy that is around you, and
you are discharging energy that you don’t need and taking in energy that you do need.

Put the middle finger of one hand in your belly button and the middle finger of your other
hand on the Third Eye ie between the eyebrows above the bridge of your nose. (It’s
important to use the middle fingers for the Hook-Up because of the polarities with the middle

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 64


finger, although the thumbs will work as well.) Gently press each finger into the skin and pull
it upward, taking deep breaths, for at least three breaths or 20 to 30 seconds. You can hold
longer if you like. Often a spontaneous sigh, deep breath and/or yawn signals that the
energies have hooked up. Yawning generally means that energy has moved and balanced
in your system.

This is a good exercise to do when you are feeling you are coming apart - it just hooks you
up again.

Connecting Heaven and Earth (page 11 of the Module 2 handout)

This is probably the oldest recorded exercise on planet Earth. Donna believes it is the oldest
Energy Medicine technique in recorded history. Donna thought she invented this technique
herself more than 30 years ago, until she saw variations of it recorded in Egyptian
hieroglyphics in the London Museum, in Qi Gong practices, and in the healing traditions of
numerous other cultures.

This exercise makes space for energy to move throughout the body, while using the body as
a conduit to energetically connect the ground beneath you with spiritual forces that are
beyond you. It gets the energy flowing and moves stagnant energy out of your body fast. It
stretches the torso, helps clear stale energy, and makes space for fresh energy to flow
throughout the body. It also activates the nurturing energies of Spleen Meridian. The
stretching enables the energy to move and flow out. When you do this exercise you are
making space in your body so that energy can move and travel more easily and, when that
happens, healing energy can get where it needs to go and you empty out any toxins that
have been building up. The more stretch you have on your body, the better. The Figure 8s
(at the end of this exercise) bind energy together so that there is a better communication
between all your energy systems.

This exercise is especially good for the joints and renewing the synovial fluid (the lubrication)
in the joints. If you have trouble sleeping, doing this exercise before you go to bed may help
as it releases all the pent up energy, letting your body relax and let go. This is also a great
exercise to do if you are ever just starting to get sick eg starting to get a cold. You will nip it
in the bud if you do this exercise instantly. Donna would always do this exercise in between
clients too - just to clear out the energy.

Energy, just in the wear and tear of daily life, tends to get stuck in those places on the body
that bend - the joints. This then becomes the basis of arthritis, so we want to get the energy
unstuck, because we don’t want it to form this kind of problem - and this is what the
Connecting Heaven and Earth exercise does.

How to test if someone needs to do the Connecting Heaven and Earth Exercise

Energy-test the person first and they will probably be strong. Then, while holding the
person’s arm at the wrist, in the energy-test position, lay your finger next to the person’s
neck just under their ear and, while your finger is on the person’s neck, energy-test the
person again and, now, they may be weak.

Then do the same while touching the person inside their elbow, then inside their wrist, then
while laying the palm of your hand on the side of the person’s waist (the Belt Flow), then the
back of each of the person’s knees and on their ankles.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 65


It may be that the person loses energy in some or all of these places, so they are in differing
stages of being weak. Those places where the person loses energy, is because they have
energy congested there.

To move that congested energy out, do the ‘Connecting Heaven and Earth’ exercise, which
is an awesome energy mover - it really can help move stagnant energy out of the body.
(This is why this exercise is part of the DER.)

After doing this exercise, energy-test the person again on each of the joints and this time
they should be strong on all of them.

Connecting Heaven and Earth - how to do it (page 11 of the Module 2 handout)

1 Rub hands briskly together and shake them off

2 Start with your hands on your thighs, fingers spread (this grounds you). Inhale
through your nose, circle your arms out and up over your head. Bring your hands
together in a prayer position down and in front of your heart. Exhale through your
mouth

3 Inhaling through your nose, stretch one arm up and one arm down, pushing with your
palms, while bending your knees. Bending the knees is quite important to this
exercise. This exercise is especially good for the joints and renewing the synovial
fluid (the lubrication) in the joints. That works best when you stretch the upward and
downward hands away from each other (without locking your knees), then releasing
all the joints as you bring your hands back together (see step 4 below). This
alternation of stretching and relaxing acts like a pump to renew all the fluids of the
joints

4 Hold your breath and the position, exhale and return to the prayer position

5 Switch arms and repeat

6 Do this twice for each arm, really emphasising the stretch

7 Drop your arms down, fold your body forward at the waist and relax with your knees
slightly bent

8 Take 2 deep breaths, trying to move your arms further down on each breath, before
slowly returning to a standing position. As you return to a standing position, either do
Figure 8s all the way from your feet to above your head, or fluff your Aura by ‘rolling’
your energy up your body with your hands, starting at your feet and rolling all the way
up and over your head and out to the sides. Rolling towards yourself makes a nice
sturdy Aura; rolling outwards can spread the Aura outwards - most people need to
roll towards them. Do either rolling or Figure 8s ie whichever feels better

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 66


Massaging your gaits

This was not covered in the MindValley course, but was mentioned several times by the
EEM Practitioner Facebook Support Group as being something that is beneficial to do daily if
possible. Massaging the Gaits is covered in YouTube’s Wednesday Energy Minute
‘Massage your gaits with Dondi Dahlin’ as follows:

The gait reflexes are acupressure points in the feet that correspond to muscles throughout
your whole body, all the way up to your hips and shoulders. Massaging your gaits is a great
thing to do if you are on your feet all day, if you are fatigued, or if you need grounding. This
also connects to your adrenals so, when you are feeling fatigued, do this exercise.

On your feet, there are bones running from each toe up the length of the foot. Massage
deeply between these bones - that’s all there is to it. Don’t massage with a light touch -
massage deeply. Remember to do it on both feet! (NB If you can’t reach your gaits with
your hands, use the heel of the opposite foot.)

The Electrics and the Electric Points (from both the Glossary and
Energy Medicine)

The Electrics, like the Celtic Weave, are a system that acts on all the other energy systems,
which is because the Electrics are comprised of the electric dimension of each of the other
energy systems. The Electrics help to charge and connect the cells, organs and other
energy systems at an electrical level and both affect, and are affected by, the nervous
system and the heart. Electrical energy is the densest and most easily measured of the
body’s energies.

The body’s Electric system can be accessed by touching and holding points on the body that
activate specific electrical circuits in order to hook up the electrical circuits among the energy
systems, sometimes bringing profound healing to specific areas that are in need. Certain
Electric Points can be easily held in order to send electrical signals throughout the body’s
energy system helping restore order and balance.

The most powerful of these are located at the base of the skull (where the spinal cord comes
into the brain stem) and are known in traditional Chinese medicine as the ‘headache points’.
They are also Central Meridian Lymphatic Points. These points are located in indentations
about an inch to either side of the centre of the back of the neck at the base of the skull.
Holding these points for an extended period of time (3 minutes or more) can stimulate deep
healing. The exact position of the Electric Points is marked in the diagram on page 12 of the
Module 6 handout.

To hold these Electric Points:

- Push your middle fingers directly into the points, allowing the weight of the head to
provide further pressure
- Holding and massaging these points for a couple of minutes activates the Central
Meridian Neurolymphatic Reflex Points, helping support movement of the lymph and
releasing toxins
- If you hold these points longer than a couple of minutes, however, you are likely to
notice a change in the sensations in your fingers. You may begin to feel heat and
even burning, making you want to pull your fingers off the points

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 67


- That is when you know that you have really connected with the Electrics, like
plugging into a socket. At this point, a profound type of healing can occur
- You need only trust the body to electrically hook up as it need to, not as you may
have planned it

In the Energy Medicine book (page 198/199) Donna recounts that she has held these points
for more than an hour on occasion. Sometimes the person has no idea anything is
happening, but she feels the burning in her fingers. The person may eventually begin to feel
strong sensations in scar tissue or other areas where the body is trying to repair itself.
Sometimes there will be a sense that an emotional wound is being healed. You will know
when the process is completed because the burning in your hands will stop! And the person
will often report that a significant and unexpected healing has occurred.

Neurolymphatic Reflex Points and Neurolymphatic Clearing (pages 16


and 17 of the Module 1 handout)

Neurolymphatic Reflex Points are used to move stagnation in organs and the meridians that
govern them. If someone has a physical organ that needs help, rub the Neurolymphatic
Reflex Points and it will stimulate the lymph of that organ and bring vitality to the meridian.

The Neurolymphatic Reflex Points are shown in the diagram on page 16 of the module 1
handout. These points are found primarily on the front and back torso, but are also on the
legs and outer shoulders.

The lymphatic system is a key part of the body’s immune system. It consists of a series of
inter-connected vessels and glands and serves as a sort of garbage collection system for
toxins in the body’s fluids. The use of Neurolymphatic Reflex Points can improve the
functioning of the lymphatic system. These Points facilitate removal of toxins from the body
and regulate energy exchange between the meridian system and the lymphatic system.
Working these Points can help detoxify the entire body or specific areas of concern.

Clogged Neurolymphatic Reflex Points will be tender, so the soreness itself may indicate
problem areas. Clearing these Points can enhance movement in the lymphatic system and
help balance the meridian and organ systems associated with the specific Reflex Point.

When you trace or flush a meridian, the energies of your hands move the meridian’s energy.
When you massage the Neurolymphatic Reflex Points, you move toxins out of the meridians.

That is why part of the DER is to become familiar with the Neurolymphatic Reflex Points you
can reach with your hands and to make it a daily practice to massage ones that are tender,
being alert for areas where the pain might be due to injury or strain, rather than the Reflex
Points.

Each meridian is associated with specific points but, rather than have to energy-test or learn
which Points go with which meridian, you can simply massage any Neurolymphatic Reflex
Points that hurt. You will get immediate feedback from your body as blocked energies begin
to flow. If the same point is consistently tender, identifying the meridian it is on provides
valuable information as you track your own health patterns. You can work in the field with
Neurolymphatic Points, if rubbing them direct is too painful. The neurolymphatic system’s
job is to keep the lymph, blood and meridian energies flowing and, by massaging the Points,
you move toxins out of your muscles while shooting fresh energy through your whole body.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 68


Every day, as part of your DER, massage just two or three of these points for a short time,
so that the whole thing takes only maybe 30 to 45 seconds. Massaging these reflexes starts
the energy flowing, energizes and sends toxins to your body’s waste removal system, and
clears stagnant energies from the body.

There is a good reason not to do all the points every day, particularly if you have been ill,
because massaging these points releases toxins so that your body can get rid of those
toxins. But it puts them into your lymph system and your blood stream, so you don’t want to
do too much - you don’t want to overwhelm your system. What you’ll find over time is that
they don’t hurt as much. When it doesn’t hurt anymore, you have really cleared it and it’s
time to move on to the next one.

In this day and age, we are living in a world that is so much artificial, and every square inch
of the atmosphere around us is filled with man-made electromagnetic energies, and there
are toxins and additives in our food, and air pollutants and other people’s negativities. So it
is good to move toxins out of our body so that we don’t get sick.

The Neurolymphatic Reflex system governs the circulation of our lymph - and the lymph
doesn’t have a pump of its own. Our hearts have a pump that pumps the blood, but the only
things that pump the lymph are either hard exercise, or massaging the points.

The Neurolymphatics Reflex Points are very different to the lymph system. These are the
reflexes to the lymph to help the toxins, energy and lymph to move. It’s not harmful to
massage them, even if you have an illness or disease, but you do want to take them in small
steps - just do three a day, or something like that - and then you won’t get too many toxins
into your body all at the same time. (If that does ever happen to you, you will be fine, just
drink some water, lay down for five minutes and you’ll feel fine again - your body really does
want to metabolise it fast. You can also tap the Spleen points afterwards.)

NB If you are working with someone with an autoimmune illness, or if you yourself have an
autoimmune illness, be careful not to do too many at a time. This is because, in this
scenario, the body is not used to fighting off other things so much, but it literally will turn and
fight the own body. So it’s much, much better to just not do more than two or three.

When the Neurolymphatic Reflex Points are stimulated they help increase the flow of energy
in meridians and release physical toxins. They can be used to balance the energy in the
meridians and the organ systems governed by the meridians. Doing this on a daily basis is
a potent way of helping the energies move through your entire body.

Working the Neurolymphatic Reflex Points also assists with any illness manifesting in the
physical body and can head off illnesses that might be just starting to appear. If you feel a
cold or the flu coming on, working your front Neurolymphatic Reflex Points will often help
avert it.

To clear a Neurolymphatic Reflex Point, press in on any of the points shown in the chart (on
page 16 of the module 1 handout) with strong pressure and make tiny circles with your
thumb or finger. Press each point for about 5 seconds and do 2 or 3 points every day. If a
point feels tender, work it for several extra seconds. The tenderness may not go away
immediately but you are clearing the congestion. Return to points that are tender on
subsequent days.

Neurolymphatic Reflex Points require firm pressure to be effective. If you are too gentle or
tentative, it can be counter-productive. As a result of the necessary pressure, it may hurt a

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 69


little when you push on these points. If any points are really sore, it means they really need
work. The harder you press (within reason), the better it is.

Important notes:

- Neurolymphatic work helps clear toxins. It is possible that you may experience some
nausea from this technique as the toxins are released for elimination. If this
happens, while the process will still be yielding benefits, you may want to proceed
more slowly or work fewer points in subsequent sessions
- Do not use pressure at the site of an injury
- Drink lots of water to help your body clear out the toxins that are released

NB If you feel hot as you are massaging the Neurolymphatic Reflex Points, it’s because you
are releasing some energy that really needs to be released.

Benefits of massaging the Central Neurolymphatic Points

These points are shown on the chart on page 16 of the module 1 handout and they are right
where you would sew the arm onto the body if you were going to stitch the 2 together.

Massaging hard on this particular Neurolymphatic Reflex Point influences all the other
Neurolymphatic Reflexes. Every other Neurolymphatic Reflex in the body is influenced by
this particular Neurolymphatic Reflex, because it is on Central Meridian, and Central
Meridian is both a meridian and a Radiant Circuit.

Massaging on this Neurolymphatic Reflex makes the lymph flow. The lymph, when it flows,
carries toxins that you have taken in, out of the body. This could be stress, or different foods
that you have eaten, for instance.

The shoulder muscles are on Central Meridian so massaging the Central Neurolymphatic
Points (where the arm meets the body) can take away shoulder pain.

Another Central Meridian Neurolymphatic Reflex Point is the Electric Points. They are
located at the base of the skull (where the spinal cord comes into the brain stem), known in
traditional Chinese medicine as the ‘headache points’. These points are located in
indentations about an inch to either side of the centre of the back of the neck at the base of
the skull. Holding these points for an extended period of time (3 minutes or more) can
stimulate deep healing.

The exact position of the Electric Points is marked in the diagram on page 12 of the Module
6 handout. To hold these Electric Points:

- Push your middle fingers directly into the points, allowing the weight of the head to
provide further pressure
- Holding and massaging these points for a couple of minutes activates the Central
Meridian Neurolymphatic Reflex Points, helping support movement of the lymph and
releasing toxins
- If you hold these points longer than a couple of minutes, however, you are likely to
notice a change in the sensations in your fingers. You may begin to feel heat and
even burning, making you want to pull your fingers off the points
- That is when you know that you have really connected with the Electrics, like
plugging into a socket. At this point, a profound type of healing can occur

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 70


- You need only trust the body to electrically hook up as it need to, not as you may
have planned it

In the Energy Medicine book (page 198/199) Donna recounts that she has held these points
for more than an hour on occasion. Sometimes the person has no idea anything is
happening, but she feels the burning in her fingers. The person may eventually begin to feel
strong sensations in scar tissue or other areas where the body is trying to repair itself.
Sometimes there will be a sense that an emotional wound is being healed. You will know
when the process is completed because the burning in your hands will stop! And the person
will often report that a significant and unexpected healing has occurred.

Benefits of massaging the Lung Neurolymphatic Reflex Point

Massaging the Lung Neurolymphatic Reflex Point (ie the sternum) gives you longevity. So if,
say, you were in a race, and you were losing your strength and your vitality and your energy,
if you massaged the sternum you would get your strength etc. Or, if you were swimming and
massaged on the sternum, it would give you more breath, so you could swim for much
longer.

Benefits of massaging the Small Intestine Neurolymphatic Reflex Points

The Lymphatic Reflexes affect different organs and different parts in the body. So, for
instance, the Small Intestine Points are not just for the small intestine, they are for the entire
abdominal cavity.

The Small Intestine Points (see the on page 16 of the module 1 handout) are under your rib
cage and also on the insides of your thighs. Massaging under your rib cage and on the
inside of your legs will help the energies that are in your whole abdominal area to drain. If
you have any tenderness there when you massage the points, it’s about your small intestine.

These points also govern the muscles, so if you bend over and try to touch your toes before
and after massaging these points, you should notice that you can get down further than
before after you have massaged the points.

Benefits of massaging the Liver and Stomach Neurolymphatic Reflex Points

If you use your thumbs to massage under your bra line, from the centre to the sides, on the
right side, this affects your liver and on your left side it affects your stomach. This is the
spleen point. Massage this if you eat too much as it will help to metabolise!

Benefits of massaging the Large Intestine Neurolymphatic Reflex Points

To get some flow going into your legs, it’s the Large Intestine Neurolymphatic Reflexes.
(You can energy-test someone for this by asking them to hold onto your shoulder while they
raise their leg and you try to push it down.) Massage hard on the back of the bottom and
then the outside of your thighs, right on the seam line from the top of your thighs to the
knees. Then do the same on the inside of your thighs. Massaging these lymphatic points on
the legs make your body more flexible. So if, for instance, you have a hard time touching the
ground, if you really massage these points, that energy will open up and you will easily be
able to touch the ground.

If you can’t massage hard, or it’s too painful when you do that, you can do something called
the ‘dental floss technique’. In this technique you actually just use your hands on both sides,

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 71


going back and forth ie pressing thumb into inner thigh then outer thigh, moving your thumbs
in little circles, slowly moving inch by inch from the top down to the knees - so you are
getting small intestine and large intestine at the same time. It doesn’t hurt as much but,
energetically, it’s still getting the effect.

After you have done this massaging, you can energy-test the person again and this time
they should be able to resist you better when you push down on their leg.

There is another way to work these points, particularly these small intestine points, which is
very effective. You put your hands out in front of you at shoulder height, with your fingers
tucked into your palm and your thumbs straight out horizontally, facing each other. Then
cross your hands over and bend down and push your thumbs into your inner thighs. In this
way, you have the power, the strength of your legs to push in and you make little circles.
And that way it doesn’t hurt so much!

The main Neurolymphatic Reflex Points to massage

To sum up, the main points to massage hard, on each side, are:

- in the space where the shoulder joins the body


- in between your ribs
- your sternum
- put your thumbs right on your bra line under your breasts and massage from the
centre to the sides
- one rib below that, right in line with your breasts ie right underneath each breast
(that’s the Spleen and also the Small Intestine)
- crossing your wrists and pushing your legs in and out onto your circling thumbs
- down the outside of your thighs to your knees

If it hurts when you do this hard massaging, then you need it - you don’t need to be energy-
tested to see if you need it or not! This is a really good biofeedback tool to let you know
what’s happening in your body! Massaging these points will really help with your flexibility
and letting go of a lot of toxins.

Using a tool to massage the Neurolymphatics

In response to a question from the Live Question and Answer Call with Lisa and Marjorie
after Modules 3 and 4 regarding if it’s OK to use massage instruments to massage pressure
points and acupressure points, or if we should always use our fingers, the response was as
follows:

Donna only ever uses her thumbs. But our hands, knuckles and fingers will get tired
if you are consistently doing stuff, so I use my Neurolymphatic Tools - which my
clients call Tools of Torture! You can use them for all sorts of different things. Some
of them are easier to do Points, some of them are easier to do on the outside of legs
and you can also get a whole lot more pressure when you are using a
Neurolymphatic Tool because you have your whole arm behind it. I particularly like
the tools that sit in the palm of my hand and the dog-shaped tools work well because
they have a flat head and they are comfortable to hold

The answer to your question is, use whatever actually works. The only time you
would really need a tool, is for the Neurolymphatic Points, because they are the only

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 72


points that we use a really deep touch with. If you are just holding or strengthening
sedating points or Neurovasculars, only a very light touch is required and so you
should use your hands for those

The Spinal Flush, or Lymphatic Massage (see page 12 of the Module 6


handout)

This exercise is a form of Neurolymphatic Clearing. You are moving lymph to help the body
release toxins and are, at the same time, calming the nervous system - Bladder Meridian,
which governs the nervous system, runs through this area.

The Lymphatic Massage is a particularly satisfying procedure to do with a friend. Because


major Neurolymphatic Reflex Points affecting every meridian run along either side of the
spine, those Points are a great focus for a shared session. Known in Donna’s circles as a
Spinal Flush, the Spinal Flush is the single technique she asks David to do on her more than
any other, at least once each day.

It takes about a minute (but you may be pleading, “don’t stop!”)

1 Lie face down, or stand 3 or 4 feet from a wall and lean into it with your hands
supporting you. This positions your body to remain stable while your partner applies
pressure to your back

2 Have your partner massage the points down both sides of your spine, using the
thumbs or middle fingers and applying body weight to get strong pressure. You are
pressing in deeply on the fleshy tissue on both sides of the spine - do NOT press
directly on the spine itself. Massage from the bottom of your neck all the way down
to the bottom of your sacrum

3 Have your partner make a few tiny circles with strong pressure on each point and
then move down about an inch or two. Staying on the point for at least 3 seconds,
your partner moves the skin in a circular motion with strong pressure, checking to
make sure that the pressure is comfortable

4 Upon reaching the sacrum, your partner can repeat the massage or can complete it
by ‘sweeping’ the energies down your body. From your shoulders, and with an open
hand, your partner sweeps all the way down your legs and off your feet, 2 or 3 times

Don’t be concerned about a point being missed. Each of your meridians will be covered by
simply going between all the notches. Rather than knowing which meridians are associated
with which points, simply ask for special attention on any points that are sore. If you are
moving through intense emotional or physical stress, or if you have been exposed to
environmental toxins, doing the Spinal Flush quickly helps clear your lymphatic system.

The Spinal Flush not only cleanses the lymphatic system, it also stimulates the cerebrospinal
fluid, clearing your head as well. It is a quick rebalance and, of all the energy techniques
Donna has seen, she says it probably delivers the most benefit for the least effort in the
greatest number of situations.

If a cold is coming on, the Spinal Flush can stop it in its tracks.

Donna regularly recommends it to couples, both as a way of lovingly caring for each other
and as a way to head off problems. If you sense that an interchange is headed toward an

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 73


argument, tell your partner, as lovingly as you can, “up against the wall now!” and firmly work
their Neurolymphatic Reflex Points. This simple technique immediately reduces built-up
stress and takes the edge off emotional overreactions.

In response to a question from the Live Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David after
Module 8 regarding if there is an alternative way to do the Spinal Flush if you have nobody to
do it for you, Donna and David’s responses were as follows:

Donna: People will use a hook with something like a tennis ball on the back that,
when you pull forwards, it will pull on your back so that you can go down each point
on your back. If you have a Chinese health store, they often sell them. Also, people
tell me that they will get up to a corner in one of the walls in their house and put their
backs to it and really push so that they get a sense of all those points being pushed
on the Spinal Flush

David: Brookstones used to sell a massager with handles that you can put on your
back and pull it in and move it up and down your spine and get an incredible Spinal
Flush

Testing the Spinal Flush

Touch a Neurolymphatic Reflex Point (energy localising) that is sore when you press in and
test with your other arm. If it tests weak, massage the point for several seconds while
breathing deeply and then test again.

Energy localising

Energy localising involves you touching a location on an individual’s body (or asking the
person themselves to do it) and then, while still holding that point, using a General Indicator
Test to detect energy imbalances. This will show whether the energy is flowing optimally
through that point or not. For example, energy localising over an organ will provide
information about the flow of energy through that organ.

When you touch a specific point on the body while testing, you are ‘aggravating’ the system
that the point connects to. What you are looking for is whether that slight aggravation is
enough to disturb the system connected with that point. If the disturbance is moderate to
severe, the test is weak. If the aggravation is less than moderate, the test stays strong.

K27 is considered to be a ‘master point’ of the meridian system. So any aggravation to that
point will activate stresses that are present anywhere in the meridian system and feedback
to the Energy Test.

Energy localising can add much greater precision to energy-testing.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 74


Pets and Energy Medicine

In response to a question on the Module 1 Question and Answer Coaching Call regarding if
this type of Energy Medicine can work on pets, the answer was as follows:

Yes. Animals are so receptive - they receive it so quickly. You can massage a cat’s
K27!

MODULE 2 - THE IMPORTANCE OF CLEARING, CENTERING, BALANCING


AND GROUNDING YOUR ENERGIES

An electrical device is ‘grounded’ when it is connected to the ground in a way that allows
excess energy to leave the system. For people, energetic grounding supports the natural
exchange of energies with the Earth and enables us to send energetic roots into the Earth so
that they hold us steady. The energies of your body are interacting with the energies of the
Earth in a way that you are built for them to interact.

Being grounded affects you physically, emotionally, mentally and spiritually. It allows you to
withstand life’s challenges at each of these levels. It is also important when you interact with
others, helping you relate openly without picking up too much of the other’s energies.

As you practise the DER, you are building a strong foundation for your own health, vitality
and growth. This Module gives even more ways to clear, ground and balance your energies.
Using these Energy Medicine techniques can help counteract the effects of stress, build
resilience, and open up to the positive energies of what you want to bring into your life.

Our bodies and psyches are challenged constantly by unnatural environmental energies,
additives in the foods we eat, and even other people’s negativity. All these things throw our
energies off and then we are more susceptible to illness and depression and confused
thinking. Clearing, grounding and balancing our energies regularly can prevent this, or
reduce negative impacts on our minds, bodies and spirits.

Neurovascular Reflex Points

Neurovasculars are points on the head that, when held, increase the blood flow to the brain.
They move the blood flow (vascular) to the forebrain from the primitive back brain. If there is
emotional distress of any kind, these are the points to use. They bring calm and peace to
the system. They can be used to re-programme stress responses and to balance meridians.
Remember to hold these points gently.

Holding the forehead (see page 77) is a simple way to engage the main Neurovascular
Points. Holding the Neurovascular Reflex Points bridges the nervous system and the
circulation system with the meridians. Because these Points can be held to influence the
circulation of blood, you can also use them to reprogram emotional and mental responses to
stress and trauma. By gently holding specific Neurovascular Reflex Points while bringing to
mind a specific trauma or crisis, you can train your body to keep blood in the forebrain rather
than sending it to the limbs and trunk in preparation for the fight-flight-or-freeze response.
This can lower overall anxiety level and reduce the number of situations that unnecessarily
trigger a stress response. Use of these Points also helps to balance energy in the specific
meridian associated with Points you are holding, and related organs.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 75


Something to do as a kind of reset button, is to lie down and hold a broad hand on the back
of your head and a broad hand on your forehead. The hand in the back is covering Kidney
and Triple Warmer Neurovasculars and the hand on the forehead is covering the man
Stomach, Liver and Bladder Neurovasculars. Breathe.

The Main Neurovascular Reflex Points on the Forehead

(For how to hold these points, see ‘How to restore blood to your forebrain to reverse a stress
response’ on page 77.)

When you are stressed, blood rushes from your forebrain - the advanced ‘thinking’ part of
your brain - into your limbs and chest to support the fight or flight response. Gently holding
the main Neurovascular Reflex Points draws energy back into your brain. Blood, oxygen
and cerebrospinal fluid follow this energy, reversing the stress response. This calms and
stabilises the nervous system, and allows you to think clearly and re-centre emotionally.
Each day, either at the start or end of your day, you should clear the stuff that comes into
your body. If you have had bad dreams, or you have been tossing and turning during the
night, it’s a good idea to clear yourself and ground yourself, and make yourself ready for the
day ahead. Practise gently holding the Neurovascular Reflex Points daily and you will start
training your body to get rid of the stress build up in your body - and you just might be
happier! Because if you have a lot of stress in your body, it’s hard to be free, happy, it’s hard
to drop out of your head and just relax.

Donna said she was ashamed that everybody in the world is not taught this, because
everybody needs to know how to do this - you need to get the blood back up into your
forebrain so you can think properly again.

We have not changed in a couple of millions years in how we handle stress in our bodies. It
did not evolve. It stayed the same because everybody quit working with energy. The fight or
flight response is one of nature’s greatest achievements. It’s kept us alive for millions of
years, yet now, it’s a real problem, because so many of the things that hit us as stressors are
no longer a sabre-toothed tiger walking into our cave, where we have to have an immediate
response that you don’t think about. Now, we have problems like our computer crashing,
which is a big problem, but it’s not a life-threatening problem, and there are lots of these
problems happening every week. So what’s happening is that our body goes into the fight or
flight response, or at least the early stages of it, and it sends all these stress chemicals
through our body, which are real poisons. They are made to get you into action but, if they
just sit there, they become poison.

That’s a big part of what Energy Medicine is able to counter. It’s able to give you a
technique like this so that when you go into stress that is not appropriate to the situation, you
can hold the Neurovascular Reflex Points, but also, so that you build your resilience so you
don’t go into that kind of distress so quickly.

That is what this technique is about, it’s interrupting the fight or flight response. And what
actually happens is that the blood leaves the forebrain, up to 80% of the blood can leave the
forebrain to go into the chest, the arms and the legs, for the fight or flight response. That’s a
big change. You can’t think very clearly when that happens. But if you hold your
Neurovasculars Reflex Points, these points are reflex points and they bring the blood back
up into the brain, so it’s a winner.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 76


In response to a question from the Q&A Live Coaching Call with Donna and David after
Module 8 regarding “every organ is governed by a meridian and, if there is an imbalance in a
particular organ, then there can be a problem with this organ. But what about if there is a
problem in the blood and brain - are those affected by more than just one meridian”, Donna’s
response was as follows:

Yes, you have several meridians going through your head, but you also have
Neurovasculars. The Neurovasculars are in the front of your forehead, but you also
have them all over your head and those govern different meridians in the body. So
holding the different Neurovasculars on the head will affect the flow of the energy in
your whole body. As for blood, it’s usually Spleen Meridian - Spleen Meridian
governs the blood - and, of course, the Heart, because it pumps it. Actually,
everything does a little bit, but it’s mostly Spleen and Heart

Energy test to determine if someone is stressed

On the video, Donna energy-tested someone and she was strong. Donna then asked her to
bring to mind something that bothered her, and then Donna energy-tested her again. She
was instantly very weak.

This demonstrates how quickly stress hits the body - it is instant and it is automatic.
It is so important to understand that what happens when you are stressed is that you lose
blood from your forebrain. It goes into your body for the fight or flight response, ie to either
beat someone up or to run away. If you do neither of these things, you just keep collecting
stress in your body.

If you put your hand flat against your forehead - it’s like an instant ‘Oh my God’ thing that lots
of people do - that is actually called the Main Neurovascular Reflex Points on the Forehead.

How to restore blood to your forebrain to reverse a stress response (page 5


of the Module 2 handout)

You can do this on your own Neurovascular Reflex Points or you can hold another person’s
Neurovascular Reflex Points for them.

Bring to mind a time you felt emotional overwhelm (or use during a current crisis). If
appropriate, energy-test the person, while they are thinking of the thing that is stressful or
upsetting.

Place your fingers on the frontal Neurovascular Reflex Points (also called the Main
Neurovascular Reflex Points). These points are located on the forehead, on the frontal
eminences, where most people have a slightly raised area. Hold these points gently, with
thumbs resting at the temples and a very light pull to the sides of the forehead, for 3 to 5
minutes while you think of the stress. As you hold the points, sink deeply into the emotion
and stress.

You can also hold the Main Neurovascular Reflex Points with the palm of one hand and use
the other hand to hold the Neurovascular Reflex Points directly behind your eyes on the
back of your head, just above your neck.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 77


After 3 to 5 minutes, you will probably find a significant shift in your subjective response to
the memory or situation. Repeat again the next day, or as needed. Depending on the
severity of the issue, the time to completely release emotional distress triggered by the
memory can vary, but the distress will diminish.

Neurovascular Reflex Points have pulses. As you hold them, an increase in the strength of
the pulses indicates that blood that had been diverted during the stress response is returning
to the forebrain. (NB It is often easier for someone else to feel your Neurovascular pulses
than for you to feel your own.)

You never know how long you are going to have to hold a person’s forehead, because if
somebody has a lot of stress going on in their life, they might have accumulated stresses
and it’s just been a series of blood leaving their forebrain. But it’s usually somewhere
between five minutes and ten minutes at the maximum. Sometimes it has to be done for
much longer than that - it just depends on how bad the stress is.

Usually, you will feel the difference within 3 minutes, but sometimes it will take much longer.
You should stay doing it until you can really feel the pulses beating. You really start to feel
what amazing, abundant movement is in a person’s head when you hold Neurovasculars.

What is happening when you hold the Neurovasculars is that you usually feel a thump,
thump, thump, or waves, almost like a figure of eight.

This is a great thing to do for yourself any old time! So, the next time you are stressed, hold
the Neurovascular Reflex Points on your forehead.

When you are feeling the sensations when holding someone else’s Neurovascular Reflex
Points on their forehead, they are coming from the person’s forehead, not from your
fingertips. You are feeling for the beating of the capillary beds. It’s not in your fingers - it’s
in the person’s head. When you hold your own Neurovascular Points, often you don’t pick
up pulses but, instead, you suddenly realise that you feel good now!

If you energy-tested before starting holding the points, energy-test them again afterwards,
while they are thinking of the same stress or emotion and they should now test strong. This
is because the blood will have gone back up into their forebrain, their body will have
dissipated a lot of the stress chemicals, and they are now in better shape.

If you can’t remember your dreams, hold your Neurovascular Points at night before you go to
sleep and that will help you to remember them when you wake up.

Donna shared an experience of one of the first times that she had to hold someone’s
Neurovascular Reflex Points for an extremely long time. When she was starting out with her
Energy Medicine, she was volunteering in every direction she could because, at that time,
nobody was hiring her. So she volunteered in the mental ward of a hospital in San Diego.
When she got to the hospital, nobody greeted her, so she ambled down the hallway and
there was a room that was open and she walked in. It was a very big dayroom but there was
only one woman in there. When the woman saw Donna, she went and laid down on a
daybed with her back to Donna as she lay down on the couch. Donna asked her, “Would
you mind if I held your Neurovasculars?!” but the woman didn’t reply. Donna held the
woman’s Neurovascular Reflex Points, and held them, and held them. She was sure that
was the longest she had ever had to hold points and she has never since held them for so
long. It was a good 45 minutes before the pulses came in but, when they came in, the
woman took a deep sigh and said to Donna, “Oh thank you. My name is so-and-so, what’s

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 78


your name?” And right at that moment, a nurse saw Donna, and came in and pulled Donna
out of the room, because she wasn’t supposed to be there. So Donna went down to the
office with the nurse and then found out that that patient had not spoken in two years!

The Blow Out Technique (page 6 of the Module 2 handout and Donna
also demonstrates the technique 23 minutes into the Module 2 video)

This technique quickly removes unwanted energies and makes room for new, vibrant
energy. The Blow Out is especially effective at clearing excess or stuck energy, anger, or
the residue of your response to stress. When you do this technique, you are going blowing
out the energy from Central Meridian and your chakras and the Penetrating Flow - so you
are getting 3 different energy systems moving out of your body while doing this exercise.
Page 6 of the Module 2 handout shows how to do the exercise and Donna also
demonstrates the technique 23 minutes into the Module 2 video.

To demonstrate this technique, Donna energy-tested someone and she was strong. Donna
then said she was going to pretend that the person had come to see her, maybe for a
session, and so Donna walked up to her and hugged her tight and said how lovely it was to
see her. She then energy-tested the person again and, this time, the person was weak.

Donna explained that you would have thought that something that positive, that good, would
be good for the person, but it’s not good for any of us if we’re already OD’d. Sometimes,
when someone is being as loving and attentive as they could possibly be, it just irritates the
hell out of you! That is because you are on overload and even somebody else’s love coming
in on it is too much. So, to remedy this, do the Blow Out technique.

Donna and the person did the Blow Out technique and then Donna went through the same
pretence with her, pretending she had come to see Donna and Donna gave her a hug.
Donna then energy-tested her again and, this time, because she had ‘blown out’ a lot of her
stuff, she was strong - she could take in the love coming from Donna.

If you ever find yourself in that circumstance with somebody that is really doing you in, and
they are trying to love you the best they can, just do that Blow Out exercise.

There are lots of other circumstances when it’s good to do the Blow Out. There are so many
times when we are just so full, we’ve got so much going on, we’re doing so much. It seems
too simplistic that you could just blow that energy out, but you can - that is all it takes - and it
really changes your chemistry. It changes your energy and it changes the chemistry in your
body when you release that way.

How to do the Blow Out (page 6 of the Module 2 handout)

1 Rub your hands together and shake them off

2 Stand with your hands on your thighs, fingers spread, and take a deep breath

3 With a deep inhalation, make fists out of your hands and swing your arms out to your
sides and complete the circle by bringing them high above your head

4 With a loud, “Shhhhhhhhhhh” as you exhale, bring your fisted hands down swiftly,
opening them as they reach toward the ground

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 79


5 Bring to mind the source of your stress, anger, or overload and make your
movements quick and forceful. Repeat 3 times

6 For a fourth time, feel your muscles and power unfolding as you slowly and
deliberately circle your arms up and then pull your arms down as you exhale

7 Repeat until you feel the unbalanced energy dissipate

8 Do the Zip-Up

Grounding yourself (pages 7 and 8 of the Module 2 handout)

‘Grounding’ is an interesting word. When people think of what it means when a person isn’t
grounded, they think they are kind of ‘off’, they are floating away, they are not really present.
But, in Energy Medicine, it has a very specific meaning. What ‘grounding’ means in Energy
Medicine is that the energies of your body are interacting with the energies of the Earth, in
the way that you’re built for them to interact, which is, there is a very clear definite polarity
that happens in your body, that happens in the Earth.

An electrical device is ‘grounded’ when it is connected to the ground in a way that allows
excess energy to leave the system. Human beings also need grounding, but we are a bit
more complicated. We need to be grounded for the natural exchange between our complex
energy system and the Earth. Like trees, we need to send our energetic roots into the Earth
so they hold us steady.

Being grounded helps you physically, emotionally, mentally and spiritually. Grounding may
assist when you are feeling anxious, ‘spacey’ or light-headed, have general discomfort, are
disconnected from what is going on, if you lose track of what you were thinking about, or
walk into a room and can’t remember what you were looking for, or if you are unable to
relate to others or the environment, or feel ‘stuck’.

It may also help if you have trouble listening, learning or focusing, walking or balancing, if
you don’t feel emotionally supported and if you ‘pick up’ too much energy from others.
If something doesn’t feel right in your body, try working on your grounding first and many
times that will be enough to make you feel a lot better.

Many things can cause us to become ungrounded eg wearing rubber-soled shoes, flying,
stress, busy schedules, being rushed, being around negative people, listening to the news
and, also, grounding can become an energy habit.

In response to a question on the Module 2 Q&A video regarding if there are any potential
gender differences with grounding techniques and if men and women experience it
differently, the answer was as follows:

Many men tend to stay more grounded than women. The energy comes up from the
Earth for a woman - she brings in more yin energy, which is more female. Men’s
energy tends to go more downwards (ie from above their head and then down to the
Earth) so they often carry more power, partly because they are in that stance on the
ground, they are grounded

All exercises work for both men and women, however, sometimes, because of your
gender, you may not like one as much as another eg when men pull Spleen Meridian

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 80


up, they are pulling yin energy up

If women are pulling energy up from the earth, why are women less grounded than
men? For women, pulling up the Spleen Meridian, that energy can actually make
them go higher up, but it’s the energy that comes down (ie the direction that men are
grounded) that makes you ground

Both men and women’s energies flow both upwards and downwards, but men draw
more energy from the heavens and women draw more energy from the earth.

In response to a question from the Module 2 Live Coaching Call with Janel and Michelle
regarding if you have to have bare feet when grounding, the answer was as follows:

No! You can use your intention, your imagination. Although it is better to take your
shoes off, you can do it with your shoes on. It is also better to have leather-soled
shoes as opposed to synthetic soles

Remember we also ground from above - we connect with the sky as well as the
Earth. And we also have the 4 Thumps - thumping the cheek bones pulls the
grounding in from the heavens

How to test if someone is ungrounded

Stomach Meridian is an Earth element - it belongs to Earth - and it’s an easy one to test
whether you are grounded or not.

Push in on the person’s second toes and then energy-test them. What you are testing is the
Stomach Meridian that travels from right underneath your eyes and goes all the way down
and off your second toe. It also grounds you into the Earth.

If the person tests weak, they should do some of the grounding and aligning with the
energies of the Earth techniques - see below - and then energy-test them again.

Grounding and aligning with the energies of the Earth techniques


Tapping the cheekbones

Tapping the cheekbones is a way to restore a healthy energy flow.

If someone energy-tested weak on their second toes, see what you can do to Stomach
Meridian at the other end of the meridian, to see if it will go down to their feet. Ask them to
breathe in deeply through their nose and out through their mouth while tapping their
cheekbones - and they should tap with some pressure. (If they don’t tap hard enough, it will
be the same as if you don’t tap K27 hard enough - ie the effect will be reversed, which you
definitely don’t want!)

Now push down on the person’s second toes again and then repeat the energy-test and the
person should now test strong.

If you need to be grounded fast, tapping on the cheekbones will work well. Just do it
whenever you feel like you need it - make it a habit!

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 81


Grounding with the Darth Vader Breath exercise

The Darth Vader Breath exercise helps ground our energies while building Aura strength
from the inside out and has many more excellent benefits (see ‘Darth Vader Breath exercise’
on page 232 for how to do it etc.)

Aligning with the energies of the Earth (page 8 of the Module 2 handout)

We are meant to be very connected to the Earth and to draw the Earth’s energies up into our
bodies. For this to happen, the polarities of the body must be aligned with the polarities of
the Earth. Think of 2 magnets. If they are not in the proper alignment, they repel one
another. If they are aligned, they attract one another and exchange energies.

At the bottom of each foot is an energy vortex that pulls energy in from the Earth. Our feet
can attune us to the rhythms of the Earth and sometimes the connection between the feet
and the Earth is blocked. If you think this might be the case, use one or more of the
following techniques: Spooning the Feet, Walk Barefoot in the Grass, or Smoothing Energy
Down your Legs, all of which are detailed in this module.

In response to a question on the Module 2 Q&A video regarding the effect if your polarity is
not aligned with the Earth’s polarity (ie what does it prevent you from having, or what does it
hurt) the answer was as follows:

If your polarities are off, it will prevent you drawing up helpful energies from the
Earth. If you can’t pull up any energy from the Earth, it might make your feet hurt, or
your Belt Flow hurt

If you are not grounded, you won’t feel like you’re a part of nature. You will tend to
pick up other people’s stuff more, or you will pick up other people’s negativity more.
This is why people hug trees - because the tree trunks will ground you back into the
Earth

If your polarity is aligned, you will feel like you are in rhythm - it is literally a huge
figure of 8 that comes up from the earth and swirls in a figure of 8. Everyone is born
in an element, a rhythm

Aligning with the energies of the Earth - Smoothing Energy down your Legs (page 8 of the
Module 2 handout)

An easy and simple way to ground yourself is to put your hands at the sides of your waist or
on the back of your hips, with your thumb in the front and your fingers towards the back.
Then take a deep breath in and smooth your hands slowly and firmly down your bottom and
then the sides, back or front of your legs (whichever feels right), all the way down to your
ankles and feet. When you get to your feet, squeeze the sides of your feet and hang there
as you take 2 deep breaths. Then trace your Spleen Meridian as you are coming back up.
Tapping the Spleen Meridian (ie at the sides under your breasts) after you have grounded is
a good idea because you want to really start adapting to that and metabolising.

Massage the gaits

For how to do this, see ‘Massaging Gaits on page 67!

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 82


How to test if a person’s polarities are off

Ask the person to take off their shoes and sit on a chair and then energy-test the person.
Now lift the bottom of the person’s foot on the top of your upturned palm and, while you have
their foot in your palm, energy-test them again. Then do the same with their other foot.
If the person tests weak on one or both feet, it means their polarities are off ie they have lost
their energy and they are not connecting to the Earth anymore. Their polarities are off
because the feet always reach south and your upturned hand was reaching north.

There are so many things that can happen throughout the day that throw your polarities off.
Every single cell in your body is a miniature battery with a north and south pole, just like a
magnet. And, ideally, our polarities will always be in sort of the same way (except, at
another level, it’s always switching a little bit and then trying to come back to balance).

If your polarities are off, you can fix it by using the Spooning the Feet technique - see below.
When you Spoon your Feet, your polarities will reverse and they will then be in alignment
with the Earth. We are meant to pull up from the Earth energies that feed us and nurture us.
We’re also meant to let go of energies that go into the Earth.

Aligning with the energies of the Earth - Spooning your Feet (and hands) and Polarities

At the bottom of each foot is an energy vortex that pulls energy in from the Earth. When an
individual’s energetic polarities are aligned with the field of the Earth, energies are aided in
entering through the base of their feet (at the beginning point of the Kidney Meridian). These
energies rise through the legs to the pelvic floor and then separate into 2 streams. One
stream continues to rise through the central column of the body to emerge at the top of the
head, spilling down like water in a fountain; another spirals down from the sacrum and back
to the Earth. Both energy streams help ground people.

When an individual’s energetic polarities are reversed or out of alignment, energy exchange
between the feet and the Earth can be significantly hampered or blocked and an adequate
flow of energy cannot be drawn up into the body.

If your polarities are off, using a stainless steel spoon (no other kind of spoon will work, as
the small amount of iron present is what is clearing the stagnant energies), spoon the soles
of the person’s feet (ie rub the back of the spoon up, down and around the soles of the feet).
Stainless steel has an energy attraction to the nerves in your body and it just pulls the
energy from your nerves to connect and it flips everything.

Spooning the hands and also the spine has a great effect as well. You can also rub the
backs of the hands, pull and twist your fingers and stretch the palms and wrists. A
paraphrased quote from Dr Stone, the father of polarity therapy, is “the best health insurance
is to work on your hands and feet for 10 minutes a day”.

Donna advises that everyone carry a stainless steel spoon with them at all times so that you
can spoon your feet (or hands) when it feels like you need it if your polarities are off.

After Spooning the Feet, energy-test the person again and, this time, they should be strong.

If you ever have shoes that are making your feet hurt, spoon your feet and the pain should
just roll off your feet.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 83


Aligning with the energies of the Earth - Walk Barefoot in the Grass

When this is practical, this is a strong grounding technique that draws upon the receptive
energies of the feet.

Taking Down the Flame

This exercise is wonderful for grounding your energies (and also for both lowering your blood
pressure and helping you sleep) - see ‘Chakras: Taking Down the Flame Exercise’ on page
190.

Homolateral Crossover Re-patterning (page 10 of the Module 2


handout)

When your energies are homolateral, they are not crossing over well and the body cannot
adequately access or move the energies it stores. This is a pattern deigned by nature to
slow you down when you are tired or ill, so that you can rest, heal, or re-group. It becomes a
problem, however, if the homolateral pattern becomes a habit. Rather than helping to
restore strength, the habitual Homolateral Pattern interferes with optimal functioning.

All ‘oppositional’ exercises that involve using the left arm with the right leg and right arm with
the left leg (such as swimming or walking) can strengthen the necessary crossover patterns
in the brain if those crossover patterns are active. If they are not active (which means you
are in a homolateral state), then crossover activities will cause fatigue and further
disorganisation in your energies.

‘Crossover’ or ‘Figure 8’ patterns run through all the body’s energy systems and are vital to
maintaining a healthy energy flow and balance. Exercises like the Crossover Shoulder Pull
and the Cross Crawl reinforce crossover patterns for greater resilience.

If doing the Cross Crawl (or simply taking a walk) tires you or is hard to co-ordinate, your
energies may not be crossing over with ease. This homolateral pattern can happen when
your body needs to rest, heal, or regroup. Although this is a brilliant strategy for forcing you
to slow down when rest is needed, it can become an established pattern that saps your
energy, productivity and joy.

If you are going through something that is very stressful, or maybe you’re sick, or emotional,
and you are doing the DER but it doesn’t seem to be doing as well for you as it did at
another time, then you may be homolateral. If you are homolateral the Crossover Shoulder
Pull and the Cross Crawl will not be enough to cross your energies over.

The Homolateral Crossover Re-Patterning exercise can correct this ‘bad habit’ if it is not too
ingrained and put your body back on track to working at its best.

In response to a question from the Module 3 Questions and Answers regarding what is the
relationship between Triple Warmer Meridian and homolateral energy flow, the answer was
as follows:

There is a huge relationship. If you are homolateral, Triple Warmer is involved. If


Triple Warmer is overactive in your body, often you have gone into homolateral. If
you get out of homolateral, Triple Warmer gets a little boost - it can relax a little bit

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 84


How to test if someone is homolateral

Energy-test the person while they are looking at an ‘X’ shape (someone behind you can
make that shape with their index fingers, or you can put an ‘X’ on the wall for the person to
look at). Then energy-test the person while they are looking at 2 vertical parallel lines
(someone behind you can raise each of their index fingers vertically, or you can put a ‘I I’ on
the wall for the person to look at).

If the person tests weak while looking at the X and strong while they are looking at the 2
parallel lines, it means they are homolateral.

If the person is already doing the Crossover Shoulder Pull and the Cross Crawl and they are
homolateral, it means that it’s not holding and so something stronger is required.

In both these cases, they should do the Homolateral Re-Patterning Exercise.

The FAQs handout confirms you can test yourself for homolateral: try lifting a weight or using
a leg muscle to test while looking at parallel lines and then do the same while looking at an
‘X’. If it is easier with the parallel lines, you are homolateral.

In response to a question on the Module 2 Q&A video regarding if there is a way to energy-
test yourself for homolateral energy flow, the answer was as follows:

The best way, and what doing Energy Medicine allows in you, is to begin to sense
into your own body and what it’s trying to tell you. Energy-testing is a way to get
there, but eventually you get more intuitive and your sensory systems turn on

How do you know if you are homolateral?

In response to a question from the Q&A Live Coaching Call with Donna and David after
Module 8 regarding how does one know if they have become homolateral, Donna’s
response was as follows. You are homolateral:
 If you are depressed
 If you have no energy
 If you can’t think and you feel fuzzy and lost
 If you feel clumsy, or klutzy
 If you are starting to get sick

It’s a degree of difference between how much energy you have when you feel
good and how much you have when you don’t feel good. There are other ways
you can know, but always, your energies have become more deficient.

Homolateral Crossover Re-Patterning Exercise (page 10 of the Module 2


handout)

This exercise is detailed on page 10 of the Module 2 handout.

Begin with the Four Thumps. Then, while standing or sitting down, alternately raise each
knee up to touch the elbow or palm of the same arm (ie right knee to right elbow or palm,
then left knee to left elbow or palm) and the arm that isn’t touching the knee should be

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 85


swung backwards. Do this 12 times on each side. This is called parallel marching or
homolateral marching.

Now energy-test the person again. If they are strong on this homolateral marching that is
not what we want, because that’s not how you walk!

Ask the person to tap the palm of each hand on the opposite knee, alternately, while lifting
the other arm up high, to shoulder level, while breathing deeply ie crossing over. Do this 12
times on each side. This is called crossover marching.

Energy-test the person again - this exercise should have made them strong, but if they still
test weak, because they are homolateral, you have to trick the brain and go back and forth
between parallel marching and crossover marching.

So ask the person to go back to doing the parallel marching again (ie right knee to right
elbow, left knee to left elbow) for a few moments, then to stop and take a deep breath in.
Then to do the crossover exercise again ie raise knees to the opposite palm alternately,
arms held high.

You will need to find out how many patterns it will take before the person tests strong on the
crossover pattern, so energy-test the person again. If they are still weak, they haven’t done
these 2 exercises enough times to fool the brain. This usually means a more entrenched
pattern has steeped into the person. So the person should do the 2 marches again a few
times alternately (ending with the cross over one) until they test strong on the cross over
exercise.

It usually takes 3 patterns to change the energy from being homolateral. If it takes more
than that, it means the person has been in that pattern for quite a while. If someone is this
entrenched into homolateral, it’s not going to be suddenly gone from going through these
patterns on one occasion. It means a habit has set in and so the person will need to do this
several times every day for a while, to get out of it. So do 12 homolaterals (ie parallel
marching) and 12 cross crawls (which is crossover marching) and then 12 homolaterals and
then 12 cross crawls, and 2 more sets of that. End with 12 additional cross crawls and then
the Four Thumps.

Alternative technique for balancing a homolateral condition/re-patterning


a homolateral condition

The more usual homolateral re-patterning helps a lot of people, but not every fix is right for
every person, so this technique is a useful alternative (particularly for disabled people,
elderly people, amputees, etc.). This technique works better for many people and really
seems to get the brain involved in crossing over.

There is an optic chiasm, which is like an ‘X’ that is behind the eyes and that is where the
brain/body connection happens, because the left hemisphere of our brain governs the right
side of the body and vice versa. So that ‘energy crossing’ happens right behind the middle
of the eyebrows/between the eyes. (Sometimes people can’t get out of homolateral because,
when they are doing their Cross Crawls, their arms are down too low. If you move your arms
up higher when you are doing the Cross Crawl, so that the ‘X’ is happening in front of the
face, it can make the pattern hold better.)

This technique is demonstrated on YouTube’s ‘Alternative technique for balancing a


homolateral condition’: Close your eyes so you don’t have any outside external stimulation.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 86


Take your index finger (Large Intestine Meridian’s end point - Large Intestine is all about
letting go) and place it in between your eyebrows (Bladder Meridian’s end point - the central
nervous system). Pull your finger half way up your forehead to really pull that into the
nervous system. Then trace around the outside of the eye and then along the top of the
cheekbone (which calms Stomach Meridian’s end point), then cross over in the middle of
your eyebrows and go up again on the other side, going around the eye and down along the
cheekbone. Keep doing this slowly, tracing Figure 8s - you are tuning into the energy.
Repeat this several times - maybe up to 10 times, to really get the pattern crossing over.
Use a firm pressure - it’s not a light tracing. This is taking the crossover internally and
putting into the brain that you are crossing over, which tends to hold the re-patterning longer.
This exercise is good to do if you wake up in the night, to cross things over, and it really
calms Triple Warmer Meridian.

More homolateral information

In answer to a TribeLearn question, if you feel sick or dizzy while doing Homolateral
Crossover Re-Patterning, it usually means that you really need to do it and you should
definitely Hook-Up and sit down while doing it. Also, go a little slower than you are currently
doing it and make sure the same cadence of rhythm is happening when you are doing
parallel and crossover. Make sure to breath in between changing patterns and remember to
relax your breath while doing the re-patterning.

If someone tests strong with both the X and the parallel lines, that indicates the energies are
part way there and need a little more support to release the homolateral pattern and fully
cross over. The correction is to do the Homolateral Re-patterning. Once the energies are
staying crossed, then you can go back to just doing the cross crawl or shoulder swipes.

Everything will be able to work better when you get out of homolateral and you’ll be able to
think better. It’s important for the energies to cross over because all over your body, in every
cell of your body, also in your energy field (which extends outside your body) and in your
Aura (which also extends outside your body), you have crossover patterns, the energy
crosses over. Every energy pattern has crossover energy patterns in them and, if they go
straight up and down, you’re using at least 50% of your energies, and you can’t think as well,
and you just might become a couch potato and that kind of thing!

Science understands that energies do cross over in the body in the way that the right side of
the brain controls the left side of the body, and the left side to the right side, and this goes all
the way down into the DNA - the helix in the DNA is the double spiral.

When Donna looks at someone who is healthy, and compares them to someone who is not
healthy, one of the differences in the energies consistently will be that in the healthy person
there will be a lot of crossovers, and these crossovers will be at all levels. They’ll be at the
large level of the whole body and they’ll be all the way down to the cells.

This is a really important energy system, and just doing this simple exercise, where you are
not only working with the big energies, the full body energies, but it also gets it down to the
smaller level, so that there are little crossovers all over the body, and this gets them going as
well.

One of the questions that people often ask is, “If you want the body to cross over, if you want
the energies to cross over, why is it that you don’t just do the straightforward crossing over
exercise ie opposite knees to opposite arms? Why do you bother to do the exercise where
you do the homolateral exercise ie same arm to same knee? Doesn’t that just give the body

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 87


the wrong message?” The answer is that what’s happening is that your energies are going
straight up and down and so you need to start off in the same flow of your energies ie doing
the exercise homolaterally - ie to the same side.

Even though it’s not good for you, it’s still in the flow that’s already happening. So the part of
you that is watching up in your brain is saying, “OK, whoever is steering knows what they are
doing”. So that’s why the homolateral exercise energy-tests strong, because, although it’s in
harmony with what’s wrong, it is still in harmony with it. Then, after a dozen back and forths
of doing the alternately homolateral and then crossover energy patterns, the part of you
that’s controlling all this, starts to relax, then you go in the crossover direction again and that
part of you isn’t able to really incorporate that, and that’s why you test weak, because you
are going against the flow. But then you go back to the homolateral exercise again and that
part of you says, “OK, OK, they know what they are doing again, they regained their
senses”. And then you test strong and then you go back to the other exercise again and that
part of you says, “OK, what’s going on?” That part of you starts to get confused and then
notices that the crossover pattern feels better than the homolateral pattern - and then it
allows the energies to start to cross over. It allows the energies to follow the pattern, rather
than fight the pattern that you are doing with your body.

David Feinstein (Donna’s husband) is a clinical psychologist and says that one of the first
things you learn in counselling is that you follow the client, before you try to change the
client. In hypnosis that is called pace, pace, lead. You pace the client, so you pace what’s
happening when you are doing the homolateral pattern. That’s where the energies are
going and that’s what you are pacing. And then, after a little while, you lead to a different
pattern ie the cross over pattern. So in a very real way, this exercise is speaking to your
body. You are talking to your body in its own language, which is energy, which is
movement. So that is why this exercise is so effective.

If it’s a pattern you have had for some time that has made you homolateral (as opposed to it
happening just because you have been on a long flight, for example), you may have to do
the 2 exercises alternately several times, because it will go back to the old homolateral
unless you do this. It’s advised that you do it two or three times a day for a period of time,
until it really starts to shift. But it will shift because that’s what your body wants. The
crossovers are what’s natural for your body.

If you get sick, you are going to be homolateral - that is a given - and that is for your sake, so
that you will rest, so that you won’t be out trying to do normal things. So the body, in its
intelligence, takes away your energy so that you will just recuperate. But, an awful lot of
people, have something like maybe cancer, and in these cases, you don’t get out of
homolateral. The body learns habits too quickly, so it will begin to hold onto the new habit,
and it becomes really imperative that somebody teach you or help you get out of homolateral
so that you can actually get well. You can’t really get well from a heavy duty illness unless
you are out of homolateral.

And homolateral goes in many directions. If you are depressed in any way, you are
homolateral. That is just a given. You are homolateral and everything depresses in your
whole body, in your psyche, in your soul, in your spirit. Everything is depressed so, you
must get out of homolateral.

Homolateral is a brilliant strategy to really get your body to tell you it’s time to rest. We have
learned already that massaging K27 when you’re starting to drag, because your energies are
starting to go backwards, that is your body saying, “slow down, rest”. Well, homolateral is
the next level beyond that, but it’s doing the same thing. It’s demanding that you rest. It
makes it even harder to go forward.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 88


It’s a brilliant strategy - but it’s a horrible habit! And the body’s energies do form habits, so
that if you are in homolateral, it will stay there and you just won’t know why it is that you don’t
have the ‘get up and go’ that you used to have and why is it that you are depressed. It goes
both ways. The negative thinking can cause the energies to go into a homolateral, but if you
are in a homolateral state, all the positive thinking in the world is going to have a tough battle
to go against those energies unless you can reverse them in a systematic, somatic (ie
relating to the human body, as distinct from the mind) way.

That’s why David, as a clinical psychologist particularly influenced by Donna, is working so


much more with the body as well as the mind, getting those two in harmony. And it’s
particularly true with depression where if a person’s energies are in a homolateral state, all
the traditional talk therapy kinds of work that are taught in graduate school, are just not very
effective, and so we turn to drugs because we know it’s the body. But drugs have a lot of
costs, and if you are able to do it at the energy level that does what the drugs try to do, so
it’s a very powerful technique.

In answer to a question, if you do these exercises when you are not homolateral, it will not
put you into a homolateral state. One of the wonderful things is that the body wants more
and more crossover patterns. The more and more crossover patterns that you have, the
better and healthier you are and the more vibrant you are, and the better you’ll be as you get
older. As you get older, you’ll like ageing!

So if you are doing the Homolateral Re-Patterning exercise, it’s not going to throw it into the
homolateral. And then, when you do the crossover pattern, it kind of bounces it back.
If you energy-test someone who is not homolateral and then draw a little cross on them just
under, for example, their bra line, then energy-test them again, they will probably test weak.
This is because there are homolateral patterns all over the body, maybe just in an organ, or
on a system, and you want to get out of them. You might think that just because you took
the big pattern out (ie by doing the homolateral/crossover exercise using your arms and
knees) you are home free, but you aren’t. You need to keep doing it. But doing these
homolateral/crossover exercises is going to help the little patterns as well as the big ones –
it’s going to help all the patterns, as long as you end with the crossover, not the homolateral
exercise. And also, pull across your shoulder a lot, too.

David explained that when they were regularly at home, a number of cardiologists started to
refer people to Donna, and these were people that had the same pattern. They had had
some kind of procedure on their heart, often surgery, and they were then doing the
rehabilitation, they were taking their walks etc but they were not getting better. Donna was
able to figure out that what was happening was that the people that were taking these walks
were in homolateral so that their energies were going up and down. But when they were
walking normally ie doing their crossover (because when you walk, you automatically cross
over alternate legs/arms), they were going against their flow with the walks, so that it wasn’t
helping them. It was exercising their muscles, but not helping them get energetically
stronger. It was not helping their heart. So simply getting them out of homolateral was all
Donna needed to do for them to be back on the program and benefitting from it, rather than
getting worse and worse.

If you ever see anybody not getting well, think, “They are probably homolateral” and it will
never harm them to teach them the Homolateral Re-Patterning exercise, as it will always
help.

When you check for homolateral, you normally check with a large X that the person looks to,
and then two vertical lines. And if they are strong on vertical lines, then they are in a

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 89


homolateral state. So you do the exercise, and you think, “OK, that did it and I’m OK”, but,
what happens - especially if you’ve gone through something, if you’re going through some
difficulties or lots of stresses - is that different parts of your body might have homolateral
patterns in them ie they are not crossing over.

An example of this - Donna had a client years ago who did her homolateral, cross crawl and
the DER and she knew she was in good shape. But she had cancer and she didn’t know for
a while, and nor did Donna, why wasn’t it getting over this, when she was not homolateral.
And then one day, Donna was just looking at her and it was so clear to her. She had
stomach cancer, and right over the whole stomach area was just energy that was just going
straight up and down, very slow. When you are homolateral, everything slows down, so it
wasn’t in conjunction with any other energies in the body, and other energies couldn’t get in
to be healing. So Donna just started getting her out of homolateral right on her stomach and
then things turned around.

What it means if you test strong on both the X and the parallel lines

In response to a question on the Module 2 live question and answer call with Janel and
Michelle regarding what is happening if you test for Cross Over and Homolateral and they
both test strong, the answer was as follows:

That can mean a couple of different things. It can mean that the body is starting to
make that shift from being homolateral to having the energies cross over but it hasn’t
quite done it yet. So continuing to do the Homolateral Re-Patterning, to help the
body make the switch, is a good place to start

The other thing to think about if your body is testing strong for both things, is that
your polarity may be off, your grounding may be off, and the body is not quite sure
which way to go. So just do some of the grounding exercises, or go outside and walk
in the grass, or put your back against a tree. Do anything to help you re-ground and
then go ahead and test again

What if Homolateral Re-Patterning doesn’t seem to be working?

On the Live Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David after Module 8, the questioner said
that they had been doing homolateral re-patterning with the DER diligently for 3 months,
sometimes twice a day, and they were feeling depressed and falling apart a lot. Donna and
David’s responses were as follows:

Donna: I’m sorry that’s been happening to you. Triple Warmer is an amazing energy
- it’s not just a meridian, it’s also a Radiant Circuit. Its job is to hold on to what you
have learned, to hold on to old patterns, because that was what was required in
evolution - we needed to be able to not have to think twice about how to be, or to
think etc. So our bodies still hold on to patterns

Periodically, I will see somebody like this, where it is so hard to have homolateral
switch over so that you are not homolateral anymore. But I can promise you that,
eventually, it will kick in. One of our top teachers, it took her 6 months before it
switched over. But her life radically changed then - she got her self-confidence and
everything kicked in then. So if you have old bad habits in your body or your psyche,
it will take longer

I would make sure that you are not just crossing over from your shoulders to your

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 90


hips, but also do the Homolateral Re-Patterning with the arms and legs. Usually
when it is really entrenched deeply you need to do this

David: There is also another answer, which is that there may be a lot going on for
you at the moment, which is larger than what simply doing the Crossover and the
DER can get to. The chances are that doing the DER has been helping you but it’s
not enough - so look for other resources that are going to help you with the
depression and help you with the instability that you are feeling in your life, because
your life force is too valuable to be going for 3 months without getting some help for
it. So take good care of yourself

Donna: Sometimes if you have somebody in your life who can do the techniques on
you, you can lay there and relax, which helps a lot. I have had a couple of people tell
me that they found that that is what worked. When I had my practice, somebody
came in who was extremely homolateral and I lay them on my table and I literally
picked up their arms and legs myself and did the Homolateral Re-Patterning for
them, so that their body could be limp. And, when a body is limp, Triple Warmer
doesn’t feel like there is anything to fight and that was what was kicking in previously

David: So, from an Energy Medicine perspective, after 3 months of still having the
depression, and knowing that homolateral is connected with depression, that would
be a time when you might consult with an Energy Medicine practitioner who is really
able to do an assessment of what is going on - for example, finding out if it is Triple
Warmer locked in. Another perspective would be that it might be time for you to see
a psychotherapist

Figure 8s

Tracing Figure 8s is one of the simplest, easiest, most powerful things you can do. It links
up all the different energy systems in your whole body, helps the body to balance the
energies in a particular location, including the organs, relieves pain and also promotes
healing, right down to the level of our cells. Donna says never under-estimate the power of
Figure 8s.

You can do Figure 8s anywhere on the body. You take your hand over an area and just
quickly draw tons and tons of Figure eights, which have an X in them. If you have a problem
area that just doesn’t seem to respond to anything else, start doing some small Figure 8s
over the area and see what happens. If you know you have a problem with an organ, or you
are worried you might have a problem with an organ, trace Figure 8s over it.

Figure 8s also help if you are homolateral. If you trace Figure 8s over and around your
body, moving your hands slowly, it strengthens, realigns and re-weaves your entire auric
field, with all its layers. Trace Figure 8s throughout your energy field, front and back, large
and small. In addition to re-vitalising your energy field, this also integrates portions of the
Aura that may have become separated.

In answer to a TribeLearn question regarding how long you need to do Figure 8s over an
area for it to be effective and if you can do it for too long, Marjorie Fein replied that you can’t
overdo Figure 8s. Her approach would be to try doing them for a few minutes at a time,
several times a day.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 91


It doesn’t matter which direction the Figure 8s go. If you start a Figure 8, your body’s
intelligence just connects with you. Listen to your body and go in the direction that feels
best. Precision is not required with Figure 8s - intention trumps precision!

Inadvertently crossing yourself!

Inadvertently crossing yourself - for example folding your arms across your chest, or
crossing your legs or ankles, is just another way your body is trying to talk to you. It’s
saying, “Cross me, for goodness’ sake, cross me - I need to have my energies crossed.”

People don’t think in advance before they cross their arms or legs - they just find themselves
doing it. If you are crossing your legs, or your hands, or you just start crossing things, that is
just part of ‘listening to your body’ and starting to get sensitive to that.

MODULE 3 - BEFRIENDING TRIPLE WARMER AND SPLEEN MERIDIANS


TO RELIEVE STRESS

Stress can create a major bump in your road to greater health and vitality. This Module
explores the effects of stress on your energies, mind, body and spirits. We learn about the
Meridian Flow Wheel, which is a practical tool for understanding how meridians work as a
connected system. We also learn about 2 meridians - Triple Warmer and Spleen - and why
maintaining a healthy balance between Triple Warmer and Spleen Meridians can prevent or
minimise the impact of stress.

The Meridian Flow Wheel (page 5 of the Module 3 handout)

The Meridian Flow Wheel is a great tool. Inside the outer band are the names of the
meridians. On the outside of those bands are the time of day, in 2-hour periods. For
example, Heart Meridian is 11 am to 1 pm and Small Intestine Meridian is 1 pm to 3 pm -
and it goes all the way around the wheel like that. So every 2 hours, a different meridian is
getting ‘juiced’.

Each meridian feeds the next meridian. So Spleen feeds Heart, feeds Small Intestine etc
and it just keeps going around like that. It’s very important that each meridian can feed the
next one, because if it can’t feed the next meridian, then that next meridian doesn’t have any
juice!

For each of the meridians, when there is a high tide on one meridian, it’s the low tide in the
opposite meridian. High tide is the meridian’s most highly fuelled state and low tide is when
it is at rest. So, for instance, between 3 pm and 5 pm, it’s high tide for Bladder Meridian, but
it is low tide for Lung Meridian, which is at 3 am to 5 am.

The first place a meridian sucks energy from is its opposite meridian on the Meridian Flow
Wheel. So, for instance, Spleen Meridian should be getting strong at 9 am to 11 am but, if
it’s become chronically weak, because Triple Warmer (it’s opposite on the wheel) is too
stressed out, then Spleen Meridian can’t get that energy. It’s the same principle all the way
around the wheel.

There are more heart attacks on Spleen time, which is between 9 am and 11 am, than at any
other time. This is because Spleen Meridian tends to get the weakest of all the meridians. If

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 92


Spleen is too weak, it doesn’t have anything to feed the Heart - which is its adjacent
meridian on the Meridian Flow Wheel. That’s why more heart attacks happen in Spleen
time, than at any other time.

Another contender in the times of day that a heart attack can happen is often the opposite
on the Meridian Flow Wheel, which is Gall Bladder time at the bottom of the chart. There is
a definite energy between opposites.

You can have that between Spleen and Triple Warmer, too, because Triple Warmer keeps
sucking the energy away from the Spleen. The reason why that is, is because Triple
Warmer has such an important job ie to save your life. Its job is to make you get out of
danger as quickly as you can - the fight or flight response. The problem with that is that we
live in a world where there often isn’t danger at all. Yet Triple Warmer turns on, because it
has learned to be on alert for danger. So, if your computer crashes, that is not a danger, but
Triple Warmer turns on. The problem is, it turns on and the first place it sucks energy from is
its opposite on the Meridian Flow Wheel, which is Spleen Meridian. Then Spleen keeps
taking from everywhere all over the entire chart. The only place it can’t take from is the
Heart - because, if it took from the Heart, you would be having heart attacks all day long.

Take a few days to note what happens to you at the times of day on the Meridian Flow
Wheel. Many people lose energy between 3 pm and 5 pm. That is Bladder time. Bladder
governs your nervous system and it also sits opposite the Lungs. So when Bladder time
comes around, which is 3 pm to 5 pm, this is a natural time to take a rest. We are all meant
to have siestas although, in our culture, we don’t - and maybe that’s the very reason that
Triple Warmer is turning on more and more. There are so many reasons why Triple Warmer
is always on alert and this is one of them - ie that we don’t take a natural nap. Lung
Meridian, which sits opposite Bladder Meridian, literally sucks the oxygen away from Bladder
Meridian. So you don’t have as much oxygen at that time. It’s a very physical time that you
are meant to take a nap.

There is a relationship between everything that is opposite, and also the flow.

The Meridian Flow Wheel is a really important part of Energy Medicine for understanding the
relationships of one meridian to another, to another, to another. It seems abstract when you
first look at it, but it really tells a lot about how nature operates.

If we think about ourselves as beings on this Earth, we are energy beings. Every cell is a
miniature battery with a positive and negative charge. So we are very responsive to the
energies around us. Just like you take a magnet and put it to another magnet and you see
an attraction or repulsion, all the electromagnetic fields around us influence us. They
influence us both electromagnetically and through gravitational pulls. If you think of the
tides, the moon is having that effect on Earth. We are 70% water. Is the moon having an
effect on us like that? The sun is very, very powerful energy. Our relationship to the sun
changes because we spin around every 24 hours, so we are facing it or we are opposite it.

Those energies are impacting us. Then, we have the fact that Earth is moving around the
sun, so it’s impacted in different ways. And we’re here, and we adjusted to all those
energies. So our energy systems are working in conjunction with them and, interestingly, we
have 12 major meridians, plus Governing and Central Meridians, which are a different
system ie the Microcosmic Orbit that Donna has spoken about. (see ‘Standard breath in
Energy Medicine and the Microcosmic Orbit’ on page 49.)

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 93


The Meridian Flow Wheel helps you understand that there is an order to all of our energies
and, using it, you can start figuring out the maze in your own body.

An example of this is that somebody in a class that Donna taught said, after a couple of days
of class, “I’ve been trying some of the things to take away the pain I’ve always had and I
can’t do it.” But she then figured out that there was a pull, probably from Circulation Sex and
Stomach Meridians. Because, at around 7 pm to 9 pm, she’d get an awful pain every night,
whether she ate or she didn’t. She started sedating those energies ie sedating acupressure
points that are on Circulation Sex Meridian - and her pain went away!

So the chart is a valuable thing, for instance if you get headaches at certain times of the day.

Tracing, flushing, balancing, sedating and strengthening meridians

These are all slightly different. The order, from least to strongest effect, is trace, flush, then
strengthening/sedating.

- To BALANCE a meridian:
 trace it
 Or work with the Neurolymphatic Reflex Points and Neurovasculars. (These
will bring balance to any meridian regardless of whether it needs to be
strengthened or sedated, so use these points if you don’t know if a meridian is
over- or under- energy.)
 Strengthening and sedating points are used to balance and stabilise energy
running through meridians. Holding these points in a definite order can
stimulate redistribution of the body’s meridian energies to bring balance

- TRACING a meridian in the direction of its flow activates the meridian, makes the
meridian stronger and balances the energy flow. It gives the meridian a little boost

- FLUSHING a meridian is like emptying the kettle when you get home from a
weekend away and refilling it with fresh water before you make a cup of tea.
Flushing is a great way to keep meridians flowing well. Flushing is a way to
decongest energy - meridians can be sluggish when they are congested. (To
determine if a meridian is sluggish, energy-test it. It is more common with the Yin
meridians.) Flushing gives a meridian more of a boost than tracing it does. It is often
useful to flush a meridian before you strengthen it because this clears it of energetic
debris, leaving more space for fresh energy to enter. Flushing a meridian is gentler
and not as powerful as sedating a meridian. (Sedating a meridian is very powerful.)
Remember you never flush or trace Heart Meridian backwards

- STRENGTHENING points strengthen meridians by adding energy. Strengthening a


meridian is like refilling the kettle after you have used up some of the water. It is
often useful to flush a meridian before you strengthen it because this clears it of
energetic debris, leaving more space for fresh energy to enter. NB you would never
normally strengthen Triple Warmer Meridian unless you were in a severe allergic
reaction (see: ‘Specific conditions and how to alleviate them - to help with severe
allergy attacks). To strengthen a meridian:
 Trace it in a forward direction along its pathway
 Or hold the strengthening points. Strengthening (and sedating) points are
used to balance and stabilise energy running through meridians. Holding
these points in a definite order can stimulate redistribution of the body’s
meridian energies to bring balance

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 94


- SEDATING points strengthen meridians by releasing excess energy in that meridian.
Sedating helps the energy to flow better by taking away energy that is clogged and
has the effect of releasing excess energy while calming it. You are freeing blocked
energies so a strong flow can be restored in the meridian. Sedating a meridian is
very powerful (more so than flushing a meridian). If there is pain, you know you can
sedate - that’s a rule. Remember you never sedate Heart Meridian. (We would not
normally sedate Spleen Meridian.) To sedate a meridian or to reduce a meridian’s
energy flow:
 Trace the meridian backwards from the end point to the beginning point
 Or hold the sedating points. Sedating (and strengthening) points are used to
balance and stabilise energy running through the meridians. Sedating points
are used for pain control (remembering that pain is usually excess energy)
and other situations where energies have become backed up. Holding these
points in a definite order can stimulate redistribution of the body’s meridian
energies to bring balance

In response to a question with Donna and David in the live coaching call after Module 8
regarding how do you know if you should flush or trace a meridian, the answer was as
follows:

It’s always good to trace any meridian. However, if you just trace it, I would say
make sure you use your whole hand and go very, very slowly. You might really like
that and the more your own body begins to give you that feedback, of what it is
resonating with, the more you will know yourself. I think you might get more of a
response in your body if you flush it and there are times when you should flush - for
example if you have a stomach ache or indigestion, then you would want to flush it.
For most people, Spleen is their strongest vulnerability and so it is good to flush
Spleen often. You flush by going backwards once on it and then forward 3 times. It’s
like back-washing pipes - flushing out energy that was stuck, and bringing fresh new
energy in

NB Donna flushed her Spleen Meridian up to 3 times every day when she was trying
to get well from multiple sclerosis. At the time, she didn’t know she was going to
actually get well from it, she just wanted to get her body stronger and she knew that
doing that exercise was doing her good. But before she was well in MS, all her
allergies went away and it also took away her asthma and she just got stronger and
stronger.

In response to a question in the Q&A session with Donna and David after Module 5,
regarding the difference between strengthening and sedating meridian points, Donna’s
answer was as follows:

Sedating points are for pain

There is a myriad of reasons you might use strengthening points. You don’t use
them as much as you would use sedating because, usually, our bodies hold on to too
much energy

When Donna had her practice, people would tell her that they had no energy but they
actually had so much energy stuffed into their bodies and so their energies didn’t flow
in their bodies. Most of the time sedating was precisely what she needed to do. But,
every now and then, say she’d been sedating, but their body had got used to being

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 95


very, very, slow and they couldn’t get their energy up, then Donna might strengthen
afterwards

In response to a question on the Live Question and Answer Call with Lisa and Marjorie after
Modules 3 and 4 re when do you decide to strengthen versus sedate, the answer was as
follows:

At the stage where you guys are at, that is a pretty hard question to answer -
because 2 people can have exactly the same condition and one person is going to
need strengthening and another person is going to need sedating. However, here
are some things to note and these are rules you can count on:

 If there is pain, then you know you can sedate. That’s a rule
 I would say that you are virtually always going to sedate Triple Warmer. I
would not strengthen Triple Warmer unless I was dying or had been stung by
a bee and I am allergic to bee stings!
 Heart you will always strengthen, we never sedate Heart
 Spleen you will virtually always strengthen
 The Neurolymphatics will bring balance to any meridian regardless of whether
it needs to be strengthened or sedated
 If you don’t have someone to test you, then you are just not going to know at
this point, so use the Neurolymphatic Points or, if it’s a more emotional thing,
use the Neurovascular Points (ie where you are holding the head)
 The short answer to this question is, if there is nobody testing you, you are
not going to know, so use the neutral treatments like Neurolymphatics and
then you’ll be absolutely balancing in a very safe way

In response to a question from the Module 7 Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David
regarding what the difference is between flushing and sedating a meridian and, as flushing is
so much quicker, why would we ever sedate, rather than flush, a meridian, Donna and
David’s answers were as follows:

Donna: They are different. For many people in our culture, Spleen Meridian is weak,
because we are not metabolising the toxins, we are not able to digest certain things,
the toxins in the air around us, the body is not able to metabolise them and move
them out, so Spleen is a good example of if you flush it (ie you go backwards once
and forwards 3 times), it empties and then brings energy in

But you sedate for several reasons. We are meant to be bringing energy constantly
in and releasing energy constantly. But we tend to gather more energy in our bodies,
instead of releasing energy. When you gather too much, when you have a habit of
too much energy in a particular organ or meridian, you want to sedate it, because
you want to release it. If you have pain, you want to sedate it. Once in a while,
flushing will be enough - you will know it’s enough if it takes the pain away - but it’s a
much more serious thing to sedate. It really releases energy and wherever you have
pain, you have too much energy, so then you want to sedate, not flush

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 96


David: Flushing and sedating do have the same effect of clearing out the block, of
clearing out energy that is stale or stagnant. Flushing is satisfying - it’s fast and you
feel it. Sedating takes longer, but sedating goes deeper and is a more powerful way
to have the same result

In response to a question on the live Question and Answer Call with Lisa and Marjorie after
Modules 3 and 4 regarding whether the strengthening and sedating points are used only
when we have pain in the areas on the muscle meridian chart, or if there are other
applications, the response was as follows:

Absolutely there are other applications. Generally when we have pain it’s because
there is too much energy, so we lean way more to sedating points for pain and
muscles than we do strengthening points

But when we use strengthening and sedating points it is really to balance and
stabilise energy running in meridians and so that is really the other main application -
it is to balance energy running through meridians. Since there are 14 meridians and
12 of them talk to the 12 major organs in the body, it’s a way to increase the energy
flow into meridians

As the whole meridian system is on a 24-hour cycle, it’s like Donna mentioned, most
heart attacks occur during Spleen time, which is 9 am to 11 am, and the reason is
because Spleen is so depleted that it doesn’t have the energy to send to Heart,
which follows on the chart, and so strengthening Spleen is a way to help Heart

So we use strengthening and sedating points way more to balance the energy
moving towards meridians and the whole cycle

Meridians are named for the organs that they govern. So, for example, the Liver
Meridian obviously can have an effect on the liver organ, but it also has a whole
melange of things that it will affect as well. For example Liver Meridian opens up into
the eyes and it also governs muscles and tendons. There also are specific muscles
that are part of that. So the meridian will always govern the organ it’s named for, it
will have a sense organ in other things it governs but, for example, if you do have
pain, say in the pectoral muscle, the pecs (ie chest muscles) are governed by the
Liver. So that is just 1 of the aspects of what each meridian will govern

For pain, obviously most of the time it’s in a muscle, so you are using the meridian
energy to relieve that

In response to a question on the Live Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David after
Module 8 from someone who said their liver was burdened by taking too many liver
supplements and whether they should strengthen the Liver Meridian or sedate it, Donna and
David’s responses were as follows:

Donna: You sedate. When you have too many supplements, that’s awful and it can
make you feel nauseated. Sedate Liver Meridian, it will make you feel better, you will

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 97


process things quicker and you will be very glad you did it. Do not strengthen the
Liver because then the Liver will not have a way to relax and let things go and
process

David: When the Liver is over-processing and over-working, sedating is helping it to


relax and find balance

Tracing your meridians (extract from the Energy Medicine book)

While many of the essential structures of the human body, including the meridians, evolved
millions of years ago, these structures evolved to support a body that was adapting to a
markedly different world than we encounter today. So it is not surprising that your body’s
energy transportation system may sometimes get its lines crossed and may deliver too much
energy to one organ or not enough to another.

The stressors we face daily tend to send our most vulnerable meridians into a frenzy of
overwork or, alternatively, a virtual shutdown. When this frenzy or shutdown is recurrent,
other meridians, attempting to compensate for the imbalance, become entrenched in crisis
mode. In the ensuing chain reaction, your whole energy transportation can become
ineffective, draining your vitality and leaving you frazzled and susceptible to all sorts of
maladies.

The strategy of waiting until our bodies evolve to fit our lifestyle, a process that typically
requires eons, may be impractical. Human adaptation, however, does not rely on genetic
mutation alone. We also learn.

Tracing your meridians is one of the simplest and most effective ways you can correct for the
mismatch between your genetic programming and the demands of your environment.
Regardless of the pressures, stresses and new circumstances that tend to overwhelm your
meridian system, if you can keep the energy highways open, minimise the traffic jams,
maintain the import and export systems, remove stagnant energy, and bring in a fresh
energy supply, you will be healthier. Tracing a meridian gives it a little boost.

Because your meridians, like your hands, carry electromagnetic and more subtle energies,
you can influence their flow by tracing them, keeping your hands in direct contact with your
body or a few inches away from it. The energy will follow your hand and the flow of energy
along the meridian’s circuitry will be strengthened. By tracing your meridians every day, you
can direct the traffic in your energy transportation system. You can communicate to it, in a
language it understands, that keeping the energies flowing along their natural routes is more
effective than a haphazard crisis response. And you can trace your entire meridian system
in 2 minutes, a procedure you can do as a daily exercise or whenever the spirit moves you.
In addition, if you know that one of your meridians needs special attention, you can trace that
meridian several times each day. You can also add meridian tracing to the DER.

Tracing a meridian in a forward direction along its pathway will strengthen its energy.
Tracing a meridian backwards from the end point to the beginning point will sedate or reduce
its energy flow. (Remember that you NEVER trace Heart Meridian backwards or flush it.)

To trace any of the meridians, use an open hand, palm facing the body, directly touching it or
staying within 2 inches of it. As you pass your hand over a meridian, you are aligning your
hand’s energies with the meridian’s energies, like the moon pulling the tide.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 98


Just as the meridian-tracing sequence begins with the Central, Governing and Spleen
Meridians, it finishes by tracing them a second time, which overlaps and strengthens the
circuitry. You can actually begin with any meridian and proceed in the order listed. You get
an extra boost when you begin where you are most vulnerable. So, after Central and
Governing Meridians, begin with the Spleen Meridian, or any other your intuition suggests.
The Chinese typically start with the Lung Meridian because it brings in the breath. Donna
has found that there are many benefits to starting with the Spleen Meridian. First of all, the
Spleen Meridian provides critical energy for the immune system and each of the meridians is
affected by it. It corrects chemical imbalances and problems with the blood supply. If you
are ill or don’t have much energy, the Spleen Meridian will be weak. Tracing the Spleen
Meridian first sets a strong foundation for tracing the remaining meridians.

Tracing your meridians daily will do a great deal toward keeping you healthy and feeling
good. However, a meridian can be so entrenched in heroic efforts to bring balance to the
organs it governs, or may be so overwhelmed and shut down, that simply tracing it cannot
bring it back to its natural flow.

To identify and correct such imbalances, see separate sections: ‘Energy-testing your
meridians’ on page 255 and ‘Correcting imbalances in your meridians’ on page 257.

Tracing your meridians course notes (at the 6-minute point of the Module 6
video and page 4 of the Module 5 handout)

Tracing a meridian activates the meridian, makes the meridian stronger and balances the
energy flow. Tracing a meridian in a forward direction along the pathway will strengthen its
energy. (Tracing a meridian backwards from the end point to the beginning point will sedate
its energy flow or release trapped energy. Remember that you NEVER trace Heart Meridian
backwards, or flush it, or sedate it.)

The meridians feed the chakras and the chakras feed the meridians, so they really have a
synergistic relationship with each other. This is one of the most important energy
partnerships in your body. Tracing your meridians is a very effective way to encourage
healthy energy exchange between these 2 key systems and to prepare for clearing and
balancing the chakras.

The energies coming off your hands are electromagnetic, which means that, when you trace
a meridian, the energies on that meridian will follow as if you had a magnet in your hands, so
moving the energy and shifting whatever needs to be shifted. You will become more attuned
to the flow of your meridians if you trace them regularly.

Tracing your meridians is good for jet lag (see ‘The meridians and why we get jet lag’ on
page 103 and ‘To negate the effect of jet lag and get your meridians on the right time zone’
on page 103). It is also good to do if you work on a night shift etc, as your rhythms get ‘off’
in these circumstances.

When Donna’s children were little, and Donna was feeling ‘off’, they would say, “let me trace
your meridians, Mum” - and then she would be back ‘on’ again!

NB If you experience no change after tracing a meridian forward/backward, Energy


Medicine practitioners call this ‘frozen energy’ and it usually means the energy in the
meridian is not flowing freely. One of the simplest ways to get that energy moving freely is to
run it back and forth several times - like 6 forward and 6 backward and then re-test to see if
there is an indicator change. What is happening is the running of the meridian backward

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 99


and forward creates a stir in the meridian and, because our bodies are hardwired to move
freely and in the direction that supports us, it will begin to flow. It’s a bit like turning off and
on your computer when it gets ‘stuck’.

In response to a question from the Module 7 Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David
regarding if it is necessary to trace the meridians at the specific times on the Meridian Flow
Wheel and if it is OK to keep repeating the same meridian if there is trouble there, Donna
and David’s answers were as follows:

Donna: I do think it is best to trace from the time of day that the energy is coming in,
but you will not harm yourself if you start it at other times. You will just get faster
results if you trace it from the time that the energy is coming in. If you have an issue
with one of the meridians, or an organ, you can just repeat that meridian several
times. You can do just one meridian, or a few meridians, but it’s very good to do
them all together, just to keep them going

David: If it feels good to do it several times. You also might want to flush the
meridian - ie go backwards once and then forwards several times

How to trace your meridians and the Meridian Cycle (pages 4 and 5 of the
Module 6 handout)

An overview is:

- Do the DER or the 4 Thumps. This insures that your meridians are flowing in the
right direction and gives you a jump start
- Start by rubbing your hands together hard and then shaking them off, so that your
hands have come to neutral
- Lightly trace, with your full open hand, on the meridian pathway from the beginning
point to the end point of the meridian. You can touch the surface of the body or trace
slightly above the skin
- Always start (and finish) by tracing Central Meridian - which is simply doing the Zip-
Up - and then Governing Meridian
- Then trace the meridian associated with the present time of day, based on the
Meridian Flow Wheel. So, for example, if it is 10 am:
 Trace Central then Governing Meridian
 Then go around the Meridian Flow Wheel in a clockwise direction tracing
each meridian, starting with Spleen (which is 9 am to 11 am)
 The next meridian on the wheel after Spleen Meridian is Heart Meridian, then
Small Intestine etc
- After you have traced each meridian once, re-trace your starting meridian (which is
Spleen Meridian in the example above)
- End by re-tracing Central then Governing Meridian, “zipping up” your energy

Full details are as follows:

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 100


Tracing Meridians (to activate, strengthen & balance the energy flow - but
do DER or 4 Thumps first!)
Always start with tracing Central Meridian then Governing Meridian, then trace the Meridian that
matches the time of the day that it is right now & then in the order below. Start off by rubbing your
hands hard together and then shaking them off.
Spleen Meridian: 9 am to 11 am (use both hands)
Start tracing from the outside edges of your big toes, then along the inside edges of both feet, up the
insides of the legs. When you get to the knees, trace diagonally out to the hips, then up the sides of
the body to the arm pits and then back down the sides, ending at the bottom of the rib cage.
Heart Meridian: 11 am to 1 pm (trace down each arm separately)
Place your open hand underneath the opposite armpit in alignment with your little finger and then
trace down your arm, ending by tweaking off your little finger.
Small Intestine Meridian: 1 pm to 3 pm (trace up each arm separately)
Back of your hand facing up, start at the end of the baby finger, then trace straight up the side of the
hand to the elbow, then to the shoulder, briefly go back on the scapula, then trace up the side of the
neck and over to the edge of the cheekbone nearest your nose and end at the opening of the ear.
Bladder Meridian: 3 pm to 5 pm (use both hands)
Start between your eyebrows, go over the crown of your head, down the back of your head and
down the neck. Reach up behind you and put your hands as high as you can on your back, then
trace your hands down either side of your spine to below your waist, jog in and up toward your waist
again, then trace down the middle of your bottom and then up around the sides of the bottom,
ending at the front sides of your hips. Leave the Meridian and put your hands on your shoulders.
Reach up as high as you can on your back and then trace down your body, down the back of your
thighs and the back of your knees, down along the calf, then along the side of your lower leg and the
outside edge of your foot and end by tracing off your baby toes.
Kidney Meridian: 5 pm to 7 pm (use both hands)
Start underneath the ball of each foot, trace along the insides of both feet, circle behind the insides
of your ankle bones, then up the insides of your legs, then straight up to K27 and end by massaging
or tapping K27.
Circulation Sex Meridian: 7 pm to 9 pm (trace each arm separately)
Start at the outer edge of your breast, then inwards as far as your nipple, then up to your shoulder,
then down the inside of your arm and end by tweaking off the end of your middle finger. (“From nip
to tip!”)
Triple Warmer Meridian: 9 pm to 11 pm (trace each arm separately)
Back of your hand facing up, start at the end of your ring finger, then trace straight up your arm and
along the top of your shoulder, then upwards to beneath your ear, then trace around behind your
ear and end at the outer edge of your eyebrow.
Gall Bladder Meridian: 11 pm to 1 am (use both hands)
Place the fingers of both hands on the outside edges of your eyebrows, drop down to the openings
of your ears, then trace straight up about 2”, circle forward with your fingers along your temples and
then drop back behind the ears. Go up from behind your ears to your forehead, then trace back
over the crown of your head again, down the neck and end at the shoulders. Take your hands up to
the sides of your rib cage and then trace forward on your rib cage, back on to the back of your waist,
forward on your hips, then straight down the sides of your legs and end by tracing off your 4th toe.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 101


Liver Meridian: 1 am to 3 am (use both hands)
Fingers on the insides of your big toes, then trace straight up the insides of your legs and thighs,
flaring out at the hips, then up to the sides of the rib cage and end by tracing inwards to above your
ribs until your hands are in line with your nipples.
Lung Meridian: 3 am to 5 am (trace each arm separately)
Start with your flat palm over the opposite lung and then move it up over your shoulder, then
straight down the inside of your arm, ending by tweaking off your thumb.
Large Intestine Meridian: 5 am to 7 am (trace each arm separately)
Back of your hand facing up, start at the end of your index finger and then trace straight up your
arm, onto your shoulder, up the side of your neck and then trace across to beneath your nose and
end at the flare of the nose.
Stomach Meridian: 7 am to 9 am (use both hands)
Start with both hands flat on your face, tips of your fingers underneath your eyes, drop your hands
to your jaw bone, then circle up the outside edges of your face to the middle of your forehead, then
move both hands down over your eyes and the whole of your face and then neck, to your collar
bone, then trace straight down over the nipples, inwards towards the edges of your belly button
then flaring out to your hips, then straight down the front of your legs and end by tracing off your 2nd
toe.
NOW REPEAT THE MERIDIAN YOU STARTED WITH (ie the Meridian for the time it is now)
FINISH BY TRACING CENTRAL AND THEN GOVERNING MERIDIANS AGAIN

How to balance a meridian

To balance a meridian, trace it, or work with the Neurolymphatics and Neurovasculars.

What time of day to work on a specific meridian

In response to a question on the Live Question and Answer Call with Lisa and Marjorie re
Modules 3 and 4 regarding if it matters what time of day we work on a specific meridian and
whether we should align it with the time of day the meridian is active or weak, the answer
was as follows:

Absolutely - it’s an awesome thing to do. You can do it in 2 ways:

Let’s say you are having chronic spleen issues. You might work on it between 9 am
and 11 am and really beef it up while it is in its strength, or you might work on it 12
hours later when it’s at its weak point, because then it might really need the help

Alternatively, let’s say you need to work on Liver, which is active between 1 am and
3 am. It wouldn’t be that helpful to set the alarm to wake up at 1 am to work on Liver!
But you can do liver work in Small Intestine time, which is between 1 pm and 3 pm,
and so, when Liver is at its lowest you are going to be giving it a boost

Also, notice what time of day you have ebbs. Most of us have ebbs at certain times
of the day. And you can either do your DER then or look to see what meridian is
active or low and get some insight into what is going on for you

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 102


The meridians and why we get jet lag

The 12 major meridians, conveniently for a 24-hour day, divide up nicely into 2 hours for
each meridian. So, as the Earth spins, a different meridian is getting charged. It’s getting the
maximum energy because of its relationship to the heavens and Earth. Our bodies are
designed so that, for instance, Spleen Meridian energy comes in strongest at the time you
see on the Meridian Flow chart ie from 9 am to 11 am.

One of the ways to understand how this is so important is in regard to jetlag. What happens
with jetlag is that you are brought from one environment, where you are totally adjusted to
that environment, to a different environment.

In your home environment, your body knows that the energy of the Heart Meridian is going
to be coming in 2 hours after the energy of Spleen Meridian. It’s poised and waiting for it.
Everything in your body is adjusted to that. Then, for each of the next meridians, every 2
hours, your body is expecting energy from the next meridian to be coming in and your body
is operating as if that’s going to happen, which is healthy and efficient.

But if you take yourself away from home and artificially move yourself very fast to a different
time zone eg London to the USA, your body is still making this change every 2 hours. But, in
the USA, you are in a different relationship to the Earth, to the sun, to the moon. What you
are finding in this different relationship is, say, it’s Spleen Meridian time and your body is
expecting Spleen Meridian to get fed, but Spleen Meridian isn’t getting energised, because it
is still operating on the cycle of your home time. So something is wrong and that throws you
off. That is jetlag. Jetlag is not just because of the sleep disturbance, it’s also because the
energy is not doing what it’s supposed to do, what it’s always done and what it is used to.

Everything works in cycles and you can see those cycles depicted in the Meridian Flow
Wheel chart. You will see that, for each of the meridians, when there is a high tide on one,
it’s the low tide in the other. High tide is its most highly fuelled state and low tide is when it is
at rest. So, for instance, when it’s 3 pm, it’s high tide for Bladder Meridian, but it’s low tide for
Lung Meridian.

To negate the effect of jet lag and get your meridians on the right time zone

To help your body adapt faster to a new time zone and relieve jet lag, a few days before the
time zone switch, start tracing all your meridians in the new time zone and continue to do
this for several days after the switch. For example, if you usually trace your meridians at
8 am, but you are going somewhere where the time zone is 4 hours ahead, then delay your
usual time to 4 hours later, to match the time zone you will be heading to.

When you arrive at your new destination and time zone, do the 4 Thumps (Stomach - ie
cheek bones - K27, thymus and Spleen) - you can do this very quickly.

Then, as soon as it is convenient, trace the meridians. Start by tracing Central and
Governing Meridians as usual, then the next meridian to trace is the meridian which is at the
new time where you are right now (look at the Meridian Flow Wheel), then follow around the
Meridian Flow Chart as normal and end by tracing the meridian you started with again,
followed by Central and Governing Meridians again. So you need to trace 17 meridians in
total:

1 Trace Central Meridian


2 Trace Governing Meridian

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 103


3 Trace the meridian which corresponds to the time it is now (ie in your new time zone)
- see the Meridian Flow Wheel to determine which meridian this is
4-14 Trace the other 11 meridians, one after another, in the order they appear on the
Meridian Flow Wheel
15 Trace the meridian which corresponds to the time it is now, for a second time
16 Trace Central Meridian for a second time
17 Trace Governing Meridian for a second time

If you have a long flight, you can trace your meridians during the flight, always being mindful
of the time zone you are in and remember you can always trace meridians in your mind as
well. Tapping the end points of the meridians on the fingers and toes can also help.
Staying hydrated is also extremely important.

In response to a question from the Live Question and Answer Coaching Call with Donna and
David after Module 8 regarding how does a time change (like Daylight Saving Time) affect
the Meridian Flow Wheel times and how do we adjust, Donna and David’s answers were as
follows:

Donna: Scientifically, they have proven that it takes the body at least 2 or 3 days to
adjust and adapt to a time change. In fact, when Daylight Savings Time comes, in
those 2 or 3 following days, there are more accidents and there are also more
suicides, because people are thrown off their rhythm. To help you adjust, do the
DER, make sure you get out of Homolateral, by crossing your energies over, and
trace your meridians for the new time of day every day for a week before the change
actually happens
David: Some people are more sensitive, some people are less sensitive, to these
kinds of changes in the environment. Daylight Savings Time is artificial, so your
meridians don’t get the memo of the clocks jumping an hour! But your body is
attuned to all the energies in the environment so, when that change happens, it does
adjust to the energies - but it takes a few days for that to happen, just as it takes a
few days for people to get out of jet lag if they don’t know how to use Energy
Medicine to get out of instantly
Donna: Since you now know Energy Medicine, you don’t have to wait 2 or 3 days to
have your body get adjusted to the time change!
David: Basically, what you do is you trace your meridians and you trace them from
the time of where you landed. So if it’s between 9 am and 11 am, which is when
Spleen Meridian is at its strongest, you always start with Central and Governing
Meridians, then you would start with the Spleen Meridian and go around the Meridian
Flow Wheel until you get to Spleen, do Spleen again, then do Central and Governing
again. That will shift the body’s energies very quickly so that you are now adjusted to
the time that you are now in
Donna: If the time change is just because of Daylight Saving Time, just trace your
meridians that day at the beginning of the hour, as soon as it has moved forward or
back, start at the beginning of the hour and trace from there

Meridian beginning and end points

The beginning and end points of each meridian segment are particularly powerful points.
They can be tapped, held, or pressed to shift the energies associated with that meridian.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 104


The meridian tracing diagrams (page 19 of the Module 5 handout) show the beginning and
end points of each meridian.

Meridian strengthening and sedating points

NB For exactly how to use meridian strengthening and sedating points, see pages 157 - 159.

Strengthening and sedating points are used to balance and stabilise energy running through
meridians. Located along each meridian are specific points that can be held to calm or
strengthen the flow of that meridian’s energies (ie acupressure strengthening and sedating
points). Holding these points in a definite order can stimulate redistribution of the body’s
meridian energies to bring balance. (I have printed out all the strengthening and sedating
points for each meridian.)

Each meridian contains between 9 and 67 acupuncture points. You can affect the flow of
any of these meridians, without using acupuncture needles, by placing your fingers on
specified points and holding them there for 2 or 3 minutes.

The points held may include:

- Points that are on the meridian that feeds the meridian whose flow you are trying to
strengthen
- Points on a meridian that is downstream (each meridian pours into another) from a
meridian whose flow you are trying to free

The points you hold to strengthen the flow of energy into a meridian are called strengthening
points. The points you hold to free energies that are overcharged or blocked are called
sedating points.

NB It is often useful to flush a meridian before you strengthen it because this clears it of
energetic debris, leaving more space for fresh energy to enter.

In response to a question from the Question and Answer session with Donna and David after
Module 5 regarding how much pressure you should use when you are holding points, the
answer was as follows:

It’s like a firm lightness. It’s not deep pressure, but there is some pressing, but it’s
not so that it would hurt you. It’s a light pressure

Both strengthening points and sedating points actually have the effect of strengthening the
meridian. The strengthening points strengthen meridians by adding energy. The sedating
points strengthen meridians by releasing excess energy in that meridian. Sedating doesn’t
mean it’s bad for the meridian and it doesn’t mean it’s weakening the meridian. It means it’s
helping the energy to flow better by taking away energy that is clogged. Sedating a meridian
has the effect of releasing excess energy while calming it. You are freeing blocked energies
so a strong flow can be restored in the meridian.

Sedating points are used for pain control (remembering that pain is usually excess energy)
and other situations where energies have become backed up.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 105


By holding the strengthening or sedating points for a particular meridian, your hands become
jumper cables that draw energy from one meridian to another. Holding the points these
ways can bring bursts of energy into the related area and is the basis of the field of
acupressure.

Holding a pair of points has the effect of releasing energy in that meridian. So if, for instance
you are holding the Kidney Meridian Sedating Points, the energy is flowing from the Kidney
Meridian, which you want to release, and it moves to the next point you are holding - so, in
this example, you are hooking up Kidney and Liver. For more detailed information on
sedating points for pain control, see Module 5 Working with Pain starting on page 140.

There are 2 sets of sedating points. You open the valve when you hold the first set of points
and you close the valve when you hold the second set of points. The second points not only
close the valve, but also balance it all out. It’s like it listens to the body’s brilliance and it
knows how much to let go. The second set of points is called the control points.

I have printed off the 12 Meridian Strengthening and Sedating Points charts (from
points.edenenergymedicine.com) and filed them in the Module 5 Working with Pain section
of the file. Pages 15 and 16 of the Module 6 Handout also show the Kidney, Triple Warmer
and Stomach Meridian sedating points.

In response to a question on the live Q&A Coaching Call after Module 5 - with Donna and
David, regarding if tracing or flushing a particular meridian seems too complex to do to
yourself, would sedating that meridian have similar benefits, Donna’s answer was as follows:

It does have a similar benefit although flushing a meridian is gentler and not as
powerful as sedating a meridian. Sedating a meridian is very powerful

Sedating Heart Meridian

Heart Meridian is the only meridian you do not sedate, flush, or trace backwards, because it
can slow your heart down. (The sedating points shown for Heart Meridian are not any that
sedate the heart, they are actually something that sedates Small Intestine and that helps the
heart slow down.) In response to a question from the Module 7 Q&A Coaching Call with
Donna and David regarding if there is something else we can do instead of sedating Heart
Meridian, Donna’s answer was as follows:

Yes, absolutely - strengthen Small Intestine and you will not have the result of
slowing the heart beat down. In all of the strengthening and sedating points given to
you, we don’t give you the sedating points of Heart Meridian

Strengthening Triple Warmer Meridian

You would probably never want to strengthen Triple Warmer, unless you were dying or had
been stung by a bee and are allergic to bee stings!

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 106


Another way of accessing, strengthening and balancing meridians - the
Neurolymphatics

On page 16 of the Module 1 handout there is a chart showing all the Neurolymphatics and,
when you massage the Neurolymphatics, that will balance your energy. This is another way,
other than tracing the meridians, of accessing and balancing the meridians. (See
‘Neurolymphatic Reflex Points and Neurolymphatic Clearing’ on page 68.)

Flushing meridians

Flushing meridians is a great way to keep them flowing well. Flushing is like emptying the
tea kettle when you get home from a weekend away and refilling it with fresh water before
you make a cup of tea.

How to Flush a Meridian

Remember that you NEVER trace Heart Meridian backwards, or flush it, or sedate it.)

NB If you are going to flush Spleen Meridian, always do it after you have calmed Triple Warmer eg by
doing the Triple Warmer Smoothie. If Spleen doesn’t have enough juice on it, it won’t do you much
good to flush it, because Triple Warmer is in control. So if you do the Spleen Flush before the Triple
Warmer Smoothie, it won’t have enough energy on the meridian itself to make any difference when
doing the Spleen Flush - because Triple Warmer is holding on to so much of the energy.

Select one of the meridians that tested weak (see ‘Energy-testing meridians’ on page 255) or
whose primary organ or system is problematic for you.

If you don’t know of a problem, use the Lung Meridian. NB If you are flushing one of the
meridians on the arms (Lung, Small and Large intestine and Circulation Sex), trace
backwards once and forwards 3 times on one arm, then the other arm. The following
procedures, like taking a bath, will never hurt your body and, with the numerous pollutants
your lungs must filter daily, flushing the Lung Meridian even when it is balanced helps it
perform more effectively. To flush a meridian, do the following (about 30 seconds):

1 Begin by finding the diagram that shows how to trace the meridian you have selected
(see page 19 of the Module 5 handout or page 116 of the Energy Medicine book)

2 Use the full sweep of either or both hands to trace the meridian in the opposite
direction of the natural flow that is shown in the diagram. (So if, for instance, you
were flushing the Spleen Meridian, you would be moving your hands down the body,
instead of up the body.)

3 As you pass your hands over the meridian, inhale. You may want to imagine that
your hand is a magnet, pulling stagnant energies out of the meridian

4 Exhale and shake these energies off your hands

5 After flushing the meridian, trace it in its normal direction 3 times, slowly and
deliberately

So the procedure for flushing a meridian is to trace the meridian backwards once and then
forwards 3 times.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 107


When Flushing a Meridian, you go against the flow of the meridian once and then with the
flow 3 times. That’s why it’s called Flushing out - it’s like changing the oil in your car. So
you go against the flow once and that takes the energy out of the meridian and then with the
flow 3 times, which invites and directs energy back into it.

Flushing a meridian backwashes its energy, so the meridian pathway will be clear when you
then move your hand in harmony with its flow. Flushing may produce either a sedating or an
energising effect, depending on whether the meridian was over-charged or under-charged.

It is often useful to flush a meridian before you strengthen it because this clears it of
energetic debris, leaving more space for fresh energy to enter.

Donna flushed her Spleen Meridian up to 3 times every day when she was trying to get well
from multiple sclerosis. At the time, she didn’t know she was going to actually get well from
it, she just wanted to get her body stronger and she knew that doing that exercise was doing
her good. But before she was well in MS, all her allergies went away and it also took away
her asthma and she just got stronger and stronger.

In response to a question from the live Q&A session with Donna and David after Module 5
regarding if it is safe to flush every meridian daily, the answers were as follows:

Donna: It is safe, but you must never flush Heart meridian because it can really slow
the heart down. But every other meridian, you can flush and it is a way of cleansing
the meridian and is very good. When I was sickest, I flushed my Spleen meridian
every day, maybe 3 times a day and it really began to open up those channels

David: You want to also pay attention to what meridians in your body really need
attention. There is not a reason to flush every meridian every day. But if you do feel
bunged up and you don’t know which meridian is causing the problem, it’s fine. It just
takes a lot of time

Triple Warmer

Triple Warmer is charged with keeping us alive in much the way our local police force and
fire brigade are charged with keeping us safe. Each of us landed in a world that tends to
send Triple Warmer into overdrive - and many of our health problems result from, or are at
least exacerbated by, this single evolutionary twist. The good news is that you can literally
retrain Triple Warmer to respond more appropriately to the stresses of modern life and
literally help it to evolve.

We are going to learn some ways to calm Triple Warmer down. Donna believes one of the
most important reasons to learn Energy Medicine is to evolve your body and evolve the way
stress acts in your body. Triple Warmer governs that stress and it has not changed in a
couple of million years. We still act as if it’s a major, major, danger, when it could be
something slight. People have road rage, or punch somebody in their family, and it’s often
just because Triple Warmer is starting to explode. An awful lot of people try to hold their
rage and anger down and then it explodes at inopportune times.

When Donna and David lived in the small town of Ashland, Oregon, just about everyone in
the town had taken Donna’s class at one time or another. She had a couple of judges who

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 108


took these classes and both of them called Donna up at one time or another and said,
“Donna, I have this man in front of me who just went berserk and beat up his family and a
couple of co-workers. I know I can just send him to jail, but everybody says he is such a
nice guy and I was thinking, do you think that’s a Triple Warmer thing?”! And Donna replied,
“Yes, that is a Triple Warmer thing!” So the man’s sentence was to go to Donna and learn
how to calm down his Triple Warmer!

What we want to do is to evolve that energy that has been keeping us, as a species, alive for
so long and we want to honour what an amazing energy this is - even though it is now out of
sync with the different world that we live in now. Although bad things still can happen - we
can be attacked, for instance - Triple Warmer still turns on in the same ways, regardless of if
it’s a big stress or a tiny little stress.

In this Module Donna shows what happens to our body. The more you calm and sedate
Triple Warmer, the more the other energies, all the other meridians, start collecting their
energy back. It’s as if Triple Warmer releases to them.

NB One of the signature features of Donna’s work is how we are all unique beings. That’s
why, for any given thing that she gives you to help you balance your energies, you are
usually going to get a couple of different ways to do it. So the best way to work is to
experiment and see what works best for you as, for someone else, it could be the exact
opposite. That’s why Donna gives several different ways to balance Triple Warmer.

In response to a question from the Module 3 Questions and Answers regarding if there are
any situations when strengthening Triple Warmer is more beneficial than calming it down
and making it feel safe, the answer was as follows:

Yes, in these situations:

 if you are going into anaphylactic shock or something like that, you want to
strengthen Triple Warmer
 If you are having an asthma attack, or a bumble bee sting, strengthen Triple
Warmer. What people give someone who has an asthma attack is
adrenaline. Well, Triple Warmer governs the adrenals. You can strengthen
them and it is so good
 If somebody is extremely sick, sometimes Triple Warmer thinks that things
are so bad that you are going to die, so strengthen Triple Warmer in that
circumstance, if a person has got that bad

However, more than 99% of the time, Triple Warmer is overactive and it’s
really robbing you of vital resources, so almost always it’s better to sedate it -
and it loves for you to sedate it because it calms down, it doesn’t have to feel
like it’s holding up the entire world!

In response to a question from the Module 3 Questions and Answers regarding what
happens to Triple Warmer when you have an organ removed or you are going into surgery,
the answer was as follows:

First of all, your body doesn’t know that you are not being attacked in these
circumstances. Even if surgery is going to save your life, your body doesn’t know
that and Triple Warmer freaks out. You hear so often that the doctor had said the
operation was a tremendous success, but the patient died. The patient died because
Triple Warmer had gone nuts and pulled energy away from every other meridian and

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 109


so the meridians didn’t have the energy to save the patient’s life. So, before you go
into hospital for any kind of operation, you should balance all your energies, but
make sure Triple Warmer is really, really calm and you should also make sure you
are not homolateral. Of course you are going to come out of hospital homolateral,
but you want to make sure your energies are really strong before you go into hospital

In response to a question from the Module 3 Questions and Answers regarding what is the
relationship between Triple Warmer Meridian and homolateral energy flow, the answer was
as follows:

There is a huge relationship. If you are homolateral, Triple Warmer is involved. If


Triple Warmer is overactive in your body, often you have gone into homolateral. If
you get out of homolateral, Triple Warmer gets a little boost - it can relax a little bit

Triple Warmer and Spleen Meridians being out of balance

In modern industrialised societies, the imbalance of Triple Warmer and Spleen Meridians
has become an epidemic problem. The Triple Warmer can conscript energies from other
systems and, due to the omnipresent perceived threats lurking in an environment that is
different from the one in which it evolved, it is continually on alert and taking energies from
other systems.

Because of their paired relationship in insuring the body’s survival, the first system Triple
Warmer taps for additional energy is the Spleen Meridian. As a result, Triple Warmer is
perpetually over-energised and Spleen is perpetually under-energised. Over time, this
energetic imbalance can negatively impact our mind, body and spirits.

Conditions associated with Triple Warmer Meridian being out of balance

Some conditions associated with Triple Warmer Meridian being out of balance are:

- Inability to adapt to hot and cold temperatures


- Problems related to temperature imbalances, including colds, fevers, sweats, night
sweats and hot flushes
- Cold hands or feet
- Autoimmune diseases (including MS), weight problems, asthma, diabetes,
hypoglycaemia, morning fatigue
- Adrenal exhaustion
- Edema, irritable bowel, colitis, stomach ulcers, indigestion, rapid heartbeat,
hyper/hypo-thyroidism
- Feelings of overwhelm, anxiety, panic, hysteria and mood swings
- Addictions
- Sleep difficulties
- Chronic muscle tension
- Post-traumatic stress disorders

Restoring Triple Warmer/Spleen Balance

When Triple Warmer is in harmony with Spleen Meridian, our immune system, metabolism
and mood stay in balance. In this state:

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 110


- Triple Warmer promotes feelings of safety and supports your ability to handle the
demands of life
- Triple Warmer can save your life, or the life of another, in an emergency
- Triple Warmer can inspire warm and balanced social connections

Changing your response to stress involves restoring the balance between Triple Warmer
and Spleen Meridian. Befriending Triple Warmer (ie keeping it calm) can help it evolve to
meet the conditions of contemporary life and our own lifestyle.

Triple Warmer is influenced by our beliefs and thinking, by our habitual emotional responses
and by the flows of energy that you can change through Energy Medicine techniques.

NB Triple Warmer and Spleen Meridians are intimately intertwined with the Throat Chakra,
because thyroid is governed by Triple Warmer and the lymph is governed by Spleen. When
the Throat Chakra is cleaned, cleared and strengthened, Triple Warmer and Spleen are
better and happier too.

Changing a chronically overactive stress response

Changing a chronically overactive stress response may require some time. It’s usually a
good idea to make sure that your energies are crossing over easily when you are working on
habit change. The Homolateral Re-Patterning exercise learned in Module 2 can help with
this. So can the relaxing and the playful experience of Energy Medicine Dance!

How to energy-test Spleen Meridian and Triple Warmer Meridian (at the 20
minute point on the video)
To test Spleen Meridian

NB See page 116 re self-testing Spleen Meridian. When doing the Spleen Meridian Energy
Test - see page 9 of the module 4 handout - there are several things to remember:

- Cross your energies or do the Blow Out or the DER to ensure that your own energies
are crossing well
- Set the intention that the energy test will be accurate and beneficial. You might also
invite the person you are testing to set an intention to allow the body’s energies to
dialogue with you, the tester
- Tell the person not to look at you, because you might be giving them energy just by
smiling at them!
- Stand to the side of the person you are testing
- Make sure the person’s arm hasn’t been injured in any way
- Ask the person to hold the arm you want to test straight down the side of their body,
with their elbow straight and their fingers open, with palm facing back and thumb
facing down alongside the thigh. (A beginner’s mistake is to jump the gun - ie to pull
the arm out before the volunteer is ready.)
- Make sure that the person’s elbow stays straight and their fingers are open,
otherwise it won’t be an accurate test
- Ask the person to ‘hold’ or ‘meet my pressure’ before you begin to apply the pressure
- Place one hand on the shoulder of the arm being tested, so that you are creating a
circuit. If you don’t do that, the person you are energy-testing may be picking up your
energy and not their own - putting your hand on their shoulder closes that circuit

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 111


- Place the palm of your other hand between the person’s arm and body, just above
the wrist. Gently pull straight outward and away from the body for about 2 seconds,
as the person being tested resists the pull. You need to have your hand open and
flat when you pull the person’s arm, otherwise it will block the energy, so you should
not circle the person’s wrist with your hand when you are pulling the arm away from
the body.
- Even though you can pull for a long time, what you really want to do is just pull for
one or 2 seconds, as that is how fast you will know, so it’s not a long pull. You know
if a wall is strong, you don’t have to keep pushing it to know that! Within that one to 2
seconds, you start off slow and increase the pressure, so that you are not jumping
the gun
- By exerting pressure gradually, you can better sense the quality of the energy flow
and begin to distinguish a strong response from a weak response. Some people will
show very little variation between weak and strong. Others will show a marked
difference. You shouldn’t be able to pull the person’s arm away from the body if the
Spleen Meridian is strong
- Remember that it’s not a test of strength - you are simply finding out how the
person’s arm is, whether it stays strong or whether it moves. Sometimes people,
guys particularly, do this as a test of strength and put all their other muscles into it!
So stay calm, centred and see if the arm pulls out

There will be 3 possibilities when you do the Spleen Meridian energy test - the arm will stay
strong like steel, or it will be very weak and just move out easily, or it will pull out a little bit
and then bounce back. The latter also counts as strong.

What to do if you test weak on Spleen Meridian

If someone is weak when energy-testing the Spleen and they have already done the Triple
Warmer Smoothie and Flushing the Spleen, they should do the Triple Warmer/Spleen Hug,
or the Cross my Heart exercises for a couple of minutes - and if they test strong after doing
that, it means they had a broken communication between Spleen and Triple Warmer. (The
Triple Warmer/Spleen Hug balances Triple Warmer and Spleen.)

Or, they could tap on the Spleen Neurolymphatic Reflex Points (ie with the 3-finger notch
fingers, tap just under the bra line, on the sides/in line with the nipples) for a couple of
minutes - and if they test strong after doing that, it means they had a problem with the
lymphatics.

To test Triple Warmer Meridian

Spleen Meridian’s opposite force is Triple Warmer.

Ask the person to hold their elbow tight into their side, while holding their hand out to their
side (ie away from their body). Then put the fingers of one hand flat onto the inside of the
person’s elbow and circle your other hand around the person’s wrist. Ask the person to try
to push their arm backwards away from their body, while you try to push it forward, toward
the person’s body. The person will always stay extremely strong! Donna explains on the
video that there is no way that you would be able to knock Triple Warmer down, because it
is so powerful and it still carries that mandate to make you safe and fight against anything
that comes its way.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 112


How to energy-test Heart Meridian

To energy-test the Heart Meridian, ask the person to hold their arm straight out to the side at
shoulder height, fingers extended, and then to bend their arm at the elbow, so that their
fingers are facing the floor. Now stand behind the person and put the fingers of one hand on
the person’s upper arm, just above their inner elbow and, with the other hand, circle the
person’s wrist. Then try to push the person’s arm forwards and upwards, asking the person
to resist.

If you energy-test the Heart Meridian, then calm down Triple Warmer (for instance by tracing
the Triple Warmer Meridian backwards), then test Heart Meridian again, the Heart Meridian
should test stronger than it did before you calmed Triple Warmer. This is because the more
you calm and sedate Triple Warmer, the more the other energies, all the other meridians,
start collecting their energy back. Triple Warmer releases to them.

Techniques to calm Triple Warmer

NB Calming Triple Warmer can work best when you don’t always use the same method to
calm it. Mix the calming techniques up eg don’t always hold the sedating points. In
response to a question in the Q&A session after Module 3 regarding how often should you
calm Triple Warmer in a day when your body is always on very high alert, the answer was as
follows:

Start slow and ease into it. Start with experimenting with the Triple Warmer
exercises. Don’t do them all at once and mix the different calming techniques up.
There is not a specific number or timing - it’s whatever feels right for you - and give
yourself time after each exercise to see how the exercise makes you feel

Triple Warmer Smoothie (page 10 of the Module 3 handout)

This technique will help the Triple Warmer turn into a Radiant Circuit. When you do this
Triple Warmer Smoothie exercise, you are tracing backwards on part of the Triple Warmer
Meridian (ie up and around the ears) and it releases and sedates Triple Warmer, so that
Spleen Meridian gets some energy. So you may want to energy-test the person’s Spleen
Meridian both before and after doing this exercise, as it should test stronger after doing this
exercise.

(There is no point in energy-testing Triple Warmer Meridian, because it will always stay
strong - we are all OD’d on that energy!)

First, rub your hands together and then shake them off. Lay your fingers gently sideways
across your eyelids (ie fingers pointing towards your nose and covering your eyes) and take
a very deep breath in. On your next breath, lightly draw your fingers out to rest on your
temples, holding there for another deep breath. You are now on some very important points
- the Neurovasculars for Triple Warmer.

Now take another deep breath in and lift your fingers 2 to 3 inches, smoothing the skin from
the temples to above your ears. Then, as you let your breath out, trace your fingers around
your ears, press down the sides of your neck and hang your hands on the back of your
shoulders, pressing your fingers into your shoulders. Stay in this position for at least 2 deep
breaths.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 113


Now drag your fingers slowly over your shoulders with pressure and draw your hands down
to the middle of your chest on your Heart Chakra and take one more deep breath.

If you tested the person’s Spleen Meridian before doing this exercise, you may want to test
again now and the person should be very much stronger. (There is no point in testing Triple
Warmer Meridian again, because it will always stay strong - we are all OD’d on that energy!)

Partial Triple Warmer Smoothie

A simple tool you can use to sedate and calm Triple Warmer is to put your fingers at your
temples and keep running your hands around the back of your ears to your shoulders.

Triple Warmer Neurovasculars

The main Neurovasculars are in the centre of the forehead - they are the Triple Warmer and
Stomach Neurovasculars.

Also, on the back of the head, in line with your eyebrows, you have Triple Warmer
Neurovasculars, so a great hold is just to sit, stand, or lie down with one hand on your
forehead and the other on the back of your head, in line with your eyebrows. (It doesn’t
matter which hand is where - do whatever is most comfortable for you.)

Another Triple Warmer Neurovascular is in the indent at the base of your throat. So lightly
hold that point, with a 3-finger cluster of your thumb, index and middle fingers, with one
hand, and put the opposite hand on either your temple/side of your face, which is another
Triple Warmer Neurovascular point (for overwhelm) - or on your forehead. Just sit like this
for a while. This is a good thing to do in bed if you are having a hard time sleeping.

Technique to relieve stress and balance Triple Warmer - YouTube Energy Minute

This technique is Donna’s YouTube Energy Minute ‘Relieve stress and balance Triple
Warmer with Donna Eden’. Put your thumbs at the middle of your forehead, just above the
inside edge of your eyebrows, palms facing outward and fingers resting against the top of
your head, then drag your thumbs back to each temple. With your thumb still pressing on
each temple, touch your fingers on the back of your head and take a couple of deep breaths,
in through the nose and out through the mouth.

This will help to lift stress out of you and also it brings circulation to your eyes. This is a
good exercise to do when you have been in front of a computer for too long.

Tapping to calm Triple Warmer

Using several fingers, tap the back of your hand between your little finger and your ring
finger, while you are thinking of your stress. You can also do this tapping while you are
resting your hand on your heart. You are tapping on Triple Warmer Meridian, which governs
fight/flight/freeze, and you are interrupting that flow. This might take up to a minute. If it isn’t
any better after a minute, swap hands and tap the other side. The Heart Chakra is the
energy that bathes the heart and the heart is all about deep emotions so you are getting a
double-whammy by working on Triple Warmer and Heart Meridians at the same time.

Triple Warmer Hug

Wrap your left hand around your right arm, just above your elbow. Wrap your right arm
around the left side of your body, underneath your breast over to your rib cage. Just sit for a

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 114


while like this. Do the same on the opposite side. The hand on your elbow is on the Triple
Warmer Meridian and the other hand is on the Spleen Meridian and you are balancing out
those 2 meridians while you are calming Triple Warmer. You cannot overdo the Triple
Warmer/Spleen Hug - do it as often as you like and hold the pose for as long as you like!

Reactive Pose

With both hands, make the OK sign ie hold your index fingers on your thumbs. Then place
your index fingers/thumbs on both temples and put the remaining 3 fingers on your forehead.
Just sit for a while like this. This is a great thing to do to combat Triple Warmer and it’s
another one you can do in bed, if you put pillows behind your arms, lay back and relax.

Figure 8 around the eyes/over the forehead

This technique is very good at calming Triple Warmer and is detailed in Homolateral
Crossover Re-patterning: Alternative Technique.

Tracing Triple Warmer Meridian backwards (page 11 of the Module 3 handout)

The flow of energy through Triple Warmer Meridian starts at the tip of your fourth finger and
ends at your temples. Tracing this flow forwards brings additional energy to the meridian.
Tracing the meridian backwards, against its flow, releases excess energy and calms Triple
Warmer. To trace Triple Warmer backwards:

- Place the fingers of your right hand at your left temple and hold for 2 breaths
- Breathe in deeply and lift your fingers 2 or 3 inches, smoothing the skin from the
temple to above the left ear
- Follow your ear around and behind. Let your fingers drop to the shoulder and trace
straight down the back of the arm and then really tweak hard off the tip of the fourth
finger
- Now repeat on the other side, starting with the fingers of your left hand at your right
temple

Sedating Triple Warmer Meridian (page 12 of the Module 3 handout)

Sedating Triple Warmer drains excess energy out of Triple Warmer meridian. This particular
meridian gets blocked with too much energy. It has too much energy moving through it.
This is epidemic in our culture. You can’t hurt yourself sedating Triple Warmer because
Triple Warmer always needs to be sedated. It’s always good to sedate Triple Warmer,
unless you have gone into shock.

If you have anyone in your family who has mood swings, or they get frazzled or crazed, or
crying or falling apart, just sit down and hold these points on them and you will find that they
lift up out of it and become calm and collected.

Sometimes, when you start fooling around with Triple Warmer it can make you hot, or it can
make you cold, because it governs body temperature, it governs hot flushes.

Feel the back of your calves, push your thumbs hard into your calves, and notice if you have
any tenderness there. If you have pain in the back of your calves, it is always either Triple
Warmer or Bladder (see the Muscle Meridian Chart). If you have any pain there, just
instantly sedate Triple Warmer. (If you don’t have any pain there, it is probably because you
already sedate Triple Warmer a lot!) After sedating Triple Warmer, feel your calves again
and the pain should have lessened or gone away.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 115


The sedating Triple Warmer procedure can be done on yourself or by a partner, as follows:

- The main thing to remember about sedating points is to hold the points on the
same side of the body. So, for instance, when you are sedating Triple Warmer, if
you are holding your right elbow, you are also holding your right knee. And if you are
holding your right hand, you are holding your right foot

- Place your fingers lightly, but firmly, on the ‘first’ sedating points shown in the
handout diagram. One point is just above the elbow, in line with the fourth finger
(TW-10 on the diagram). The other point is located a hand’s width beneath the knee,
just outside the shinbone. Put your hand on your knee and the sedating point is
where your middle finger reaches to (ST-36 on the Triple Warmer Meridian
Sedating). Put several fingers around it and you won’t make a mistake. Hold for 2
to 3 minutes. ST-36 is a Stomach Meridian point and TW-10 is a Triple Warmer
Meridian point

Make sure you are comfortable and remember to breathe. You are hooking up
Stomach and Triple Warmer - Triple Warmer energy is flowing into the Stomach.

- Reverse the position, holding the ‘first’ points on the other side of the body. Again,
hold for 2 to 3 minutes

- For the ‘second’ sedating points, drop the hand that was on your leg onto the outside
of your baby toe (BL-66 on the chart) and put your middle finger in the indentation at
the outside of the little toe - put your foot on your knee to do this! At the same time,
place the fingers of your other hand about an inch below the 4th and 5th finger joint
(TW-2 on the chart) on the back side of your hand

You are holding acupressure points - Bladder on your toe and Triple Warmer on your
hand - and you are hooking up. The effect of doing this is to calm Triple Warmer -
that is what these points are designed for. They are helping take excess energy out
of Triple Warmer. Hold for 1½ minutes to 2 minutes

- Reverse the position, holding the ‘second’ points on the other side of the body.
Again, hold for 1½ minutes to 2 minutes

Triple Warmer also governs body temperatures, so Donna suggests sedating Triple Warmer
Meridian if you get really hot and, within about 3 minutes, you should be feeling normal
again.

If there was one emotion you could have to make Triple Warmer evolve, it’s ‘make it feel
safe’. If it feels safe, then all the stress goes away. Any time you do any of these exercises,
or hold these sedating points, Triple Warmer feels safe.

NB For full details on sedating meridians, including Triple Warmer, see the separate ‘Pain -
sedating the pain’ section on page 155 and ‘Meridians: strengthening and sedating points on
page 105.

Scapula Squeeze Exercise

See page 214.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 116


Techniques to Strengthen Spleen
The Triple Warmer Smoothie

Because of the partnership between Triple Warmer and Spleen, calming Triple Warmer
Meridian first, by doing the Triple Warmer Smoothie, is a way to strengthen Spleen Meridian.

For how to do this exercise, see ‘Techniques to calm Triple Warmer: Triple Warmer
Smoothie’ on page 113.

Flushing Spleen Meridian (page 13 of the Module 3 handout)

Flushing the Spleen Meridian will strengthen Spleen, but always do it after you have calmed
Triple Warmer eg by doing the Triple Warmer Smoothie. The first thing you always want to
think is, “sedate Triple Warmer, sedate Triple Warmer”. Because you could strengthen
Spleen, but it if doesn’t have enough juice on it, it won’t do you much good to flush it,
because Triple Warmer is in control.

If you do the Spleen Flush before the Triple Warmer Smoothie, it won’t have enough energy
on the meridian itself to make any difference when doing the Spleen Flush - because Triple
Warmer is holding on to so much of the energy.

The procedure for flushing a meridian is to trace the meridian backwards once and then
forwards 3 times. For full details of how to flush a meridian, see ‘Meridians: How to flush a
meridian’ on page 107.

You may want to energy-test Spleen Meridian before flushing it.

To flush Spleen Meridian, rub your hands together and then shake them off. Then trace the
Spleen Meridian backwards by putting your hands at your sides at the bottom of your rib
cage (just underneath your bra line), fingers facing down to your feet. Take a deep breath in
and draw your hands up to your armpits, fingers curling into your armpits. Let your breath
out and move the palms of your hands down in front of your hip bones, down the inside of
your legs and off the outside of the big toes.

Now, starting at your feet, trace Spleen Meridian forward ie from the outside of the big toes
up the inside of the legs, go out at the hips, up the side of the rib cage, into your armpits and
then down to the bottom of the rib cage. Go up again from the feet 2 more times, shaking
your hands off each time, as soon as you have completed the exercise (ie gone up into the
armpits and then down to the bottom of the rib cage).

If you do the Spleen energy-test on someone before and after doing the Spleen Flush, the
person should test much stronger after doing the Spleen Flush exercise.

When doing the Flushing the Spleen exercise, you are going against the flow of the meridian
once (ie moving your hands downwards), and then with the flow (ie moving your hands up
the body) 3 times. That’s why it’s called Flushing out - it’s like changing the oil in your car.
So you go against the flow and that takes the energy out of the meridian and then with the
flow, which invites and directs energy back into it.

Donna did that exercise every day when she was trying to get well from multiple sclerosis.
At the time, she didn’t know she was going to actually get well from it, she just wanted to get
her body stronger and she knew that doing that exercise was doing her good. But before

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 117


she was well in MS, she lost her allergies - all her allergies went away! It also took away her
asthma and she just got stronger and stronger.

Tapping Spleen Neurolymphatic Reflex Points (page 13 of the Module 3 handout)

Tap, or vigorously rub, the Spleen Neurolymphatic Reflex Points under the breasts, one rib
below the bra line. Slide your fingers directly around to your sides, staying on the same rib
and tap vigorously. This is the last acupuncture point on Spleen Meridian (Spleen 21).

Cross my Heart exercise (page 14 of the Module 3 handout)

While standing, sitting or lying down, cross your arms and place your hands into your
armpits. Place your thumbs straight up on your chest.

Inside your armpits, your fingers are wrapping around on the end of Spleen Meridian, which
can ease worry. The thumbs are on the Central Neurolymphatic Points which stimulate the
flow of lymph in all of the body’s organs. Your arms cross over the thymus gland (excellent
for the immune system) and also cross the Heart Chakra, reinforcing energy crossover
throughout the body.

If you are feeling tired and wiped out, doing this exercise helps.

How to balance Triple Warmer and Spleen - Triple Warmer/Spleen Hug


(page 15 of the Module 3 handout)

Wrap your left hand around your right arm, just above your elbow. Wrap your right arm
around the left side of your body, underneath your breast over to your rib cage. Just sit for a
while like this. Do the same on the opposite side. The hand on your elbow is on the Triple
Warmer Meridian and the other hand is on the Spleen Meridian and you are balancing out
those 2 meridians while you are calming Triple Warmer. You cannot overdo the Triple
Warmer/Spleen Hug - do it as often as you like and hold the pose for as long as you like!

NB See also ‘Radiant Circuits: Building the habit of radiant joy - Triple Warmer/Spleen
Regulator Balancing’ on page 230 for a way to balance Triple Warmer and Spleen Radiant
Circuits.

In response to a question from the Module 3 Question and Answers regarding the Triple
Warmer Hug and how often can you do it, if you can overdo it, and whether it should be
done before or after the DER, the answer was as follows:

Soothe Triple Warmer before the DER. You cannot overdo the Triple
Warmer/Spleen Hug

More Energy Medicine Tools to Counter Stress

In addition to the stress remedies detailed in this Module 3, the Blow Out technique (on page
79) and holding the Neurovascular Reflex Points (see page 75) are both very effective at
countering stress.

In response to a question from the Module 3 Questions and Answers regarding what can be
done for the stress of an emotional shock, as opposed to physical stress, the answer was as
follows:

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 118


It will depend. If it’s a HUGE emotional shock, that’s Triple Warmer again. But there
are emotional shocks that hit both Spleen and Stomach very strongly. Stomach is a
worrier and carries stress of a different kind

Stomach and Spleen both sit opposite the 2 meridians on Fire. We are not talking so
much about elements at this point in the course, but Spleen and Stomach sit together
and Circulation Sex and Triple Warmer sit together. So these 4 are very involved in
any kind of stress

If your heart has been broken in a relationship, then you should sedate Stomach
Meridian and it will calm your whole area. Stomach Meridian goes right through the
heart area and, if you get heartache, it really lifts it up and out

Stomach is involved in a lot of different kinds of stresses. If you are an Earth element,
ie the kind of person that worries all the time, then it might be best to sedate Stomach
but, otherwise, always sedate Triple Warmer

Overview of Triple Warmer and Spleen Meridian and their relationship; the
evolution of Triple Warmer; and the immune and stress response

It’s so important to not let your meridians get sucked away by Triple Warmer, because then
you don’t have all the energies you need to handle other things in your body. Donna
explains on the video that Spleen and Triple Warmer are so important because Spleen also
governs how happy you are ie the sense that life is pleasant and easy and good - because
it’s the opposite of that stress of Triple Warmer. It’s part of the Radiant Circuit System,
where life is easy and pleasant and fun and passionate and good and thankful and all those
sort of things. But if Spleen is weak, then you don’t even have the energies for it, so that you
can’t find the vitality of joy and passion.

Spleen Meridian also helps metabolize things, whether it’s the food you are eating, or some
negative energy coming from somebody, or pollutants in the sky etc. If you can’t metabolize,
you can get sick. Another thing about Spleen is that it helps your body adapt to anything
new, and makes it become a comfort zone and so it is not a foreign energy in your body.
So, for example, if you go to a new country to live and it feels foreign, Spleen has a hard
time, until you find your rhythm there. Spleen has a lot to do with rhythm.

The relationship of Spleen and Triple Warmer that you see on the Meridian Wheel Flow is
very interesting, because the Triple Warmer is taking so much more energy.

On the video, David talked about the history of the meridians and how that fits in with Triple
Warmer:

The history of the meridians is that long, long ago in evolution, there were no meridians.
When Donna looks through a microscope at a paramecium (a microscopic water organism),
she sees the energy moving like Radiant Circuits, but not like meridians. Radiant Circuits are
like hyperlinks. They go wherever they are needed. So, in a little organism, that’s how that
works, because energy does need to be distributed. There needs to be digestion and all
kinds of activity, even in a paramecium. But it’s not so complex that it can’t be handled by a
sort of hyperlinking arrangement. So those energies are going all over the place as needed.
Now what happens is that as systems get more complicated, that doesn’t work as well,
because there are many more parts. So, for instance, with digestion, the digestive process
happens every day, and the hyperlinks need to go over the same pathway. Eventually, it’s
like, for example, a riverbed on a mountain, because the water goes there every day, it cuts

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 119


a path. And the path it cuts is a meridian. The advantage of the meridian is it doesn’t have
to figure it out every time. It’s there. It’s always there. It’s routine. It can be counted on. It
doesn’t depend on what else is going on. It is established in your energy system. So a
meridian is much more efficient than a Radiant Circuit. But the Radiant Circuit is a lot more
flexible than a meridian.

Where Triple Warmer comes in is very interesting. Is that the Radiant Circuit, like in a
paramecium, that their immune system is based on those energies moving around to keep
that organism healthy. The immune system doesn’t have a way to fight things off. The way
it fights things off is just to be healthier and healthier. So in the sense that it’s the deer that
is injured or old or lame, that the lion gets, it’s the deer that is really healthy. That’s the
strategy of the Radiant Circuits and for keeping your immune system strong, it keeps all of
you strong. Sometimes we talk about the Radiant Circuit strategy being like the great Mum.
Imagine Christmas and the Mum is figuring everything out - all the aunts and uncles, and
who likes who, and who should sit next to who, and who likes this food, and who doesn’t like
that food, and is making sure all those parts are getting taken care of. That’s how the
Radiant Circuits work.

One day, one of those Radiant Circuits went out and found out that if there was a virus
attacking, that you could attack the virus back. That’s how the Triple Warmer developed.
The Triple Warmer is the great warrior, whereas the Radiant Circuits are the great Mum.
The Triple Warmer keeps you healthy by attacking what is not familiar, by attacking what
might be dangerous.

So now, as humans, we have this enormously complex body, enormously complex energy
system, and Triple Warmer is there to keep us alive, to keep us healthy. It will attack
whatever it doesn’t recognize, because, if it was good enough for our ancestors, it’s good
enough for us. We’ve survived through all these millions of years. So Triple Warmer has a
winning strategy - ie if it’s not familiar, then it’s not needed!

But now, evolution has moved so fast and our environment has changed so fast, that all
kinds of things are not familiar. There are at least 17,000 chemicals in our foods that were
not in the foods that our ancestors ate. Every one of them is unfamiliar to Triple Warmer.
So Triple Warmer is always on the alert: “Should I attack it or should I let it be?” It’s the
same thing with all the toxins that are in the environment eg the toxins in the energy systems
with mobile phones. Even with mobile phones switched off, the signals are still coming in
and they are still touching your body.

That is all happening and Triple Warmer goes a little nuts in our current culture. That’s why
Donna said that working with Triple Warmer is such a big part of Energy Medicine. Because
what Triple Warmer needs to do is to be taught not to go into overreaction. Because, when
it does, it is draining us. It is putting toxic chemicals into our body - stress chemicals. It is
creating allergies and it is creating autoimmune diseases. All of that is the work of a
confused Triple Warmer. So you can partner with Triple Warmer to teach it to calm down
and that’s a big piece of Energy Medicine.

The simple exercise that we’ve already done - the Triple Warmer Smoothie - is one of the
ways of giving the message to Triple Warmer that, “it’s OK, you can relax”. It’s still going to
go into action if there is an emergency - you are not going to calm it down that much. But
you can calm it down so that it’s not going into this reaction when, for instance, your child
gets a bad grade, or frowns at you when you ask him to take the rubbish out. That’s not
adaptive for us, but our body doesn’t know that. Triple Warmer is not about keeping you
happy, Triple Warmer is about keeping you alive. It doesn’t care if you are happy.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 120


One more thing about Triple Warmer - not only is it the immune system, but it is also the
fight or flight response. It has the same strategy in dealing with the outside environment. If
it seems dangerous, we go into a fight mode or a run-away mode - or a freeze mode if that
will make us invisible. So we have the same strategy: inside it’s called the ‘immune system’
and outside it’s called the ‘stress response’. Triple Warmer is really over its head in our
environment. However, there is a lot we can do to teach Triple Warmer very quickly how to
adapt to the world that we live in, which Donna has shown us.

One of the things that we get - auto immune illnesses ((eg rheumatoid arthritis, inflammation
of joints and surrounding tissues, lupus, multiple sclerosis, Type 1 diabetes, psoriasis) - they
are basically a Triple Warmer/Spleen imbalance. It’s like Triple Warmer doesn’t know what
is dangerous anymore, so it’s fighting your own body, your own tissue. When Donna got
herself well, it was Triple Warmer and Spleen that she had to work with to get well. Now,
she is not even vulnerable there. This is what happens if you work with somebody who
maybe has had a heart attack or something, and you really work with their energies - you will
find they are not even vulnerable to another heart attack coming along any more.

So we have these cave-dweller immune systems here in the 21st century and we have to
change that. If we really want to have great lives, we have to change that. It is, of course,
critical into the future, because we are getting more toxins in our environment and in our
food. The other thing that is really important to understand is that if we think, “well, if I just
eat organic food ….. “ - that is, of course, better but, if your body has turned off so much on
Triple Warmer, it doesn’t matter if it’s organic! Donna actually got her sickest from organic
vegetables and fruit. She couldn’t eat anything when she was at her most allergic and this
was just because Triple Warmer no longer knew. It had gone crazy inside of her.

Energy points

In response to a question from the Module 3 Questions and Answers regarding points
across the body - where they are and why they are there etc, the answer was as follows:
There are many different kinds of points:

- Neurolymphatic Points that you massage or tap, to help the Lymph System move the
toxins
- Acupressure Points, often called Acupuncture Points. Very often, holding these
Acupressure Points with your finger will work at least as well as Acupuncture (ie
when you put needles in your body). That’s why you are able to, for example, take
the pain away from your calves when you hold the Triple Warmer Sedating Points
- Neurovascular Points, mainly on the head, which link meridian energy and blood flow
to the brain. The main Neurovascular Points are on the forehead and, when you hold
the front of the forehead to relieve stress, you are tapping into them. When doing
this, blood flow is encouraged back to the prefrontal cortex to assist with clarity v
reactivity. (They are not related to the sutures in the skull.)
- There are places on the meridian that have more energy. Points are energy
vortexes. When Donna sees the points, she sees light there. Most people who really
get into Energy Medicine - although it might take a long time - your body learns them
well and if you don’t see them you might feel them
- The energy system can be moved and worked with, in part by understanding that, on
the surface of the skin are these ‘points’ and some of them are Acupressure Points
that are on the meridians and they affect the meridians directly. Others are
Neurolymphatic Points, which are the ones that affect the lymph system. There are

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 121


other points as well, but these are the 2 that we have really emphasised the most.
As you get more sophisticated, you realise that these points, the ones you find on the
map of the body, are not really points at all! They are actually energy and so an
acupuncture point is really a bit of energy that sits on a meridian that is always in that
position in that meridian - although it can move a little bit, depending on what’s
happening. That’s why, if you go to an acupuncturist, it’s best to go to an
acupuncturist who doesn’t just go by the acupuncture points on a chart, but is
somebody who can really attune themselves to the energies, so that they can go to
exactly where that energy is. The energy may be exactly where the point is on the
chart, or it may be a little bit different. Donna went to an acupuncturist many years
ago who was the best acupuncturist she had ever been to in her life - because he
was blind. He told her that, in Japan, if you are blind, you get free tuition into
acupuncture school. Blind people are the best acupuncturists because they have to
feel it. That’s what happens a lot to people who do Energy Medicine work - they start
to feel and know where energies are. And, after a time, nobody will have to energy-
test you, because you will already know - you have learned the language

MODULE 4 - USING ENERGY TESTS TO MAKE HEALTHY CHOICES

Energy-testing is an effective biofeedback mechanism that can help you check your body’s
responses to food, supplements, personal items, environmental conditions and even energy
exercises. So you can use energy-testing as a tool to help you find out if a particular food or
supplement is in harmony with your body’s energies. You can also test items that you keep
close to your body eg spectacles and jewellery. This can be an invaluable source of
information to learn what works for you and help keep your body’s energies in balance.

The body speaks in energy pulses and flow and has trouble interpreting the sometimes
complex intent behind verbal questions. Energy-testing is a focused way to tune into the
language of the body and the flow of the body’s energies. You are checking on the flow of
energy through a muscle, not on the muscle’s strength. Using a meridian energy test can
help you determine whether the flow of energy in the muscle is disturbed or undisturbed,
interrupted or steady.

This type of energy-testing is generally quite reliable and can give you accurate information
about the flows, blockage and patterns of energy movement in the body. It can also be used
to test whether substances can be metabolised or it they will trigger undesirable reactions if
eaten. Learning how to energy-test yourself is a key to making healthy choices that improve
long-term vitality.

Daily practice of energy-testing can also help you understand and strengthen the flow of
energy through the meridians and become more aware of your body’s response to food,
activities and your environment.

When you energy-test a meridian, you are determining whether the energy is the meridian
has a strong enough natural flow to ‘lock’ an indicator muscle. Up to this point we have been
using the General Indicator Test to energy-test. In this test, an individual holds an arm out
parallel to the floor and the tester presses down gently to see if the arm stays steady
(locked) or collapses downward under relatively gentle pressure (unlocked).

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 122


But, when it comes to testing something as personal as if a substance can be safely and
harmoniously ingested, the energy-test for Spleen Meridian is used. This is because the
Spleen Meridian Test tests whether you can metabolize food or vitamins etc and the General
Indicator Test cannot do that. Although the General Indicator Test can tell if a substance is
good for you, the Spleen test helps to determine if something can be metabolized by the
body.

The Spleen Meridian energy test will help you figure out whether the foods that you are
ingesting are in harmony with your body and with your body’s needs. The truth about dieting
is that your energies are unique to you and the foods that are going to be really great to you
are also unique to you - and no diet book is going to be able to tell you that! So having a
technique like energy-testing, you can do a great deal, because the energies in your body
are based, in part, on the energies in the food that you eat. You want to be nourishing your
energies with food that is energetically aligned with your body. The foods that are
energetically aligned with your body are going to be better for you than foods that aren’t -
and energy-testing is a way to find that out.

On the video, Donna demonstrated with a volunteer the difference between testing vitamins
using the General Indicator Test and the Spleen Meridian Test. First she tested the volunteer
using the General Indicator Test and the volunteer was strong. Donna then explained she
was going to show the difference between testing vitamins using the General Indicator Test
and the Spleen Meridian Test. The General Indicator Test won’t tell you if you are going to
metabolize or not. Even if a particular vitamin is good for you, if you can’t metabolize it -
what is the point of taking it? If you can’t metabolize it, it really becomes a toxin for you - ie
something your body has to get rid of.

Donna put a vitamin C tablet in the volunteer’s hand and then tested her using the General
Indicator Test on the other arm and the volunteer was strong. Donna then put 2 tablets in
the volunteer’s hand and energy-tested her again and the volunteer was still strong. She
then put 3 tablets in the volunteer’s hand and energy-tested her again, and this time the
volunteer was weak - so 3 vitamin C tablets was too strong for the volunteer. So the
volunteer’s body was saying she needs 2 vitamin C tablets.

Donna then put 1 vitamin C tablet in the volunteer’s hand and the volunteer put that hand up
in front of her under her bra line, while Donna tested her using the Spleen Meridian Test.
(Volunteer’s other arm at her side, while Donna tried to pull it away from her body.) This
time the volunteer was completely weak - which meant she will not metabolize any vitamin
C. So this shows that you might need something, your body might really crave it but, if you
have a system that can’t break it down and metabolize it, it’s just another poison.

The vitamin C tablets Donna used were 1,000 mg tablets, so maybe 500 mg tablets might be
better for the volunteer, or even that the test was affected by the time of day. Donna then
tested the volunteer using half of one of the 1,000 mg tablets, using the Spleen Meridian
Test. This time, the volunteer was strong, meaning she could metabolise 500 mg of vitamin
C, but not 1,000 mg.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 123


NB A separate energy-test has been devised for assessing the flow of energy in each of the
14 major meridians. These tests are referred to as the ‘meridian energy tests’. They can be
used in a variety of ways to assess the flow of energy in meridians as well as other energy
systems. See ‘Energy-testing your meridians’ on page 255.

NB In Energy Medicine, we do not encourage the asking of questions when energy-testing,


as there are many factors that can make testing not clear. In response to a question from the
Live Question and Answer Call with Lisa and Marjorie after Modules 3 and 4, regarding how
to test yourself for something that has no physical form eg purchasing an online product or
course, the answer was as follows:

You can’t test yourself for something as intangible as an online course. In Energy
Medicine we discourage asking questions, which is why we touch noses or walk
forwards. Although you could use your thoughts while doing the General Indicator
Test, there may be a conflict there - for example I might want an ice cream and test
strong for it, but it might not be good for me, so there is a conflict in my energies
straightaway - ie a battle between what is good for me versus how strong my desire
is

How to strengthen Spleen Meridian eg prior to energy-testing using the


Spleen Meridian Energy Test (page 8 of the module 4 handout)

It’s always good to have a strong Spleen Meridian. Spleen sits opposite Triple Warmer on
the Meridian Flow Wheel. So if you are stressed at all, Triple Warmer is taking energy from
that Spleen Meridian. All of us should ensure we get stronger and stronger on Spleen
Meridian and then our body will be able to metabolise better, it will be able to adapt to things
that we wouldn’t have imagined and, as our body gets stronger, allergies tend to go away.
Test the Spleen Meridian using the Spleen Meridian energy-test (see page 44) and then do
some or all of the following and then re-test.

Different ways to strengthen Spleen Meridian:

- Because of the partnership between Triple Warmer and Spleen meridians, calming
Triple Warmer strengthens Spleen Meridian. One way to calm Triple Warmer is to do
the Triple Warmer Smoothie exercise (see page 113), which is a great preparation
for energy-testing with Spleen Meridian. This exercise lets the Triple Warmer know
that you are safe and so there is no need for a fight, flight or freeze response from
Triple Warmer and it can release energy to other meridians (eg the Spleen!)

- After you have released from Triple Warmer, you want Spleen to start getting
stronger and stronger on its own, building a habit, so it’s always a good idea to do the
Flush Spleen Meridian exercise (see page 8 of the Module 4 handout) after you have
done the Triple Warmer Smoothie exercise. To do this, rub your hands together and
shake them off. Put your hands at your sides at the bottom of your rib cage (just
underneath your bra line), fingers facing down to your feet. Take a deep breath in
and draw your hands up to your armpits, fingers curling into your armpits. Let your
breath out and move the palms of your hands down in front of your hip bones, down
the inside of your legs and off the big toe. Now, moving forward from your big toes,
trace your fingers up from the big toe up the inside of the legs, go out at the hips, up

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 124


the side of the rib cage, into your armpits and then down to the bottom of the rib
cage. Go up again from the feet 2 more times, shaking your hands off each time, as
soon as you have completed the exercise (ie gone up into the armpits and then down
to the bottom of the rib cage). If you do the Spleen Meridian Test after Flushing the
Spleen Meridian, you will be as strong as steel!

- Make a 3-finger notch and tap on the Spleen Neurolymphatic Reflex Points, which
are under your bra line, directly underneath and in line with your nipples and breathe
in. This is the lymph system in Spleen Meridian. Notice if it hurts or if it is tender at
all.

How to energy-test Spleen Meridian and how to self-test Spleen Meridian

For how to energy-test Spleen Meridian, see page 44 and also page 9 of the Module 4
handout. In response to a question from the Live Question and Answer Call with Lisa and
Marjorie after Modules 3 and 4, regarding if there is a way to self-test the Spleen Meridian,
the answer was as follows:

Marjorie: You can put a barbell by your side and lift it out to mimic Spleen but, when
you use barbells, you have to find one that you can test by saying, “my name is …”
and lifting it and if it is strong it is the right weight for you but if you say, “my name is
Frank” it’s a lot harder. If you do use a barbell, you would have to make sure that
when you are holding the weight, your fingers are facing down with your thumb
against your thigh - and then move the barbell out away from your thigh sideways.
This is so that the integrity of the position stays the same

Lisa: I would be more inclined to have someone else test you, or use the water jug.
Energy follows intention and if I really wanted to choose Spleen because Spleen is
the metabolizer of thoughts, feelings and food, ideally Spleen, but I can get an
accurate test using General Indicator

Testing food, supplements and personal items - how to do it

Energy-testing foods, supplements and personal items can determine whether the vibration
of a substance is harmonious with your own vibration. If a substance is in energetic
harmony with you, the energy test will show that an indicator muscle has stayed strong when
the substance is placed in your energy field. If the vibration of a substance is not in harmony
with your energies, the indicator muscle will lose its strength and test weak.

When you start with a strong indicator muscle, you can use the test to see whether the
substance disrupts the energy flowing to that muscle. Always use Spleen Meridian when
testing substance.

Begin with a strong Spleen energy-test. Now hold the substance to the solar plexus and test
Spleen again. If the energy-test that was strong now tests weak with the substance held to
the solar plexus, the substance is out of harmony with the body’s energies. If the energy-
test stays strong, the substance is in harmony with the body’s energies and may be
beneficial, or simply neutral.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 125


In response to a question on the Module 2 Question and Answer Live Call with Janel and
Michelle regarding if it matters, when testing food, if the food is packaged in some sort of
container (eg milk in a glass or carton), the answer was as follows:

No, it really doesn’t matter. The body has the intention to know that it is a food
substance that you are looking at and so don’t worry about the container

Surrogate energy-testing

In response to a question from the Q&A Live Coaching Call with Donna and David after
Module 8 regarding how to test disabled children who cannot follow instructions, Donna and
David’s responses were as follows:

Donna: Use the surrogate test. If you can’t test a baby, a child, or a pet, you can use
another person and have that person put their hand on the person that can’t be
tested - and they will pick up the energy of that person or pet. So then you test the
surrogate ie the person who is touching that person or pet

David: So, for example, if we wanted to know what was going on in me, we could
have Donna touch me, and Donna puts her other hand out and somebody else tests
Donna and, because of the way the energy travels, the test will stay strong if I am
strong or it will show weak if I am weak. So, in this case, you are not testing Donna,
you are testing the surrogate person

Donna: If you have ever seen a film or a video of somebody putting their hand on an
electric fence and then somebody comes along and touches them and they get it too,
that electricity goes through everybody, that is exactly what happens in a surrogate
test - the energy went through a surrogate

How to get more reliable results when energy-testing (page 11 of the


Module 4 handout)

See page 44.

Energy-testing medication

Energy-testing medication is beyond the scope of this this course. Unless you are licensed
to prescribe medication, you are legally restricted from advising others on their use.

One of the reasons for this, besides the fact that the decision to prescribe a medication is a
very complex one that your doctor has figured out, is that you may, for instance, have a
kidney problem and the medication really helps with that, but it also causes some side
effects. However, the side effects are much less prominent and less important than the fact
that you are getting help with your kidney. But the energy test will pick up the side effects,
the energy imbalance, and so it would be not to your benefit to not take the medication when
it’s going to really be helping you.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 126


NB A qualified Energy Medicine Practitioner would figure out what the side effects are with a
medication and then work with those, much the same way as you work with an allergy. The
Energy Medicine Practitioner would put the medication into the person’s energy field and
figure out which meridians lose their energy and then the practitioner would strengthen those
meridians, thus training the body to be able to tolerate the medication. However, this is way
beyond the remit of this particular course!

NB Donna, as a very sophisticated Energy Medicine Practitioner, when she lived in Oregon,
was invited into hospitals by the anaesthetist while operations were going on, to test to find
the right anaesthesia and the right amount of anaesthesia for the patient!

Energy-testing shoes, glasses, beds or mattresses, jewellery

This kind of testing also goes beyond both food and vitamins. Anything that is close up to
your body has an energy to it. We always move into situations that are energetically off for
us but we are designed to bounce back from that.

But some things are up against us all the time - like shoes, for instance. When you shop for
shoes, they might feel fine as you are walking around them in a shop but, they might be very
uncomfortable if you walked a mile with them. You can energy-test for this right away while
you are in the shoe shop ie test if the shoe is energetically aligned with your body or if it is, in
some way, cutting off your energies. If you have nobody with you, you can ask the shoe
seller to energy-test you using the Spleen Meridian Energy test.

In response to a question on the Module 4 Question and Answer session regarding if you
test weak on shoes, is it the material of the shoe that you are testing weak on - which would
mean that you shouldn’t be able to handle any shoe with that material - the answer was as
follows:

Sometimes it will be the material, but not usually. Usually it’s the way that the fit of
the shoe is interacting with your foot, so that is what is most likely to cut off the
energy ie how your foot is held by the shoe.

NB If you are an extremely sensitive person, and you test weak for shoes or glasses frames,
it could be because of other things like chemicals in the carpet etc and so you may not be
able to determine which of the elements is affecting you. A possible solution would be to
buy the shoes/frames you are interested in and take them home and test them there, in an
environment you trust.

Eye glasses are the same. Different frames are going to energetically have a different
effect. So have someone test the frame on you by doing the Spleen Meridian Energy test on
you before you buy, because you are going to be wearing the frame all the time once you
have bought it.

Another thing to do this energy test on is when you go to buy a bed or a mattress. Donna
lies down on it and she stays there for about 3 minutes and then David energy-tests her to

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 127


see if she has assimilated the energies. (David never lets her see the prices before she lies
on the beds, but she gets stronger and stronger as the beds get more expensive!)

Another thing is jewellery. People have known for thousands of years that jewellery can
really make their energies shine, but jewellery can also drag your energy down. There is a
whole science of energies and crystals and metals and how they affect the energies. But
this will be unique to you - how your body is going to accept and react to a particular metal,
crystal or substance etc.

Sometimes a piece of jewellery will be wonderful for you, but then it doesn’t keep feeling
good and you feel you want to get it off you. This could be because the piece of jewellery
needs to be cleaned. Donna advised that one of the best ways to do this is to put jewellery
out in dewy grass. By morning, the jewellery will be cleansed and good. It could also be
because the kind of stone in the piece of jewellery is not good for you.

Donna demonstrates on the video a way to test pieces of jewellery. (There are many
different ways to test jewellery.) She tested a volunteer who was wearing a necklace.
Donna explained that the bottom of the necklace hit right at the top of the volunteer’s
thymus. The volunteer took the necklace off. Donna put her hand on the volunteer’s thymus
and then tested her using the General Indicator Test and the volunteer was weak. The
volunteer then put the piece of jewellery on again and Donna did the General Indicator Test
again, while touching the necklace - and the volunteer was very strong. This proved that the
necklace was very good for the volunteer.

Donna then tested another volunteer who had a necklace, that she had been told in the
chakra shop where she bought it that it would strengthen her chakras. The volunteer took
the necklace off and then Donna did the General Indicator Test on her while touching each
of the chakras (eg third eye) and the volunteer was weak. The volunteer then put the
necklace on again and Donna put her hand on top of the necklace’s stone while doing the
General Indicator Test and the volunteer was very strong and she also touched all the
chakra points and the volunteer was strong. Donna said that the volunteer had been sold
the right necklace for her chakras!

In answer to a question on the Module 4 Question and Answer session regarding if you test
strong on a particular kind of stone, does that mean you can wear anything in that stone,
whether it’s on the neck or finger, the answer from Donna was as follows:

Usually, but it depends on the setting. For example, fluorite is a really good stone for
me and there may be a display cabinet full of fluorite in a store but, often, there is
only one piece in that display cabinet that energetically goes with my body - and
none of the other fluorite stones will. I can’t explain that, except it’s a different energy
and I want it to resonate with me

Also, jewellery may carry the energy of the person that wore it before you, which can
really do you in until you’ve cleaned that energy - so it just depends!

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 128


Small Intestine Meridian Test (to test food)

This energy test is on Small Intestine Meridian because Small Intestine decides whether the
food you eat is going to become you or not, or whether it’s not so good for you. It might
seem strange to use your knee to test small intestine, but muscles all over your body are
governed by different meridians and the muscles from your knees to the top of your legs are
Small Intestine. The energy from the Small Intestine literally goes through these muscles, so
that’s why the test is done this way.

If you want to test some food when you are in a restaurant because you don’t know if the
food is going to be good for you, you need to test it against Small Intestine. So this is what
you do when the food arrives at your table: put your flat hand, palm down, within about an
inch of the top of the food (ie within its aura) and, under the table, pick your foot up off the
floor and bend your knee at about a 45 degree angle and then push your knee down with the
hand that isn’t hovering over the food. If your knee pushes flat down, the food is not good
for you. If your knee stays strong, the food is going to be good food for you. (Also see ‘Self-
testing using the leg muscles’ on page 136.)

To test food before you order it ie to test it from the menu, test first to ensure you have a nice
strong test, then make a true statement and test to ensure it remains strong. Then test a
false statement and it should test weak. Now point to the item on the menu and think it and
apply testing pressure while reading the item from the menu.

In answer to a question on the Module 4 Question and Answer session regarding what
technique you may be able to use to counteract any negative effects of eating food that you
have energy-tested and so you know it’s not right for you (for example if you are at a friend’s
house for dinner and they serve something bad for you, even though they have put a lot of
love into making the meal), the answer from Donna was as follows:

Tap Spleen Meridian (ie underneath your bust below nipples) both before you eat the
food and after you have eaten it - because it will help you metabolize it

Donna said she had seen a programme on television where somebody was using
energy-testing and it was somebody who loved cooking and loved giving her gift of
food to people. Although she had used the cheapest foods, because she didn’t have
any money for food, they energy-tested it and it was really good for everybody

Donna said that, if you pour love into your food, it is much, much, better. To
demonstrate this, she told a story about a man who came to one of her weekly
classes years ago. He came late every week and he left early and she didn’t know
why and he never took part in the class. The other people in the class were doing all
sorts of work on each other every week, but he never took part. One day, when the
class had only one more week to go, Donna grabbed him before he left the class to
find out if he was getting anything out of the class, because he wasn’t doing anything
in the class. And his story was that he had had a very good job and a family and,
long story short, he lost everything and his family left him as well and he had to take
a little tiny place behind a 7-Eleven Store, and so the only food he could eat were the

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 129


packaged foods in a tiny little 7-Eleven. He knew it wasn’t good for him, but he didn’t
have the money or the strength to go anywhere and he didn’t have a car. That’s why
he came late and left early - he always had to take the bus. Donna said, “OK, no
problem, here’s what you are going to do with that food. You’re going to place it in
front of you and the first thing you’re going to do is you’re going to put a pyramid over
that food by steepling your fingers together and just bless that food and know that it
is going to serve you well. And then, do a little Chakra clearing over it, by swirling
your hand over the top of it, as if this whole energy field, whatever isn’t really good for
you, you’re going to move it on and out, and then put the pyramid back over the top
of the food and now know that the food will be good for you.”

Donna and the man then had a 3-month break from seeing each other, but then the
man came back to class. He had gained about 15 lbs. He said he felt so good, and
he took part in the class after that. Donna said that the act of steepling and Chakra
clearing actually did something for this man’s body and for his metabolism, so that he
was able to absorb and digest that food - although some people might find that hard
to believe!

How accurate and reliable is energy-testing and can we trust it?

Energy-testing is a technique that has both a scientific basis - having to do with the way that
energies move through the muscle that you are testing - and an art part to it. You get better
as you practise it.

The art part is that there are many things that can influence an energy test. Your mind can
influence an energy test. You may be testing food that you are drooling over and that you
really want! In these circumstances, your energy is going to go, “yey”!

The research is very interesting. There are studies that confirm the reliability of the energy-
test and there are studies that say it is not reliable. For instance, if you take 3 practitioners
and ask them to test the same person, you will get 3 different results. There are other tests -
for instance they used a mechanical device, instead of a human, to press down on the arm,
and they found that when the person said something they believed to be true, their energy
would be strong, and it took a lot more pressure to move the arm than when they said
something that they believed was not true.

David demonstrates how that works on the video. He tested a volunteer using the General
Indicator Test and she was strong. Then he asked the volunteer to say, “my name is Jill”
(which was her name) and he tested her again and she was strong. Then he asked her to
say, “my name is Tabitha” (which is not her name) and she tested weak.

There are so many variables in energy-testing that part of what Donna and David do is to try
to teach people to accommodate those variables. One of the ways to do this is to get your
mind out of the way, which will improve the accuracy of an energy test. So you need to be in
a beginner’s mind space, full of curiosity, rather than hoping for a particular outcome, or
knowing the outcome. ‘Beginner’s mind’ is an important way to improve the accuracy of an
energy test.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 130


Another thing to make an energy test more accurate is that there has to be a bit of
attunement between the person being tested and the person doing the test. A simple way to
do that, which gets the mind out of the way and also attunes you, is if you both take a breath
at the same time before doing the test. So, as the person’s arm is raised ready to have the
test done, both the tester and the person being tested take a deep breath at the same time
and then the tester does the test.

Another thing that sometimes gets in the way is that, if you look directly in the eyes of the
person being tested, what you can sometimes end up testing is the relationship with the
person, or the relationship in that moment with the person, rather than what you think you
are testing. So, although the person being tested can look you in the eye, you should look a
little bit away when you are testing the person.

Another thing that is useful for getting a more accurate energy-test is that there are some
points that you can hold on the body that actually have the effect of neutralising your
expectations and those points are where the traditional Chinese headache points are. They
are right in the back of the head, at the nape of the neck, just a bit on either side of the
centre of the nape of your neck. Donna calls them the Electric Points (see page 67). Just
holding those points while doing the test, or holding your own points and have the person
being tested hold their points while you are actually doing the test will help. (This is possible
with the body pendulum by using one hand to hold both points and the other to hold
whatever you may be testing as your body rocks forward or backward.)

But energy-testing is something you really need to practise in order to do it well. You can’t
do it by simply watching it being done and then going ahead and doing it. Also, you need to
be asking questions that are about the energy that is flowing through the body. So don’t use
it as a parlour trick. What you are asking is basically, “is the energy flowing through the
muscle that you are testing, or is something blocking the energy from flowing through the
muscle?”

The next question that comes up is, “Can I self-test?” This is a very interesting question,
because there are some things that you can do - see ‘Self-Testing’ on the next page.

In response to a question from the Module 7 Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David
regarding someone who had been doing energy tests with his wife but it didn’t seem to be
working and were there any study materials he could use, Donna and David’s answers were
as follows:

David: Chapter 2 of Donna’s book Energy Medicine gives more detail than was
possible for us to give in this course. So that is the best reference that we have,
unless you come into our Certification Programme, when we go into much more
detail about energy-testing

Donna: A lot of people have problems working with their spouse in the beginning,
because there is a surrogate that happens sometimes with somebody that you are
very close to and you are picking up your own energy. I would suggest you practise

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 131


with someone other than your wife, but that doesn’t mean you can’t practise with your
wife. Go to Chapter 2 in the book and practise some of the tips we suggested,
especially to take a deep breath and breathe out when you energy test. Then you
might start getting some better results. Even David and I, in the beginning we both
didn’t get good results - but you do learn to get good results

David: Other things you want to do are to make sure you are well grounded before
you do the energy test, that you have centred yourself - do the DER - so that you are
starting off at your best. Then do things like not looking at each other, hold the back
of your wife’s neck as you do the test and take a deep breath together before you do
the test

Self-Testing (page 14 of the Module 4 handout)

There are various reasons to learn how to energy-test yourself:


- To get a reading on something when nobody is there to test you
- To verify that your energy systems are clear and organised
- To confirm your intuition about what is happening in your energy systems
- To develop the ability to dialogue with your own energy systems and learn more
about them

A number of methods can be used for self-testing and it’s important to experiment to find one
or several that work for you. Periodically, double-check your findings by asking someone
else to energy-test you after a self-test. This is because self-testing can be less reliable than
testing with a partner who can help counter expectations or subjective preferences.
Donna advises that you check whether the self-testing method you choose responds to a
clear true/false statement, such as, “my name is (your name)” and then, “my name is Minnie
Mouse”.

In response to a question from the Live Question and Answer Call with Lisa and Marjorie
after Modules 3 and 4, regarding what to do if you don’t have a friend to test you, the answer
was as follows:

Then you have to make do. The bottom line is that testing is something that takes
time to develop accuracy, to start to understand yourself and to develop. It is not
something that you get in a minute or two. As you start to practise, practise, practise,
you are also starting to get a sense of whether it is accurate or not. If a friend isn’t
there, use a barbell or a jug, filling the jug to exactly the weight that you can lift easily
or not, depending on the question. You can also use the pendulum test. You will
need to experiment.

Self-testing using your body as a pendulum (page 14 of the Module 4 handout)

This test is especially useful when you want a read on the effect something will have on your
body. When doing this test, don’t wear heels and ensure your feet are flat and you are
balanced, so that you can sway easily. While standing, hold the substance in question over
your solar plexus with one hand, then place your other hand over the first hand. Bring your

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 132


elbows to your sides and breathe in deeply. As you release your breath, release all thoughts
as well. Using your body as a pendulum let it fall forward or backward to indicate strong or
weak.

Being drawn forward or toward a substance means its energy is attracting you and indicates
an energetic harmony between you and the substance. Being pushed backward indicates
an energetic disharmony between you and the substance. You can use this test to check
your body’s tolerance for food, a vitamin, or a supplement.

Donna demonstrated how to test yourself using your body as a pendulum in the video. She
said she was going to think of herself as a pendulum. She then put one vitamin C tablet in
her hand and pressed it up against herself at her solar plexus, then she put the other hand
over the top of her hand and she pulled her elbows together into her sides. She then took a
very deep breath in, lifting up her ribcage and, when she released the breath, she let go of
all thoughts and all feelings as to whether it was going to be good for her or not. She said
that what will happen is that, as you release the breath, you will find yourself either falling
towards the tablet or away from it (ie falling backwards). If you fall towards it, you need it, if
you fall backwards, you don’t. She then did the same thing while holding 2 tablets.
You need to practise doing this for a while because it is a bit of an art as well as being
scientific.

At the beginning, Donna suggests that you start testing with a partner, because it’s easier to
control some of the variables and it’s easier to get your mind out of the way if the partner is
reminding you to get the mind out of the way. But as you go on, it will become natural to do
the pendulum test.

Donna is such a natural at doing the pendulum test that she finds, as she is doing grocery
shopping that she swings forwards and backwards in the aisles because her body has got so
sensitive to doing the pendulum test!

In response to a question on the Module 4 Question and Answer session re if you fell
towards a particular food in the supermarket on a Monday, would it still be the same result
when you want to cook the food on, say, a Wednesday, the answer from Donna was as
follows:

That is an issue - because you might change. I’ve certainly had that problem. I
scoop up so many things that I think my body needs and it tests so strong that day
but, the next day, it may not want that at all and may not need it in my body. So I’ve
learned not to do a weekly grocery shop - I grocery shop every couple of days. But
also, there are many foods that will not vary, which will be good for you all the time.
You will learn what your body resonates with

It’s more unusual that there is something that will vary - for instance, if you test strong
on cashews and you eat a pound of cashews, your body is probably not going to be
wanting cashews for a while!

So it’s the balances that we are talking about here. And, by the way, they also

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 133


happen at different times of the day. (For example, Donna cannot eat in the morning,
but she’s fine with eggs later on in the day.) She is also much better with the eggs
that are grass-fed, home-grown kinds, than kinds that have hormones in them

Self-testing using a weight (page 14 of the module 4 handout)

Find a barbell whose weight allows you to lift it when holding it at the side of your leg and
pulling out from your body (the same motion as in the Spleen Meridian Test) while making a
true statement, but not when you are making a false statement.

In Donna’s early days when it was so important to get it right because of her multiple
allergies, Donna used this method because she didn’t have the strength to do it as a
pendulum. She put a barbell on her dresser, at shoulder height, and she would pick up the
vitamin in one hand and raise it to shoulder level. If the vitamin was good for her, she would
be able to pick up the barbell in the other hand, while holding the vitamin. If it wasn’t good
for her, she wouldn’t be able to pick up the weight while she was holding the vitamin in the
other hand.

Doing it that way is a more objective test. Donna had to find a weight where there was the
differential so she could lift it if she was strong and couldn’t lift it if she went weak.

Self-testing using a water jug

So that you don’t have to work out the right weight of the barbell, you can use the Water Jug
Method, so you can just fill up the amount that gives you the right weight so that you can
have that differential.

So put enough water in a jug to make a weight that takes moderate effort to lift - ie you can
lift it, but it’s not super easy. Then compare what happens when you hold a substance
against your body while you try to lift it again. Is it easier or harder to lift with the addition of
this new piece of information (ie the substance)?

If it’s much easier to lift, the substance is giving you energy and, therefore, it’s good for you.
If it’s harder to lift, the substance is draining your energy and is therefore not going to benefit
you.

This is a really good way to begin learning energy self-testing. For more detailed
instructions on using the water jug to energy-test, see the answer to the question below.

In response to a question from the Live Question and Answer Call with Lisa and Marjorie
after Modules 3 and 4 regarding energy-testing and that it sometimes works on the caller’s
husband really well and sometimes it doesn’t, the response was as follows:

Working on those nearest and dearest to us can be the most challenging

I’ve been doing this for quite a while now and the water jug is my favourite thing for
energy-testing - especially working with other people - because it shows me how

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 134


easy my job may or may not be. At some point, invariably, when you start pushing
on people’s arms and legs, they think you are pushing harder and so, if they
experience energy-testing first hand for themselves (ie using the jug), your whole job
is a whole lot easier and the information is way more reliable

Always establish a base line first. I have a water jug and I instruct people. I tell them
that their arm has to be completely straight, no bending the elbow, and it’s not a
question of can you pick it up, it’s a question of how much effort or energy is required
to pick it up

I always test on the exhale because there are fight, flight and freeze people. Freeze
people hold their breath and they look stronger when they are not, temporarily, and
so I demonstrate: I ask them to pick up the jug and I say, “Now breathe in and
breathe out and really pay attention to how much work is that to pick up”. So that’s
establishing the baseline - like Donna says, let’s just see if you are strong to begin
with

Then I say, “now think about something you just love” (eg ice cream!). Now we don’t
really need to energy-test that because people’s whole persona changes - they light
up, you can see it. Then they tune into what they love and lift the jug up and it lifts up
so easily - it’s a totally different test

Some people can instantly get there and some people it takes a little time, which is
another reason why sometimes energy-testing doesn’t seem to work - we don’t give
people enough time

Then you ask them to think about something they don’t like (eg Brussel sprouts!) and
then they pick up the jug and they can’t move it easily

So now I can see for myself, first-hand, what was easy for them to pick up and what
wasn’t and so now when I energy-test, I say, “now we’re going to do reverse jug
testing so just lift your arm up and hold it steady and on the exhale I’m going to test,
just so I can establish my baseline.”

Then I ask them to put their arm down and then I say, “now get back in touch with
what you love”. When they are back in touch with what they love, then I’m going to
ask them to put their arm back up and I’m going to test. And it should feel a lot
stronger if they were able to lift this jug a lot higher

And then I ask them to do it while thinking about what they don’t like and if it looks
strong I say, “do you think maybe you were putting a little more effort into your hold,
because before, when you thought of something you didn’t like, you could barely pick
up the jug

So it’s kind of like a way of calibrating that and I find energy-testing on the whole
works a whole lot better when your client has experienced it independently of you,
before you go and start testing

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 135


It needs to be accurate, because that’s where we get our information. Even those of
us who energy-test lots and lots of times every single day, some people are a little
easier to calibrate than others. When I teach foundation classes, I would say for the
entire first year that what people really need time to get at ease with is energy-
testing. When we are nervous and new to something, we bring our own nervousness
to it. Just practise, practise, practise and stay as calm and as amused about the
whole thing as you can. Keep your sense of humour

One thing I find that’s helpful is, I let people know that sometimes a strong test is
indicating imbalance. Strong is not always good and weak is not always bad. If I
make the statement, “I am a man” and I test strong, or “I am a woman” and I test
weak, that’s the reverse. If I test strong on 2 parallel lines, and weak on an X, it
means that my energy is not crossing. So when I explain to people that strong is
sometimes indicating the imbalance, it also gets them off the distortion that strong is
always good. I use the words, “everything is good” because nobody wants to be
weak, everybody wants to be strong and so if you say everything is good, you get
reliable information when you energy-test people

Self-testing using the leg muscles (page 14 of the module 4 handout)

One of the easiest ways to test yourself is to use the quadriceps (thigh) muscle.

While sitting down, lift one leg slightly off the chair and extend your foot 30º forward. Then,
push downward on your knee. A locked or strong muscle will not allow the leg to move. An
unlocked or weak muscle will collapse back to the chair.

TribeLearn responses to a query re self-testing

The question was, ‘what does it mean when I am self-testing that sometimes I don’t fall
backwards or forwards and other times I have fallen a bit to the left?’

The various answers were as follows:

- Where do you fall when you say, “I am ….. (your name)” or where you live etc? That
is how you fall when you know something is true. Then try with something that is not
true

- It seems that advanced students still use the water jug method. When you are
starting using falling forward and backward make sure you are hydrated and
concentrate on things you know the answers to - do that for a while before you
attempt things you don’t know

- Sometimes with the body pendulum test, if you go sideways, the body is ambivalent
about the substance. If you find you are often ambivalent, sedate Triple Warmer and
strengthen Spleen before doing any self-testing

- It could be that those items that caused you to go sideways were neither good nor
bad

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 136


Developing healthy habits (page 18 of the Module 4 handout)

Module 4 teaches how to use energy-testing to check whether foods, vitamins and personal
items are in harmony with your energies. Because the results of energy-testing improve with
practice, consider testing foods and supplements for at least the next 2 weeks.

Energy-testing is a wonderful way to demonstrate the value of DER exercises. In earlier


modules we detailed using the General Indicator Test for scrambled energies (test while
reading forward and while reading backward), for homolateral energies (test while looking at
an ‘X’ and parallel lines) and for weak energy flow in the Kidney Meridian (test while walking
forward and while walking backward). Donna recommends doing these tests before doing
the DER and then testing again after doing the DER. In most cases, the DER will bring your
energies back into balance. Recognising the impact of DER exercises through testing can
provide even more motivation to make this routine an essential daily habit.

What to do if energy-testing doesn’t work for you

In the Q&A Live Coaching Call with Donna and David after Module 8, a questioner said that
they didn’t have anyone to energy-test them and energy-testing themselves wasn’t working
as everything tested positive, even when they tested for their name, the colour they were
wearing, or a food that always makes them sick. They asked how could they solve this
problem. Donna and David’s responses were as follows:

Donna: Energy-testing is both an art and a science. So the art of it is to learn to be in


tune with it and to learn all the things that get in the way of energy-testing yourself, or
being tested by somebody else. Some of the simple things I would encourage you to
do is to just really take a deep breath in, very deeply, and release all thoughts, so
that your body can just fall forwards or fall backwards

David: When Donna started testing herself and needed to test herself frequently, she
didn’t start with the pendulum test. I am assuming that is what you are using,
because the pendulum test is a lot more subtle and easier to fool it. One way to take
out one of the variables is, rather than doing the pendulum test, get a weight that you
can put on your dresser and can you lift it when you have your arm straight out
ahead at shoulder height

So you need to get a differential - ie something that if you say your name, you can lift
it, and if you say your name is something else, you can’t lift it. Or you put something
in your field that you know isn’t good for you and you can’t lift it and put something in
your field that is good for you and you can lift it. Get that differential

The technique of filling a 5-gallon water jug (for most people 1 gallon is enough!),
where you can fill it with the right amount of water and you can use it for the General
Indicator Test and also the Spleen Test (ie putting it at your side and seeing if you
can pull it out) will take away one of the major variables ie one of the ways the test
becomes more subjective

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 137


But also, all of the clues that we gave about testing another person fit here. The
science research results are very mixed. We have given a lot of thought as to why
that is and one of the things is that there are so many variables to control for. The
variables are not just obvious ones - some variables are in the person’s mind, which
will affect the test. So getting your mind set into, “I want the truth here”, rather than,
“I want that ice cream sundae” is the way to do it. If you live alone, you can still find
someone to experiment energy testing with. That is the best training wheels to know
how to do it on yourself. You need to experiment with someone else so that you can
train your body to pick up on those nuances

Ileocecal and Houston Valves (page 15 of the Module 4 handout)

The Ileocecal Valve is located on the right hand side of the body just inside the hipbone. It
connects the small intestine with the ascending colon of the large intestine and regulates the
flow of fluids and waste.

The Houston ‘Valve’, located inside the left hipbone, is not a true valve but plays a similar
role in helping to regulate the action between the descending colon of the large intestine and
the rectum.

Together, these 2 ‘valves’ play an important role in making sure your body removes nutrients
from food and releases unnecessary material for evacuation.

When these valves are out of sync and fail to open and close properly, symptoms that result
can mimic many serious illnesses. However, both valves can be reset with a simple energy
exercise.

There is a second advantage to resetting these valves on a regular basis. The rhythmic
pulsing of these valve muscles is linked to all the other valves in the body. By keeping the
Ileocecal and Houston Valves working properly, you are supporting the function of your
body’s other crucial valves - it makes all the different valves and openings work really well.

The Ileocecal Valve sits between the small and large intestine and it often, in stress, doesn’t
open and shut as it should do, in the same way as the diaphragm doesn’t.

There is a real relationship here because, if the diaphragm is not opening and shutting as it
should, it will often close off valves, so they are not opening as well as they should do.

Donna recommends that you reset the Ileocecal and Houston Valves before you do the
Freeing the Diaphragm exercise. If you do the exercises in this order, suddenly, all over
your body, any valve that was not opening as it should, will open.

If you open a valve anywhere in the body, all the other valves respond. All the other
openings (eg the crown chakra) will open too!

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 138


How to reset the Ileocecal and Houston Valves (page 15 of the Module 4
handout)

Place both hands on your hip bones with your little fingers at the inside edges ie put the heel
of your palms on the sides of your waist with your palms resting on your hip bones and your
fingers diagonally facing inwards.

Your right hand is over the Ileocecal Valve and your left hand is over the Houston Valve.
Resetting both valves creates symmetry between them.

While taking a deep breath in, exert pressure as you push in and slowly drag the fingers of
each hand upwards 6 to 7 inches just inside each hipbone. Shake the energy off your
fingers with the out breath and return to the original position. Repeat 2 to 4 times.
End by putting your hands on your waist and smooth your thumbs downward from the waist
to the hip bones (top of legs) one time with pressure.

Freeing the Diaphragm (page 16 of the module 4 handout)

The diaphragm is a horizontal wall of muscle that acts as a bellows, enabling oxygen to
enter the body via the lungs. Like all muscles, it can get tight, stuck, or out of rhythm and
lose its optimum functioning.

This exercise helps to release the diaphragm and reinstate its healthiest rhythm. It’s good to
do this every day, because every time you open the diaphragm it really affects all of the
valves in your body.

When the diaphragm is opening and shutting on its natural rhythm, it supports the
functioning of the Ileocecal and Houston Valves as well as all the other valves in the body.
At the same time, it helps you distribute oxygen and energy more effectively up to your brain
and to your organs and limbs.

How to test if someone needs to free their diaphragm

The diaphragm is meant to open and close like a bellows and when it does this, it pumps
oxygen to every part of your body, so it’s very good for you. If, for instance, you have been
sitting all day, your diaphragm may test weak.

Do the General Indicator Test on the person and they should test strong. Then poke and
press hard into the middle of the person’s chest - right between the boobs! Then energy-test
the person again and, if they test weak, they need to free their diaphragm.

How to free the diaphragm (page 16 of the Module 4 handout)

NB Donna recommends that you reset the Ileocecal and Houston Valves before you do the
Freeing the Diaphragm exercise. If you do the exercises in this order, suddenly, all over

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 139


your body, any valve that was not opening as it should, will open. Also, there is an
extraordinarily strong relationship between the diaphragm and the function of Triple Warmer
so do a couple of the Triple Warmer calming exercise before doing the Freeing the
Diaphragm exercise.

In a standing position:

- Firmly place your left hand under the centre of your rib cage and place your right
hand on top of it (fingers of both hands pointing to the sides of your body)

- With your hands flat, pull your elbows close to your body so you are hugging your
midsection

- Inhale deeply, raising your rib cage up, and push your body toward your hands while
your hands push back against your body

- Hold your breath and push your body hard against your hands. Although there is no
set amount of time, the longer you hold your breath and push (but not to the point of
feeling lightheaded), the better

- Release your breath out through your mouth and release your hands. Relax

- Repeat 2 or 3 times

- Then, on an in-breath, reach your right hand around the left side of your waist with
your fingers spread

- On the out-breath, pull your fingers to your navel with pressure. (This gets your Belt
Flow)

- Repeat several times

- Then repeat several more times with your left hand crossing your right side

- Place your hands on your hips with your thumbs reaching back. Pull your thumbs up
over your hips and smooth the energy down your legs with both hands

MODULE 5 - WORKING WITH PAIN

Pain and Pain Techniques

We were all designed to heal ourselves. Donna feels that it’s a tragedy that we left that
behind and, several hundred years ago, we started going to other people, and also forgetting
what is natural in our body. However, we can reclaim that, and Donna feels it will change

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 140


your life to know that you don’t have to swallow a pharmaceutical tablet and, instead, you
can do some Energy Medicine techniques that don’t have any side effects.

Our energy systems already have maps inside of us for how to handle the pain, so all that is
needed is for you to be a partner with your energy systems and then you will be thrilled with
what happens and how you can shift things around. Even by just doing the DER every day,
various pains will start to go away.

In terms of energy, pain is usually a result of congested or excess energy - energy in excess
somewhere, which is just bottlenecked. Sometime it is bottlenecked somewhere else in the
body and shows up because the energy can’t get through and things just get ‘off’. So pain
indicates either too much energy or stuck/stagnant/bottle-necked energy.

Chronic pain can be a sign of long-standing energy blocks, which may originate in a different
area than where you sense the pain. Pain will often decrease if congested energies are
released.

We start in this Module with the simple things, the simple ways of working with your pain.
We will build up to harder, but even more efficient ways, as we go through this Module.

Western medicine has paid a lot of attention to pain. And a lot of what Western medicine
does is based around the symptoms people come in with - eg where they hurt, what’s going
on - so pain is diagnostic. But a lot of what the treatments are, are to stop the signals of pain
from consciousness using medication (which may have side effects). However, when you
take a pharmaceutical, you are ‘just’ blocking pain.

That is very different from how Energy Medicine approaches pain. Energy Medicine
approaches pain by going to the energetic roots of what’s causing the pain. It doesn’t try to
block the pain and mask the symptoms in the way that conventional medical treatments and
medication do. But by going to the root of what is at the basis of the pain, you also are
addressing what’s causing the pain - you are addressing the underlying issues. This is a
healthier approach and one that works with your body’s innate wisdom and ability to heal.
Also, unlike medication, energy techniques have no side effects and there is no worry about
becoming addicted.

In Energy Medicine, you are not focused on, “let’s stop it from hurting”. You are focused on
why is it hurting, what is going on energetically, how can we shift that? In fact, when you
take pain away energetically, that is also healing your body - you are going to the root of it.
Energy Medicine regards pain as a valuable messenger, one that tells us about an
imbalance in the body’s energies or physical damage that needs care.

The term ‘Energy Medicine’ is itself a double entendre:

1 In Energy Medicine, energy is the medicine. Medicine is an agent that is used to


heal or prevent disease. Your body’s energies know how to mobilise themselves to
respond to all manner of illness and threat, bringing the purest and most natural elixir

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 141


that exists to care for your maladies. Energy gives life to the body

2 In Energy Medicine, troubled energies are the patient. The energy systems that
attempt to adapt to a world of stresses, pollutants and information overload unknown
to our ancestors, become overwhelmed and confounded, settling for imperfect
compromises, and requiring significant re-patterning if you are to fully thrive. Energy
Medicine is able to bring about such re-patterning

Energy heals, and energy systems are healed

Energy Medicine has a number of different ways to work with pain. Any of the techniques in
the DER might address pain. As your energies become balanced, the pain may go away
without ever having focused on it because energy blocks that cause pain may be removed.
The Crossover Shoulder Pull can literally pull pain out from the shoulders. When you work
the Neurolymphatic Points (which may be painful and hurt when you press/rub them) they
hurt in part because that’s where the clogged energy is - and breaking up clogged energy is
one of the ways of reducing pain.

There are reasons to do these techniques, and to do different techniques at different times,
because we are all different. One pain technique may not work for you, but another will.

There is a lot that we have already learned in this course that may address pain. And what
we are going to be learning in this Module is much more specifically focused on working with
pain, so pain becomes a signal from your body saying, “I need attention. I want attention
here.” But we don’t know how to give it that attention, so that’s what we are going to be
doing in this Module. We are going to start with simple techniques that everybody - even a
child - can do.

NB Everything Donna teaches in pain will be for every kind of pain.

Donna said that one thing that is interesting as you get more into Energy Medicine is that
you pay more attention to your tension! This is because if there is nothing that you can do
about it, you have to just carry on, but, if there is something that you can do to release that
tension, or pain, or minor aches and pains, then it’s not as important to block them out and
ignore them the way that we used to do before we knew about Energy Medicine. People
that learn Energy Medicine become more attuned to their body, and that is really good for
you in the long run. It’s really good for your health not to be carrying those minor/mini
tensions, and minor/mini pains.

In response to a question from the Live Q&A Coaching Call after Module 5 with Donna and
David regarding if you can use the simple Energy Medicine pain techniques to send healing
energy to parts of your body, or if they are for pain only, the answer was as follows:

Donna: One of the things I love about Energy Medicine is say, for instance, if it is for
pain, you not only take pain away but you bring healing to the area. So it’s not like in
Western medicine where, if you pop a pill, it might take the pain away but it won’t
heal you. In Energy Medicine, it does both. You can also, whenever you are holding
points anywhere on the body for pain, you will notice maybe that you have a little bit

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 142


more strength in your back or somewhere else, because the energy keeps travelling
to where it needs to go

In response to a question from the live Q&A Coaching Call after Module 5 with Donna and
David asking if they could give a summary on dealing with pain in general, using chronic
pain as an example, their answers were as follows:

David: Working with the energy is a very different model for dealing with pain than
that used by Western medicine. The basis of it is that pain is because energy is
coagulated in a particular area - it has gotten too much. Our body does that for good
reason. It’s not just to give you a signal, but it is also to get the energy there. What
goes wrong is that that energy stops flowing. So to work with pain in Energy
Medicine has a very different purpose than working with pain is generally done in
Western medicine. The idea is not to have the pain - that is secondary, it’s a benefit.
In Western medicine a lot of the attention is suppressing the pain, making it not
experienced, but it doesn’t heal the condition. Whereas with Energy Medicine, the
things that you need to do to make the pain decrease, help with the healing - it’s a 2
for 1 - and so the pain is the symptom that you are working on to reduce the pain, but
it is also initiating the healing

Donna: We have given you a lot of different pain techniques. Try every one of them.
If you have some pain, try one of the techniques. If it doesn’t work, go to another
technique, because different pain techniques are useful for different things. Many
years ago, David used to break my heart a lot and I would hurt in my chest. (This
doesn’t happen anymore - we have been together for 40 years!) If I sedated
Stomach Meridian, that meridian goes right through the chest, and it would take away
the pain in my chest like magic. So that’s what I did on me - I started experimenting -
and I encourage you to do the same. Don’t grab for a pain killer first - try something
on yourself and see if you can make the pain go away. You will get more and more
thrilled with your abilities and the excitement of how it works and you will like life
better, because you will be in more control and you will be in sync with life

David: For acute pain, you want to find a technique to ease the pain and you also
want to find out what is causing it. Chronic pain is very different to acute pain -
chronic pain is our body’s habit. Chronic pain often started with a physical reason,
but it has become habitual, so that the pain continues even if there is not the original
cause for the pain. In these cases, Energy Medicine helps a great deal. If there is
no medical reason for the pain, Energy Medicine can very relatively quickly shift that
entire constellation of energy. If there is still a physical cause for the pain, and it is
something that the person has to live with, you won’t be able to make it so that you
don’t know the condition is there - you will still be able to feel it - but you will be able
to reduce tremendously the amount of suffering that is involved

Which hand should we lead with when doing energy work?

In answer to a question from the Question and Answer session after Module 5, your right
hand is more the hand that sends energy and the left hand is more the hand that receives

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 143


energy. Similarly, your right side is more the masculine side and your left side is more the
feminine side. When you are working with something, energy-wise, you want to be thinking
about whether you want to be sending energy or whether you want to be receiving energy.

So, for instance, if you are learning to clear chakras you might use your left hand to go
counter-clockwise to pull energy out and to receive the energy from your client and move
their energy and then you might want to go clockwise with your right hand to give them
energy, to send them energy.

With pain, often we use the left hand because we want to draw out the excess and
congested energy. So we use the left hand, with counter-clockwise circles, to clear the pain
and use the right hand to re-balance the body’s energies.

Preliminaries

Start with the Homolateral Crossover Re-patterning exercise (if needed) and the DER.
These exercises can loosen the hold of energy habits and blocked energies associated with
pain (which is especially useful with chronic pain).

NB If, while doing any of the following pain techniques, you feel energy caught in your body,
stop and shake off your hands, or place your arms in cold running water to above the
elbows, or do Connecting Heaven and Earth.

Siphoning (page 6 of the Module 5 handout)

There is a way you can siphon pain off your body and so, for some pain, this next exercise
will work well. The technique is based on the principle that the left hand pulls energy out and
the right hand puts healing energy in. It may require a partner.

Siphoning is done as follows (the first 4 bullet points below are recommended before trying
to remove someone’s pain, using any of the pain techniques in this Module):
 Make sure you are grounded - tap your cheekbones or smooth your energy
down your legs. This is because, if there is an excess of energy, it will get
directed down to the earth, instead of backing up to you
 Do your DER so that your energies are in the best possible state before you
start
 Spoon your feet - you want to make sure they are open
 Rub and press into the palms of your hands before working, because that is a
place where we pick up excess energy

- Place your left hand on or over the area of the pain to ‘siphon’ off energy. You can
do this on yourself or on somebody else. Do it with intent ie that you want your hand
to receive the energy. The left hand is usually the ‘receiving’ hand, which is why it’s
recommended to use that hand, but you can interchange hands if you want to. (It
doesn’t make any difference if you are left- or right-handed.) Remember to shake the
energy off your hand regularly

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 144


- Breathing in through your nose and out through your mouth, with your left hand
resting on the area of the pain, hold your right hand palm out and facing down,
fingers extended and away from your body to allow the siphoned energy to drain off

- Be aware that the pain is draining off your right hand - feel or imagine the pain or
stagnant energy being pulled out of your body

- Place your right hand on or over the area of pain and raise your left hand upward to
bring healing energy into the area

- Shake off your hand

- Close with tracing Figure 8s over the area of the pain

- When doing any of the pain techniques, always make your last step doing something
to calm Triple Warmer. This will help the body to integrate the new habit that you are
trying to help the body understand ie the new habit of having less or no pain and it
will help the body feel safer

- When you have finished, practise energy hygiene - rub your palms together and
shake them off. It’s always good to rinse your hands under cool water afterwards,
too

Counter-Clockwise Clearing (page 6 of the Module 5 handout)

Vortices of swirling energy form over areas of pain and wounding. You (or a partner) can
clear this energy to reduce localised pain. This technique can be used over an open or
closed wound.

You may remember some time in your life when, say, you had a pain in your stomach and
you just pressed around in a circle on your stomach. As children we often did that on our
tummies. Or you will see people rubbing, say, their elbow in Counter-Clockwise Circles
automatically just by themselves and that is relieving the energy. This is more than instinct -
your body remembers that is good for it.

Wherever you have pain you have too much energy and, if you go in a counter-clockwise
circle around that pain, it begins to pull the energy up and out.

To determine which way is counter-clockwise, imagine a clock is right in front and on top of
where the pain is. The clock is looking outwards, and if somebody in front of you was
looking at the clock, they would be making the hands of the clock move backwards if they
were circling in a counter-clockwise direction.

Counter-Clockwise Clearing is done as follows (the first 4 bullet points below are
recommended before trying to remove someone’s pain, using any of the pain techniques in
this Module):

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 145


 Make sure you are grounded - tap your cheekbones or smooth your energy
down your legs. This is because, if there is an excess of energy, it will get
directed down to the earth, instead of backing up to you
 Do your DER so that your energies are in the best possible state before you
start
 Spoon your feet - you want to make sure they are open
 Rub and press into the palms of your hands before working, because that is a
place where we pick up excess energy

- Using a slow counter-clockwise motion, circle your hand over the area that hurts.
This clears or draws out stagnant energy and relieves pain. Do this for a bit of time -
usually between 2 and 4 minutes

NB the palm of your hand is more powerful than the back of your hand but, if you
have pain in your back, reach up with the back of your hand to do the circling. You
can also do it mentally

- Circle your hand in a clockwise motion to balance the energy you have just cleared.
This stabilising move usually takes less time than doing the counter-clockwise motion

- Trace a lot of Figure 8s over the area for 2 to 3 minutes

- When doing any of the pain techniques, always make your last step doing something
to calm Triple Warmer. This will help the body to integrate the new habit that you are
trying to help the body understand ie the new habit of having less or no pain and it
will help the body feel safer

- When you have finished, practise energy hygiene - rub your palms together and
shake them off. It’s always good to rinse your hands under cool water afterwards,
too

You may have to do the above procedure numerous times as the pain subsides - until it is
gone.

In response to a question from the Module 7 Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David
asking for clarification regarding the anticlockwise direction for healing pain and if any harm
will be done if it is done accidentally in the opposite direction, Donna’s answer was as
follows:

First of all you are not going to harm anyone by doing it the other way - it just won’t
help them as much and you won’t get the result you want. Imagine a clock is sitting
against your body, on your back or on your neck or wherever you want it. Set the
clock so the hands of the clock are facing out. The anticlockwise/counter-clockwise
way, is by the hands going backwards

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 146


Rubbing Neurolymphatic Reflex Points associated with the meridian
involved in the pain (page 7 of the Module 5 handout)

Rubbing the Neurolymphatic Reflexes can help release energy and so take away pain. See
‘Neurolymphatic Reflex Points and Neurolymphatic Clearing’ on page 68.

For instance, when Donna had shoulder pain, she massaged hard the Central Meridian
Neurolymphatic Reflex Points (where the arm meets the body) to release the energy and
take the pain away. The shoulder muscles are on the Central Meridian.

Techniques for healing emotional pain

Some of you may be wondering if these techniques are also for emotional pain and the
answer is yes, doing Siphoning, Counter-Clockwise Circles and Rubbing Neurolymphatic
Reflex Points will all help with healing emotional pain.

So, if your feelings get hurt, you would usually feel it in your Heart Chakra and get pain in
your chest and so doing counter-clockwise circles over your chest will help. You might also
want to rake your fingers outwards from the centre of your chest to the sides of your chest
and just open it up.

Tracing Figure 8s (page 7 of the Module 5 handout)

See page 91 for detailed information about tracing Figure 8s.

Use your hand or a crystal to trace Figure 8s over the painful area. When you make Figure
8s in an area, you are knitting the energy together - it begins to knit and you begin to heal.
Trace Figure 8s over the area of the injury, small, large, and in whatever directions feel good
to you. This can really calm down an injury and can help relieve swelling, bruising and
discomfort. If, for any reason, you are not able to physically trace the Figure 8 pattern over
the injury, use your imagination as though you are tracing the area with your own fingers, but
in your mind. “Energy flows where intention goes!”.

In response to a question from the Question and Answer session with Donna and David after
Module 5 regarding which pain technique would be most appropriate for kitchen accidents,
like second degree burns that blister, the answer was as follows:

That happened to Donna about 3 years ago when she was in Scotland. She was
moving a candle and all the melted candle wax went on to her hand and she was
burned very badly. It was 5 minutes before she had to go to teach a class, so she
really wanted to do something fast. First she put it under cold water - she was not
sure whether that was the right or wrong thing to do - but then she traced Figure 8s
over it so much. You could see down to a bone in one place but she just kept knitting
it with the Figure 8s

Main Neurovasculars (page 7 of the Module 5 handout)

Put one hand on the pain, the other on the Main Neurovasculars, and hold.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 147


When doing any of the pain techniques, always make your last step doing something to calm
Triple Warmer. This will help the body to integrate the new habit that you are trying to help
the body understand ie the new habit of having less or no pain and it will help the body feel
safer

Breathing out the Pain (page 7 of the Module 5 handout)

The simplest of the pain relief techniques is called Breathing out the Pain. Breath moves
energy. By focusing your breath, you can gain some control over your pain. Focused
breathing can be used for localised or dispersed pain and with an open or closed wound.

You find where the pain is and then you mindfully connect with the pain and you move it
mindfully out with your breath. So this technique really combines the mind with what you are
doing with your breath, with your body. Millions of women have been helped through the
pain of childbirth using the Lamaze breathing technique and it can be adapted to any
situation.

Breathing out the pain is done as follows:

- Breathe in through the nostrils, mouth closed, as if smelling a rose

- Breathe out through the mouth, as if blowing out a candle and as if blowing out the
pain

- Continue breathing slowly, making each breath slightly slower than the breath prior to
it, breathing the pain out more slowly with each breath. As you exhale, you are
releasing some of the energy involved with the pain

- The mantra taught to guide people through an acute attack of pain is simple: smell
the rose, blow out the candle

- When doing any of the pain techniques, always make your last step doing something
to calm Triple Warmer. This will help the body to integrate the new habit that you are
trying to help the body understand ie the new habit of having less or no pain and it
will help the body feel safer

How the mind can move your energies (page 9 of the Module 5 handout)

A lot of the more advanced pain techniques are not using your mind at all - they are purely
physical, they are based on really shifting the energy and it doesn’t matter what your mind is
doing. However, your mind can move energy and affect your body in many ways. Energy
Medicine techniques such as Siphoning and Breathing out the Pain show how your thinking
can move energy to relieve pain.

If these methods are not as effective as you wish, you may want to check for energetic
blocks that could be interfering. Homolateral energy patterns, for example, may decrease
the desired effects of these pain relief tools. If this is the case, the DER and the Homolateral

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 148


Re-Patterning Exercise are great antidotes and can amplify the effects of your mind’s focus
on pain relief.

Energy Medicine presents a wide array of pain relief tools and encourages you to try them
out to find what works in a specific situation. Start with the simplest method that seems
appropriate to your condition. If needed, try something else.

To give an example and to demonstrate how much the mind can move your energies, David
did an interesting experiment with the audience on the video.

David asked everyone to stand up and face directly forward and look directly forward. Then
David turned around, so his back was to everybody, because he wanted the audience to
mimic what he did. The first thing he asked the audience to do was to turn their neck to the
right and, without hurting themselves and without straining too much, see how far you can
see to the right. He asked them to memorise that point. Then he asked them to turn their
neck back to the centre. Then he asked them to stretch their right arm up (as if they wanted
to ask a question), stretching their fingers and stretching their wrist around, stretching all
along their sides, stretching their thigh, calve, ankle and toes. And then turn back to the
centre. He then asked them to look to the right again and see how far they could see. Most
of the audience said they could see further now than the point they had previously
memorised.

David said this result was mechanical, as the audience were stretching pieces of parts of
their body and that makes more room for your neck to turn.

David then asked the audience to stand and face forward again, but this time to turn their
head and look to the left and memorise the furthest point they could see without straining
themselves and then come back to the centre. He then asked them not to move a muscle,
but to imagine that they were doing what David was doing ie doing the stretching thing
again. He then asked them to imagine they were coming back to the centre point and to
then turn to their left and see how far they could see.

Many people were able to see further than they did before they imagined they were
stretching like David.

This illustrates a number of things, but the one we are focusing on is how the mind can move
energy that impacts the body. And you can do that with pain, so that is why things like the
Syphoning and Breathing out the Pain Techniques are effective. If they are not doing the job
for you, you can still continue to do them, it’s kind of like that pushes the pain away a bit, but
you may need more powerful techniques, which are detailed in the following pages.

Tapping (page 10 of the Module 5 handout)

Tapping loosens congested energy so it can move more freely. Because the body is
accustomed to the beat of the heart and the pulsating of the capillaries, tapping is a
language the body understands and to which it responds.

Use the fingers on either hand, or something with many little ‘tappers’ - such as a hairbrush
with plastic bristles.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 149


When you are tapping, do a real proper tap - you should bounce off that body! Tap for as
long as it feels right - perhaps about a minute, or until you notice that energy has released or
the pain has decreased.

For sore muscles, such as shoulder pain, tap the area.

NB Do not tap on an open wound. ‘Pain tapping points’ are shown under the Strengthening
Points in the pages at the back of this book.

The Spindle Cell Pinch (page 8 of the Module 5 handout)

There is a demonstration of this technique on YouTube Help for Arthritis and Carpal Tunnel
with Titanya Dahlin.

This technique cannot be done over an open wound.

At the nucleus of every cell there is a mechanism called the spindle. Lightly pinching the
centre of the area of the pain triggers the Spindle Cell mechanism and sends a signal to the
brain that the pain is no longer necessary. It is like hitting the reset button after a fuse has
been thrown. This frees energy that is clogged in the area of the pain. The slight pinch
sends a signal into your nervous system that releases trapped energy.

Remember, the lighter the pinch, the better - the pressure required is almost too light to even
be called a ‘pinch’!

For a localised area, go to the centre of the painful area with your thumb and forefinger and
very, very, lightly, pinch the skin one time. For pain in the hands, wrists, or elbow, make tiny
light pinches up and down the inside of the arm for about 20 seconds. This technique
particularly helps with Carpel Tunnel Syndrome (see below).

In response to a question from the Question and Answer Session with Donna and David
after Module 5 regarding how far up the arm you should pinch, the answer was as follows:

That depends on the individual. Usually, you only have to do the inside, the yen
parts, which is the inside of your arm to the inside of your elbow. But every now and
then, if somebody has had it for a long time, you have to go all the way up to their
shoulder

NB For neck pain, stretch the area first before doing the Spindle Cell Pinch (see ‘stretching
the neck’ on the following page).

Demonstration of how the Spindle Cell Pinch works with energy which is
stuck in the fingers, arms or shoulders

In the video, Donna used the General Indicator test on a volunteer who had Carpel Tunnel
Syndrome and the volunteer tested strong. Donna then asked the volunteer to keep
squeezing her fingers around in all different ways, as if she was typing. Donna then

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 150


repeated the General Indicator Test on the volunteer and, this time, the volunteer tested
weak - she had lost energy just by moving her fingers.

When somebody has no energy going off their hand/ends of their fingers, you want to reset
the Spindle Cell mechanism. Energy should be able to pull right off the end of the hand but
the energy had been backing up on the volunteer’s hand - otherwise she wouldn’t have lost
energy after she moved her fingers as if she was typing.

This often shows up in Carpel Tunnel, but it can also show up in pain in the arms or even in
the shoulders sometimes.

Donna then turned the volunteer’s arm over, so that her palm was facing upwards, and then
pinched her very lightly, making little tiny movements with just her thumb and index finger
pinched together (like Pac-Man!), going up the volunteer’s arm, from her wrist up to her
shoulder and back down again. These little tiny pinches reset the Spindle Cell mechanism.
Donna explained this really works on the Yen energies. Donna then asked the volunteer to
move her fingers as if she was typing again, and then she re-tested her. This time, the
volunteer tested strong!

That is the beginning of healing - you have to reset it by doing the Spindle Cell Pinching,
which makes the energy continue to go off your fingers and not back up into your hand.

It’s extremely important not to pinch hard - if you pinch hard it will not work - it will literally
hold the energy in your arm or your hand, it will hold it even more so. So you have to reset it
with the tiniest, tiniest movement of your fingers - your thumb and your pointer finger - just
very, very lightly.

Stretching

As long as the area surrounding the pain is not an open wound, stretching it can also bring
relief. Pain involves too much energy at its site. Stretching the areas about an inch or two
beyond the sides of the pain relieves some of the congestion. Then press in deeply around
the perimeter of the pain and stretch the muscle in every direction.

Neck stretching and how to test if the neck needs stretching

You can use the Spindle Cell technique in many, many things, for example, if the neck tends
to get tight. However, before using the Spindle Cell technique on the neck, it is best to
stretch the neck, because there are 7 chambers in the neck and it’s best to open up space in
them first.

To test if the neck needs stretching, Donna energy-tested a volunteer and the volunteer was
strong. Donna then repeated the General Indicator Test but, this time, while Donna pushed
down onto the volunteer’s hand, Donna put her index finger in the middle of the volunteer’s
neck - about where the Adam’s Apple would be. This time the volunteer tested weak.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 151


Then Donna did the General Indicator Test again and, while pushing down onto the
volunteer’s hand, she tested each chamber by putting her finger around the edges of the
volunteer’s neck, and also the back of the neck - and the volunteer was weak with all of
them. This is because the energy had either stopped, or was not moving very much.

Donna explained that you always need to think of making space in your body because it
allows energy to move.

To make space in your neck and on your throat chakra before doing the Spindle Cell
technique: put one hand on your chin and one hand on your collarbone and really stretch
them apart - and go all around your jaw line and collarbone doing this. (Somebody told
Donna recently that doing this had really helped her double chin!) Then go around to the
back of your neck, and go up against the bottom of the head ie fingers of one hand pulling
down around the nape of the neck, while the fingers on the other hand are pushing upwards
at the hairline. You are stretching all the way around the neck.

Then you pinch your thumb and forefinger together, the Spindle Cell mechanism, and,
starting on the back of the neck, extremely quickly and lightly come around to the front of the
neck.

Donna then re-tested the volunteer and this time she was strong - because doing the
Stretching and then the Spindle Cell technique had started the energy moving again.

When to use Zone Tapping, rather than meridian sedating points

Sometimes, you can look at the Muscle Meridian Chart and the pain doesn’t seem to be on a
particular muscle or on a particular meridian line, then Zone Tapping might be a good idea -
for instance, if you have bone on bone pain in your knee. Zone Tapping interrupts the pain
signal and it’s easy to use - and it only takes about 2 minutes!

Pain techniques are a case of trial and error. If you tried one technique and it didn’t work
very well, try a different technique. Sometimes it’s good to do one technique, for example
using sedating points, and the pain will lessen, and then you might want to wait a few
minutes and use another technique and the pain might lessen more.

When doing any of the pain techniques, always make your last step doing something to calm
Triple Warmer. This will help the body to integrate the new habit that you are trying to help
the body understand ie the new habit of having less or no pain and it will help the body feel
safer.

Zone Tapping

This is at about 27 minutes on the video and see pages 10 to 12 of the Module 5 handout.
This is one of the more advanced pain techniques. Zone Tapping is based on foot
reflexology which maps the body into zones. It can be used for both an open and a closed
wound, because you tap points based on the Zone in which your pain resides, rather than on
the area of the pain itself (see the illustrations on pages 11 and 12 of the Module 5 handout).

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 152


The fellow depicted in the handout is sitting in that strange way because that’s the way the
Zones move in the body. These are not meridians or chakras, they are nothing like that -
these are Zones. Reflexology is based on the Zones and that’s why reflexology works so
often - because it is based on these Zones.

With Zone Tapping you locate points to tap based on the Zone within which your pain sits.
Zone Tapping is most useful for localised pain rather than diffuse pain. Donna estimates
that between 70% and 80% of the people she knows who have tried Zone Tapping have
reported that it relieved at least some of the pain.

The Zones are on both the front and back of your body. Your softer parts, which are in the
front and inside the limbs, are considered yin. On your arms and legs, yin is where hair
doesn’t grow as easily. The yin areas of your body include the bottoms of your feet, the
palms of your hands, the insides of your arms and legs, the front of your neck and your face.

The more rough-skinned areas of your body, mostly on the back, are considered yang. The
yang side of your body also includes the tops of your feet, the backs of your hand, the
outsides of your arms and legs and the back of your head and neck.

How to do Zone Tapping

The first 4 bullet points below are recommended before trying to remove someone’s pain,
using any of the pain techniques in this Module):

 Make sure you are grounded - tap your cheekbones or smooth your energy
down your legs. This is because, if there is an excess of energy, it will get
directed down to the earth, instead of backing up to you
 Do your DER so that your energies are in the best possible state before you
start
 Spoon your feet - you want to make sure they are open
 Rub and press into the palms of your hands before working, because that is a
place where we pick up excess energy

1 Locate where your pain is in one of the Zones (spaces between the lines). The
Zones are depicted on pages 10 and 11 of the Module 5 handout. So use the
diagrams to find the Zone that corresponds with your pain, and the related tapping
points. Tap on the same side of the body as the pain

So, if you have a pain in your leg, you will notice that the Zones go 1, 2 and 3 on the
front of the leg and 4, 5 and 6 on the back of your leg

NB See below, underneath point 6, regarding energy-testing to be certain you are on


the right point

2 Find the number that is in the same Zone as your pain. If the pain is below your
waist, you will be tapping at the ankle (marked A on the diagram). If the pain is
above your waist, you will be tapping at your wrist (marked W on the diagram). If the
pain is actually on the waist, tap at both the ankle and the wrist. When in doubt, do
both!

3 If the pain is on the front of your body (yin), tap on the inside of your ankle or wrist
(yin). If the pain is on the back of your body (yang), tap on the outside of your ankle

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 153


or wrist (yang). See the diagrams on page 11 of the Module 5 handout.

4 Find the point on the diagrams of the wrists or ankles that corresponds with your
pain. For example, A3 means your pain was in Zone 3 below the waist

To help it sink in exactly where the points are, just think on your ankle it goes on
inside of the ankle, it starts at the back and 1 and 2 are behind the bone and 3 is in
front of the bone. And then it goes 4, 5, 6 - so two behind the bone and one in front.
On your wrist, with your palm facing towards you, it starts on the inside, so zone 1 is
underneath the baby finger, zone 2 is in the middle and zone 3 is on the outside.
Then you turn your hand over and zone 4 is under the thumb, then 5 and 6

5 Remembering to breathe correctly, tap the point quite hard about 10 times. Stop for
about 10 seconds. Then tap for about 60 to 90 seconds more. That is enough. The
uninterrupted tapping calms the slow, persistent pain impulses, while interrupting the
rhythm engages and calms the faster, shooting impulses

Because there are 2 types of pulses that move through, you want to make sure they
both go. If you just continue tapping without a break, the second pulse won’t jump in.
Donna explained about the pulses being sent, in terms of Energy Medicine. She said
just like with chickens and cows, humans have light meat and dark meat inside of us.
The pulses that go over the light meat usually go much faster, and the pulses that go
over the dark meat go slower. So that is why you should stop after about 10 taps
and just relax for a minute, and then the other pulse will start

6 The body will continue to pulse for another 10 minutes or so after you have stopped
tapping. So sometimes you won’t know for about 10 minutes if the tapping has
helped with the pain and other times the pain will be gone instantly. If you have
blocks in other places in your body, it might take up to 10 minutes to work. The pain
usually continues to diminish for about 10 minutes after you have stopped tapping. If
most of the pain has disappeared, but not all of it, tap in the same Zone on the
opposite side of the body (or try another technique)

7 When doing any of the pain techniques, always make your last step doing something
to calm Triple Warmer. This will help the body to integrate the new habit that you are
trying to help the body understand ie the new habit of having less or no pain and it
will help the body feel safer

8 When you have finished, practise energy hygiene - rub your palms together and
shake them off. It’s always good to rinse your hands under cool water afterwards,
too

You will not harm yourself if you tap on the wrong point. (It just moves energies in another
way.) However, to be certain you are tapping on the right point, energy-test while touching
each point on the ankle or wrist separately - you will lose energy on the point that represents
the Zone that needs to be tapped and the other points will stay strong. For instance, if you
are not certain whether your pain is in Zone 1, 2, or 3 of the inside ankle, then energy-test
while touching each point.

NB It is very important to continue to sedate, flush, or communicate with Triple Warmer as


you move through pain levels on Zone Tapping. You want Triple Warmer to support your
efforts and not become alarmed and fight your progress!

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 154


In the video, the volunteer for Zone Tapping had a pain on the outside of her thigh. Donna
put her fingers at the back of the volunteer’s calf and the inside of her ankle and then
energy-tested the volunteer. She energy-tested her normally, using the General Indicator
Test, then Donna checked the volunteer’s foot again. She put her finger on the volunteer’s
heel and held it there, while energy-testing the volunteer. The volunteer tested strong, which
proved that the zone was not in zone 1. Donna then put her fingers on to the second zone of
the volunteer’s foot ie her just a little bit up from her heel. The volunteer tested strong again
so the pain was not in zone 2 either. Then she put her finger in zone 3 on the volunteer
ankle ie above her ankle level with a line straight up from her big toe and energy-tested the
volunteer and this time she tested weak - which meant the pain was definitely on zone 3
because you lose your energy when you touch the zone where the pain is.

Sedating pain

See ‘Meridian strengthening and sedating points’ on page 105 for more information on how
sedating points work etc.

Pain is often due to stale or excess energy being trapped in a meridian. Holding sedating
points frees trapped energy and makes room for healing energies to enter the area.

Sedating points are points that are acupuncture points used in acupressure, and holding a
pair of points has the effect of releasing energy in that meridian. Sedating a meridian has
the effect of releasing excess energy while calming it. This does not mean you are
weakening the meridian or the muscle, but rather that you are freeing blocked energies so a
strong flow can be restored in the meridian - sedating points helps the energy to flow better
on the meridian by taking away energy that is clogged.

Sedating points are used for pain control (remembering that pain is usually excess energy)
and other situations where energies have become backed up. By holding the strengthening
or sedating points for a particular meridian, your hands become jumper cables that draw
energy from one meridian to another. Holding the points these ways can bring bursts of
energy into the related area and is the basis of the field of acupressure. Holding a pair of
points has the effect of releasing energy in that meridian.

In response to a question from the Question and Answer session with Donna and David after
Module 5 regarding how much pressure you should use when you are holding points, the
answer was as follows:

It’s a firm lightness. It’s not deep pressure, but there is some pressing, but it’s not so
that it would hurt you. It’s a light pressure

There are 2 sets of sedating points. You open the valve when you hold the first set of points
and you close the valve when you hold the second set of points. The second points not only
close the valve, but also balance it all out. It’s like it listens to the body’s brilliance and it
knows how much to let go. The second set of points is called the control points.

When you sedate, remembering that pain is usually excess energy and you want to move it
out, so when you hook up 2 points, the energy flows from the first set of points, which you
want to release, and moves to the second set of points.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 155


I have printed off the 12 Meridian Strengthening and Sedating Points charts (from
points.edenenergymedicine.com) and filed them in the Module 5 Working with Pain section
of the file. Pages 15 and 16 of the Module 6 Handout also show the Kidney, Triple Warmer
and Stomach Meridian sedating points.

NB The sedating points are labelled according to which meridian they are on and
whereabouts on the meridian the point is. So, for example, the first set of Kidney Meridian
sedating points are labelled K1 and LV1. K1 is the first acupressure point on the Kidney
Meridian and LV1 is the first acupressure point on the Liver Meridian. The second set of
Kidney Meridian sedating points are labelled K3 and SP3. K3 is the third acupressure point
on the Kidney Meridian and SP3 is the third acupressure point on the Spleen Meridian.

NB You can’t hurt yourself using the sedating (or strengthening) points but, if you decide to
hold a specific set of points and it doesn’t feel right while you are holding them, stop and
listen to your body.

NB Remember never to sedate Heart Meridian! Heart Meridian is the only one you do not
sedate because it can slow your heart down. (The sedating points shown for Heart Meridian
are not any that sedate the heart, they are actually something that sedates Small Intestine
and that helps the heart slow down.)

Identifying and sedating the meridian involved with the pain using the Muscle Meridian
Chart

One way of identifying the meridian to sedate when addressing pain is to identify which
meridian runs through the painful area. Another way of identifying the meridian to sedate is
to identify the muscle that sits in the area of the pain. Each muscle is fed by a different
meridian. Sedating the meridian that corresponds with the muscle may alleviate the pain if
sedating the meridian that runs through the pain itself was not effective.

The Muscle Meridian Chart - see page 14 of the Module 5 handout - has the names of the
meridians that the muscles are on. So, for example, if you have pain in your shoulders, you
will see from the Muscle Meridian Chart that the muscles of your shoulders are related to
Kidney Meridian, so holding the Kidney Meridian Sedating Points can be a very effective way
to relieve your shoulder pain. The payoff for you sedating the Kidney Meridian will be that
your shoulders will feel better. But it will also affect your kidneys and help the kidneys
release energy - it’s like a cleanse and so it’s really good. There are other muscles in your
body that it will affect as well, so this is a really good thing to do.

NB If the pain is in a Spleen Meridian muscle, sedate Spleen to get rid of the pain but then,
given that most people actually need Spleen Meridian strengthened, wait maybe 30 minutes
and then strengthen Spleen Meridian, to leave the meridian strong.

NB You could also look at the ‘meridians’ section to see what governs each of the meridians.

You can hold sedating points yourself or have a partner hold them for you.

Donna advises that you carry the Muscle Meridian Chart around with you and check in on it
once a day, for example, “I have a little tenderness here, or I have a little pain there” and
experiment and see if you can take your pain away. Because, when you sedate meridians
to take the pain away, it is far more than taking the pain away - you are also really bringing
healing to an area that would otherwise not get that healing - so it’s a really good thing to do.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 156


To use the Muscle Meridian Chart:

The first 4 bullet points below are recommended before trying to remove someone’s pain,
using any of the pain techniques in this Module):
 Make sure you are grounded - tap your cheekbones or smooth your energy
down your legs. This is because, if there is an excess of energy, it will get
directed down to the earth, instead of backing up to you
 Do your DER so that your energies are in the best possible state before you
start
 Spoon your feet - you want to make sure they are open
 Rub and press into the palms of your hands before working, because that is a
place where we pick up excess energy

1 On the Chart, identify a muscle that sits in the area of the pain (but remember never
to sedate Heart Meridian! NB The points given for Heart sedation are actually the
strengthening points for Small Intestine, Heart’s Yang partner)

2 Find the name of the meridian that corresponds with that muscle

3 Find the corresponding sedating points for that meridian (sedating points for all the
meridians are printed out and filed in the Module 5 Working with Pain section - taken
from www.points.edenenergymedicine.com). Note that the sedating points are
labelled ‘first’ and ‘second’. The meridian abbreviations are followed by a number
representing the acupuncture point. SI5, for instance, means the fifth acupuncture
point on the Small Intestine Meridian

4 Sit down and get comfortable. If you can be in a really relaxed position while you are
holding the points, it works better. (If you are all contorted, maybe you are going to
create a block somewhere!) Some people feel too contorted when they hold their
own points but, if you lie down, and put your legs up over pillows, it’s suddenly very
easy. If you like being in a bath, it’s very easy to hold the points because your body
is so relaxed

When touching the strengthening or sedating points it is OK to rest the rest of your
hand against the body - it’s not important that you have only the finger on the point
touching your body

5 The main thing to remember about sedating points is to hold the points on the
same side of the body. So, for instance, when you are sedating Triple Warmer, if
you are holding your right elbow, you are also holding your right knee. And if you are
holding your right hand, you are holding your right foot

It’s easy, especially with Spleen sedating points, to get the points turned around so
that you are holding one right point and one left point - which is wrong!

6 For 2 to 3 minutes, lightly but firmly hold the first set of sedating points, starting on
the side of the body where the pain is located, remembering to breathe in through
your nose and out through your mouth

If you are holding your own sedating points, you can do it either by holding both of
the points with one hand, or by holding one of the points with one hand and the other
point with your other hand - depending on where the particular sedating points are
situated.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 157


Don’t worry about being in exactly the right place. This is one of the wonderful things
about acupressure over acupuncture. In acupuncture you have to be in exactly the
right place because the needle is going into the point but, in acupressure, which is
what this is, you are using your own energies and so, if you get fairly close, then your
body just draws it in. To be on the safe side, instead of using just one finger to hold a
point, use several fingers - your energies are electromagnetic, so you will hook up!

NB 2 to 3 minutes is a guide time as, if you don’t sense energy yourself, it is enough
time to get the energy moving. Sometimes they connect a lot sooner or take longer.
However, if you feel pulsing in your fingers, wait until the pulses synchronise - which
means the points have connected up. Or, some people see colours change, or yawn
or sigh - these are bodily signs that the connection is complete and you can move to
the second set of points. It is common for one side to take longer than the other,
because it’s common that the level of imbalance is different on each side

If you were sedating Kidney Meridian, you would put your middle finger under the ball
of your foot (K1). Then take either the thumb of the same hand, or use your other
hand, either way it doesn’t matter, and put it right at the inside bottom corner of the
big toe nail (LV1) on the same foot that you are holding K1. Although you can hold
both points with one hand, it takes a little bit of gymnastics to figure out how to do it,
so while you are learning, it’s easier to do it one at a time!

The energy is now literally moving along the Kidney Meridian into the Liver Meridian.
Kidney Meridian energy is moving into Liver Meridian. What you are doing is
instructing your body to send the energy that is in the Kidney Meridian into the next
meridian on the flow cycle of the 5 Element Chart, which is the Liver Meridian (see
Innersource.net Relationship of the 5 Elements and Polar Meridians). So it just gets
that motion going when the energy has got stuck.

7 After holding the first set of points for 2 to 3 minutes, shake your hands off

8 Now hold the first set of sedating points on the other side of your body for 2 to 3
minutes, then shake your hands off

9 Remembering to breathe in through your nose and out through your mouth, now
lightly but firmly hold the second set of sedating points - the control points - for 1½ to
2 minutes and then shake your hands off

The second points stop the energy from continuing on. So you open the valve when
you hold the first set of points and you close the valve when you hold the second set
of points. The second points not only close the valve, but also balance it all out.
(So, if, for example, you are sedating Kidney Meridian, if you let go of the first set of
sedating points, without then holding the second set of sedating points, it would
continue to drain the energy from the Kidney Meridian to the Liver Meridian.)

10 Now hold the second set of sedating points on the other side of the body for 1½ to 2
minutes and then shake your hands off

11 After holding any of the meridian sedating points, you should always end by holding
the Triple Warmer sedating points or doing something else to calm Triple Warmer,
because this will help the body integrate the new habit that you are trying to help the
body understand ie the new habit of having less or no pain. It will help the body feel
safer and integrate the changes you just told your nervous system to incorporate

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 158


12 When you have held both sets of points, on each side of the body, test to see if there
is any difference to the pain. Although it may take 10 minutes to hold the points, it is
worth it because it works!

13 When you have finished, practise energy hygiene - rub your palms together and
shake them off. It’s always good to rinse your hands under cool water afterwards,
too

NB If you have been doing a lot of work on somebody and you feel like you have really
moved a lot of energy, remember to use the Kidney Meridian Sedating Points as you want to
be able to move that energy out of their body, and sedating Kidney Meridian will move it out
of their body and help the kidneys process it.

For a guide to holding Triple Warmer Sedating Points, see page 115. Kidney Meridian
Sedating Points are on page 15 of the Module 5 handout and Triple Warmer Meridian
Sedating Points and Stomach Meridian Sedating Points are on page 16 of the Module 5
handout.

In response to a question from the Live Coaching Call with Donna and David after Module 8
asking if there is a more detailed muscle meridian chart, as, in the last session Donna said
that knee pain can be helped by sedating Small Intestine and the questioner was not sure
they would have thought to try that by looking at the chart provided, Donna and David’s
responses were as follows:

Donna: Small Intestine Meridian governs the muscle that starts right at the thighs and
it cuts the knee. So very often, sedating Small Intestine works

David: We don’t have a more detailed chart. The chart that is in Donna’s Energy
Medicine book is a different chart, but the one that is in your handouts is an improved
version of it, so we just don’t have something more detailed. But you should be able
to get the information from the handout chart

Headache Isometric Press (page 17 of the Module 5 handout and just past
the 1 hour point on the video)

We have already learned in this section how to stretch and pinch the neck to make space in
the neck - see ‘neck stretching and how to test if the neck needs stretching’ on page 151 -
which will help with headaches.

The Headache Isometric Press is an exercise which helps overcome and prevent
headaches. It takes about 2 minutes. Energy is meant to be released all the time and come
in fresh all the time. The fact that you are getting a headache is because your body isn’t
releasing energy as it needs to release.

Donna gets a lot of feedback about this technique. People tell her that they stop having
headaches after doing this. It usually takes away headaches, but it also prevents
headaches. If you ever hear clicks as you turn your head, those clicks will go away the more
you do this technique.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 159


This exercise is an isometric (ie involving pushing muscles against something), and they did
some research on astronauts going into space, who always lose bone density in space. At
one time, they thought that they should do weights, but the only way that they didn’t lose any
bone density, was with isometrics, so it’s a really good isometric exercise.

Incidentally, the only way that you don’t lose bone density as you age is through either doing
tap dancing, clogging or Irish Dancing - that thud is really good for not losing bone density!

How to do the Headache Isometric Press (just past the 1 hour mark on the video)

NB I think the video shows a slightly different exercise than the one below, which is taken
from page 17 of the Module 5 handout.

1 Sit down and relax your shoulders. Tilt your head to the right, bringing your ear close
to your right shoulder - let it go as far as you can drop it

2 Place your right palm against the right side of your head. Take a deep breath in as
you press your hand and your head against each other. Push hard while holding
your breath

3 Slowly but completely releasing your breath, drop your hand away from your head
and stretch your head even closer to your right shoulder

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 two or three more times

5 Now repeat steps 1 to 4 but, this time, tilting your head to the left side

6 With your head straight, place the pads of your fingers on the bones at the base of
your head (where the back of your skull meets your neck). Take a deep breath in
and isometrically push your fingers and your head really hard against each other

7 Drop your hands into your lap and open your jaw as you release your breath through
your mouth. With a deep inhalation through your mouth, jut your jaw out, pulling your
lower teeth up to your top jaw. Release your breath, open your mouth and let your
jaw relax

8 Tighten your jaw one more time. As you release your breath, let your head drop
forward toward your chest

9 Taking a deep breath in, put your hands up to your forehead with the pads of your
fingers pushing your head upward as your head continues to push down - push your
head against your fingers really hard. Release your fingers with your outbreath and
allow your head to drop farther downward, as far as it will go. Repeat twice. On the
last time, as you let your breath out, lace your fingers behind your head and allow
your elbows to pull your head downward

10 When doing any of the pain techniques, always make your last step doing something
to calm Triple Warmer. This will help the body to integrate the new habit that you are
trying to help the body understand ie the new habit of having less or no pain and it
will help the body feel safer

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 160


11 When you have finished, practise energy hygiene - rub your palms together and
shake them off. It’s always good to rinse your hands under cool water afterwards,
too

After doing this exercise, your head should be looser.

Pain Chasing (page 18 of the Module 5 handout)

This technique is usually used for chronic pain (ie pain that is either long-lasting or that you
have had for a very long period). If you are working with chronic pain and the pain falls
along a meridian line, pain chasing can be very beneficial. Usually chronic pain is right on
the meridian. Chronic pain is usually there because it is on a meridian - the meridian has
somehow got bottle-necked over the years and it doesn’t even have the knowledge anymore
to keep on flowing.

In pain chasing, you push the pain along the meridian pathway and out the far end of the
meridian (away from the body’s core) - something like squeezing toothpaste out of a tube.

Donna has successfully used this technique on people who have had their pain for 25 and
30 years and who could not get the pain to go away unless they took a lot of medication. If
you have someone where nothing has been working for their pain, this is the technique to
use.

You can do it on yourself, although it is always nice to have a partner do it for you. If you
can reach it, you can do it yourself. Some places, it will be too difficult to reach on yourself -
you couldn’t do Bladder yourself, for instance. But, if you can reach it, you can do it yourself.
Donna has had people tell her that they have done pain chasing on themselves and the area
that they couldn’t reach, they would literally imagine themselves doing it from that place to
that place - and it still chased it because your mind gets involved and that will work. So
visualise the meridian, and where the pain is on the meridian, and chase it in your mind.

It can take between 5 and 30 minutes to do.

In response to a question from the Question and Answer session with Donna and David after
Module 5 regarding the points you press on the meridian when you are pain chasing, the
answer was as follows:

They are acupressure points. You usually find that you’ve gone to an acupuncture
point where the energy is congesting. But Donna has had it where nothing is there -
it’s not a real point and yet it’s congested in a little vortex of energy where your body
has learned a habit of holding pain there

How to do pain chasing (page 18 of the Module 5 handout)

NB When chasing pain you always start from the head or torso and go off the extremities of
the body. So it depends on the meridian whether you are going to go forward or backwards
on the meridian. Forward or reverse direction does not matter - but what does matter is that
you are chasing it off the body.

The first 4 bullet points below are recommended before trying to remove someone’s pain,
using any of the pain techniques in this Module):

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 161


 Make sure you are grounded - tap your cheekbones or smooth your energy
down your legs. This is because, if there is an excess of energy, it will get
directed down to the earth, instead of backing up to you
 Do your DER so that your energies are in the best possible state before you
start
 Spoon your feet - you want to make sure they are open
 Rub and press into the palms of your hands before working, because that is a
place where we pick up excess energy

1 Sometimes, when something releases while you are pain chasing, the person who is
doing the pain chasing might really feel it, so that is why it is a good thing to always
ground yourself before you work on somebody

2 Identify the meridian that the pain is on, by checking the meridian chart on page 19 of
the Module 5 handout

3 Tap the beginning and end points of the meridian to stimulate its energies

4 Place the index finger of one hand at the centre of the pain, which will be on the
meridian

5 Place the index finger of your other hand on the last point of the meridian that is
located on the torso or head (this will be the meridian’s beginning point or end point)

6 Press both fingers fairly hard - enough to make a firm contact

The pressure depends on if the point is sensitive or not, obviously, but there should
be nothing dainty about it - it should be good firm pressure. If you are working with
someone and it is too painful and they can’t take that pain, once you find the pain,
you can back off and not go so deep, because the energy will still work. Then, after a
while, you go back in and push it again and see if it still hurts

7 Keeping the finger located on the pain steady, move the other finger half an inch
down along the meridian line (toward the pain) and press. If there is no pain, move it
another half inch and press. Continue until you reach a point that is tender. Pain on
one point of a meridian is generally matched by pain on another point on the
meridian

If any point is even just very slightly tender, you must hold it until the pain is
completely gone, as this won’t work if you leave it behind. This is because the whole
meridian has been suffering, even though you think it’s just the one place where you
have the pain

8 Once you have found another painful point, hold that point along with the original
pain point

9 The pain on one of the points usually will have vanished in less than 3 minutes. After
a couple of minutes, check both points by pushing in firmly to see if the pain is still
there. The pain on one of the points will usually have dissipated. This occurs
because you are opening a channel for blocked energy to flow

Don’t stop holding the point of tenderness until the pain has completely gone away,
because you have to get it all off the meridian

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 162


When you are working with someone with chronic pain, it might take some time for
the pain to move

10 Using the finger from the point that no longer hurts (keep contact) continue inching
down toward the end of the meridian furthest from the trunk of the body, while
keeping the other finger on the point that hurts. Continue moving until you find a
second point that is painful and then repeat steps 8 and 9

11 Eventually, one finger will get to the end of the meridian or the fingers will be side by
side. If the fingers are side by side, move the fingers from the point that doesn’t hurt
a finger’s width toward the end of the meridian

12 When one finger gets to the end of the meridian that is farthest from the trunk of the
body, “chase it” with the other finger, a finger’s width at a time, moving only when
there is no pain

13 Continue until you have chased the pain off the end of the meridian. Always end up
by going off an extremity (eg a finger or toe)

14 When doing any of the pain techniques, always make your last step doing something
to calm Triple Warmer. This will help the body to integrate the new habit that you are
trying to help the body understand ie the new habit of having less or no pain and it
will help the body feel safer

15 When you have finished, practise energy hygiene - rub your palms together and
shake them off. It’s always good to rinse your hands under cool water afterwards,
too
Notes:
If the energy gets stuck at the end of the meridian, hold the meridian’s Sedating
Points for a short time (no more than about 30 seconds)
You can do the pain chasing technique to open up the flow of the meridian even
when there is no pain
If you are doing pain chasing and it doesn’t work, you have probably worked on the
wrong meridian!

On the video, Donna demonstrated on a volunteer who had pain on the outside of her elbow
- although it wasn’t a chronic pain. Donna thought the volunteer’s pain was on the Small
Intestine Meridian as the Small Intestine Meridian goes from the little finger, up the arm to
the elbow, along the shoulder and to the cheek bone and then the ear and back again. The
Small Intestine Meridian ends at the opening of the ear.

Donna held the volunteer’s elbow, where the pain was, with one hand and with the index
finger of the other hand, she pressed her finger by the opening of the volunteer’s ear, and
asked the volunteer if she had any tenderness at the ear. The volunteer didn’t.

Donna then traced her index finger, while still holding onto the elbow with the pain, down the
meridian’s path to the cheek bone and pressed in there and asked if there was any
tenderness there. There wasn’t.

Donna then traced her index finger a little further down the volunteer’s cheekbone and
pressed in and this time there was tenderness, so Donna held her finger there for a while.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 163


She said that either the tenderness on the cheekbone or the pain in the elbow would go
away in a while - you won’t ever know which one it will be. It surprises Donna if the pain
actually goes away very early on because usually it doesn’t - you have to chase the whole
meridian. After a couple of minutes, the tenderness in the volunteer’s cheek bone stopped.

As you are holding onto the various points on the meridian, remember to breathe properly.

If you are ever doing this with somebody and maybe they are worried about you holding for
too long, they may say, “Oh, that’s better now”. But don’t stop holding the point of
tenderness until they say it has completely gone, because you’ve got to get it all off the
meridian.

Donna then traced her index finger down to the volunteer’s cheek bone and pressed her
finger in and the volunteer said it was tender there.

If you have chronic pain somewhere, you may think that that is the only place you have pain,
but when you chase the pain, it often is the case that you find other pains in that meridian ie
lots of little bottle-necks on the meridian that you now will have to open up that flow. If any
area is even just very slightly tender, you need to hold it - this won’t work if you leave it
behind, because the whole meridian has been suffering even though you think it’s just the
one place where you have the pain.

Donna then traced her finger down the meridian slightly further, to the volunteer’s neck, and
it was not tender. She continued to do this, stopping every 3 inches or so and pressing in
and, if it was tender, pressing that point until the volunteer said the pain had gone.

Donna explained that, because the volunteer’s pain wasn’t chronic, it was easier to move it.
She said that sometimes you have to sit on the painful points for a while before it moves. If
you are working with someone with chronic pain it might take you some time to do this. You
have to relax into it. But know that you are giving whomever you’re working on such an
amazing gift - they might have had this pain for years and pain chasing takes it away.

Donna checked with the volunteer if the original pain in the elbow had changed, because as
you chase it, you are sending out this pressure of energy - it’s going out like a tube and so
you are pushing it further along on the meridian. Also, as you pain chase on someone,
because the pain is being chased, the person you are working on might feel pain
accumulating from all the other points you’ve been pressing, as you get nearer the site of the
original pain, because the energy has moved down to there.

Donna moved down the volunteer’s arm towards her hand, bit by bit, pressing points along
the meridian, until the final point on the volunteer’s little finger, by which time all the pain had
completely gone.

Use of Magnets to Lift Away Pain (pages 21 to 23 of the Module 5 handout)

NB A couple of the EEM Practitioners on the Facebook support group said that using
magnets would be their choice of last resort - they would only use them if everything else
they had tried had failed. They said to remember that our hands are magnets - the palms of
our hands are south and the back of our hands are north. Kelmie said that by flipping your
hands back and forth, you can have exactly the same effect as using a magnet - so she said
you don’t really need to use magnets!

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 164


There is a comprehensive section in the Energy Medicine book on using magnets, starting at
page 319.

Magnets can be quite beneficial with pain, but you need to use them carefully. Test for
magnet sensitivity before using a magnet on the body (see ‘magnet sensitivity test’). Some
people are extremely sensitive to magnets. You may wish to use a crystal instead, if
sensitivity is evident. It won’t be quite as strong as a magnet, but it does have an effect and
it helps - and there will be no unintended side effects.

Donna likes to use selenite and she puts it right up against the pain, and that works. You
can also tape crystal right onto the pain - but nothing works as well as a magnet and, maybe,
selenite.

If you can use a magnet, get the weakest magnet you can. You should not use a strong
magnet because you don’t want it to continue to move your energy, because you want it just
to help your energy.

NB In response to a Module 3 Q&A session re magnets, Kelmie said that the Radio Shack
magnets that Donna mentions in the video are no longer available. She said you can get
great magnets from any kind of acupuncture source, which have the North or South Pole
marked. Or you can use round, ceramic, weak craft magnets. But she said the cool thing is
that you don’t really need magnets because our hands are magnets. The palms of our
hands are south and the back of the hands are north. Kelmie said that by flipping your
hands back and forth, you can have exactly the same effect as using a magnet - so you
don’t really need to use magnets!

Using magnets to reduce pain begins to energetically correct for the causes of the pain.
Generally the north side of the magnet is placed against the skin for localised pain, since it
pulls stagnant energies out of the body. It cannot be emphasised enough that if you get a
magnet, you should put some fingernail polish on the north side so that you’ll know that that
is the side that goes next to you.

Magnets move energy and blood quickly, either toward or away from an area, depending on
the polarity.

NB Shop-bought magnet pads are not made by brilliant magnet people or brilliant Energy
Medicine people and they often put the magnets in with the wrong side facing the skin. So
it’s extremely important to check that the magnet pad you buy, or knee pad with magnets in
it, or elbow pad with magnets etc, has the magnets facing the correct way out. Make sure
that it is set in there with the north side against your skin.

Donna mentioned that she once sat in a friend’s car and she started to get a bad stomach
ache and her back hurt too. She had to ask her friend to stop the car because she thought
she was going to be sick. As soon as Donna got out of the car, she started to feel better.
So she asked her friend if she had been sitting on something in the car and the friend told
her that she had bought a very expensive £500 seat for the car for people to sit on. Donna
took a look at the seat and the whole pad thing was south side out! So be very careful with
magnets - energy-test them!

How to find out which is the north or south of a magnet, using a person

You can find out which is the north or south side of a magnet on a human being - you do not
need a compass.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 165


On the video, Donna asked for a volunteer and she then energy-tested her. Then she
showed the volunteer just how electro-magnetic she was. Donna held the magnet above the
volunteer’s ear while energy-testing her. The volunteer was incredibly strong. That means
that the south side of the magnet was pressing against her head because energy just fills up
all the spaces of your testing.

Then Donna turned the magnet over to the other side ie the north side and energy-tested the
volunteer while holding the magnet against her head and the volunteer was weak. Donna
said you always lose energy on the north side because it pulls towards where the magnet is.

It cannot be emphasised enough that if you get a magnet, you should put some fingernail
polish on the north side so that you’ll know that that is the side that goes next to you.

If you have a pain, and it’s not an open cut, you can put the north side of the magnet right
against the pain and it will start lifting away the pain. The south side will not. The south side
of the magnet will expand it and move it around your body - so only ever use the north side
of the magnet against the pain!

That might be puzzling, because when Donna put the north side of the magnet against the
volunteer’s head, the volunteer’s energies went weak when Donna energy-tested her. The
reason for that is that the north side is pulling energy toward it. So pull the energy out of the
muscle and that’s why the test showed weak, but that is actually what you want. You want
to pull the energy out of the area of pain.

Conversely, when the south side of the magnet was against the volunteer’s head it was
pushing energy through and that’s what made her arm so strong when she was energy-
tested, but that is not what you want, as that will distribute the stale, mucked up energy
through the body and it can actually spread problematic energy. There is the danger there
of maybe spreading a tumour or something like that.

Magnet cautions - be careful! (page 23 of the Module 5 handout)

- Do not use a magnet if the person has a pacemaker or any implanted device with a
battery or pump (shunts, pain pumps etc) or if the person is wearing hearing aids

- Do not use a magnet if the person is pregnant

NB In response to a question from the live Q&A Coaching Call after Module 5 with
Donna and David from a woman who was pregnant and who wondered if working
with magnets on a client would affect her and if there is anything else that isn’t good
for pregnant clients or practitioners, Donna’s answer was as follows:

I’m not worried about you being pregnant and working on a client, as long as it’s not
a super-powerful magnet, and as long as the client is not pregnant. Get a tiny
magnet with a hole in the middle. Don’t do it on yourself, but it’s OK to use it on
someone else. The reason for the hole in the middle is so that you can spin the
magnet over the person’s body. A pregnant woman should not use it on herself or
anybody else who is pregnant because the energy will pull the baby and you don’t
want to fool around with Mother Nature

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 166


- Do not use a magnet if the person is diabetic. (Magnets move energy and blood
quickly, either toward or away from an area, depending on the polarity. Since
diabetic are prone to numbness and tissue death in the limbs due to poor circulation,
magnet usage could cause damage.)

- Do not use a magnet over an open wound

- Do not use the south side of a magnet over an infection, on a swollen area, over a
tumour, in an area of cancer, or on a meridian that is already overcharged. The
south side stimulates growth and increases circulation

- Never put the south side of a magnet against the back or spine, as it can cause
indigestion or pain

- Limit the use of the north side in a single location to 8 hours. Limit the use of the
south side for shorter spurts, not more than 30 minutes. The area you are treating
will energy-test weak when the south side of the magnet is no longer working

- After using magnets, check and correct for any homolateral patterns or scrambled
energy patterns (see the appropriate sections of this manual)

In response to a question from the Question and Answer session with Donna after Module 5
regarding if you can tape a magnet onto an organ or the spine and if there is any area which
we should not tape magnets to, the answer was as follows:

Do not put a magnet anywhere near the heart. Also, if somebody has a pacemaker,
do not use a magnet on them. Other than the heart, you can put a magnet
anywhere. A lot of people have told Donna that you can go online and get little
magnets that are on tape that acupuncturists use sometimes when they want to send
somebody home with that point. And you can put those strips alongside, not on the
spine, but right next to the spine, where your neurolymphatic reflexes are. Donna
has lost count of the number of people who have told her they don’t need to go to
chiropractors anymore after doing this. They just get themselves taped up and leave
it on for a while!

Magnet sensitivity test (page 22 of the Module 5 handout)

1 Spin a magnet in the person’s field. (Spinning a magnet creates an electromagnetic


field that can influence the subtle energies of the body.) Begin 2 feet away from the
body and, testing periodically, gradually move the magnet toward the body

2 If the Spleen Meridian energy-test remains strong, magnets are OK to use

3 The same test can be used for sensitivity to crystals

How to use magnets to relieve pain (page 21 of the Module 5 handout)

- Hold or tape the north side of the magnet over an area of pain (unless there is an
open wound). If there is an open wound, place the magnet immediately below the
area of pain (away from the head and closer to the fingers or toes)

- Hold the south side over the area of pain for about 30 seconds to restore balance
following longer use of the north side

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 167


- Do NOT tape the south side of the magnet directly on a painful area. Instead, place
the south side above the pain (closer to the head). The exception to this is in the
case of a burn

- Do not leave the magnet on too long. This may upset internal balances. Stop using
the magnet immediately if the pain increases

- There are no exact guidelines for how long to keep the magnet taped to the body.
Certainly remove the magnet as soon as the pain is resolved or if it begins to
intensify. The pain may be resolved in as little as a minute or you may need to wear
the magnet for several hours or several times each day

Check in every now and then - maybe every 20 minutes or so - to see if the pain has
left or is getting better. It’s always going to be different with every person and how
bad their pain is. If the pain has left, take the magnet off. But if it’s getting better, but
is not all the way there, then keep it on a bit longer

When the pain stops, remove the magnet. If the pain returns, replace the magnet

Never keep the north side of the magnet taped on for more than 8 hours, or apply the
south side for more than 30 minutes. If you have it on too long, the pain will start to
come back, so it’s really important not to leave it on for too long

- When doing any of the pain techniques, always make your last step doing something
to calm Triple Warmer. This will help the body to integrate the new habit that you are
trying to help the body understand ie the new habit of having less or no pain and it
will help the body feel safer

How to use magnets on broken bones

Tape a magnet north side down on the break (unless the skin is open). Tape a second
magnet north side down below the break. Tape a magnet south side down above the break.
You are making a circuit. Leave magnets on the body, energy-testing periodically. Remove
the magnets if energy localising (see ‘Energy localising’ section on page 74) on the break
tests weak.

Using crystals instead of magnets (see page 22 of the Module 5 handout)

Crystals carry primary natural vibrations. Even cut-glass ‘crystals’ can be effective because
they reflect light. Spinning a crystal over a point has an immediate effect on the energies
involved with that point. You may want to use a crystal if:

- Spinning a magnet in the person’s auric field weakened an indicator muscle

- The person has a condition listed in the ‘magnet cautions - be careful’ list

NB Sometimes a quartz crystal is too much. Natural crystals are minerals that have different
energetic effects on the body. Cut-glass crystals are more neutral. They can be used for
any intended effects without unintended side effects. You can also put a string through them
so they can spin.

In response to a question from the Live Q&A Coaching Call after Module 5 with Donna and
David regarding what is the difference between using our hands for our chakras, or using a
crystal, the answers were as follows

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 168


Donna: If you use your hand, again, we have so much electromagnetic energy on our
hands and, when you hook up and circle above a chakra, you are in complete
resonance with it. It’s an amazing thing to feel that energy in your hands and you
really affect the chakra. When you use a crystal, it’s the prism of light that comes
through, so that has a healing affect also. I suggest people try doing it both ways to
see which feels best for them

David: One of the ways I like using a crystal the most, is when working on yourself,
because it’s a little harder to do the circling on yourself. The way we suggest is that
you have a cut glass crystal with a hole on the top (that a necklace chain would
normally go through) - see next page - and use dental floss through the hole and
then spin it. Our only reference to using a crystal is in the Energy Medicine Kit

How to use a cut-glass crystal on a string (see page 22 of the Module 5 handout)

- Spinning counter-clockwise pulls energy out of an area


- Spinning clockwise draws energy into an area
- Spinning back and forth clears congestion

MODULE 6 - THE CHAKRAS

The Hindu word ‘chakra’ means disk, vortex, or wheel. Chakras are spiralling wheels of
energy that encode and process physical, mental, emotional and spiritual experiences. The
major chakras are comprised of 7 spiralling ‘pools’ of energy that are situated from the top of
the head (Crown Chakra) down to the base of the spine (Root Chakra).

The chakras carry fresh energy into the body and transport stagnant energies out of the
body. They service the organs, muscles, ligaments, veins, and other body parts that sit
within their field.

Besides transporting energy, the chakras are also energy processing plants. They register,
sort, and store energies that contain information about your body, your emotions and your
life’s journey. Sensitive practitioners can sometimes tune into your chakra energies and
register details about your history while working with you.

Chakras are like filing cabinets for your experiences. An energetic imprint of every
emotionally or physically significant event you have experienced is recorded in your chakras.
Each chakra encodes a slice of your personal story and has a specific theme - see ‘primary
themes of the major chakras’. Chakras are like your own encyclopaedia. They are your
story, your journey through life and your trials and tribulations - these all show up in your
chakras. Because they store memories, the chakras influence your sense of identity and
your response to current experience.

Chakra energies play important physical, psychological and spiritual roles in your health and
vitality. Undigested experience (including emotional reactions) can lodge in specific chakras
and block healthy flow and further growth.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 169


You can work with the Chakra System to clear deep energetic blocks, release the past and
open your way to a renewed future. Whenever you are working on a chakra, you are
cleaning, clearing and positively impacting all the organs and organ systems that sit in that
chakra. When you clean and clear that chakra, you are impacting all those organs and you
are also impacting all the meridians attached to those organs. Whenever you clear any
chakra, you are also clearing and making the meridians in that chakra better, too. This is
why Donna has said many times that, if she has only one chance to work on someone, she
will choose to do chakra work, as it is the system that helps all the systems.

You may be surprised to discover how many ways chakra work can help heal the body. You
can pick up a great deal of information about a person in their chakras. Since the chakras
directly feed the meridians and the aura, and their overflow goes into all the other systems,
they are useful in helping all energy systems. They store impressions from every experience
the person has and carry deep wisdom that is to be trusted.

Chakra work is also a gentle way to work with someone who is very ill.

Each of the main chakras is associated with specific physical organs, psychological themes,
and spiritual functions. Since all of these can affect your health and vitality, understanding
these aspects can help you figure out what is going on as you work with specific chakras.
Each chakra plays a specific role in supporting and governing the functioning of your
physical body and its organs. Each chakra also helps influence different hormones, clearing
and balancing the chakra energies regulates your body chemistry, improves your mental
acuity and strengthens your overall health.

It’s really important to understand that each chakra is meant to feed another chakra so that
you are one complete person. The more that there is an interaction, a communication,
between them all, the better you are. The energy on the chakras climbs the spine and each
one feeds energy into the next one. When it gets to the back of your head, the energy
literally bends and goes out the Third Eye area.

The 7 primary chakras

There are 7 major chakras and many minor chakras. The chakras are named after the
areas of the body over which they spin. The chakras are also in continual interaction with
the aura and meridians, each giving energies to and receiving energies from the others.

The chakras have 3 major functions - physiological (based on where the chakra is situated
and what organs are near it), psychological (based on those themes) and spiritual (based on
that which is beyond your personal self). These functions are explained in more detail
below.

Physiological functions of the chakras - ie the way they function (page 8 of


the Module 6 handout)

Where the meridians are like rivers of energy, each chakra is a pool of energy, which
continuously bathes the organs, muscles, bones and other tissue in its proximity. The
chakras are feeding and bathing those areas that they sit over. The chakras provide fresh

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 170


energy, remove excess or stagnant energy, and have a strong influence on the health of the
body areas they support.

So, for instance, the heart chakra is feeding the heart and all the organs in the heart area.
So each chakra has numerous organs that it’s feeding and that is the physiological function.

If the chakra is clear and clean, then that organ is getting clear, clean energy. If the chakra
is murky, if it’s been disturbed in some way, then the organs beneath that chakra are not
getting clear, clean, energy and that harms them. So it may be much more subtle than an
illness, but it may be that you are just not at your best along the lines of what those organs
do.

Psychological function of the chakras (page 8 of the Module 6 handout)

Each of the chakras is associated with a different psychological theme. Though an


oversimplification, the themes of the chakras are as follows:

- Root Chakra: safety and survival

- Womb Chakra: creativity, your unique expression in the world

- Solar Plexus Chakra: identity and power; what you have to do; who you have to be.
It pushes out into the world in a particular way

- Heart Chakra: love, connection, grief and sadness

- Throat Chakra: expression

- Third Eye Chakra: perception (because it’s over your eyes and ears), abstraction and
extrasensory perception. It tunes into other energies in your environment and picks
up and reads those energies

- Crown Chakra: transcendence, connection to the heavens, directly into that which is
beyond your personal self

So in each of the chakras - going along with the theme of that chakra of safety, of creativity,
of power in the world, of connection, of expression, of perception, and of a larger connection
- there are memories of what happened in your past, that had to do with that theme. So
every emotionally significant experience gets coded in one of those chakras, and the chakra
that corresponds with the theme of that experience.

For example, experiences with love and connection are registered in the Heart Chakra and
processed there. That means your beliefs about love, your joys and wounds from love, and
your relationship habits all have an energetic imprint in the Heart Chakra. These become
building blocks for your way of operating in the world around love and connection and for
your overall personality. The information held in a chakra influences the way that chakra’s
theme plays out in your life.

David explained that, as a psychologist, the first time that he really understood that chakras
have memory and hold information about a person’s past, was when Donna told him about a
woman she worked with. Donna was working on the woman’s Heart Chakra, doing the kinds
of motions which are covered in this Module, and suddenly Donna felt enormously sad. She
was feeling the energy in the woman’s Heart Chakra and Donna couldn’t understand why,

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 171


but she started crying. The woman herself, who had come to Donna for help, didn’t
understand why Donna, her healer, had broken down into tears! Donna just kept moving the
chakra and she finally said to the woman, “I feel as if I’m about 6 years old and I’ve lost the
most important thing in the world to me - it doesn’t feel like a parent but it feels so important.”
It turned out that this was when the woman’s brother died - her big brother, who she had
looked up to so much. As Donna said that, the woman was suddenly in tears herself.

What often happens in these early losses is that they never get fully processed and they
never get resolved. And so that unresolved energy is sitting there in the chakra. As Donna
worked the chakra and the woman was conscious of what was going on, that began to get
resolved. In fact, what happened afterwards was that it changed the woman’s relationship
with her husband dramatically because, after her big brother died, she had never again been
able to love as fully as she had loved her brother. Her love had closed off there and had a
block to it. However, after the chakra clearing, the woman was able to open up to her
husband in new ways, so it was really very transformative.

Spiritual function of the chakras (page 8 of the Module 6 handout)

Each chakra serves a spiritual function and resonates with particular forces in nature/the
Universe. Just as the broad chakra themes of survival, creativity, power, love, expression,
perception and transcendence are rooted deep in our being, they are themes in nature/the
Universe, as well. The Root Chakra resonates with nature’s patterning around the theme of
survival. The Throat Chakra resonates with nature’s patterning around the theme of
expression.

By meditating on a chakra, you can open yourself to nature’s/the Universe’s wisdom about
that chakra’s theme. The chakra is always energetically connected to nature’s/the
Universe’s brilliant patterning and is channelling it to inform your personal journey. (As
above; so below.)

It’s a strange concept. Carl Jung talked about it as archetypes. He said there is, in the
atmosphere, in the field that surrounds us, a kind of energy, which is sometimes referred to
as a morphic field, which governs that theme. So there is your personal love for somebody,
but there is also the archetype of love, that human beings can tune into. And that archetype
actually influences how we love, or how we create, or how we express our power, or how we
communicate. And so tuning into that archetype is a way that you can strengthen that
quality.

For instance, supposing you have difficulty expressing yourself. One of the ways that you
can work with that difficulty is to tune into your own Throat Chakra and sense out that there
is a more ideal way of expressing that is out there - and invite that into your Throat Chakra,
so it begins to energetically impact what is happening in your chakra - and that can then
transform your relationship to that issue.

Special properties of the Root Chakra and Crown Chakra (page 8 of the
Module 6 handout)

The Root Chakra and the Crown Chakra play special roles in pulling energies into the body.
The Root Chakra pulls energy up from the Earth. This energy rises up through the body to
meet energy that the Crown Chakra pulls down from above.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 172


Traditional cultures view these as complementary energies: Earth (yin) and sky (yang)
energy, rooting each of us in both the power of the Earth and the power of the sun and the
heavens.

Working with the chakras as an energy

What we are going to be doing in this Module is learn how to work with the chakras as an
energy, in an orderly and systematic way. It doesn’t require being able to see the energies.
It’s something done with your hands, in an almost mechanical way, that is then shifting the
energies of the chakras and it will actually begin to heal what needs to be healed.

But, more importantly, as we go through life, the energies get a bit disorganised. And so
what we will be learning first is a kind of pulling out the old energy from the chakra and
bringing in the new energy.

We have already learned that when you flush a meridian it’s like changing the oil. Clearing
the chakras is like changing the oil, so it gets it really clear, and then more healing can
happen and the functions can take care of themselves.

Primary themes of the major chakras (page 9 of the Module 6 handout)

Memory is certainly stored in your neurons, but it is also stored in your chakras! Chakras
are like filing cabinets for your experiences. An energetic imprint of every emotionally or
physically significant event you have experienced is recorded in your chakras. Each chakra
encodes a slice of your personal story and has a specific theme. These themes are:

- 1st or Root Chakra - the urge for life


The rudimentary, instinctual, animalistic drive for survival is carried in the Root
Chakra. It includes aggression, flight, primal sexual energies, imprints from threats,
and the tribal aspect of our connections to one another

It starts down at the bottom of the trunk of your body and it governs your sex glands
and just how safe you feel in this world. It is how grounded you are and it gives you
drive. It’s like a pilot light, a light in the Root Chakra, and when it gets activated, it
lights up all the other chakras, and you have passion and drive and you are really
moving through life

However, when it goes on a low ebb, you might not have that passion. You might not
have the drive that you would like to have and you might not have any interest in sex
at all

If you have had issues in your life with who you belong to, like your family, or a group
you belong to, or your neighbourhood - that affects your Root Chakra because that
chakra deals with how safe you are. If, for instance, you are the only black person in
an all-white neighbourhood, maybe that neighbourhood hasn’t helped you feel really
safe. That might affect you in your life and how safe you feel. If you don’t feel safe,
you might feel on alert all the time, or have a real visceral reaction (from instinct
rather than from reasoned thinking) over things that would not actually take your
safety away - but you don’t know it

- 2nd or Womb Chakra (or Sacral Chakra) - childlike wonder, joy, intuition and creativity
The second chakra is the seat of our natural innocence, our wonder, joy and
creativity. Faith and trust, delight and passion, aesthetic sensibilities, intuition,
psychic abilities and natural healing are all characteristics of this chakra. The second

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 173


chakra is, for both men and women, the ‘womb’ of our creativity. All our creativity
comes from the second chakra - whether you are an artist, a singer, a crafts person
etc

Donna sees all sorts of colours in this chakra, but if she sees indigo or powder blue
on the second chakra, she’ll know this person has real, strong, natural healing
abilities, more than just learning. This just comes naturally to some people, like
some people have a green thumb with plants

Many adults squash the information and the energy from their second chakra,
because they grew up and they learned to put away the child inside of them - and the
second chakra is very child-like. It’s when you have faith, and you just feel good, you
love everybody around you, and you don’t think that anyone is going to harm you.
You feel safe, you like to play, and feelings bubble up and you aren’t afraid of saying
anything. A lot of people have lost this part of themselves. However, working with
the chakras, you often have this come bubbling up again

- 3rd or Solar Plexus Chakra - ego, identity and power


Who am I? What do others think of me? What is required of me? What do I want?
How do I get it? are all themes of the third chakra. It is competition, it’s all the
“shoulds” - what you should do, better do, have to do, need to do and the list you are
making all day long. It is also who you see yourself as, versus who other people see
you as. It’s making your way into the world of other people

This chakra is where you learned how to be, how you were supposed to be, and what
you should do in life. It’s about your identity, how you think of yourself and how other
people think of you, how you want to do it right and you want to make people proud
of you and pleased with you. It also governs judgment, how judging you might be, or
your anger, or your fear. So, sometimes, you can get lost in the third chakra (and
also the second chakra). This chakra has to do with competition, but also
confidence. It has to do with courage, to stand tall and do something that you really
need to do but are afraid to do, because fear can also sit in the third chakra. It can
be about a sense of power and really knowing yourself, power in the world versus
power with yourself, versus power over others

It governs the adrenals, the organs of the liver, and gall bladder, stomach, spleen,
pancreas, diaphragm, and kidneys - and all of those organs also have to do with all
sorts of information. There is so much that the Solar Plexus governs that there is an
awful lot of information and energy and even confusion sometimes within you over
judgements and self-criticisms and things like that

The Solar Plexus Chakra, gets more mature the older you get. As a teenager, it
begins to grow quite a bit and it starts blocking the energy of your 2nd chakra and you
put away your childish things.

- 4th or Heart Chakra - love and connection


The soul embraces the body at the Heart Chakra making it the bridge for our natural,
loving connection to others, to ourselves and to the Universe. It is about love and
also Universal love. It also carries the wounds and losses of broken love. The Heart
Chakra governs a certain kind of spirituality, because when your heart is open, you
feel more connected with everybody

In the heart chakra there is also the lungs and it carries sorrow and pain and old
grief. So you might pick that up sometimes when working on a person’s heart
chakra. Donna said that there was something you can sometimes feel while working

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 174


on any chakra, but, particularly on the heart chakra, especially if the heart has really
learned a lot of lessons. You might find your hand going in a figure of 8 after you
have been clearing the Heart Chakra. Figure 8 energy is an energy that binds
different systems together

- 5th or Throat Chakra - integration and expression


Information from all the other chakras passes through the Throat Chakra, which
integrates this information for internal communication as well as expression in the
world

It is more different, more unique, than any other chakra. It does spin in a disk, on a
spiralling wheel, like all the others. There is also Figure 8 energy here - both Figure
8s going to the side and also going up and down. It also has 7 chambers and those
chambers are connected to all the other chakras. So the idea is, since it governs
expression mainly, before you express, before you speak, before you bring out an
energy of love or caring or anything for anybody else, you will feel the wisdom from
every chakra, and it goes through to each of these chambers. So it is very powerful.
In ancient times, it was considered the ‘Holy Grail’ of chakras because they thought it
was the last one to open. Sometimes, we think it’s the Heart Chakra that is the last
to open, but if the Throat Chakra is open it pulls up the information from the heart,
and everything else, before you speak. The Throat Chakra also governs your
tongue, your metabolism, your voice box and your thyroid

- 6th or Third Eye Chakra (or Pituitary Chakra) - sensory/extrasensory perception and
abstract thought
The 6th chakra gives us perspective on how everything within us and in our
environment fits and relates to everything else. We know the world through our
senses and we transcend our immersion in the physical world through the use of
language and symbol. The 6th chakra also enables us to transcend the world of
thought. It is the chakra of sensory perception, abstract thought and extrasensory
perception

It governs the Third Eye, your pituitary, your mind, the left and right hemispheres of
your mind and your hypothalamus, which sits in the middle of your head. The
hypothalamus governs the fight of flight response and also all the automatic things
that your body will do for you, so it is very important. It is about your mind, but it’s
also about a gland in the middle of your head that is very important that when it
works well, your hormones work well, your mind works well, and you are calm in
stressful situations. This chakra also helps you be witty - if you are one of those
really witty people - that is your sixth chakra. You can also create from your sixth
chakra because your mind is so open and flexible and flowing

Donna usually sees in the sixth chakra some shade of sea greens, aqua and
turquoises, violets, mauve and different shades of red. Because information from all
of the chakras will come up and will literally bend at the back of your head and come
out there, you might see colours of every kind of all the other chakras

It is considered the Third Eye chakra because there is an illumination that can come
right out of this space above your nose and between your eyes. Many, many, people
are psychic from that place. They can see things, they can get visions, they can
know the future. You can work with it to get stronger. You don’t have to be psychic
for that chakra to be turned on. It might just balance the hemispheres of your brain

A lot of people are very psychic from the 6th chakra. There is an energy at the Third

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 175


Eye and you really do tap into it and you can start pulling energy from there. The
energy on the chakras climbs the spine and each one feeds energy into the next one.
When it gets to the back of your head, the energy literally bends and goes out the
Third Eye area

If you live in a culture or family that hasn’t supported that, it tends to go dormant. But
many, many people can open this chakra up again. It starts with intuition

- 7th or Crown Chakra (or Pineal Chakra) - soul and spirit connection
Soul and spirit connection with the cosmos is the theme of this chakra. This is the
energy centre that places the self in the context of the bigger picture

The Crown Chakra governs your pineal gland and it opens you to the heavens. It
allows you to really feel connected-in when you pray. Some people can channel
information and that is the seventh chakra. It allows you to feel at one with the whole
world and to feel safe - just like the root chakra is about feeling safe, so is the
seventh chakra. You know you are being taken care of and there is no worry

You might get every colour under the sun in the seventh chakra and, sometimes,
people see white there

In old artist portrayals of the halo, it is really the Crown Chakra. It is your connection
outside of the body, outside of this realm, and you really do feel not alone when you
are connected in that way

- NB - The Belt Flow


Donna also mentions the Belt Flow in the video. The Belt Flow surrounds the waist
and connects the energies of the top and bottom parts of the body. Its vital health
task involves distribution of the energies up and down the body. It also helps all of
the meridians to move in harmony and orchestrates the chakras. Psychologically
and spiritually, the Belt Flow is involved with how grounded we are, how inspired we
are and how grounded we can stay when reaching to our spiritual heights

The energy of the second (Womb or Sacral) chakra can be cut off from that of the
third (Solar Plexus) chakra, as well as the others above it. The energy system
between the second and third chakras is called the Belt Flow, which is one of the
Radiant Circuits (see ‘radiant circuits’ section). The Belt Flow, which goes around
the waist, can become like a huge wall above the second chakra that cuts off the
second chakra’s natural spontaneity, trust and faith. When this happens, as it
frequently does in modern Western culture, the person may be tormented by
merciless self-hatred, a desecration that often originates in the third chakra’s
attempts to shape an identity that differs vastly from the natural child of the second
chakra. Once the connection between the second and third chakra is opened,
energy rises; knowledge about a truer, kinder, gentler self can filter up; and self-
condemnation and self-hatred begin to dissolve in that knowledge

The Belt Flow is visceral (ie it proceeds from instinct rather than from reasoned
thinking) and it is characterised by showing basic emotions. You can feel it
sometimes and it can often squash that energy down in the second chakra

Each chakra layer carries a different kind of information (page 10 of the


Module 6 handout)

Each layer of a chakra carries different kinds of information about its theme. In general:

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 176


1. The outer layers process recent experiences. The top layer picks up the energies of
events in their raw form as they are being lived. Sometimes, particularly in times of
stress or change, this layer can feel more like debris and clutter than a coherent
energy field.

The recent experiences of the outer layers get sorted through - eg what are the
principles and learnings you can derive from this particular experience. This all
happens unconsciously but, as you process the recent experience, it goes into the
middle layers

2. As the outer layers process the raw experiences of life, this processed information
passes into the middle layers of the chakra where it becomes part of the person’s
accumulated knowledge, beliefs, confusions, stories, self-concept, habits, sense of
worth, and wisdom based on the experiences of this lifetime. Even though it has
been processed, this information may carry distortions and gaps corresponding with
the person’s adaptation style and energy habits. So those are your learnings, those
become part of your sense of reality, your sense of what works in the world, your
sense of, “who am I? What am I meant for? What can I do? Who can I trust?” All of
that is in the middle layers

3. The deepest layers of a chakra contain genetic, inherited and other information that
the person brought into this lifetime. The deepest layers are what you are born with,
the inherited parts of the chakra. This kind of intuitive knowledge and character
strengths are sometimes difficult to explain, as if they were learned during past
lifetimes. The talents of child prodigies, such as Mozart, are an example of these
inexplicable gifts. Also, for instance, if you are working with your 3rd chakra, that has
to do with power and identity, this is the identity that is really core for you, it even
goes beyond what you learned in your childhood. What you learned in your
childhood, those experiences certainly shape you, but they are not as deep as the
deepest layers - they are more in the middle-to-deeper layers - that is what was
shaped very early on in your life

Chakra clearing preliminaries (page 12 of the Module 6 handout and 30


minutes into the video)

In order to clear clogged energy and enable greater energy flow to assist chakra movement,
you need to do 3 chakra clearing preliminaries - the Spinal Flush, the Energy Sweep and the
Power and Electric Point Stretch.

The Spinal Flush (page 12 of the Module 6 handout)

This technique moves lymph to help the body release toxins and, at the same time, calms
the nervous system. You are clearing the person’s neurolymphatic reflexes down the spine.

Full details of how to do this exercise are on page 73. Ask the person to lay face-down while
you sit or stand at their head. Then, starting at the neck and continuing all the way down the
spine to the sacrum, press in deeply on the fleshy tissue on each side of the spine. Use real
pressure, using the knuckles of both hands. Do NOT press directly on the spine itself. At
each spot, make a few tiny circles with strong pressure, a little back and forth motion with
your knuckles, and then move about an inch or two further down until you get to the base of
the spine.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 177


The diagram on page 12 of the Module 6 handout shows what each point either side of the
spine relates to.

Energy Sweep (page 12 of the Module 6 handout and 30 minutes into the video)

In this technique, while the person is still lying face-down, you pull energy down the body
from each shoulder across to the opposite leg and then off that foot. You are literally
‘brushing them off’ and helping their energy cross over.

To do this, flatten your palms down their back and shoulders. Then reach across on the
person’s shoulders and drag from the shoulder diagonally down their back, over their butt
cheek and down their leg to their ankles and then off that foot.

Power and Electric/Central Point Stretch (page 12 of the Module 6 handout and 32
minutes into the video)

The position of the Power Point and Electric/Central Points are marked in the diagram on
page 12 of the Module 6 handout.

As the person lies on their back, put your hands at the top of their neck, the bottom of their
head, where there is an indent right in the middle - it’s right at the top of the spine - and push
in and pull out with your fingers at the centre notch along the back of the skull - this is the
Power Point location. This point is marked on the diagram.

Now move outwards about half an inch each side of the Power Point and you will find the
Electric Points (or Central Points). Massage these points deeply for a few seconds.

These Points clear a lot of energy which makes it easier to have the chakras start moving.

For more detailed information on the Electric Points, see ‘the Electrics and the Electric
Points’ on page 67.

Energy-testing individual chakras (page 13 of the Module 6 handout)

NB To test your own chakras, just tap twice and use any of the self-testing methods you feel
comfortable with. Trust your own sensing.

To test that another person’s chakras are functioning well:

1 The person you are testing extends his/her arms at a 90º angle from the body,
bringing the back of the wrists together and holds. If the person is standing, the arms
are held straight out from the body; if s/he is lying down, the arms are extended up
toward the ceiling

2 Slide both your hands between the person’s raised arms, beneath their wrists, your
palms facing outward. Then push outward, attempting to separate the person’s
hands, while the person being tested tries to keep them joined. Care - If the person
bends their elbows, this energy-test will not work! NB In the video, Donna just grabs
holds of each of the person’s wrists and then tries to pull them apart!

If the person loses their energy when you pull their hands apart (ie their arms come
open easily), this indicates whether any of the chakras are clogged, weak, or out of
balance

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 178


The above is the general test for the overall energy flow in the chakras, but it does not
provide information about specific chakras.

3 The same procedure is used for testing individual chakras, except that, prior to the
test, the tester either taps twice on the chakra being tested, or taps twice in the field a
couple of inches above the chakra being tested

So, while holding the person’s wrists together with one hand, tap at 7 different places

The first place is the Root Chakra, which is a personal part of a person’s body, so
you don’t have to actually tap their body there, just do 2 taps a couple of inches
above their skin (you will be in their energy field)

Then tap right on the second chakra with your middle 3 fingers, while holding the
person’s wrists together with your other hand. Do 2 taps and then pull the person’s
wrists apart

Then tap the 3rd chakra, 2 taps and then pull the person’s wrists apart. You are
tapping right in the middle of the chakra

Then tap the Heart Chakra, which is right in between the breasts - do 2 taps and then
pull the person’s wrists apart

Then tap and pull on the Throat Chakra, and then the 6th chakra (ie 2 taps on the
person’s forehead) and then the 7th chakra (ie 2 taps on top of the person’s head)

4. If the person’s arms come apart, chakra clearing and balancing is likely needed, as a
weak energy-test indicates that the chakra is clogged, weak or out of balance

Energy-testing chakra connections (page 13 of the Module 6 handout)

To energy-test the connections between 2 chakras:

- The person being tested extends arms forward, bringing the backs of the wrists
together and holds, as with the regular chakra test

- Tap the 2 chakras being tested simultaneously (ie 1st with 2nd chakra, 2nd chakra with
3rd chakra etc)

- Slide both your hands between the person’s raised arms, beneath their wrists, your
palms facing outward. Then push outward, attempting to separate the person’s
hands, while the person being tested tries to keep them joined. Care - If the person
bends their elbows, this energy-test will not work! NB In the video, Donna just grabs
holds of each of the person’s wrists and then tries to pull them apart!

- A weak energy-test indicates that the 2 chakras tested do not have a strong
connection at the moment of testing

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 179


Chakra clearing and balancing - background information (page 14 of the
Module 6 handout)

In response to a TribeLearn question about working on chakras, what we are doing when
chakra clearing is balancing the energies of the chakras so that they can move information
freely into and out of the system in order to nourish and sustain it. The body is intelligent
with its energies and we are serving that intelligence when we clear chakras.

You can clear your own chakras as often or as infrequently as you choose to. Some
practitioners clear theirs on a daily basis, while others clear theirs rarely. It’s up to you!
Clearing chakras is not required, it’s just recommended. Chakras can accumulate excess
energy and clearing them can help them to function more optimally. For how to actually
clear and balance chakras, see page 182.

Chakra energy travels along a two-way street:

- Physical body    Outward


- Outside body    Inward

A chakra’s rotational spin is its mechanism for moving energy in and out of the body.
A counter-clockwise spin sends energies outward - you are cleaning out the energy from the
chakra, pulling out stale old energy. A clockwise spin accepts energies and stabilises them -
you are putting in and balancing the energies of that chakra.

Think of the circling in the same way as installing a screw in wood. You turn the screwdriver
clockwise to screw it in and counter-clockwise to pull it out.

Chakra clearing/balancing starts with moving your hand(s) over the chakra in a counter-
clockwise direction. (Direction is determined as if there is a clock, face-up, on the person’s
body as you look at them. See the diagram on page 14 of the Module 6 handout.) The
major exception to this rule is the Crown Chakra in men. When balancing a man’s Crown
Chakra you begin by spinning your hand in a clockwise direction and end with a counter-
clockwise circling. This is simply because of the way the Crown Chakra spins on a man.
Going clockwise first on men is also really good because it pulls in the balance to their
‘yangness’. Their yang energy is very, very good, which is the way it needs to be. (NB If a
man is gay, you still go clockwise first!) We work with a man’s Crown Chakra differently
because the yang energies come into that chakra more strongly than with women and we
don’t want to interrupt that flow abruptly.

Because of the electromagnetic charge on your hands, the chakra’s energy will entrain itself
to your hand. First the top layer of the chakra and then (as it becomes organised and
stronger in its counter-clockwise spin), all of the layers, will begin to move in a counter-
clockwise direction, releasing and pulling out stagnant, stale or blocked energy from each
layer.

After the counter-clockwise spin has cleared the chakra, allowing ‘energy toxins’ to loosen
and be swept clear, all 7 layers are able to make spontaneous adjustments in their internal
flow and balance. They also come into a fresh balance with one another. Then, a clockwise
spin will bring all 7 layers of the chakra to spin in a clockwise direction, allowing fresh energy
to enter and stabilising the change.

Charka work often spontaneously takes on a sacred quality.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 180


When working with the chakras, you don’t know what layer you will be working with but you
will certainly start with the outer layers. But then, whatever needs to be healed, that tends to
happen as you do chakra sessions.

If you don’t see or feel energy, like Donna does, we are kind of taking all this on faith. But
when you are working with chakras, sometimes that energy does become palpable to some
people. As you move your hands over the chakra, it is like moving through something that is
real, that has texture and warmth, and you can feel the sensation of that. So, as you are
working with your partner, be alert for that.

Donna said chakra clearing and balancing is one of those techniques that you will grow to
love more and more, because they give so much information. When you have time to drop
into the many layers of a chakra, sometimes you can be astounded by what comes up.

Working on your own chakras

In the video, Donna says that, if you don’t have a partner, you can do the following things on
yourself, and you will have an understanding, but it helps to do it with a partner!

In response to a question from the Module 6 Question and Answer session regarding if you
can do this technique of clearing chakras on yourself, the answer was as follows:

Donna: Most people want somebody else to do it to them because it’s so wonderful
just to relax into it. But, I have had quite a few people over the years who say, “Oh
no, I would not give up doing it to myself every night” and their health has gotten so
much better just by doing that to themselves

David: Another thing about doing it on yourself is that sometimes something is going
on. You have a pain in your chest and you just choose to do it on that area. Maybe
it even comes in as just a little first aid - and you saw in our Pain Module that one of
the techniques that we use for working with pain is going counter-clockwise in the
area with small circles

In response to a question from the Module 7 Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David
regarding how do you work on your own chakras, Donna and David’s answers were as
follows:

Donna: Over time you will begin to have a feel of the chakras that are weaker in you,
but you can do that counter-clockwise with the chakras. Move very, very slowly over
each chakra if you are having trouble feeling it. This sensitivity to chakras grows
over time. For me, I can do just 3 circles and my hand is picking up energy. When
you go backwards you are pulling energies or toxins out of the chakra. Always shake
it off and then, going clockwise, it will smooth things out

David: The counter-clockwise is pulling energies out and is pulling energies that are
disorganised out. Whenever you pull energies out, what is good about that, is that
fresh energy comes in, so when you go in a clockwise direction what you are doing is
you are stabilising. Also, it’s nice to be able to do a chakra clearing with someone
else and we encourage you to find an energy partner to work with and exchange the
energy work with each other. You have now done enough in this class to teach
others and/or to show them the videos

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 181


To balance and bring oxygen to the chakras (Darth Vadar Breath)

Do the Darth Vader Breath exercise - see page 232. This exercise brings the oxygen up
your chakras and is excellent for stability and centeredness. (It is also good to do when you
have panic or anxiety.)

Use the back of your throat to make the sound you make when you whisper. Let your breath
out all the way with an audible, “aaaaaaaa”, then catch it in the back of your throat and make
a loud sound, like Darth Vader, as you breathe in, while moving your head up and back. Do
this for as long as you can and then let your breath out, still making the Darth Vadar sound.

Watch the YouTube Eden Energy Minute Darth Vader Breath to see exactly how it’s done.

How to clear, balance and strengthen chakras (page 15 of the Module 6


handout)

This is demonstrated at 30 minutes into the video. It’s usually best done in relative silence.
Soft background music can enhance the atmosphere. Some communication may be useful,
but chatting usually distracts from the process. Attend to your own energies, your grounding
and your physical comfort while working with the chakras. Shake the energies off your
hands as frequently as you wish.

NB The ‘default’ is for the practitioner’s hands to:

- Be placed about 4 inches above the chakra


- Make circles that are about as wide as the person’s body
- Move at the speed of about one circle in 5 to 7 seconds

1 You may want to start by testing the chakras

2 In response to a TribeLearn question, the main thing to remember when clearing


chakras is to stay present and stay grounded - don’t let your mind drift to your
grocery list when clearing a chakra! Pay attention to what you are feeling and get
feedback from the person whose chakras you are clearing

3 Rub your hands together briskly and then shake them off

4 Move one or both hands about 2 to 6 inches above the Root Chakra in a counter-
clockwise direction. Circle slowly for about 3 minutes in quite a wide circle. (This
clears and balances the chakra.) Shake your hands off

Some people find it easier to circle just with the left hand in a counter-clockwise way,
but you can do it any way you want**

You probably will begin to feel things. If you do not feel anything, go slower - you
have to get into the vibration of this energy. If you feel the energy, let that guide you
as to the speed you do the counter-clockwise circles. Sometimes you will feel
warmth as you are circling, because you are in the energy field

It may hurt your hands when doing the circling - it is always going to vary depending
on who you are working with. The things on a chakra can be physical or mental and,
if it’s physical, that may show up as pain in your hands. However, you can always
shake off your hands and then come back to the chakra - you don’t need to take the

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 182


person’s energy in. As soon as you feel a sensation in your hands, just shake it off
and then go back to what you were doing

Sometimes, when you are working on a Crown Chakra, there will be a release and it
will actually push your hand out a bit, further away from the head

NB 3 minutes is a suggested time, not a requirement. Chakras’ needs can be very


individual. It can be beneficial just to give them all a quick clearing. Pay attention to
how they feel and how long it seems to you they need, rather than a specified
amount of time.

5 Then, move one or both hands clockwise over the Root Chakra for about 2 minutes.
(This re-stabilises the chakra.) Shake your hands off

6 Continue in the same manner through all 7 chakras, remembering, if you are working
on a man, that when you get to his Crown Chakra, you circle clockwise first, then
counter-clockwise second

The timeframes of 3 minutes counter-clockwise and 2 minutes clockwise are often


used in classes. As you become more attuned to working with a chakra’s energies,
you will sense when it is time to change direction or shift to the next chakra

NB In response to a TribeLearn question as to whether you should clear the chakras


starting with the Root Chakra and work upwards to the Crown Chakra, as detailed in
the video, and also if it is OK to just work on a single chakra that you think needs
clearing, the answer was:

if someone has a headache, or has a tendency to accumulate energy in their head, it


is best to begin with the Crown Chakra and work your way down to the Root Chakra.
Yes, you can also work on just one chakra that needs attention

7 End with Figure 8s over the person’s body to help anchor the changes

8 When you have finished clearing and balancing the chakras, to help all of the
energies of all the chakras to be very fluid with each other, ask the person you have
been working on to lay their hands on one or two of their chakras at the same time
(eg their Root and Solar Plexus Chakras) and you hold your hands on, say, their
Throat and Third Eye Chakras. Stay like this for a minute or two before you re-test
their chakras. Doing this isn’t necessary, but it’s a technique for connecting them so
that they are in this new balanced state and they are flowing with one another again

9 Re-test the chakras

If an energy test indicates that the chakras are not connected and chakra clearing
does not improve this, you may want to add further Energy Medicine techniques to
strengthen chakra connections - see ‘techniques to strengthen chakra connections’
starting on page 189

10 Donna advises clearing the room after you have been doing chakra work. See
‘clearing a room after doing chakra work’

** In response to a question from the Module 7 Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David
regarding if it matters which hand you use in chakra clearing, Donna and David’s answers
were as follows:

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 183


Donna: The left hand has a tendency to pull out energies more, so a lot of people find
they can do better with their left hand when they go counter-clockwise, and then they
go clockwise with their right hand. But your energies will connect up with the chakras
as they wish. You might feel that it feels better to do it with either your left or your
right hand - so do it the way it feels better to you. If you can’t tell which feels better,
do the counter-clockwise circles with your left hand

David: There is a principle, which holds for many of the exercises, which is that there
is a correct, traditional way to do it. In chakra clearing, the principle is that it is the
left hand which goes counter-clockwise to pull the energies out and the right hand
goes clockwise, to stabilise the energies. But, if that doesn’t feel right to you, then
that is your body and your energies talking to you in their language - which is feeling.
So do it the way that feels right - which might not be the way that we teach it. That is
you taking your own authority by listening to what your energies are telling you

In response to a question from the Live Coaching Call with Donna and David after Module 8
regarding if it is it necessary to clear the chakras etc on an empty stomach and if it matters if
you just ate, Donna and David’s responses were as follows

Donna: People are different. Some people don’t like to have eaten first because they
say it is like stirring the pot of the food you have just eaten, especially when you go
counter-clockwise it can feel a little unsettling. I personally like to have eaten first if
somebody is going to work on me because, for my issues, I don’t want my blood
sugar to drop

David: It is really a matter of individual preference. For the most part, you will get
good results either way

NB The Clearing and Balancing Chakras technique is demonstrated at 30 minutes into the
video and, for the purposes of the demonstration, David explained that he would act as the
timer and that Donna would go for about 2 minutes on each chakra on the counter-clockwise
position and then about a minute and a half on the clockwise position. However, when you
practise this yourself, you can take much more time than this.

Donna explains on the video that, because she didn’t have an unlimited time frame, she
would have to teach within the time she had and, because of this, she said most people
practising on the video probably would not get below the first or second levels. She advised
that when we practise it, we should do it for longer and drop deeper. Also, if you practise
again on the same person, the next time you work on them you will drop deeper - you will
probably begin at a deeper level.

Donna gives an idea of what energy might feel like on the video. She said it sometimes
feels like she could fall through it - it’s almost like a wind tunnel. Sometimes she feels like a
kind of current is going up her arm. If that happens, don’t let it get past your elbow, or you
will take on that person’s energy. So just shake it off. (Or put your arm under cold water
and it will move right off.)

Donna explained that each chakra is different to the others - so you might feel yourself, for
instance, circling quicker with some chakras than with others. You might find, as you are

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 184


circling counter-clockwise above a chakra that your hand starts to slow down. It’s as if an
energy grabs you for a little bit and you suddenly move at a different pace and a different
tempo. Donna often gets pictures when she is in a chakra.

Donna said that sometimes, when you are circling above a chakra, it feels a particular way,
and then, all of a sudden, it feels different. That usually means you have moved into another
layer of the chakra and there are other energies and issues there. When you have been
practising this for a while, you will know when you have dropped into another layer - it
becomes really clear as it is a different energy. Donna said that if you feel any pain while
circling any of the chakras, it is interesting that it may not be the chakra that you are circling -
it may be coming from a different chakra.

Donna explains on the video that there is something you can sometimes feel while working
on any chakra, but, particularly on the Heart Chakra, especially if the heart has really learned
a lot of lessons. You might find your hand going in a figure of 8 after you have been clearing
the Heart Chakra. Figure 8 energy is an energy that binds different systems together.

On the video, after Donna had cleared a person’s chakras, the person described how it had
felt. She said that, when Donna was working on her Root chakra, she felt a lot of pain on
her left side. She explained that, many years ago, she was walking along the street and she
was hit by a car and landed on her left side, which left massive scar tissue there. She said
that, while Donna was working on her, she felt the pain actually going up through her body
and out of her Crown chakra!

How long does it take to clear chakras?

In response to a question from the Module 7 Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David
regarding how long should we do chakra clearing and how do we know that they are all clear
and hooked up, Donna’s answer was as follows:

You can’t do too few, you can’t do too many, because you will get different results -
so don’t even worry about that! However many chakras you clear, or how much you
do it, you are helping that energy body at every level of the chakras. The more you
do, the more it will help you. But when you do just a few, you are still affecting your
chakras and, for some people, it’s better to do just a few and then balance it out. So
don’t worry about how many to do. It will become clearer and clearer as time goes
on. Every time you clear the chakras, you will have more coherence in your energies.
It’s like meditation for the energy fields!

Miscellaneous questions and answers re chakras

In response to a question from the Module 7 Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David
regarding if you should work all 7 chakras at a time, or if it’s OK to work on just one at a time,
Donna and David’s answers were as follows:

Donna: You can work on just one at a time. There is no wrong way to do this. You
might find you have a more complete sense of having completed them all when you
do 7, but we all have vulnerabilities in our chakras, or if you are going through
something that particularly speaks to that chakra, yes, work with that one chakra at a
time

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 185


David: Sometimes, in a session with a client, there may only be one chakra that
needs attention and so we will only work on that one chakra but it is more common to
balance them all

In response to a question from the Module 6 Question and Answer session regarding if there
is a simple way to hold your own chakras, the answer from Donna was as follows:

I start with both my hands on one chakra and then move one hand to another chakra
and it really doesn’t take long before they hook up. It happens in seconds - and so
that is a really good thing to do

In response to a question from the live Q&A Coaching Call after Module 5 with Donna and
David regarding if Donna sees chakras on the back as well as on the front of the body and
how do we clear the chakras if the client is lying face down, Donna’s answer was as follows:

Yes, I see chakras on the back, but they do not go out as far as on the front, because
energy just goes out further on the front. But on the back, it’s very important and, if
someone is lying on their tummy, you can do the very same thing on their back as
you would do on their front, by clearing their energies and then strengthening them -
counter-clockwise first then clockwise. It’s very good. For many people, if they have
tension or tightness or pain in their back, that is the way to take it away - by just
chakra clearing

In response to a question from the live Q&A Coaching Call after Module 5 with Donna and
David, regarding how often a chakra needs to be re-treated after it has been healed for the
first time - ie how long does it stay stable - Donna’s answer was as follows:

First of all, if you’ve done your chakras once, the thing is that there are 7 layers on
each chakra. So if you do a chakra clearing once, you might have got through one,
two, or three layers, but there are other layers beneath that. So you could come
back again and, if you have cleared them and they stay clear, you will find that you
will be at another level. When you are at another level, often you begin to feel it not
just underneath your hand, but also on top of your hand, because your hand is
between the layers. So there isn’t an absolute answer - you always get more and
more, and the more you go into deeper layers, the more you unfold the person’s
story and an answer might be there on a deeper layer

As to how long it will last, everyone is different. It depends whether you start working
on someone when they are ill, or healthy, or if they have a lot of self-knowledge
about themselves. You start at your own unique place in life and the more you grasp
that the more you sense when you need to do it again - ie if you should do it again
quickly or if it can wait. How long something lasts really depends on your energetic
foundation and that’s why doing the DER is so valuable, because it helps to build that
foundation - and then other techniques will take better and last longer

In response to a question from the Live Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David after
Module 8 regarding if you are doing a chakra clearing on yourself, what is the difference
between using your hands and using crystals and is one better than the other, Donna’s
response was as follows:

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 186


I think they are totally different experiences. If you use your hand, I think it is a
stronger training in really feeling the energy and starting to assess what your hand is
picking up because, if you go slowly enough, you will feel that vibration, or buzzing,
or pushing on your fingers. If you use a crystal, you don’t feel that. Some people like
using a crystal sometimes and their hand at other times. A crystal has its own
vibration and, because you have a crystalline energy field, that crystal will also
resonate with your energies

In response to a question from the Module 6 Question and Answer session regarding if you
should do anything else when chakra clearing, besides moving your hands and if you should
hold an intention of clearing, the answers were as follows:

Donna: Intention can certainly be a part of this, but, a long time ago, I just began to
trust the process of energy, and its brilliance of knowing what to do, and I just simply
move energy. I had a very full practice for 23 years and I had so many people who
would come who didn’t believe it. So I think I intentionally didn’t want my intent to be
there - except that I just wanted them to experience energy so much and that they
would find what a brilliant, holy, thing goes on inside them

David: Actually, you are coming into the session with an intention - an intention of
healing, an intention of really having an experience that is going to be good for your
client - so that is the intention that carries things. One of the points that Donna has
been making is that actually moving the energies, really is adequate for carrying out
that broader intention

In response to a question from the Module 6 Question and Answer session regarding if,
when you are having your chakras cleared, you can’t feel your physical body and what you
can do to help the person that is being worked on to ‘come back’, the answer was as follows:

Do any of the ‘techniques to strengthen chakra connections’ or do the Hook-Up - and


that will bring you back into your body

In response to a question from the live Q&A Coaching Call after Module 5 with Donna and
David, regarding if a sea salt bath would help someone who was working on clearing their
Sacral Chakra, the answer was as follows:

Sea salt is good but, if you are clearing your Sacral Chakra, hold Circulation Sex
sedating points. It makes everything relax and then it’s easier to move that energy.

NB If, when pushing your fingers in on your butt muscles, you have any tenderness
there, sedate Circulation Sex meridian

In response to a question from the Module 6 Question and Answer session from someone
who had cleared her partner’s chakras and, when she re-tested him after clearing them, they
had all gone from weak to strong, except for one chakra - which was strong before and had
become weak after she had cleared it, the answer was as follows:

On the video, Donna chakra-tested the person on the chakra and she was weak.
Donna then said she would show us what really happened. She put her fingers in
the person’s chakra field (ie just above her chakra) and she held them there. Donna
said she could feel herself dropping down into another layer. Then Donna tapped
above the chakra and chakra-tested the person again and she was strong. She

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 187


explained that the questioner had cleared one layer at least and then she found
herself in another layer

In response to a question from the Module 6 Question and answer session from someone
who asked why, when she was working on her partner’s Heart Chakra, she felt heaviness,
almost sadness, but it only occurred when she was moving clockwise, not when she was
circling counter-clockwise, the answer was as follows:

Usually people feel pain or something like that in the counter-clockwise movement.
But, if you feel it in the clockwise, one of 2 things is going on. Either you are moving
it out and things are smoothing over or, what the person needs, is a simple thing that
usually deals with your Assemblage Point. But you can also do little Figure 8s above
her heart and then that energy, that doesn’t quite turn, will do so

Donna explained that she is not teaching the Assemblage Point on this course, but it
is an energy that is out in front of your Heart Chakra that can lead you and guide you.
Some things in our lives can throw that Assemblage Point ‘off’

In response to a TribeLearn question regarding chakra clearing: The questioner said they
start at the root chakra and work their way up, but every time, on the second chakra, or at
latest when they arrive at the third chakra, they get either so tired that they can’t hold their
arms up any more and feel an urgent need to lie down, or they get a feeling of irritating
tension in their arms and body so that they have to shake their arms off and get away from it,
unable to continue any further. They said it seems to become a little easier with time on the
Root Chakra and second chakra, but the third seems still the same. They asked what this
means and if there is anything different they could do to get over this. The answer was as
follows:

My answer would be different depending on whether you were working on your own
chakras or someone else’s, as well as if it was the same person each time

If you are having this experience from working on someone else, I would recommend
that before you start working you do the DER or at the very least Connecting Heaven
and Earth, Celtic Weave, Hook-Up and Zip Up. This will get you grounded and well-
boundaried before you move into the other person’s energies

If it is the same person every time, this may be information about their chakras

If it is different people, it may be information about yours!

You could try ‘opening’ the Crown Chakra before starting, to give the energy a place
to escape if it’s building up. You could also try doing a short period of time on each
chakra - say, a minute to do the counter-clockwise circles and 30 seconds to do the
clockwise. After doing all the chakras in this way you could try to go deeper. You
could also use this approach on yourself. You could also lay one hand on the chakra
and the other hand on the forehead, very lightly, and see if this disperses the energy

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 188


Techniques to strengthen chakra connections (page 16 of the Module 6
handout)

When an energy test indicates that the chakras are not connected and chakra clearing does
not improve this, you may want to add the following further Energy Medicine techniques to
strengthen chakra connections. (Donna demonstrates these techniques in the Module 6
video.) There is also an exercise to help all the chakras talk to each other well and have
good communication and flow between them in the Module 6 Energy Dance.

The Belt Flow Pull/Clearing the Belt Flow/Belt Flow Energy Test

See page 16 of the Module 6 handout.

The Belt Flow surrounds the waist and connects the energies of the top and bottom parts of
the body. Its vital health task involves distribution of the energies up and down the body. It
also helps all of the meridians to move in harmony and orchestrates the chakras.
Psychologically and spiritually, the Belt Flow is involved with: how grounded we are, how
inspired we are and how grounded we can stay when reaching to our spiritual heights
The Belt Flow Pull/Clearing the Belt Flow helps to connect the second and third chakras. It
also helps open energies of the pelvic region and increases flow between the top and bottom
of the body. The Belt Flow is a Radiant Circuit. If it needs clearing, it cuts the energy off
between the third and second chakras.

Standing on one side at the person’s waist, reach across to the other side of their waist and
place your hands down under their back, at waist level. Pull the energy from the back to the
front of their waist and across their belly towards you a few times and then, on the final
swipe, pull it down their body. Then, with a firm touch, pull it straight down the outside of
their opposite leg (ie the leg nearest to you), smoothing it down the leg and off the toes of
the foot. Reverse sides, pulling the energies in the opposite direction, and then down off
their other leg

To do the Belt Flow Energy Test, while the person is lying down, hold your fingers tight
together with your thumb out at a right angle and put this hand around the side of the
person’s waist. Then energy-test by having the person lift their arm (the arm on the same
side of the waist you are holding) straight up, with their fingers and thumb pointing up
towards toward the ceiling. Then put your open hand just below their wrist and try to pull the
person’s arm back down to their side. If their Belt Flows is out, they won’t be able to hold
their energy and so their arm will drop downwards.

Figure 8s

Do Figure 8s back and forth between each set of chakras (first to second, second to third
etc).

Clear the Chambers of the Throat Chakra (page 17 of the Module 6 handout)

The Throat Chakra is physically different from the other chakras. It has the same swirling
pattern of energy, the spiralling wheel, seen in the other chakras. It is also a major Figure 8
that goes both ways ie from top to bottom and from one side to another - a bit like a four-leaf
clover. But the main thing is that it has 7 chambers that extend up and down the throat, like
bridges connecting the head to the torso - and each of the 7 chambers matches to one of the
chakras.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 189


The 3 chambers on the left side of the Throat Chakra (to your right when you are facing the
person), moving from the outer edge of the neck toward the centre, represent the 6th, 4th and
2nd chakras. These are the yin, or receiving, energies. (See the diagram on page 17 of the
Module 6 handout.)

The 3 chambers on the right side of the Throat Chakra (to your left when facing the person)
moving from the outer edge of the neck toward the centre, represent the 5th 3rd and 1st
chakras. These are the yang, or expressing, energies.

The centre chamber maintains a balance between these 2 functions and represents the 7th
chakra. So, moving from a person’s far right to their far left, the chambers are numbered: 5,
3, 1, 7, 2, 4, and 6.

Stretching the chambers of the Throat Chakra may enable energy flow and more open
connection between all of the chakras. This can also enhance the ability of the 5th chakra to
play its role as the body’s major centre of expression and communication.

Donna demonstrates stretching the chambers on the video. Put one hand on the jawbone
and the other on the collar bone - go from one side of the edge of the jawbone/collar bone,
all around to the edge of the other jawbone/collar bone. This is very good for the Throat
Chakra. You can then begin to do the circling. You can work a long time on the Throat
Chakra because, after a while, you might find that you are feeling a very different energy on
one of the 7 chambers, then another - and you just want to work on that one for a while.
When Donna first started working on the volunteer’s Throat Chakra in the video, the circles
were circles, but then they went an elliptical shape. This is because you find yourself going
along those chambers - but you can cross them - just do anything that feels right.

Donna mentioned on the video that she was demonstrating this technique in a class once
and, when she got to the man’s Throat Chakra, Donna’s hand started hurting very badly.
The man said that there was nothing wrong with his Throat Chakra. Donna explained to him
that the Throat Chakra covers the mouth and goes down and then the man opened his
mouth and he had gingivitis in his gums.

Taking Down the Flame Exercise (page 18 of the Module 6 handout and 1 hour 11
minutes on the video)

This exercise is wonderful for grounding your energies and strengthening the connections
between all of your chakras - it helps the communication between all the chakras. (It is also
good for both reducing blood pressure and getting better sleep.)

Rub your hands together and then shake them off, then:

 Stand, placing your open hands on your thighs, fingers spread. Sense the
energy travelling down your legs as you become grounded. Take a deep
breath in through your nose and out through your mouth

 Breathing deeply and slowly, make a sighing ‘Haaaaaaaaa’ sound with each
exhalation. Imagine the fire or chaos or clutter in your mind dissolving with
each sigh

 Inhale deeply, lifting up your body as you do so, as usual, as you circle your
arms widely over your head until the fingertips and thumbs of each hand
meet.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 190


 Exhaling with the ‘Haaaaaaaaa’ sound, bring your thumbs down to the Crown
Chakra, above the centre of your head, fingertips and thumbs still touching.
Remain in this position as you inhale

 Exhaling with the ‘Haaaaaaaaa’ sound, bring you thumbs to the point
between your eyebrows - your Third Eye. Keep them there as you inhale

(NB It is deliberate not to do this on the Throat Chakra - see explanation


below)

 Exhaling with the ‘Haaaaaaaaa’ sound, bring your thumbs down to the point
between your breasts, the ‘Sea of Tranquillity’ - the Heart Chakra - fingertips
and thumbs still touching. Hands remain as you inhale

 Exhaling with the ‘Haaaaaaaaa’ sound, bring your thumbs down to your navel
(Sacral/Womb Chakra) and roll your hands down so they form a pyramid
beneath your navel. Keep them in this position with your next inhalation

 Exhaling with the ‘Haaaaaaaaa’ sound, flatten your hands and stretch them
down to the original position at your thighs. Keep them in this position as you
inhale

 Exhaling with the ‘Haaaaaaaaa’ sound, slowly smooth the palms of your
hands all the way down your legs as you bend over, finally letting your hands
hang down as you inhale. Make a Figure 8 at your feet

 Still hanging over, exhale with the ‘Haaaaaaaaa’ sound. As you return to a
full stand, inhaling, continue making Figure 8s all the way up, then reach up
high above your head. Put the backs of your hands together and then let
your arms come down, exhaling with a final ‘Haaaaaaaaa’ sound

NB You don’t go to the 3rd, 2nd, or 1st chakra with this exercise. If you don’t
skip the Throat Chakra, it will disconnect the chakras. You miss out the
Throat Chakra because it is so convoluted with so much energy and Triple
Warmer and Spleen also govern that chakra. It’s like almost an insistence on
that energy that it will direct what is going to happen there. We can’t direct it
ourselves - it will blow the circuits (ie if you don’t miss out the Heart Chakra
when doing this exercise and then you re-test all the chakras, they will all be
weak.) We don’t get to control the one on the Throat Chakra!

Energies released as chakras clear (page 19 of the Module 6 handout)

Because the chakras hold energetic memory and emotional energies, working with them can
sometimes bring forth emotions, imagery, memories, or sensations - in either the person
whose chakras are being cleared, or the person who does the clearing. These released
energies may lead to feelings that range from excitement to distress.

The goal, however, is to assist clearing and balancing the chakra energy. Too much focus
on the stories or images that may emerge can interrupt the process, though some people
are able to stay in the moment and connected with the chakra’s energies while describing
them.

Remaining grounded and centred as you enable this process of clearing is most important.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 191


When you receive images or stories, it may be difficult to know how to interpret them or
whether they relate to you, or to the person receiving assistance. It can also be delicate to
know which images or insights to share with this individual and what might not be
appropriate. Be aware that your words may be given considerable authority by the person
you are helping, so be very conservative in any interpretations.

If you feel it is important to share an impression, make sure to state it objectively. For
example, you may want to say, “I keep seeing a little red car” and not, “I sense you had a
little red car and there was pain around that”.

Before the chakra clearing, discuss whether or not your chakra clearing partner would like to
hear your impressions. Discussion after the chakra session can often be a way of
confirming what is valid or appropriate and what is not.

In response to a question from the Module 6 Question and Answer session from a
clairvoyant who sees colours and pictures when doing chakra clearing and if working with
the chakras could be a way to do readings with people, the answer was as follows:

Donna: I will say one thing and David will say the opposite! What I am going to say
is, and the more you do this the more you’ll find that you can’t keep your mouth shut!
It’s so hard because you are picking stuff up and it is real - and you know it. What I
always did was really check it out with them. I didn’t want to impart anything of mine,
but I got more and more to know that this is theirs - it isn’t mine at all - and you get
better and better at that

David: I’m not really going to say the opposite! I’m just going to say that Donna was
careful not to project her own material onto the client. When you are working on a
chakra, you don’t know if it’s information from inside of you, inside of your chakra,
that is resonating with them. So, if you get an image, it’s like a hypothesis. It’s
something to check out, it’s something to be aware of. Maybe you say something
then because it’s relevant right then. You might say it as an inquiry - for example,
you might say, “I’m feeling a lot of sadness right now. Does that resonate with you?”
There is a danger with some people who do get a lot of images of over-interpreting
them. So utilise images cautiously. But, sometimes, they are gems. They really
have information that is not in the person’s consciousness yet that is very relevant.
And, if it’s coming up, they may be ready to hear it - but just go gently

Donna’s insights into chakras

“I don’t remember a time in my life when I didn’t see chakras, although I didn’t call them
chakras when I was little. I just saw these little vortexes, these wheels of energy that spin in
front of people and inside of them - and energy would go out from them and come back in. I
knew even then that they also went around the body, feeding the different organs.

So chakras are cool! It’s a joy for me to open people to the magnificent power of chakras.
Chakras are everything - they are electrical, they are chemical, they are hormonal, they are
very physical and they are very spiritual. They are different colours, but not the colours you
usually would see perhaps in a book that would pertain to what they say belongs to different
chakras. Actually, every single person in this world has different vibrations and colours -
because that’s what colour is - it’s a vibration.

Chakras represent who you are. They reflect what you have gone through and what you go
through. And since there are 7 layers on each chakra, each layer is a different time in your

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 192


life or a different experience that impacted you deeply. Each layer might be a different
colour, too. So it’s quite an encyclopaedia of the person you are.

Each of the chakras rotates at a different speed as well. The lower chakras rotate at a
slower speed, because that is usually much denser energy, and the higher chakras rotate at
faster speeds. But things can be different on every individual person because a person’s
energy is as unique as a thumbprint.

I will give you an example. Once in a while, I will see a colour that not many people would
attribute to the Root Chakra, which is your first chakra. Sometimes, on the deepest level, I
will see purple there. Now red is attributed to the Root Chakra, but you will see a different
colour because there are different things you have gone through. Purple often signifies, to
me the energy you came in with, what you already knew, what you had learned in other
times and you were born with it this time. So sometimes, when you can tap into that energy,
it really does change your life magnificently

Here is something more: just as a brain has neurotransmitters that alter your mood and your
feelings, so do your chakras. There are neurotransmitters in every chakra in your body and
that is why, suddenly, you can feel differently than you did just a little while before.
Something shifted in your chakras, so that is really powerful.

So it is so empowering to know that you can handle and affect your own moods by working
with your own chakras.”

Clearing a room after doing chakra work

In response to a question in the coaching call after this module about clearing a room after
working on chakras, Donna said she always wants the energies cleared afterwards and she
said there are a couple of ways to do it. Opening a window is a good thing. She also makes
large, massive circles in a counter-clockwise direction with her hands, going slowly around
the room, and then she does figure 8s all around the room and that clears the room.

Circulation Sex Meridian and the chakras

Donna explains on the video that sometimes you can really get the ball rolling of that energy
moving on your chakras by looking on the back side of the muscle man chart, at his gluteus
medius, gluteus maximus - his butt. And if you find that you can’t feel energy moving or
things are just really stuck, even if you are working with someone, if they push in on their
butt muscles, and if they have tenderness, you can sedate Circulation Sex and it will make
all the chakras move faster and heal and empty out. The meridians feed the chakras and
chakras feed the meridian. So if you can sometimes work with the meridians it will suddenly
trigger the chakras to start spitting more.

MODULE 7 - THE AURA

The energy field surrounding our body is called, in many ancient and modern spiritual and
healing traditions, the Aura. The Aura is talked about in many, many, traditions, using
different language, but they all talk about something that surrounds you. You see it in
religious paintings. In modern science, it has been detected and talked about as the bio
field.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 193


When your Aura is healthy and balanced, it attracts nourishing energies to you. When it is
not, you are vulnerable to energies that are harmful and you may not be receiving energies
you need.

In its role as a receiver and transmitter, your Aura also sends energies inward, to your
chakras and other energy systems. It holds and transmits holographic information about
who you are and how you will develop physically, giving instructions to the cells and
communication centres of your body on how to organise themselves. The Aura is a sensing,
pulsing set of interrelated energy fields that are the blueprints for your body and mind.

This Aura, or bio field, has a number of functions, but its main one is to protect you and to
help you to provide an environment within which you can thrive. It also connects you with
the energies that are in the environment that surround you.

It is very interesting how this works and there are 2 very different metaphors that help us
understand the Aura - see below.

Your energetic space suit or antenna

One of those metaphors is a space suit - it is our invisible space suit that is protecting us
from environmental energies that are not in harmony with us, that are not in resonance with
us, that are not good for us.

The other analogy is that it is an antenna, doing just the opposite of what the space suit
does. The space suit is keeping energies out. The antenna is tuning in to energies that feed
us, energies that we need, people that are going to be nourishing for us, things in the bigger
atmosphere that are going to be nourishing for us, bringing in the energy of the moon, the
energy of the sun and whatever energies our bodies are needing, energies our bodies are
craving.

So there are those very different metaphors that both capture a bit of what the Aura is about.

In recent decades, scientists have found more and more evidence that gives credence to
energy fields surrounding the body as recognised by ancient shamans, folk healers, and
many religious traditions.

One of the first scientific measurements of the body’s bio field was reported in the 1930s
when Harold Burr, a neuroanatomist at Yale, measured the electromagnetic field around an
unfertilised salamander egg. Burr loved to tinker with electronic things. He would build
electronic gadgets and he figured out a gadget that could measure the voltage that comes
off creatures. His early work was with salamanders and it turned out that salamanders have
a measurable electronic field around them. So that was interesting enough on its own!

However, in this electronic field, he could actually see from the field where the spine was
and where it connected with the other parts of the salamander. It was visible in the field.
And he said, “Well OK, that’s very interesting. I wonder when that develops.” So he began
looking at younger salamanders to see when it developed - and younger ones, and younger
ones, and younger ones. And he found something that was amazing, which was that the
younger ones had basically the same size field as the mature salamander. Isn’t that odd?
He went all the way back to the unfertilised egg, and that unfertilised egg had the same field
as the mature adult - which is remarkable. It was shaped like a mature salamander, as if the
blueprint for the adult were already there in the egg’s energy field. The electrical axis that
would later align with the brain and spinal cord was already present in the unfertilised egg.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 194


It’s as if the field is there and then the body develops into that field. It’s like the field provides
a blueprint for what is going to happen. And that solved the mystery - because science
understands that genetics gives you the programming for all the parts, but there was never
really a way in biology to completely explain how a cell in the leg knows to become a leg cell,
and how a cell somewhere else becomes the kind of cell it’s meant to be ie how it all
organises itself.

Burr gave us a way to understand that this field is organising the physiology to help it grow.
Then he took it even further, because he went on to find electromagnetic fields surrounding
all manner of organisms, from moulds, to plants, to frogs, to humans, and he was able to
distinguish electrical patterns that corresponded with health and fitness.

He found something even more interesting, which is that illness showed up in this field
before it manifested itself in the body. So he did an amazing experiment in Bellevue
Hospital in New York on about a thousand women, who came with gynaecological problems,
and who did not know what the basis was. They measured the energy field and then they
did the diagnosis. And Burr was able to predict with about 90% accuracy, who had cancer,
and who would turn out to have cancer, based on this field.

This got written up in the annals of science and major medical journals and it was then
promptly forgotten. Because we don’t have any paradigms (ie in the philosophy of science,
a generally accepted model of how ideas relate to one another, forming a conceptual
framework within which scientific research is carried out) to really understand this, to think
this way. So that work was forgotten for many, many years. And now, with Energy Medicine
and other complementary health, they are starting to look at that work again and see if they
can replicate it.

But this is not only a modern thought - it goes way back to ancient Chinese medicine. In
many provinces, you only paid the doctor when you were healthy - you didn’t pay the doctor
when you were sick. When you were sick, the doctor had to work on you to try to get you
better, and work really hard, but you didn’t pay extra for that because the doctor had already
failed you by the time you were sick, because his job was to keep your energy field healthy.
And if you keep your energy field healthy, then the body stays healthy.

What Burr found out is that the energy field becomes unhealthy before the body becomes
unhealthy. So this has tremendous implications for Energy Medicine - to understand these
fields and the Aura is the key in understanding this. So, as you know, there are 9 energy
systems that Donna worked with, but the Aura is the one that surrounds us, that surrounds
all our other energies.

Summary of what the Aura is and why it is important (page 2 of the Module
7 handout)

Your Aura is a multi-layered invisible cloud of electromagnetic energy that surrounds you
and helps to integrate and align your energy systems. Your Aura serves 2 major functions:

- like an enveloping spacesuit, it protects you from energies in the environment that
might harm you
- like an antenna, it pulls in resonant energies that support and harmonise all the
energies in your body

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 195


Disturbances in your Aura can lead to health problems or simply to feeling ‘out of it’. These
disturbances can be corrected with simple exercises.

As you strengthen your Aura’s ability to shield against harmful influences and to take in what
you need, you may experience surprising improvements in your physical, emotional and
spiritual balance.

A strong Aura promotes and protects your energetic integrity and can optimise your
connection to the Universe around you. One of the ways you can know if your Aura is strong
is, if you feel confident most of the time - if you feel you can walk into any space and your
Aura is strong around you. When you feel happy, attractive and spirited, your Aura may fill
an entire room. When you are sad, despondent and sombre, your Aura crashes in on you,
forming an energetic shell that isolates you from the world.

Whereas each chakra is an energy station that is attuned to larger energies in the Universe,
the Aura serves as a two-way antenna that brings energy from the environment into your
chakras and sends energy from your chakras outward. Some Auras reach out and embrace
you. Others keep you out like an electric fence.

Sensing the Aura as you do the Daily Energy Routine

You can use your practice of the DER to hone your ability to detect the Aura. Before you
begin the routine, tune into the space around your body and notice what you experience.
What do you sense about the extent, density, and quality of this energy field? Add this to
your ‘inner inventory’ of what you are feeling physically and emotionally.

The layers of the Aura (page 6 of the Module 7 handout)

On the Module 7 video, Donna looked at the audience in the class and she said every one of
them had a very different Aura from each other. Some of their Auras went way, way, out,
some kind of collapsed in, and some of them had some holes in them. Everybody has lots
of different colours and diagrams and Figure 8s in their field. Our Aura has at least 7 layers
out. So each layer is a very different experience of what it means to you. And all of it
together makes you.

Each layer surrounds the body like a fluid and energetically dynamic eggshell, and all 7 nest
within each other like Russian Dolls. The 7 layers are:

1 The innermost layer of the Aura, your Etheric field, mirrors your spirit and serves as a
blueprint for your physical body

2 The second ‘Protective Mist’ shields you from destructive energies that range from
microwaves to the negative vibes of anger. It protects you from any onslaught trying
to come at you and get you - and you are protected as much as that layer is strong

3 The Mental/Emotional layer extends beyond this and contains information about your
sensory systems and which of these are dominant for you. Whether you are more
‘mental’ or more ‘feeling’, or whatever you are, it will show up in this field

4 The fourth layer is what Donna calls your Morphogenic field. It holds the energies of
the Five Rhythms and imprints this personal energetic signature on your body’s
primary energy systems via resonance. Major shifts in your life show up in this band.
It’s like a template of your rhythm, your values, the things that are deep in your soul.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 196


If you are going to change, if you are going to shift, it will really show up in that band
and it will show up very strongly if you are going to go through a major shift in your
life. You hold your habits in there, but it is also your rhythm that is so much more
than a habit. It is from probably conception onwards - your rhythm

5 The fifth or Celestial layer extends beyond this, giving you the ability to sense and
align with the energies of Nature and the Universe. It is like a wisdom band. It is
also your wisdom that you have carried in this time around in life and it also opens
you up to the spirit and into the Universe. Whatever is in your Celestial band,
reaching out far, shows up there. A lot of people who are really into prayer have a
very strong Celestial band

6 Your Life Colour makes up the sixth layer of the Aura, reflecting the theme of your life
and the lessons it can bring you

7 Finally, the Celtic Weave surrounds and permeates all the rest of the auric layers.
The geometric energy forms that infuse this seventh layer (including large and small
Figure 8s) weave together and vitalise all of the energies that it contains. It literally
weaves everything together and it looks like a lot of Figure 8s far out from your body.
It also weaves into the body, it weaves into the chakras and into every energy system
in the body - so it is very important

All of these bands have extraordinary meaning. They are part of what makes you, you. All
of these layers make up the Aura. It may seem complicated, but the energy body is
complicated, because the physical body is complicated. Think of how much complication
there is with all our different systems, and all our cells and organs, and all that is going on
there. If we agree that the energies are governing all of those, of course the energy body
would be complex. But we can put it all into a simple term - the Aura - and work with it as
the Aura, so that we won’t get overwhelmed with all the parts of it.

NB In TribeLearn, EEM Practitioner Kim Wedman advised that knowing the individual layers
of the Aura by heart and a little bit about each one is invaluable when tracking energy with
yourself and others. She suggested that, in our notes, we write on a separate sheet of paper
each of the layer names and add 3 words that remind us of each layer (eg morphogenic field
= rhythm, life shifts and personality traits). She advised that, if we do this, and really put
some of our personal experience and thought when choosing the 3 words, we will have
made a personal connection to experiencing the Aura and will have a deeper connection to
these fields in our work with both ourselves and others.

In response to a question from the Q&A Live Coaching Call with Donna and David after
Module 8 regarding how subjective or objective is seeing energy and, if 10 people are
looking at the Aura of the same person, how similar will their observations be, Donna and
David’s answers were as follows:

Donna: First of all, when you see someone’s energy, you also have to look through
your own field. You see all the energies in your own Aura, even if they are kind of
backdrop energies, or you see through a film of it. What I have found is that
sometimes people will see precisely what I am seeing, but there are other times
when they see different things. I think that part of it is because they are looking
through their own Aura. Also, people see different things. I know people who see
much more geometrical shapes, or Figure 8s, than colours. Colours very often are
close to similar, but they can be different because you are looking through the veil of

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 197


your own field

David: Many years ago, UCLA did research with clairvoyants and had them look at
the chakras and see if they saw similar things. There was a lot of overlap in what
they saw. But, as Donna said, there is also a difference in the perceptual filters that
each of us has, so some people see nothing, some people see in a sea of colour
and, for some people, it’s much more geometric, so there are individual differences.
One thing about seeing colour is that you are not really seeing colour in this sense.
What is going on there is a vibration of energy. It’s a vibration that our eyes can
learn to recognise as and register as a certain colour, but there is no colour inherent
in the energy. Vibration is what is inherent in the energy and then our sensory
system is involved so that we do see vibrations that are in the electromagnetic light
span, as colour. What Donna sees in addition, and what other energy healers see,
they are not in that electromagnetic light wave area, but they still get registered as if
they were

Donna: Very often, even people who don’t think they see energy, every now and then
they will see energy around a person’s body, but they will see it as light. That is
because light is energy and energy is light and sometimes you will see it as light and
then see it go into a real colour, because colour is the light spectrum broken down

NB Donna believes babies see Auras. She says watching a baby’s eyes move around a
person tracks exactly with the movements she sees in the Aura. Presumably we lose touch
with that ability as children because our cultures don’t talk about seeing Auras, or encourage
or acknowledge it.

More information on the sixth, Life Colour, layer of the aura

Donna explains on the video that, when she looks at somebody’s field, she is looking to see
which is the band that does not shift and change, regardless of what they are going through.
This is an outer band. This is the person’s Life Colour and they were born with that colour
and will die with that colour.

If you meet somebody who has your Life Colour, you have a very similar vibration, on some
level, with them. There is something very similar and you will recognise each other, usually.

The Life Colour is very important - it has more to do with your spirit, your soul, your
everything. Everything about you is the Life Colour on some level, because it’s the big
lessons, it’s the big challenges you have to go through life with, and you are meant to learn
your challenges - but sometimes it takes a lifetime. When you do, it is wonderful. You shift
in a way that sets you free.

Your Life Colour has to do with basic themes that govern your life. The people of the same
Life Colour may be very different in every way, except their life is running through a
particular theme. The theme might be a theme of mothering, or it might be a theme of
spiritual leadership, or organisational leadership, or community leadership.

Donna sees it in colour and it is talked about by other people as a colour. So it is


experience, it’s a colour. But colour is what our eyes translate from a vibration. So it is a
vibration that is there in this field that surrounds everything else. That is the vibration that is
there. So it is fundamental and important.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 198


When to work with the Aura (page 7 of the Module 7 handout)

You can see how important the Aura is for our well-being and for our interactions with other
people and the environment. When the energies of the Aura are clear, strong and balanced,
they support and protect you. Energetic imbalances in any system are reflected in your Aura
and disease can be recognised and diagnosed there before it manifests physically.

When your Aura is damaged or unhealthy, you are much more vulnerable to negative
elements or influences in your environment. It is hard to feel confident and it is even hard to
be social. It is hard to take chances because you don’t feel you have a big support system
around you.

Your Aura may need attention when you are:

- Easily overwhelmed in the presence of others


- Feeling small or ignored
- Experiencing a chronic illness or autoimmune disease
- Highly sensitive to the environment
- Highly sensitive to surrounding electromagnetic energies
- Recovering from a serious accident, illness, surgery or near-death experience

If you have nobody to test your Aura, you will not do any damage by doing any of the Aura
exercises, even if you don’t need to do them. Pay attention to how you feel when doing an
exercise and, if you feel worse afterwards, consider skipping that one. The exercise that
feels the best to you is probably the one you need. See also page 202 ‘What to do if you
have nobody to test you’.

In response to a question from the Module 7 Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David
regarding if it is OK to work on the Aura on a daily basis, specifically, the Butterfly and Celtic
Weave Exercises, Donna and David’s answers were as follows:

Donna: Absolutely. Work on it on a daily basis and it will be very good for you and
you will work up the habit
David: The ‘how often should I do these exercises and how long should I do them’ is
a question that often comes up. It really varies from person to person and you will
find that energy goes in habits. So, when you do something twice a day, you begin
to establish that habit. If, for instance, you are doing the Zip-Up regularly, it helps
Central Meridian flow in that positive upward motion and that is true for any exercise
you have learned in this course. How long it will last also depends, because if your
energies are disorganised, nothing will last as long as it would if you were to have
done it for a period of time

In response to a question from the Q&A Live Coaching Call with Donna and David after
Module 8, regarding how does one know if their Aura needs to be expanded or brought in,
Donna’s answer was as follows:

If you are feeling really alive and sociable and expanded and your energy is really out
there in the world, sometimes you want to come back into yourself. And if you want
to come back into yourself, you will want to pull the energy in. However, if you find
yourself locked into yourself, and you can’t be very sociable and you can’t enjoy the

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 199


world outside of you very much, then you need to go the other way. So experiment,
and notice which one feels right for you - and it will be different, perhaps, at different
times

In response to a question from the Q&A Live Coaching Call with Kelmie and Suzee after
Module 8 regarding what causes your Aura to have gaps or holes in it, Kelmie’s response
was as follows:

It can be from lots of things eg injuries, being in crowded places, an old response that
the body just goes into - there are lots of different things

Energy-test to show how far a person’s Aura extends

This is demonstrated at 19 minutes into the video. Ask the person to stand with both arms
outstretched and to the sides, at shoulder level, fingers extended. Then push down with
your hands simultaneously on both their arms, just a little up from their wrists. The person’s
arms should remain where they were, which indicates a strong test.

A healthy Aura generally extends beyond the fingertips and, sometimes, far beyond them so,
as a starting point, test to see if the person’s Aura goes as far as, say 3” out from the ends of
the person’s fingers.

To do this, ‘slice’ your arm/hand down vertically through the air, fingers extended and tight
together, with your open hand facing the person’s body, about 3” out from the ends of the
person’s fingertips, first on one side then on the other side (without making contact with the
person). When you ‘slice’, you are disturbing the person’s field.

Now energy-test the person again. If the person tests weak (ie their arms go down easily), it
means that their Aura did not extend outwards to as far as where you ‘sliced’ (ie 3” beyond
their fingertips).

So, next, try ‘slicing’ down to the very edges of the person’s finger tips (without making
contact with the person) and then re-test. If, this time, the person tests strong, you know the
Aura extends to at least the end of the person’s fingertips.

So, next, try ‘slicing’ down again, this time a little further out from the person’s fingertips,
then re-test. If, this time, the person tests weak, it means that the person’s Aura extends to
her fingertips, but no further than that.

How to recognise and correct a detached Aura (page 8 of the Module 7


handout)

In the Module 7 video, Donna talks about and shows ways to correct conditions that may
hamper your Aura’s ability to work properly. One of these conditions is that the Aura may
expand too far or detach from the body.

Some people have a disconnect between their Aura and their body - and so this is one of the
ways that they could be vulnerable. Even though the person may have a great Aura, things
could get them sometimes because their own self disconnects from the Aura sometimes.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 200


On the video, Donna explains the reason why a person’s energy sometimes detaches. She
says a lot of people are just really ‘out there’ in the world and sometimes a habit grows that
your energy goes out further and further and is very connected to other people but, then,
sometimes, you are disconnected from yourself a little bit. This makes it harder to come
home to self, or it is harder to find yourself, or maybe you just pick up stuff. You can pick up
other people’s stuff if you are detached.

Donna recounted that she used to have a wonderful teacher who loved to sky dive and he
loved the experience of what that does to your Aura. However, he pointed at someone in
the class whose Aura was detached and he told him never to parachute out of a plane
because he would fall right out of his Aura - he’ll get so detached. So if you are a person
who has a detached Aura, you should never sky dive because you could die. This explains
why sometimes people mysteriously die when doing this - apparently inexplicably.

See below for how to identify and correct this detached Aura condition.

Signs of a detached auric field (page 8 of the Module 7 handout)

- Boundaries may become thin or permeable

- The person’s Aura indiscriminately merges with other energies in the environment

- The person becomes ultra-sensitive, affected far too readily by the moods and
energies of other people and generally ‘picking up’ undesired energies from the
environment

Testing for a detached auric field (page 8 of the Module 7 handout)

Using the General Indicator Test, make a closed fist and bring it in from the side of the
person’s body (so you are not ‘pushing’ the Aura inward) to directly over their chest and 1” to
6” out. Open your fist there, with your palm facing the person’s chest and test. A weak test
shows that the Aura is detached from the body.

How to correct an over-expanded or detached Aura (page 8 of the Module 7 handout)

These exercises can be done separately, or in sequence:

A: Do the Reverse Butterfly Exercise (see separate section)

B: Do the Celtic Weave Exercise (see separate section)

C: Make very small Figure 8s, especially over the Heart Chakra

How to recognise and correct a collapsed Aura (page 9 of the Module 7


handout)

In the Module 7 video, Donna talks about and shows ways to correct conditions that may
hamper your Aura’s ability to work properly. One of these conditions is that the Aura may
collapse in closely around the body. See the following pages for how to identify and correct
this condition.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 201


Signs of a collapsed auric field (page 9 of the Module 7 handout)

When the Aura is collapsed, the person’s energy field doesn’t reach out to others, making
the person seem almost invisible, as if not occupying the full space of his or her body. An
Aura that has collapsed can result in feelings of vulnerability, hopelessness and isolation.

In the video, one of the people Donna was working with had a collapsed auric field and
Donna felt that this may simply be because this person was participating in the class.
Sometimes, when people are in a social situation, their Aura will collapse inward on them -
and this is to be protective.

Illness may correspond with the collapse of the auric field. This may be an adaptive reaction
to severe illness or surgery, as the Aura directs its energies toward the body and the organs,
protecting them and summoning an inward focus for rest, healing and renewal. If, however,
the Aura remains collapsed after healing is well under way, the collapse is no longer
adaptive.

Testing for a collapsed auric field (page 9 of the Module 7 handout)

Ask the person to stand with both arms outstretched and to the sides, at shoulder level,
fingers extended.

Without making physical contact with the person, ‘slice’ your arm/hand down vertically
through the air, fingers extended and tight together, with your open hand facing the person’s
body, in line with the knuckles on the person’s hand (or anywhere before the ends of the
fingertips), first on one side then on the other side. When you ‘slice’, you are disturbing the
person’s field.

Then test by pushing down with your hands simultaneously on both their outstretched arms,
just a little up from the person’s wrists.

A weak indicator test following the ‘slice’ shows that the person’s Aura is collapsed - it isn’t
extending to at least the end of their fingertips. A healthy Aura generally extends beyond the
fingertips - and, sometimes, far beyond them.

How to correct a collapsed auric field (page 10 of the Module 7 handout)

A: Do the Butterfly Exercise (see separate section)

B: Do the Celtic Weave Exercise (see separate section)

What to do if you have nobody to test you for a detached or collapsed Aura

In response to a TribeLearn question regarding what to do if you have nobody who can test
you for a detached or collapsed Aura, the response was as follows:

- Do the Celtic Weave - this will restore the more common imbalances in one’s Aura
and help you get to wholeness regardless of the Aura imbalance. The Celtic Weave
is a great choice for managing your own Aura when you have nobody to test you

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 202


The Butterfly Exercise - to expand a collapsed auric field and make the Aura
go out further (page 10 of the Module 7 handout and 22 minutes into the
video)

If the Aura is collapsed, the Butterfly Exercise can fluff out the Aura to the fingertips.
Slowly and with a deep breath, bring the right hand up the midline of the body, fingers facing
down toward the floor, then go over the head and out and downward on the right side of the
body, fingers down, arm straight, releasing the breath, ending with your hand at your right
thigh, fingers down to the floor.

Then bring the left hand up the midline of the body, fingers facing down toward the floor,
then go over the head and out and downward on the left side of the body, fingers down, arm
straight, releasing the breath, ending with your left hand at your left thigh, fingers down to the
floor. You are making butterfly wings! When you do this exercise, because your energy is
electromagnetic, you take it out through the field. You are pumping your field outward
further

Then the right hand, then the left etc. Repeat 3 times or more, as it is sometimes harder to
build the Aura to its default setting than to collapse it.

Then re-test for the Aura at the fingertips and it should be there. (In fact you could test to see
how far it goes out now - it may now go beyond your fingertips!) If not, repeat this Butterfly
Exercise one or 2 more times.

NB See also ‘Push or fluff the Aura’ exercises on page 205 - as this is also a good exercise
to do for a collapsed Aura.

The Reverse Butterfly Exercise - to pull in or reattach the auric field ie


reattach the Aura to the body (page 9 of the Module 7 handout and 23
minutes into the video)

If your Aura is too expanded or detached, the Reverse Butterfly Exercise can bring the Aura
back to your fingertips.

The Reverse Butterfly Exercise is the opposite of the Butterfly Exercise!

Make a wing by scooping the Aura’s energies up by starting with your right arm at your side
by your thigh, then swing the right arm and hand, arm straight, fingers extended, out, up, and
over the head with a deep in breath and down the midline of the body, breathing out slowly,
fingers spread and standing straight up, the thumb eventually following the Central Meridian
line and so coming straight down the midline of the body

Then, starting with your left arm at your side by your thigh, swing the left arm and hand, arm
straight, fingers extended, out, up, and over the head with a deep in breath and down the
midline of the body in the same way, then the right hand, then the left.

Two to 3 times on each side is usually enough to bring the Aura in, because the arms’ length
is the default neutral setting of the Aura. (Don’t do it too much!)

After twice on each side, re-test the Aura’s extent - see ‘testing for a collapsed auric field’,
although, on the video, Donna re-tested simply by waving her hand a couple of inches over

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 203


the person’s chest, like she was fanning them or waving at them, and then pushed down on
her arms.

If the Aura is not yet at the fingertips, repeat the Reverse Butterfly once or twice.

The person may always have an Aura that extends out far and this exercise will not stop
that, but what it does do is reattach the Aura to the body.

The Celtic Weave Exercise to repair and revitalise the Aura, to correct an
over-expanded, detached or collapsed Aura, for if you have holes or tears in
your Aura, or if the Aura needs reattaching (page 11 of the Module 7
handout)

Like connective tissue that keeps all the energy systems functioning as a single unit, the
Celtic Weave winds and spins through and around the body in spiralling Figure 8 patterns.
Whereas meridians can be compared to streams and chakras to pools, the Celtic Weave is
comparable to a web. It draws all or our energy systems together into a network of
communication through its crisscrossing dance of large and small Figure 8s (and sometimes
other geometrical shapes as well). Because the Celtic Weave aids communication between
energy systems, it enables integrated support to your body. As the criss-cross pattern of
your Celtic Weave grows stronger and more vibrant, you (as a whole) grow healthier and
more vital.

The Celtic Weave Exercise pulses your auric energies outward and strengthens them. It
also weaves your Aura back together, pulling it back into its natural healthy state and
‘stitching’ it more securely to your body. This connects all your energies together so they
operate as a single web. It enhances our inner strength and energy integration and allows
your body’s energy filter to operate with greater resilience and intelligence. Doing the Celtic
Weave Exercise ‘fluffs’ your energies, making them fuller and more capable of protecting
you. It can also build your sense of confidence.

Donna explains on the video that this is something wonderful that everybody can do and
also, if you have holes or tears in your field, or if you need re-attaching, or if you feel that
your Aura isn’t really strong and around you, this is a really good exercise to do.

How you can know if your Aura is strong is, if you just feel confident most of the time. If you
feel like you can walk into any space and your Aura is strong around you. But, if you want it
stronger, or you feel that it isn’t strong around you, do this exercise.

To test if you need to do the Celtic Weave Exercise (page 11 of the Module 7 handout)

Ask the person to stand with both arms outstretched and to the sides, at shoulder level,
fingers extended. With your hands at the end of the person’s fingertips, without making
physical contact with the person, raise your hands high. Then, using your open hand facing
the person’s body, quickly ‘slice’ your arm/hand down vertically through their field at the end
of their fingertips. When you ‘slice’, you are disturbing the person’s field.

Then energy-test by pushing down with your hands simultaneously on both their
outstretched arms, just a little up from the person’s wrists. A weak test indicates a collapsed
Aura, which can be strengthened using the Celtic Weave Exercise. So, have the person do
the Celtic Weave Exercise and then re-test.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 204


This demonstrates how much an Aura affects your own body. It is as much a part of you as
your physical body and you are just connected in to it. But you lose your strength when your
field is sliced.

Donna does this test and demonstrates the Celtic Weave Exercise on the video. (It is after
the 23 minute point.)

How to do the Celtic Weave Exercise (pages 11 and 12 of the Module 7 handout)

1 Stand tall, hands on thighs. Breathe deeply throughout this exercise, in through the
nose and out through the mouth, while lifting your rib cage high

2 Rub your hands together, shake them off, face your palms toward each other and
feel the energy between them. Rub and shake them off again

3 Take a deep breath in and place your palms a little out from either side of your ears
(as if you are in the ‘Tragedy’ position!) and take a deep breath

4 Inhale and bring your elbows together in front of you, palms flat. Exhale, cross your
arms and swing them out high up to the sides

5 Bend forward slightly and cross and swing your arms out in front of your waist

6 Bend further and cross your arms and swing them out in front of your ankles

7 Bend your knees, turn your palms upward and forward and scoop up the energy

8 Stand tall and pour that energy all over the front, sides and back of your body

NB You don’t need to be precise with these moves - think how Titanya does it in her
energy dance!

More Ways to Clear, Strengthen and Balance your Aura (page 13 of the
Module 7 handout)
Pushing the Aura out Exercise (page 13 of the Module 7 handout)

To push the Aura out from your body (which is a good exercise to do if your Aura has
collapsed), beginning close to your body, hold your hands a little bit out from your chest, with
palms facing away from the chest and thumbs down, then very slowly push your field out
from your body. As you push, sense how this expands the feeling of space around your
body. If you go slow enough, you will probably feel that you are in something, or pushing
against something.

Do this all over your body, pushing out every way that you can, all around your body - almost
like you are doing breast stroke and you are swimming in it.

Fluffing the Aura Exercise (page 13 of the Module 7 handout)

To expand and revitalise the Aura, scoop up energy from ground level, rolling it up the
midline of your body with your hands circling each other, and then pour it down over your
entire field. This technique (like the Zip-Up) also strengthens Central Meridian which, in turn,
feeds all the meridians and chakras.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 205


In response to a question from the Module 7 Question and Answer session regarding when
you would want to fluff your Aura and how to do it, Donna’s answer was as follows:

Fluffing the Aura is a wonderful thing to do for yourself. I just do it when suddenly the
spirit moves me. I may be leaning forward near the ground ready to do an exercise
like the Spleen Meridian, or maybe I am doing Figure 8s up from my feet, and I just
think that I need to fluff my Aura. There is a certain buoyancy that you like to see in
an Aura. If there is no buoyancy in their Aura, the person does not feel very buoyant.
So, if you are not feeling buoyant, fluff your Aura!

Trace Figure 8s (page 13 of the Module 7 handout)

If you trace Figure 8s over and around your body, moving your hands slowly, it strengthens,
realigns and re-weaves your entire auric field, with all its layers. Trace Figure 8s throughout
your energy field, front and back and sides, large and small. In addition to re-vitalising your
energy field, this also integrates portions of the Aura that may have become separated and
the Aura begins to feed the chakras as well. See page 91 for further Figure 8 information.

Spoon your feet

Spooning your feet will strengthen your Aura

Darth Vader Breath

The Darth Vader Breath Exercise will help to strengthen your Aura. See page 232.

Spin a magnet or crystal (page 13 of the Module 7 handout)

Both magnets and crystals can be used for strengthening your aura.

You can spin a magnet in your field, out and back, to build an Aura. Spin it through your
auric field in all directions. This can help to re-build and strengthen an Aura that is weak,
damaged, or stretched thin. (Use a magnet with a hole in it, with dental floss threaded
through the hold so you can spin it, and then move the magnet back and forth in the Aura.)

NB Remember to test for magnet sensitivity before using a magnet to support your Aura -
see ‘pain: magnet cautions’ on page 166.

You may wish to use a crystal if magnet sensitivity is evident. Magnets are stronger than a
crystal but the crystal is a more subtle kind of energy and, although you can use natural
crystals, Donna uses a cut glass crystal, designed so that there is a place where you can put
a string in the top of it.

Donna related a story in the video about something that happened to her in the 1990s. She
said she had what, for lack of a better explanation, she called “electromagnetics” - she said
this was because they were frying her circuits. They lived in a house and Donna had to be
out of the bed by 2 am or 3 am because the energy from the Earth was electrocuting her. In
the mornings, her arms wouldn’t bend and they would be very swollen, and her legs hurt.

It turned out there was an underground river underneath their house, and it hit every socket
in the house, and she got it. Donna knew she had no Aura anymore - she knew it had gone
- there was nothing there. She didn’t know what, but something else was keeping her alive -
presumably it was because she was doing all the energy work.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 206


Donna took a magnet and made it spin out into the field and back, just back and forth in
every direction, in every level of her being, from top to bottom, every which way. Slowly, she
began to build an Aura.

David said it had been a real problem because they didn’t really know what was going on.
All that they knew was that Donna was having a lot of trouble. So their first guess was that
they thought that maybe it was because of the bed. So they had experts from Sealy look at
the bed but Sealy said that the bed tested fine. Then they bought 3 different top-of-the-line
mattresses in a very short period of time. (This was because, when Donna was lying on the
bed, it would feel like she was being drawn into the Earth and so she kept thinking that the
bed must be breaking down.)

Then it occurred to them that this had something to do with the electromagnetic fields, but
they didn’t know exactly what, and they didn’t know how to figure it out. So the next thing
they did was they found a guy who had worked for NASA before he retired, and he was
working as a consultant doing the kinds of things he did for NASA. At NASA, he was the
person who was responsible for minimising the impact of all those electromagnetic
instruments that are in a spaceship from impacting the astronauts.

So he went to Donna and David’s house and he used his expertise and his meters and
looked at the electrical sockets. They heard him say, “You are the toughest case I have ever
had!” He knew something was happening and that it had something to do with the house
and something to do with Donna. Donna had tried sleeping in other places, trying to find a
place she could sleep, but there wasn’t anywhere in the house she could sleep, because she
had no Aura left.

So the retired NASA guy nailed magnets all over the house - but it just wasn’t enough. So
Donna took the magnets. Donna reminded us that the bottom of your feet is south-directed
and the earth is north-directed. So she wanted to stop the energy from the Earth from
coming in. So she took a magnet and put the north facing out, to repel the Earth’s energies
and that was the beginning - because, until then, she couldn’t bear the pain coming into her
body every night.

That Aura was not just a theoretical concept for Donna at that point. She had an Aura, then
she didn’t have one. And her life got a lot worse for her. She didn’t have the protection
when she was working on people and she couldn’t work before 2 pm because her arms were
so swollen that they wouldn’t work.

But what was very interesting, was that she was teaching a lot in Australia at the time and
the first time she went to Australia after all this was going on, she found that this was very
common there. Everybody understood you could have this problem and there would be
clinics in different main cities because Australia is the oldest continent and the top layer was
going and the magnetic field of the earth was coming through more strongly and impacting
people more strongly. That has always been the ‘canary in the cave’ in the sense that
Donna is very sensitive - whatever is going on, it will register in her body. Energy medicine
was her survival, technically.

Donna added that she went to several acupuncturists when she lost her Aura, but none of
them could find any pulses on her - they simply were not there, when her Aura had been
stripped.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 207


So having a magnet with a hole in it, with dental floss threaded through the hole so you can
spin it, and then moving the magnet back and forth in the Aura, was the remedy. Later,
when Donna’s Aura had got stronger, she used a crystal to smooth things out and it would
pick up fabulous vibrations. But the crystal didn’t work until Donna could get the magnetics
out there again.

The Hook-Up and the Zip-Up (page 13 of the Module 7 handout)

The Hook-Up and the Zip-Up are also excellent Aura strengtheners. See ‘DER: the Hook-
Up’ on page 64 and ‘DER: the Zip-Up’ on page 63.

Working with Central Meridian to protect from other energies

In terms of the Aura being there to protect you from all that is around you, and from the
energies of people, some people feel the impact of other people’s energies very strongly,
wherever they are, be it at work, or out shopping etc. That attunement to the energies in the
environment which some people have is both a gift and a hazard. Donna has had to work
really hard to survive in this world and her energy work has really strengthened her.

We all run into situations that bombard our energies. There are a number of techniques that
are quite straightforward that you can use to protect yourself better when you are going to a
shopping centre, or when you are in a business meeting, or when you are in a conference,
or at a party etc.

One of the most basic of these techniques is working with Central Meridian to protect from
other energies. The Zip-Up is part of the DER, so we already have some experience with
Central Meridian. But Central Meridian is also part of that microcosmic orbit between
Central and Governing Meridian, and that then becomes part of the Aura, so you want that to
be really strong to protect you.

Energy test for Central Meridian

Every meridian has its own test. To test the Central Meridian, the person puts their arm out
in front of them, palm facing down, sloping diagonally down to the floor. They then try to
keep it steady while the other person presses down on their wrists (while holding their other
shoulder to create the circuit).

In the Module 7 video, David tested a member of the audience’s Central Meridian and she
tested strong.

You can trace a meridian forward or backward. As the volunteer’s Central Meridian was
strong when tested, David did not need to trace it forward to make it stronger, so he traced it
against the flow of the meridian ie starting at the lips and moving his hand downwards to the
pubic bone. He then energy-tested the volunteer again and she had lost some of her
energy.

So, David traced the meridian the right way again and then energy-tested the volunteer and
she was strong again.

Then David stepped about 4 feet back from her and explained that you can affect a meridian
with your eyes - there are a lot of ways that you can affect the meridian without touching a
person! Sometimes your thoughts can affect them. So David then simply using his eyes

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 208


looked down the meridian (ie backwards) and re-tested the volunteer and she was weak.
Then, from far away, he looked up her Central Meridian, re-tested her, and she was strong.
Most people are very responsive to this and lose their energy if someone traces it backwards
with their eyes.

There are cultures that really understand this. In the martial arts, for instance, they begin by
strengthening their own Central Meridian and weakening their opponent’s Central Meridian
by tracing it backwards (ie downwards) with their hand, while standing a distance away from
them. That action is not just to look cute - they know what they are doing!

David recounted one of his favourite stories with Donna, which was when her daughters,
Titanya and Dondi Dahlin, were in high school. It was a small school and the varsity football
coach was a PE teacher and he asked the girls to get Donna to come to work with the team.
Donna agreed and she went in to the school.

These big hulking guys looked down at her and she went up to the biggest, meanest, looking
one and said, “Let me show you something”. She did the General Indicator Test and the guy
was strong and Donna said, “Look at that, look how strong you are” and he growled in reply.
And then she waved her hand across the front of his chest and energy-tested him again and
he was weak! The class’s reaction was to ask if they could do the same thing to the
opposing team!

David joked that that is not what he and Donna are teaching us. They are teaching us how
to do it to ourselves, so the other team can’t get us!

David then re-tested the volunteer’s Central Meridian and she was strong. He turned her to
face the audience. He asked the audience to think a negative thought (not a negative
thought about the volunteer), about something that bothers them, or is hard for them. Then
he immediately re-tested the volunteer’s Central Meridian and it was completely weak!
Then he asked the audience to thing a positive thought. He then re-tested the volunteer’s
Central Meridian and she was completely strong. So, if you hang around happy, healthy,
people you will always be fine!

David then said he was going to do a single-blind experiment. He explained it was not
science but he was going to ask people to either look up the volunteer’s Central Meridian
(pubic bone to lower lip) at his signal or down her Central Meridian (lower lip to pubic bone),
while the volunteer had her eyes closed, so she wouldn’t know which way the audience were
tracing her meridian with their eyes.

She tested strong when the audience traced her Central Meridian forwards with their eyes
and she tested weak when the audience traced her Central Meridian backwards.

So the audience impacted the volunteer, even though she didn’t know what they were doing.
The audience were not thinking something negative, they simply either looked up or down
her Central Meridian with their eyes.

David explained that all this build-up was because the technique is so simple that you would
forget it without the build-up, so hopefully that will make it easier to remember!

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 209


The Lock-up technique combined with the Zip-Up

David explained that we have been doing the Zip-Up already, but now we were going to add
another dimension to it, because the Zip-Up is the meridian that is most affected by self-
suggestion and it is also the meridian that is involved with hypnosis.

There are actually 2 meridians that are involved with the central nervous system - the
Bladder Meridian, which goes to the third eye, and Central Meridian, but Central Meridian is
really involved with suggestion as well as the Microcosmic Orbit.

So, in terms of suggestion, David said the volunteer was going to not only Zip-Up, but also
imagine there is a lock there at the bottom lip and a key - and lock it and toss the key into the
ethers. He had the volunteer both do it physically and then do it in her imagination only. He
then re-tested her doing both a General Indicator Test and a Central Meridian Test and she
was, not surprisingly, strong.

He then asked the volunteer to face the audience and, in her imagination, Zip-Up and Lock-
Up to reinforce the Central Meridian again (ie trace the Central Meridian forwards with a
Lock-Up at the bottom lip).

He then asked the audience to try to weaken the volunteer’s Central Meridian with all they
had - he asked them to look at the volunteer and trace her Central Meridian backwards with
their eyes and to think negative thoughts.

Then he re-tested the volunteer and she was strong - which meant that the volunteer knew
that she could withstand a group of 20 people trying to bring her energies down! Donna
reminded the volunteer that the audience were worse than any party or social situation that
the volunteer would ever go to - and yet she withstood them.

This is a very simple, but very powerful technique.

Summary of how to protect yourself from other energies and keep your Aura
strengthened

To sum up, David said there are 2 things you can do to protect yourself from other energies,
protect your Aura. and keep your Aura strengthened:

- the Microcosmic Orbit and the Zip-Up and Lock-Up

- the Celtic Weave Exercise (this covers everything to do with your Aura

The outer job is the Aura and the inner job is Central Meridian.

Tracing Central and Governing Meridians protect your Aura - this creates an energetic egg, it
creates a bubble that will offer protection.

Miscellaneous questions re working with Central Meridian

In response to a question from the Module 7 Questions and Answers regarding if you look
someone down, although you can negatively impact their energy field, are you also
negatively impacting your own energy field if you do this, Donna’s answer was as follows:

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 210


If I did it, it would negatively impact me, because it doesn’t feel good to do that to
another person. Many years ago, I worked with different athletic teams and the
volleyball team made it a part of their entire practice to always look each other up,
and they also looked the team that they were playing up - so that they all had more
energy, which I loved

In response to a question from the Module 7 Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David
regarding if Zipping-Up will help after we have taken on someone’s negative energies and, if
it doesn’t, how we would restore our positive self and energies, Donna and David’s answers
were as follows:

Donna: if you have already taken on negative energies, I would Blow It Out and send
that energy into the Earth. Do It 3 or 4 times and then protect yourself at the end

David: There are also other ways also to clear energy eg after Donna did sessions in
her practice, she would put her hands under running cold water, or do Connecting
Heaven and Earth - which is a good way of stretching your body and getting the
energy to go out of your hands. But the Blow Out is our favourite. When you have
cleared yourself, then do the Zip Up

In response to a question from the Module 7 Questions and Answers regarding teachers
always looking down at their students from their higher desk and if there has ever been a
suggestion of having teachers on the same eye level - and similarly, adults in general always
looking down on their children because they are taller - Donna’s answer was as follows:

That is so true. Donna then asked the questioner to come and sit down in her chair.
Donna said that the questioner would be the kid in the classroom. She energy-tested
the volunteer, using the General Indicator Test, and the questioner was strong.
Donna then asked the questioner to pretend that she was looking up to a teacher or
the blackboard and then to look down at her desk and pretend she was writing
something. She then energy-tested the questioner again and this time she was
weak!

Donna explained that doing this makes you lose your energies fast and it makes your
meridians run backwards, so K-27 gets really thrown. She said kids often think they
can’t learn or that they have lost their ability to make sense of what is going on. So
Donna teaches kids to always massage their K-27

Donna then massaged the questioner’s K-27 and energy-tested her again, and she
was strong again. She then pretended that she was looking up to see a blackboard
and then she looked down again, pretending to write something down. Donna
energy-tested her again and the questioner was strong again. So massaging K-27
really works in this situation and is a really important thing for children to do in school!

Energy Dance for Module 7

The Energy Dance for Module 7 shows you how to have fun working with your Aura.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 211


How to develop the ability to see Auras

You can practise by putting a person or object in front of a plain, light-coloured wall. The
lighting should not be harsh or bright. Look at the person with a dream-like focus. Instead of
staring directly at them, soften your eyes and broaden your focus to include your peripheral
vision - looking to the side or just past them. It’s a bit like focusing your eyes on nothing.
Keep this gentle, steady non-focus and wait. Practise not tensing or straining. If you need
to blink, do so, and allow yourself to keep this gentle gaze. If an outline and/or colour
doesn’t show up right away, keep practising when you feel like it, especially when you are
relaxed and feeling OK with whatever outcome you get.

Take a crystal and spin it in front of your Third Eye, moving it towards your Third Eye and
then backwards several times. That can help to open the Third Eye to make it easier to see
energy.

MODULE 8 - RADIANT CIRCUITS - THE ENERGIES OF VITALITY AND


JOY

Radiant Circuits are energies that produce higher states of happiness, spontaneity,
accelerated healing, and the extra energy that fuels exceptional performance and joy. They
are more ancient (in terms of evolution) than the meridians and are not confined to fixed
pathways like meridians. Instead, they move instantly where needed with a radiant glow that
attracts vital energies from the environment and activates healing from within.

Radiant Circuits also influence body chemistry, including hormones, and Donna has
observed that spontaneous healing only happens when the Radiant Circuits are strong.

Radiant Circuits counteract the habit and effects of stress. The more you activate these
Circuits, the more you gravitate to joy and passion. As you make this a habit (see ‘Building
the Habit of Radiant Joy’ on page 229), you are more open to the positive, more curious
about everything, and more open to the spiritual realm. This will help you find and maintain
your own rhythm, love yourself, and enjoy your life.

When you smile from a deep natural space, it sends joy all the way down to your soul and up
again. A deep smile is not an ornament of a mask. It engages your radiant energies. So
does listening to music you love, being overtaken by beauty, revelling in nature, laughing
uncontrollably, abandoning yourself to play, love or dance etc.

But it is also the case of, ‘if you don’t use it, you lose it’. The radiant energies can become
stagnant and unable to easily move to where they are needed. This is the plight of many of
us today where work, computer screens and passive entertainment have taken precedence
over deeper pleasures. The more the Radiant Circuits are exercised, the more available
they are to you.

Radiant Circuits sit underneath Triple Warmer, so if you can move those stress energies out
of your body, they become much more available.

Radiant Circuits are about being so in love with life and about giving thanks and feeling it
down into your soul. If you have ever been in love, you know what Radiant Circuits are
about - it’s that kind of energy. It’s about the sense of wonder and awe. Studies have

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 212


recently been done on awe, which show that there is something like your arteries open 22%
more when you go into awe.

Radiant Circuits are about feeling free, about synchronicities, about spontaneity and
spontaneous healings and amazing wonderful life. It is available to everybody if you can
scoop out the Triple Warmer energy and let Radiant Circuits come up more.

Radiant Circuits are contagious. They are the antidote to other people’s bad moods.
Radiance is a choice, we can choose to activate them with exercises that clear their energy
and lift them out of dormant states. We can choose to activate them with conscious
visualisations and we can choose to use them to maintain our Aura in a balanced state and
have a great ‘atmosphere’ inside our environmental spacesuit. We don’t let people ‘steal’
our joy - we give it up. When you have Radiant Circuits activated in your field you can invite
others to share your joy and share techniques with them as well. This works great in
relationships and work environments and Donna and David have even driven around
neighbourhoods tracing hearts and weaving Figure 8s to bring more joy to that space.
Together we can make society a much better space.

There are 10 individual Radiant Circuits, not all of which are covered in this course. Much
more information on how to test, activate and balance these energies is available in Eden
Energy Medicine advance online courses, or in the Foundations face-to-face learning
programme.

What Radiant Circuits Do for You (page 4 of the Module 8 handout)

- The Radiant Circuits are about joy!


- The Radiant Circuits are a magical, spiritual energy that can take you to your knees
in gratitude!
- Wonder and joy well up from the very depths of your soul and connect you to the
oneness and vastness of the Universe! This is the most fundamental action of the
Radiant Circuits
- The Radiant Circuits instil strength, resilience, spontaneous healing, and vitality in
the body
- Beyond doing repair work, the Radiant Circuits are also primary energies in
exhilaration, falling in love, orgasm, hope, gratitude, rapture, and spiritual ecstasy

- In short, bliss is not a lightweight energy

The Radiant Circuits were first described in ancient Chinese texts dating back some 4,500
years, and their use continues to be reported within the clinical literatures of acupuncture,
acupressure, Jin Shin Do, Qigong and Shiatsu. In classical Chinese medicine, they were
called the ‘strange flows’, ‘collector meridians’ or ‘extraordinary vessels’.

But they are not exactly flows, meridians or vessels. Donna sees them as more like
hyperlinks on the Web; they jump instantly to wherever they are about to travel. All of the
body’s energy systems are linked through them, and they can regulate energetic deficiencies
and excesses.

Because they are associated with the awakening of psychic abilities, they were also
sometimes called the ‘psychic channels’. Looking for a term that captures the spiritual
splendour of these critically important yet largely misunderstood and under-appreciated
energies, Donna chose the term ‘radiant’ because people who see energy experience this
force as carrying a radiant glow. She chose the term ‘circuits’ because one of their most

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 213


important functions is to create instant circuits that distribute energies. They bring a radiant
charge as they make their connections throughout the body. They also connect us with vital
energies in the Universe. Just as they literally have a radiant appearance to people who are
able to see energies, they bring a radiant, joyful, uplifting quality to all they touch. A study
reportedly conducted in China and subsequently suppressed found that treatments which
focused on the radiant energies were ‘far more effective than those of the traditional Chinese
protocols’.

Ways you naturally tap into your Radiant Circuits (page 5 of the Module 8
handout)

- Falling in love (the most popular!)


- When you feel exhilarated and free
- When you experience the sense of thanksgiving and gratitude
- Spontaneous joy
- Feeling deeply: not just joy, but can also include feeling sorrow, connections, and life,
deeply

Triple Warmer Radiant Circuit Test (Cupping Hand) (8 minutes in on the


video)

To energy-test the Triple Warmer Radiant Circuit (as opposed to the Triple Warmer
Meridian), have the person put their straight arm out to the side (the same as when using the
General Indicator Test) and, while their arm is stretched out, cup one of your hands close to
the person’s ear (the ear which is on the same side as their outstretched arm). With your
hand cupped close to their ear, push down on the person’s wrist with your other hand.

This tests whether Triple Warmer, as a Radiant Circuit, is on enough.

Quick and easy ways to activate Radiant Circuits (pages 7 to 10 of the


Module 8 handout)

On the video Donna says that one of the things she believes energies are trying to do, and
even Triple Warmer is trying to do, is to move Triple Warmer away from its meridian identity
and more into its Radiant Circuit identity.

When you test Triple Warmer Meridian (ie by having the person keep their elbow clenched to
their side, with their bent arm coming out diagonally in front of their body, while you try to
push the arm in toward their body by pressing on their wrist) normally it is very strong.

Donna energy-tested a volunteer on the video and her Triple Warmer Meridian was strong.
However, when Donna then tested the volunteer’s Spleen Meridian (ie by having the person
keep their straight arm hanging down at their side, elbow straight, while you try to pull the
arm away from their body - see full instructions under the ‘Energy-Testing’ and ‘Triple
Warmer’ sections) it was weak.

Scapula Squeeze Exercise to Activate Triple Warmer as a Radiant Circuit (page 7 of the
Module 8 handout and 8 minutes into the video)

Calming Triple Warmer Meridian can enable activation of Radiant Circuits. When this
happens, Triple Warmer itself can release its meridian role and move into its Radiant Circuits
potential. You can help this happen by doing the Scapula Squeeze Exercise.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 214


Teres minor is a slim, narrow muscle within the rotator cuff, located in the shoulder, and it is
on the Triple Warmer Meridian. Energy tends to bottleneck there, keeping Triple Warmer on
the alert, and in its meridian state. The Scapula Squeeze Exercise relaxes teres minor,
giving Triple Warmer a chance to move into its Radiant Circuit state.

To do the Scapula Squeeze, which is a simple way to get that energy moving energetically
into your body:

- You might want to start by doing the Triple Warmer Radiant Circuit energy test

- As you stand tall with your arms at your sides, raise both elbows until they are level
with your shoulders. Your arms, from shoulders to elbows, are now parallel to the
floor, and your forearms hang down with hands and fingertips facing down toward the
floor

- From this position, flip your hands and forearms up as though someone has just
pointed a gun at you and said, “Hands up!”

- In the Hands Up! Position, take a deep breath in and, while holding your breath in,
squeeze your shoulder blades (ie scapula) together, hold the breath for as long as
you can and then let it go and bring your arms back down

- You might want to re-test the Triple Warmer Radiant Circuit and, if you were weak
before this exercise, you should be strong now

6-Word meditation: Notice Breath, Soften Belly, Open Heart (see page 7 of the Module 8
handout and 9 minutes into the video)

Radiant Circuits flow in patterns that respond to the body’s needs and to thought. Attuning
your consciousness to your body can activate these Circuits and their response to your
body’s needs. This meditation exercise brings consciousness in.

When you feel ‘stuck in your head’, you can use this exercise to encourage energy flow
throughout your body, de-stress, ignite the action of Radiant Circuits, and remember what
matters to you.

You can energy-test to determine if you are ‘stuck in your head’, as this affects your chakras.
To do the energy-test (10 minutes into the video), ask the person to put their arms straight
out in front of them at shoulder height, with the back of their hands tight together, palms
facing outwards, and hold them strong like that. Then hold each of their wrists and try to pull
their arms apart at their wrists. If their arms pull apart, they are ‘stuck in their head’!

To do the 6-Word Meditation:

- You may want to start by doing the ‘stuck in your head’ energy-test described above

- You begin this exercise with attuning your consciousness to your body ie you notice
your first breath, so, close your eyes, focus inward, and take a deep breath and just
notice your breath and say to yourself ‘notice breath’, then exhale deeply

- Take another deep breath in and notice your breath and soften your belly, say to
yourself ‘soften belly’ and release any tension in your belly area - so now you are

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 215


doing something with your consciousness - you are instructing your body to soften
belly, which allows a lot of energy to flow. So you soften belly, then exhale deeply

- Take another deep breath in and notice your breath, soften your belly and open
heart, saying to yourself ‘open heart’. You may wish to cross your hands over your
heart as you say this last phrase. You are now instructing at another level, for your
body to move more into a spiritual, open space. Then exhale deeply

- As you absorb these 6 words, note what happens to tightness in your body, to the
quality of your breathing, and to your sense of presence

- Do about 3 rounds of notice breath, soften belly, open heart

- Then cross your hands over your heart, notice how you are breathing, how the
quality of your breathing may be a little different than it was before you started the
exercise

- You may wish to re-test after doing this exercise and you should now test strong

By doing this exercise, you start getting your energies on the side of your consciousness of
what you really want. David explained on the video that this exercise is simple,
transportable and you have it in your back pocket anytime you are starting to get stressed,
anytime you are starting to recognise that you are ‘in your head’ more than you want to be.

Donna said that your mind can’t wander if you are noticing your breath and then you have to
notice that you are softening your belly and opening your heart. She said it was amazing
how this exercise lifts people out of their brains.

Yin Bridge Flow Radiant Circuit Energy-Test (14 minutes into the video)

To energy-test the Yin Bridge Flow Radiant Circuit, have the person stand with their arms at
their sides and then, starting at the middle of the person’s chest, draw a heart shape over
the upper half of the volunteer’s body, ending the bottom of the heart shape at about the
person’s belly button.

Now energy-test the person using the General Indicator Test. If they test weak, do the
Tracing Hearts Exercise below and then re-test.

Trace Hearts to strengthen and activate the Yin Bridge Flow Radiant Circuit - the Nine
Hearts Exercise (page 8 of the Module 8 handout and at 14 minutes on the video)

Tracing Hearts on the torso can strengthen the Bridge Flow, which is a Radiant Circuit that
connects you to your inner self and out to others. This can open you to a deeper experience
and enjoyment of life. When it is really open, you can really feel it. It’s harder to feel it, or to
be in that feeling of love and joy etc, if it is closed off.

However, if you just make the shape of a heart over your body, starting at your neck line and
finishing at your pubic bone - do this about 3 times - it will strengthen the Bridge Flow. On
the video, Donna did this to someone who had tested weak on the Yin Bridge Flow Radiant
Circuit energy-test - and just by tracing the heart shape over her 3 times caused the person
to then re-test strong!

Donna explained that the Bridge Flow is a little bit like Central Meridian.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 216


On the video, Donna asked another person to come to the front and to think of something in
her own world that was a little difficult. Then Donna energy-tested the first person again and
she remained strong - so the second person’s negative energy did not affect the first person.
That is because tracing the shape of a heart bridges deep into yourself and makes you
stable.

On page 8 of the Module 8 handout, there is the Nine Hearts Exercise, which is a slightly
longer version of what Donna practised on the video. How to do the Nine Hearts Exercise:

1 With your hands on the front of your thighs, take a deep breath in and out

2 As you inhale, move your hands slowly up the front of your body to the top of your
forehead. Exhale as you trace a heart from your forehead to your chin

3 Inhaling, move your fingers back up to your forehead, middle finger leading the way
up the centre of your face. As you exhale, trace the heart a second time. Repeat
steps 2 and 3 to trace a third heart

4 Breathe deeply and move your hands slowly down to the middle of your chest, over
your Heart Chakra

5 As you inhale, begin to trace a heart with flattened hands moving up over the chest.
While exhaling, complete the heart by moving your hands around the trunk of your
body and down the inside of the hip bones to end at the top of the pubic bone

6 Trace 2 more hearts, moving your hands from the top of your pubic bone to over the
chest area on the inhale, and down the torso to the pubic bone as you exhale

7 For the largest heart, start at the top of the pubic bone and draw your flat hands up
your body to the centre of your chest as you inhale. As you exhale, turn your hands
so that the tips of the fingers touch one another and the palms lie on the top part of
your chest

8 As you inhale, bring your hands together into a prayerful position and raise them
above your head. Separate your hands and lift them a bit further up; turn them so
the back of the hands touch each other. Then, exhaling very slowly with enough
pressure to puff out your cheeks, slowly press your outstretched arms down to your
sides as if pushing down a weight. Bring your hands down to the sides of your legs
or all the way down to your feet

9 Trace the large heart 2 more times

Like Titanya on the Energy Dance, feel free to improvise on this basic form, tracing hearts
throughout your field and your world!

Happy Baby Pose to Activate Radiant Circuits (page 9 of the handout and 16 minutes into
the video)

This pose replaces stress with a sense of safety, security and an ‘all is well’ feeling - just as
it did when you were a baby. Like exercises that calm Triple Warmer Meridian, resting like a
happy baby enables Radiant Circuits to emerge.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 217


Donna explains on the video that this is an easy turn-on on the Radiant Circuits and this
pose moves energy very quickly. It is a Radiant Circuit pose and you can lay in that pose for
as long as you want. Donna said that it is like heaven if you do it on grass!

At the 16-minute point on the video, Donna energy-tested someone to see if it would help
their energies to do the Happy Baby Pose. To do the energy-test, Donna asked the person
to raise both her arms to shoulder height (like in the General Indicator Test), and the arms
angled a little into the centre of your chest, rather than being straight out to the sides, and
then Donna pushed down on her wrists. The person tested weak. Then, while the person
still had her arm at shoulder height, Donna touched the person in the centre of her chest and
pushed down on the person’s wrist, and then Donna touched the person just below her
sternum (under the bust) and pushed down, then just below her belly button and pushed
down, then she touched the person on her side, just below her waist, at the top of her hip,
and pushed down. The person tested weak at all 4 points

To do the Happy Baby Pose (16 minutes into the video):

1 If (and only if!) it is comfortable, kneel down on all fours with your knees on the floor,
push back so your bottom is resting on your heels, and bring your hands by your
sides as you gently lower your head to the ground

2 Again, only if it is comfortable, move your body and your head forward and lay your
face to one side so your bottom can go higher, resting like a baby

3 Hold this position for about 2 or 3 minutes - or as long as you want!

4 Use this time to meditate, contemplating a positive thought or image, or just let your
mind go

5 You may wish to re-test after doing the Happy Baby pose

The person who did this pose on the video explained afterwards that it felt like an opening
and, after she had taken a breath, she felt different.

Donna said there is a reason why babies are in that state for so much of their little lives,
which is because it really reinforces that kind of energy for a baby.

Smile deep down into your soul - a wonderful way to activate your Radiant Circuits (page
10 of the Module 8 handout)

When you smile, your biochemistry changes and you live an average of 7 years longer than
those who rarely smile. Meanwhile, the reward centre in the brain of the person you smiled
at lights up. You feel connected to your soul when you smile deeply

On the video, Donna said she likes to smile more than anything in the world and sometimes
she thinks other people don’t love it as much as she does. She said she loves to smile so
much because it isn’t surface, it feels like it goes right down deep into her soul, it saves her
life, it lifts her, it makes her feel vibrant and it feels so good. It is a soul connection.

Donna recalled that, when she was 4 years old, her mother, who had tuberculosis, almost
died. She was put in the terminal ward. Donna and her brother and sister were told their
mother was going to die. Donna lived a block and a half away from a church that was
having a church revival. She was 4 years old and it was night time and she walked down to

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 218


the church revival just because she felt so bad. (This was in the days when there were no
worries about children being kidnapped!)

There was a young man singing in front of this group of people. He sang, “you can S-M-I-L-
E. When you can’t say a word you can S-M-I-L-E. When you cannot be heard, you can S-
M-I-L-E. When it’s cloudy or fair you can S-M-I-L-E anytime, anywhere”. Donna said it felt
like this just went inside her and she was lifted up out of the terrible pain that her mother was
going to die. Somehow, she also knew that everything was OK, that her soul was reached.
So Donna said she is an advocate of smiling!

David said he had told Donna that there was an early study that really showed a lot of
physiological benefits of smiling and now some studies are contradicting that. Donna had
replied that that didn’t mean anything - they were not smiling down to their soul, so of course
it wouldn’t show the benefits if they are not getting it down to their soul! She said you feel
always connected to your soul when you smile like that.

So, smiling is one easy turn-on of the Radiant Circuits - but it has to be a deep, true, genuine
smile of your Radiant Circuits.

5 more quick easy turn-ons for your Radiant Circuits (page 10 of the Module 8 handout)

- Dance Figure 8s to music you love: Put on music that you love and move to it in
Figure 8 patterns, large and small, weaving curves and cross-overs throughout your
energy fields. As you are moving in Figure 8s, you are really helping your energy
body and you are doing something in the physical realm that is increasing your
energies
- Gratitude: Bring to mind something for which you feel very grateful and take a
moment to be fully present with it. Cross your hands over your Heart Chakra and
breathe it in. This gets the Radiant Circuits moving
- Approve something: Take something that someone has done and wholeheartedly
approve of it, enthusiastically let them know and let them feel it. As you feel that
enthusiasm for it, they are going to love it and that is going to create a Radiant Circuit
ping-pong back and forth between you and them
- Tell somebody you have difficulty with, or who is not easy for you, what you like
about them: Consider what you like about them and tell them it
- Scratch each other’s backs: Sometimes, when you look at all the strife in the world,
you say, “Why would the Creator set it up this way?” But we know why there is more
than one person, and the reason that there is more than one person is that we can
scratch one another’s backs. So that is another way to really get someone’s Radiant
Circuits moving - scratch their backs - then have them scratch yours!
- As an aside, Donna mentions on the video that a really good reason to have a belly
laugh is that it cleanses your liver!

What individual Radiant Circuits Do (pages 12 and 13 of the Module 8


handout)

The different Radiant Circuits play a significant role in keeping you healthy and enabling
vitality and joy.

Donna explains in the video that she does not go into the detail of the different circuits of the
Radiant Circuits in this course, although she does go through them as follows.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 219


David reminds us on the video of what he talked about in the Triple Warmer Module - which
is that Radiant Circuits pre-date the meridians. The meridians are like the riverbeds, but the
Radiant Circuits go wherever they want and their job is to keep you as a fully-functioning
unit. That is why we call them the Great Mum - they are looking at all the parts and making
sure that this one at Christmas dinner is sitting next to the one they like and getting the food
they like. That is the Radiant Circuits’ job.

Donna is showing us the individual Radiant Circuits which do have pathways, but they are
not fixed pathways like with the meridians.

Donna explains that you can trace Radiant Circuits when things are still but, the moment
they are activated, they jump all over the place, wherever that energy needs to go - there is
no path whatsoever.

The Yin (front) and Yang (back) Regulator Circuits and energy-test (page 12 of the
module 8 handout)

- Regulate energetic and physiological systems that include circulation, hormones and
immune function

- Help your body adapt to internal and external change

- Assist in stabilising hormonal balance and related emotions

The Regulator Flow regulates joy and gladness, so that things like Christmas bubble up
easily in you. If your Regulator Flow has gone, you would know it because you would not
find it easy to be joyful.

To energy-test the Regulator Flow (Donna demonstrates this at 23 minutes into the video),
ask the person to close their eyes and put their arm up at shoulder height (like in the General
Indicator Test) then put your hand horizontally across the front of the person’s eyes/face
(without touching them), palm facing the person’s nose. With your hand like that in front of
the person’s face, push down on the person’s arm. Then put the palm of your hand
horizontally by the person’s temple, fingers facing the back of their head and push down,
while you have your hand there.

If the person tests weak, they can rectify it by tracing their Regulator Radiant Circuit - see
instructions below.

The Yin (front) and Yang (back) Bridge Circuits and energy-test (page 12 of the module 8
handout and 26 minutes into the video)

- Connect the front and back of the body, and energetic polarities that include positive
and negative charges, receptive and expressive impulses, male and female
characteristics, and yin or yang influences

- Assist in connecting you with your soul and higher spirit, bridging your internal world
to the external world, and connecting the self to other people

To energy-test the Bridge Circuits (27 minutes into the video) ask the person to do the
General Indicator Test pose, but with both arms up at the same time and the arms angled a
little into the centre of their chest, rather than being straight out to their sides, and then push

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 220


down on both wrists. Then trace a heart shape over the person’s upper body and push
down on their wrists again.

If they test weak, they can rectify it by Tracing their Bridge Circuit - see instructions on
following pages.

The Penetrating Flow Radiant Circuit and energy-test (page 13 of the module 8 handout
and 29 minutes into the video)

- Brings energy to the depths of your being, penetrating into the chakras, the muscles,
the bones, the genitals, the cells, and the psyche

- Carries information that includes ancestral energies, influencing the basic energetic
constitution of an individual

- Enables depth of feeling at a profound level. Orgasm and mystical moments are
examples of Penetrating Flow experiences that can include a sense of the sacred,
connection with life purpose, and a deeper sense of meaning in existence

- Can also assist energy corrections to take hold more deeply

Donna explains on the video that the Penetrating Flow is about feeling things very deeply -
eg joy, poignancy, sorrow. It affects everything, including sexuality and everything that you
want to feel deeply.

There are several ways to energy-test the Penetrating Flow. Donna demonstrated one of
them at the 30 minute point of the video. To do the energy-test, ask the person to put one
arm up to their side at shoulder level, as in the General Indicator Test and push down on
their wrist to see if it is strong or not. Then, while the person’s arm is up, ask them to put
their other arm across the front of their belly, while you put your hand on their sacrum (ie the
small of their lower back). While you have your hand there, push down on their wrist.

If they test weak, they can rectify this by Tracing their Penetrating Flow - see instructions
below.

The Belt Flow Radiant Circuit and energy-test (page 12 of the Module 8 handout and 33
minutes into the video)

- Connects the energies of the top and bottom parts of the body

- Distributes energies up and down the body, aids digestion, helps meridians
harmonise, and assists chakra alignment

- Helps you to stay grounded while reaching for spiritual inspiration or connection

The Belt Flow connects the upper part of your body to the lower part of your body. It helps
you ground and it also helps you open to the heavens. It helps the energy go through your
whole being. If you get disconnected between the Earth and the top part of your body, your
Belt Flow is out. Sometimes that will make you hurt around your waist. A Belt Flow can go
right around the waist but it can also go under the belly. (They used to make wedding
dresses that way so that a woman would be reminded to own herself and not be owned by
the man! There was an understanding of the Belt Flow!)

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 221


The Belt Flow is very important and if it gets too pulled apart, you are not connected into
yourself and you lose your energetic rhythm. Also, if your Belt Flow is out, you have a break
between your second and third chakras, which can really be problematic. Your second
chakra has so much more to do with the Radiant Circuits than the third chakra, so you don’t
want to have a Belt Flow break there.

Donna demonstrates the energy-test for the Belt Flow at 35 minutes into the video.
To do the energy-test, ask the person to raise their arm, as in the General Indicator Test
then, while putting your hand on the side of their waist, press down on the person’s wrist.
Do this test on both sides of the person’s waist.

If they test weak, to rectify it they can Trace their Belt Flow - see instructions on page 227.

Central and Governing Radiant Circuits (page 13 of the Module 8 handout)

The Central and Governing Radiant Circuits also function as meridians.

Central Meridian flows up the front centre of the body, and feeds energy to the brain.
Governing Meridian flows up the back centre of the body and supports the spine and
nervous system energetically. Where the 2 meridians meet at the back of the throat, they
create a single force field and begin to behave like Radiant Circuits.

- Their combined force field radiates inward and outward, strengthening and vitalising
all of the meridians, the chakras, and the Aura

- These Radiant Circuits can calm the nervous system, support confidence and clarity,
and protect against disturbing energies by strengthening the auric shield

Triple Warmer Radiant Circuit (page 13 of the Module 8 handout)

Triple Warmer Radiant Circuit also functions as a meridian.

- Acts to respond to threats and ensure survival and (as a Radiant Circuit) can both
conscript and deliver energy wherever needed in the body

- Helps you centre, stay calm, and experience joy in the face of change

- Can strengthen you during highly challenging situations, and support resilience
(these abilities are apparent during major life transitions such as birth and death,
where the individual must find or create resonance with a new world)

Harmonising Triple Warmer and encouraging its balance with Spleen can promote a sense
of safety and encourage Triple Warmer to express its radiant potential.

Spleen Radiant Circuit (page 14 of the Module 8 handout)

Spleen Radiant Circuit can function as a meridian or as a Radiant Circuit. As a meridian,


Spleen runs through the pancreas and supports metabolism of carbohydrates and sugars. It
can metabolise thought, experience and emotion as well as food. Acting as a Radiant
Circuit, Spleen:

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 222


- Radiates the life force itself and metabolises all energies in the body to help them
align with one another and support the overall harmony of the system

- Teams up with Triple Warmer to support the vitality of the immune system, the
dynamic flow and harmony of energies throughout the body and a balanced
experience of life

How to trace Radiant Circuits (page 14 of the Module 8 handout)

To strengthen any of the Radiant Circuits, trace them. The instructions on how to do this are
on the following pages.

When tracing any of the Radiant Circuits, find the figure for the Circuit you wish to trace
(pages 15 to 18 in the handout) and, with the slow, full contact of your hands, follow the solid
lines in the diagram, generally moving from top to bottom (you can disregard the ‘Anchor
Points’ for this experience).

The instructions in the handout are for tracing the Radiant Circuits on yourself, but they can
easily be adapted for tracing on another person.

Start with the DER if you can and make sure you are not in homolateral before you begin.

Synchronising the tracing with your breath is a good practice when working with the Radiant
Circuits. Playing music, or simply thinking of things that are fun or inspirational, can also
support the enlivening effects of tracing Radiant Circuits. Anything that brings more
presence and joy to the techniques adds to their radiant effects.

There are 2 different methods for tracing each Circuit: Classic Tracing and Funky Flow!

In response to a question from the Module 8 Q&A session with Donna and David and also
with Kelmie and Suzee, regarding how many times and how often you should trace a
Radiant Circuit, their answer was as follows:

Donna: That is such a linear question. There is no answer to it! How much can you
do it to feel good? Quit when it no longer feels good!

Kelmie: I try to make the effort to trace my Radiant Circuits daily

In response to a question from the Module 8 Q&A session with Donna and David as to
whether strengthening our own Radiant Circuits would help protect us from worldly events
that could cause damage, and if that might protect us from electromagnetic energy as well,
Donna’s response was as follows:

Yes, it absolutely does. I would say that the first thing to do is to get your Aura
strong. You have to get your Aura really working. But that Aura becomes quite
radiant for you when it’s really flowing and is puffy and fluffy and goes way out. You
feel amazing when that happens - you feel utterly safe and that you can walk into any
new venture and everything is fine

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 223


In response to a question from the Module 8 Q&A session with Donna and David from
someone who said that when they were tracing their Penetrating Flow Radiant Circuit, they
noticed how much more energy they immediately had, Donna’s response was as follows:

I love that Penetrating Flow! I’ve known people who just sort of lived on the surface
of life and started working on the Penetrating Flow and tracing it and getting their
consciousness in with it - and life took on a deeper meaning for them. It’s like you
find meaning in life more

Tracing the Yin Regulator Radiant Circuit: Classic Tracing (page 15 of the Module 8
handout and 24 minutes into the video)

1 You may wish to energy-test the Yin Regulator Radiant Circuit first - see instructions
above

2 Put your chin in the palms of your hands, with your fingers resting on your eyes, and
take a couple of deep breaths, stretching upwards as you do so

3 Using one finger from each hand to make a heart shape on a stick, trace a heart on
your face from your forehead, then around the sides of your face and down to your
chin and then, with all your fingers, pull straight down your neck to the top of your
sternum (the ‘stick’)

4 Cross your arms, come to your shoulders, and pull the energy firmly down both your
arms to your elbows. Hold your elbows firmly out in front of you at shoulder height
(like Aladdin or I Dream of Jeannie) for one deep breath

5 Uncross your arms and place your hands on either side of your upper chest

6 With flat hands, move your hands down from your armpits, trace down to the inside
bottom of your ribcage

7 Continue tracing, down the front of your legs to the inside of your knees, then over
the top of your feet, and squeeze the sides of your feet (Spleen and Bladder
Meridians)

8 You may now wish to re-test the person’s Yin Regulator Radiant Circuit to see how
much of the energy has moved, by putting your hand across the front of the person’s
closed eyes and pressing down on their arm and then putting your hand by their
temple and pressing down. In the video, the person tested strong after doing this
exercise and so Donna said that her energies had started and so she suggested that
the person do this exercise a lot. She also recommended that she do the Funky
Flow version (see below) because the more fun you can have while doing this
exercise, the better it is for you

Tracing the Yin Regulator Radiant Circuit: Funky Flow (page 15 of the Module 8 handout
and 25 minutes into the video)

The more fun you can have while doing this exercise, the better it is for you!

1 You may wish to energy-test the Yin Regulator Radiant Circuit first - see instructions
above

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 224


2 Put your chin in the palms of your hands, with your fingers resting on your eyes, and
take a couple of deep breaths, stretching upwards as you do so

3 Heart on a Stick: Using one finger from each hand to make a heart shape on a stick,
trace a heart on your face from your forehead, then around the sides of your face and
down to your chin and then, with all your fingers, pull straight down your neck to the
top of your sternum (the ‘stick’)

4 I Dream of Jeannie Arms: Cross your arms, come to your shoulders, smooth down
your arms to your elbows. Hold your elbows firmly out in front of you at shoulder
height (like Aladdin or I Dream of Jeannie) lift up and down with a breath and blink
(like Jeannie)

5 Oh, Aren’t I Beautiful: Come to under your breasts and smooth down the front of your
legs

6 Squeeze the Bunions: squeeze the sides of your feet (Spleen and Bladder Meridians)

7 Up Spleen Meridian: never miss an opportunity to strengthen Spleen!

8 James Dean hair: smooth your hands over your hair, from hairline to back of neck

9 You may now wish to re-test the person’s Yin Regulator Radiant Circuit to see how
much of the energy has moved, by putting your hand across the front of the person’s
closed eyes and pressing down on their arm and then putting your hand by their
temple and pressing down

Tracing the Yin Bridge Radiant Circuit: Classic Tracing (page 16 of the Module 8 handout
and 27 minutes into the video)

1 You may wish to energy-test the Yin Bridge Radiant Circuit first - see instructions
above

2 Put your fingers behind your neck on the Power Point, which is right in the middle of
the back of your neck (to find this exact point, see ‘Chakras: Power and Electric Point
Stretch’). Take a deep in-breath and out-breath as you push in and up on the Power
Point

3 Using both hands, a couple of inches apart, trace up over your head with 3-finger
clusters to your forehead Neurovasculars. Hold for one deep breath

4 Using your middle fingers, trace along each side of your nose to the Stomach
Meridian points on your cheek

5 Trace your fingers down to your chin and down your throat, ending at K27 and buzz
these points

6 Bring your fingers together and move down to your sternum point. Hold for one deep
breath

7 Draw a heart by circling your hands up and then around each breast and then down
to your belly/pubic bone. Do this 3 times. On the video, Donna said it wasn’t enough
to just trace the shape of a heart, you have to really feel it and trace it strongly and

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 225


with intention

8 Now trace a really BIG heart shape, going way up over your head and down as low
as you like, and do this several times. Donna says on the video that doing this will
start opening up the flow that will come in and get you, but also connect up to other
people

9 Smooth your hands down the front of your thighs, to the knees, down the shins and
to the inside of the feet

10 Wrap your fingers under your feet, hold on, stick your bottom in the air, and pull your
body up

11 Now trace Spleen Meridian up

Tracing the Yin Bridge Radiant Circuit: Funky Flow (page 16 of the Module 8 handout and
28 minutes into the video)

Chant rhythmically, like a cheerleader:

1 Back of the head! (Power Point), Forehead!

2 Cheekbones!, Chest! (cross your hands to rest fingers on K27s and buzz these
points

3 Heart! Heart! Heart (trace a heart around your chest 3 times, the heart getting
bigger with each trace)

4 And you know the rest! (slide hands down the legs)

5 Hands under feet and pull up - Bump!

Tracing the Penetrating Flow: Classic Tracing (page 17 of the Module 8 handout and 30
minutes into the video)

1 You may wish to energy-test the Penetrating Flow first - see instructions above

2 Stand up and place the flat of your hands above your mid-waist on your back.
Smooth slowly down your sacrum and circle once when you get to the small of your
back

3 Trace a horseshoe by circling the flat of your hands around the front of your hips,
coming down to your groin

4 While inhaling deeply, pull your hands straight up your body, and rest for a moment
at your heart, then up your neck, and over your jaw, until you are holding your
crossed hands over your mouth

5 Fill your cheeks with air for a count of 3 while you are covering your mouth with your
crossed hands and then slowly release

6 Cross your hands slowly at your neck, drawing them down over your Heart Chakra
(with a deep breath or sigh)

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 226


7 You may wish to re-test now

Tracing the Penetrating Flow: Funky Flow (page 17 of the Module 8 handout and 30
minutes into the video)

Channel your inner Marilyn Monroe as do this version of the Penetrating Flow!:

1 You may wish to start by energy-testing the Penetrating Flow (see instructions
above)

2 Sacrum: rest both hands on your sacrum

3 Crotch: slide your hands over and around to rest on the area of your pubic bone

4 Breasts: smooth your hands straight up the Penetrating Flow lines to high on the
breasts

5 Mouth: Cover your mouth and take 3 heavy breaths (ah, ah, ah)

6 Cross your hands over your heart and sigh

7 You may wish to re-test now

Tracing the Penetrating Flow: children’s version (30 minutes into the video)

The above 2 ways to trace the Penetrating Flow are rather sexual (especially the Funky Flow
version!) and therefore may be inappropriate for children to do, so, 31 minutes into the video,
the way to trace the Penetrating Flow for children is demonstrated.

Front to Back Figure 8s to connect Yin and Yang Bridge Flow and energy-test (32 minutes
into the video)

On the video, Donna explains that, sometimes, she will see somebody walking around and
there is energy on the front of their body but hardly any energy on their back.

Donna energy-tested Titanya for this condition at the 32 minute point on the video. To do
this energy-test, ask the person to raise their arm up a bit higher than in the General
Indicator Test, then trace from the back of the person’s shoulder to the front of their same
hip and then press down on the person’s wrist. Do this on each side.

If the person tests weak, to rectify this, ask the person to wave their arms in Figure 8s at the
sides of their body, up and down and side to side (32 minutes into the video). Then re-test.

This connects up the back sense and the forward sense of the Bridge Flow - the Yin and the
Yang - and the more these energies flow, the more they connect with your consciousness
and your spirit, which is really good.

Tracing the Belt Flow Video Tracing (36 minutes into the video)

There are several ways to trace your Belt Flow and this is the way that Donna demonstrated
36 minutes into the video:

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 227


1 You may want to energy-test first

2 Put your thumbs right on the back of your waist, about an inch either side of the
central point. This point is called the Mingmen Point and it is really important for
radiating energy out. It sits both in the world of meridians and energy, and it also sits
in Radiant Circuits. When you can get it to work as a Radiant Circuit, then you don’t
have any low back pain

3 Then, keeping your thumbs splayed, smooth both hands forwards from the back of
your waist across to the front of your waist several times

4 Then smooth all the way down the front of one of your legs and off at the toes, then
come up the inside of that leg and reach over with both hands to that side of your
waist and just pull both hands around to the front of your waist. Do this 3 or 4 times

5 Then smooth down the front of the opposite leg and off the toes and do the same on
the other side

6 You may want to energy-test again

Tracing the Belt Flow: Classic Tracing (page 18 of the Module 8 handout)

1 You may want to energy-test first

2 Wrap both hands around one side of your waist

3 Pull from above, below, and on our waist (across your belly toward the other side of
your waist) several times

4 Slide your hand straight down the leg that is across from where you pulled

5 Repeat on the other side

6 You may want to energy-test again

Tracing the Belt Flow: Funky Flow (page 18 of the Module 8 handout and 37 minutes into
the video)

1 You may want to energy-test first

2 Where’s my belt? Where’s my belt? Where’s my belt? (Pull your hands across at
your waist 3 times)

3 My trousers are falling down! (Slide your hands straight down your leg across from
where you pulled)

4 Repeat on the other side

5 Trace Spleen Meridian

6 You may want to energy-test again

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 228


Building the habit of radiant joy: techniques to activate the Radiant Circuits
(pages 20 and 21 of the Module 8 handout)

Radiant Circuits counteract the habit and effects of stress. The more you activate these
Circuits, the more you gravitate to joy and passion. As you make this a habit, you are more
open to the positive, more curious about everything, and more open to the spiritual realm.
This will help you find and maintain your own rhythm, love yourself and enjoy your life.

The simple things shown in this module are little things that you can do to start building a
habit so that you gravitate more to joy and to a sense of wonder and awe, gladness and
radiance.

The following techniques help you activate the Radiant Circuits:

Breathing through the heart

A good thing to do when you feel a little lost, is to put your crossed hands over your heart
and take a couple of deep breaths - and you just come home to yourself and the energy
builds.

Tracing hearts over your heart

Make a heart shape over yourself - it is just that simple!

Connect with nature

Connect with nature - it is just that simple!

In response to a question from the Module 8 Q&A session with Donna and David regarding
what you can do if you live in a city where there isn’t much nature around and if you should
look at pictures of nature, or imagine being in nature instead, Donna and David’s answers
were as follows:

David: It is literally whatever turns you on - it’s feeding yourself what turns you on

Donna: When I was going through a period where I was in the city and travelling a
lot and couldn’t get to nature, I bought patches of grass in boxes. So right in my
living room, I could put my feet on the grass! It really worked. This is not to put
anybody down with anything that they do, but everybody is different. So those
grounding products that a lot of people use, they fried my circuits! But a patch of
grass doesn’t - that grounds me

Triple Warmer Smoothie

This technique will help the Triple Warmer turn into a Radiant Circuit.

When you do this Triple Warmer Smoothie exercise, you are tracing backwards on part of
the Triple Warmer Meridian (ie up and around the ears) and it releases, so that Spleen gets
some energy. So you may want to energy-test the person’s Spleen Meridian both before
and after doing this exercise, as it should test stronger after doing this exercise. (There is no

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 229


point in energy-testing Triple Warmer Meridian, because it will always stay strong - we are all
OD’d on that energy!)

First, rub your hands together and then shake them off. Lay your fingers gently sideways
across your eyelids (ie fingers pointing towards your nose and covering your eyes) and take
a very deep breath in. On your next breath, lightly draw your fingers out to rest on your
temples, holding there for another deep breath. You are now on some very important points
- the Neurovasculars for Triple Warmer.

Now take another deep breath in and lift your fingers 2 to 3 inches, smoothing the skin from
the temples to above your ears. Then, as you let your breath out, trace your fingers around
your ears, press down the sides of your neck and hang your hands on the back of your
shoulders, pressing your fingers into your shoulders. Stay in this position for at least 2 deep
breaths.

Now drag your fingers slowly over your shoulders with pressure and draw your hands down
to the middle of your chest on your Heart Chakra and take one more deep breath.

If you tested the person’s Spleen Meridian before doing this exercise, you may want to test
again now and the person should be very much stronger. (There is no point in testing Triple
Warmer Meridian again, because it will always stay strong - we are all OD’d on that energy!)

Triple Warmer/Spleen Regulator Balancing - which may help you lose weight! (page 20
of the Module 8 handout and 41 minutes into the video, demonstrated by Donna’s
daughter, Titanya)

1 Cover your eyes with your fingers. Inhale and exhale deeply

2 Inhale with your eyes still covered. Exhale while dragging your fingers across your
eyes and out to your temples

3 Inhale while dragging your fingers up over your ears. Exhale while dragging your
fingers down behind your ears to your shoulders. Hang your fingers on your
shoulders at the neck

4 Inhale as you cross your arms, placing your fingers on the opposite shoulders.
Exhale, smoothing your hands down your arms to the forearms

5 Inhaling, place your hands flat across the ribs under your bust area

6 Exhale while sweeping your fingers down your legs and off your feet at the toes

7 Inhale while sweeping your fingers back up your legs to under your arms (ie trace
Spleen Meridian)

8 Exhale while tapping the Spleen points (under the bust in line with the nipples)

9 Sweep your fingers down and off your body at the sides of your waist

Donna mentions on the video that she has known people who have lost weight doing this
exercise, because it creates the balance between Triple Warmer and Spleen and so you
literally start burning calories better.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 230


Heaven Rushing In (page 21 of the Module 8 handout and 45 minutes into the video)

This simple movement opens your mind, heart and energy field to receive support and
inspiration. It can put you in touch with the sacred dimension of your life.

1 Stand with your feet shoulder-width apart. Rub your hands together briskly and
shake them off. Put your hands, palms down, on the front of each thigh and take a
deep breath in through your nose and out through your mouth. Feel the energy pass
down your legs to the Earth, grounding you

2 Inhaling, bring your hands together into a ‘prayer position’ in front of your heart. Hold
the breath for a few seconds and then exhale

3 Inhaling, reach both arms up overhead, opening your hands and heart to the energy
rushing to you from heaven. Look up and the ceiling is going to evaporate and you
are going to see the sky beyond, the Universe, the air, the wind, the stars, the sun,
the moon - whatever is there you are going to see it. You are touching heaven with
both hands

4 Exhale and hold this open position, breathing normally, for as long as you like,
receiving the healing energies and raw inspiration raining down from the heavens.
Just hang out there underneath this brilliant, beautiful, really sacred sky and you are
going to feel really grateful. You’re going to feel grateful for whatever you feel
grateful for. And maybe there is a ‘thank you’ in you. And you are also going to be
open to receiving, receiving and hearing just how wonderful it is that you are here on
planet Earth and that you are making such a difference in so many people’s lives.
There are so many people who feel grateful for you. And, suddenly, you feel the
angels feeling grateful for you, every spirit out there feeling grateful for you. So
maybe you feel also grateful

5 When your hands feel as if they have a lot of energy on them, scoop it up and put it
in the middle of your Heart Chakra (ie place your hands over your heart). There is a
vortex there called ‘Heaven Rushing In’, and heaven rushes in with love, vitality, awe,
wonder and gratitude for you. Let the energies you have collected from the cosmos
rush into your Heart Chakra and find their way to any place in your body needing
healing or special attention

6 If you think that you didn’t get enough, go back and get more and take it in and end
on your Heart Chakra

Back scratch

Scratching each other’s backs gives a quick, wonderful Radiant Circuit turn-on. (David
explained that he and Donna do this every morning for their Radiant Circuits - 38 minutes
into the video.)

Tracing each other’s Belt Flow while lying down (38 minutes into the video)

David said that he and Donna do this every morning as this is another quick Radiant Circuits
turn-on.

Put your hands under the side of the person’s waist (on the opposite side from where you
are standing) and let the person’s weight just work with you as you are pulling their side up,

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 231


using alternate hands one after another, working hard, then quickly swoosh down each leg
alternately.

Then go around the person’s other side and do the same thing on the other side.

For an extra bonus, put your hand under the person’s back at their waist - ie the Mingmen
Point described above - and just bounce with the person on that Point ie move your hand
quickly up and down there underneath the person.

Miscellaneous questions and answers re Radiant Circuits

In response to a question from the Q&A session with Donna and David after Module 8,
regarding when else, besides wanting to feel more joy, would you think about using Radiant
Circuit tracing as opposed to, say, meridian tracing, Donna’s answer was as follows:

I love them both, but tracing Radiant Circuits starts building the habits of not being in
stress. Stress is hard for the body and it creates illness at times, so to have the
Radiant Circuits, and also to move Triple Warmer out of its meridian stance and more
into its Radiant Circuits stance, you don’t have to live in as much stress in your life

In response to someone’s comment of, “Donna, to me, you are radiant. I’m wondering if you
have always been this way, or have there been times when you, yourself, were low and were
you using the Radiant Circuits then?” Donna’s response was as follows:

I love being me! It has nothing to do with anything that’s out there. If everything went
away, I’d still be fine. I think that it started very early. My mother said I was born with
a smile on my face. I can remember my birth, which I loved. You know how you
always hear how if you get born in a very lighted room and nobody has that
sensitivity towards you, it can be really harmful - well, I loved that. I loved that it was
a cold room. I loved that the doctor put my butt on a steel slab - and it made me
laugh. I just loved the whole thing

However, it is very true that I have gone through things that have been very heavy in
my life and very hard. I used energy to get my energy cleared from the stress and
move more into myself again and find my rhythm. I always think of it as what you
want is to find your rhythm again. What is your rhythm?

One of the things I used to do when I was growing up is lay on the huge boulders
behind our house. Boulders are alive! Their energy is so amazing. It would come
up through my energy and, just lying there, my body would begin to Figure 8, without
me doing anything. There was just this undulating and I knew I was connected in to
the Earth

Darth Vader Breath exercise

This exercise is not covered on the course or in the Energy Medicine book. However, there
is a YouTube Eden Energy Minute covering it and the EEM Facebook Support Team highly
recommends it because it is good for so many things.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 232


It helps to align the chakras and to balance the hormones. It also strengthens your energy
field and it will help to weave your field with little Figure 8s from the inside out, so it builds the
strength of your field from the inside (as opposed to doing it from the outside, using the
Celtic Weave). It helps ground our energies while building Aura strength from the inside out.
So if you are someone who is sensitive and impacted by everything and everyone in the
environment etc, it helps to build your core strength. When you do this exercise, as you
breathe in, you fill up with everything that is you and, as you breathe out, anything that is not
yours can just fall away.

The Darth Vader Breath exercise is also excellent for the Vagus nerve as anything that
relaxes the throat is awesome for that and that is what this exercise does.

To do this exercise, you exhale completely, then catch the air in the back of your throat and
inhale making the Darth Vader noise, then exhale, while making the Darth Vader noise.
When you first try to do this exercise, you may start choking and coughing but if you do it in
the shower, the steam makes it easier to do!

In response to a question in the Module 3 Questions and Answers regarding how long and
how often you should do this exercise, Kelmie, from the EEM Facebook Support Team, said
the more you do it, the easier it gets and to do it for as long as you can breathe it in and as
long as you can breathe it out. She said she does it at least 3 times at the start of her day
and also does it throughout the day, if she feels as if she has taken energies on. She said
she may do it more than that if she is trying to move dense energies with a client.

Parlour tricks

Donna demonstrates a couple of quick and easy ways to show people the power of energy:

Tracing Stomach Meridian backwards

Do the General Indicator Test on the person, asking the person to push upwards while you
are pushing down on their wrist. They should test strong. You can then either walk a few
feet away from them (ie to the edge of their energy field) or you can stay just a couple of feet
from them. It doesn’t matter which you do - you are hooking up to their electromagnetic
field. However, this will only work if you are standing in the person’s auric field. (So,
depending on the person, their auric field may extend 6 feet from them, or 2 feet from them
etc!)

Rub your hands together and then shake them off, then trace their Stomach Meridian
backwards ie bring your hands up from the floor (where their second toe is), up the front of
their legs and hips, then up either side of their navel, up over their breasts to their collar
bone, up their neck, up the whole of their face from chin to forehead, then down the sides of
their face and end underneath their eyes.

Now do the General Indicator Test again, just using one finger, and they will be weak
because you have moved their energy. This will happen with every person in the world
because our energies are electromagnetic. So if you align your energies up with somebody
else’s, you will move their energy.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 233


Now trace the same meridian forward, re-test, and they will be strong. It’s like you have a
magnet in your hand and the other person’s energy just follows it and it gives them strength.

NB You could also only trace the part of the meridian that is on the face backwards, re-test,
then trace it forward again.

Tracing Central Meridian backwards

Doing the General Indicator Test, then tracing the Central Meridian backwards, will also
make the person weak.

Resources for continued learning of Energy Medicine

Details of resources for continued learning (eg books, DVDs, the EEM Foundations
Programme and Certification Programme) are detailed in pages 19 to 21 of the Module 7
handout and pages 25 to 27 of the Module 8 handout.

NB In the Q&A session after Module 3, Kelmie mentioned that the bulk of Year 1 and Year 2
of the course is based on Donna’s Energy Medicine book.

The Foundation Year is excellent if you want to learn about self-care and helping friends and
family, without wanting to practise on clients.

After the last module of this course, David summed up as follows:

“In this last module, we have covered the Radiant Circuits, the energies of joy, the
energies that weave all the energies together into a happy family, and we have
looked at natural ways that you can get the Radiant Circuits moving. We also looked
at each of the Radiant Circuits, and at least one kind of fun way of activating that
Circuit, and a little bit about what each of the Circuits means.

I encourage you to continue to do the DER, to experiment with our Radiant Circuits,
and then to review the course and really look at all that we have covered. We have
covered so much material and my and Donna’s concern is that we didn’t want to
overwhelm you, but we also wanted to share as much as we could.

I advise you to review the handouts, review our notes, review your memory and find
a few things beyond the DER that really resonate with you that you want to use.
Doing a few things that resonate with you is much better than doing nothing, or doing
a hundred things in a row sort of way. So find a few things that really speak to you
and build your energy, build your happiness, build your health and build your joy.
Use the Energy Medicine Practice Checklist [see ‘Energy Medicine Practice
Checklist’] as a guide for your practice and as a reference to Energy Medicine tools
that can help you meet changing circumstances and challenges. You can also
review and deepen you understanding of these tools with the help of the Journey to
Vitality video and audio replays, which are available on your MindValley course
homepage.

There are lots of resources if you wish to study Energy Medicine and Donna’s work
further.”

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 234


In the Live Q&A Coaching Call after Module 8, David talked at length about next steps to
master Energy Medicine, The Foundations Programme, and he and Donna answer a few
questions about the programme as follows:

David: The Foundations Programme is the next step from this course and so we will tell you
a little about it and answer some questions you have.

Donna: It is our mission in life to help lift the vibration of the planet, one person at a time. If
we were able to heal ourselves this world would be a much better place. We would take
care of ourselves and each other.

David: One of the big challenges we had about 15 years ago was that we had written
Donna’s Energy Medicine book and it had become a hit in Europe and was very popular and
we were getting all kinds of invitations to teach all over the world. We gave up our private
practices and went off in our van with a bunch of books in the back and started teaching -
this is almost 20 years ago. About 15 years ago, people really started wanting to study in a
more systematic way and, at that point, we had been first been teaching weekend courses
and then we extended it to a 5-day course, which is the same content as in this MindValley
course.

Then people wanted more advanced training and so we were doing more advanced courses
and then they wanted a certification programme. If we did a certification programme, Donna
could not possibly be the only teacher, so we needed other people to teach it.

So we did an experiment where we had a group of 4 of the people that had studied with us
quite a bit and we put on a workshop where they were the teachers and Donna wasn’t even
there. It was done in Chicago and about 100 people came to it and they got rave reviews -
the kind of reviews that Donna gets. So it was very affirming, because one of the questions
was always whether it was Donna’s charisma or the method that really mattered.

We have found now that the method itself carries Donna’s work without Donna having to be
part of it. So, from that, we began to form a certification programme and we opened it about
12 years ago. It’s been enormously successful. People love it and they get so much from it.
It assumes the basic information that you already have on this MindValley course already, it
will review a lot of it and it really builds on it.

We have graduated 10 classes. There have been 1,248 people that have graduated and
they are now Eden Energy Medicine Certified Practitioners.

It is a 2-year programme to get to the point where you can open a practice in Donna’s name.

The first year is called the Foundations Year and it’s not necessary to plan to take more than
that because it’s a complete course - just as the course you have just taken is a complete
course. For some of you, that will be as much as you want, but many of you will want more,
because there is such rich juicy material that will affect your life and the lives of the people
you care about. If you are in the health care profession, or looking for a new profession, it’s
so gratifying to be able to help people more effectively sometimes than with the other

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 235


resources available to them - and to be able to raise your children on Energy Medicine so
that you don’t have to rely so much on pharmaceutical medicines.

The way the programme is structured right now is that we have about 50 faculties all over
the world, but mostly in the US and the UK and Canada. They are offering this Foundations
Class and the Foundations Class is taught in this way. It’s a year-long programme and there
is probably one near you, particularly if you are in one of those countries. You come for 4
days of intensive training and, in that intensive training, you learn a lot of concepts, you learn
a lot of techniques, there is a lot of work where the teacher is working with someone on the
stage, as you saw in this class, and there is a very specific curriculum. At the end of those 4
days, you have been bombarded with so much information. People love it because it’s rich
and juicy. Then you have 3 months to integrate all that and have a programme that you do
at home where you are practising on people, you are getting Skype supervision to make
sure you have mastered the techniques, you are taking open book tests to make sure you
have mastered the concepts and so, at the end of those 3 months, you have literally
mastered the material in those intense first 4 days and then you are ready for the next
intensive 4 days. That is the way the programme runs, so it is designed for you to be able to
keep your day job and still be able to take the programme, because the 4 days includes a
weekend and you can do all the other work at whatever hours works for you. So you do four
4-day weekends, followed by the practise and supervision and mentoring and then you have
completed year 1, which is the Foundations Year. That is your next step after taking this
MindValley course.

After that would be a second year, which is taught in 2 places - Phoenix, Arizona, and
outside of London. That programme is on the same basis of 4 days followed by 3 months to
integrate, 4 times. So that is the basic way that the class is set up and we have been
overwhelmed with the enthusiasm and the competency that people are getting from going
through this programme. The class you have just been through is great, but it’s not hands-
on, it’s not person-to-person. In the Foundations Programme you are there with the teacher,
you have someone watching you as you work. You work on one another and in pairs a lot,
so you get a lot and it is a rich, rich, training.

Donna: I love the programme. I didn’t feel equipped to teach a certification programme in
the beginning because I didn’t how we’d do that. But it has really worked and we are so
gratified hearing how people have used it, how they have helped themselves, helped others
and have practices. A lot of people have started careers off it. There is also something
wonderful about the programme. The first year you will have one or 2 teachers and maybe
an assistant. But if you come to year 2 you’ll have a lot of teachers and you will see how
different teachers teach. You might resonate with one style of teaching more than another.
It is the best programme. I have had people tell me that it is the best certification
programme of an energy healing system.

David: There are many people who talk about how it’s changed their lives and you become
part of a community of healers that are very advanced souls. What Donna just said about
the larger group, what happens is that in the Foundations Year it is local and they are small
groups - maybe there’ll be around a dozen people in your group, maybe less, maybe a few
more. Then in year 2, all the Foundations graduates come together so there are more than

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 236


100 people in that class and therefore maybe more teachers. But, the way we do it, to keep
the intimacy, they stay in groups of about a dozen or less people and there is a teacher for
each of those groups. So half the time is in those small groups, really practising and dealing
with the content that we have been presenting from the stage to the groups.

One question we have been asked is do professionals ie people from the healing
professions come in to the certification programme. Interestingly, almost half of the people
are professionals, they are nurses and physicians. Each year we get about 2 or 3
physicians in Year 2 and we are really gratified by that because they are in the front line.
The other half of the class is new to energy healing as a profession. That is an interesting
mix and we have to find a way to find a level that addresses both groups. We felt pretty
successful at finding that middle ground. The professionals immediately integrate Energy
Medicine into their practices. They take the first 4-day course and then they find that they
are experimenting with their patients. It’s really geared for people to work on themselves
and their families but, if there happen to be professionals, they can start right in.

In response to a question as to whether it’s possible to take the Foundation Programme


online, David said it was not possible to take it online, because it’s hands on practice. So
much of it is you working on someone while the teacher is watching you. There is just not a
way that we can do that online.

In response to a question as to what does the life of a teacher look like:

David: I’ll start with the life of a practitioner, because people that go through the programme
first become practitioners. It depends a great deal on what you want. Many people that
come through the programme are already professionals and they already have a practice, or
they are already working in a hospital or another institution. So their life doesn’t look that
different after doing the programme.

They go on to bring Energy Medicine into their work so they become more effective but they
are still on the same basic setting. But, if they want to open a practice, then they have a
really interesting road ahead of them because starting a private practice is never an easy
thing to do in a community.

What they will often do is offer short little classes - they might speak to the Rotary Club, or
speak in a library, they might get invited to speak to different groups. From those classes,
people will then start to want to see them privately and they will begin to build a practice over
time. They have to know the laws of their state and stay within these laws so they are not
accused of practising medicine without a licence, but all of our practitioners have figured out
how to do that and there is a lot of support for doing that.

Other people are not interested in a practice or applying it in a healing setting, but they are
doing it for themselves and their families and we feel that is absolutely valid and a great way
to go.

Other people, more and more, are bringing it into businesses and sport settings. One of our
graduates in a major company started teaching the DER and then was doing it every day at

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 237


lunch - so everyone would meet for lunch to do the DER and it perked them up for working in
the afternoon.

We have people that are working as consultants to businesses, to teach the leader in the
business how to help their employees to be at their best so that their energies are really
flowing and so that the energies are flowing in the organisation.

There are a lot of applications and it’s a new field. Like every new field, there is a risk to
getting into it. There is no state right now in the US that is licensing people in energy
medicine. States just haven’t recognised it yet. So it is a brand new field as far as the
legislatures are concerned and that is an exciting thing. It means we are able to shape it in
many ways.

The classes always start in April/May and you will get information on our web site and from
MindValley telling you about it.
In response to a question as to why the Foundation courses are so expensive:

David: They are expensive for many reasons. One of them is that they keep a very good
student to faculty ratio. So you are not part of a big group and just left there. There is a
personal relationship between you and your teacher. The best thing I can say for why is it so
expensive is that it has lost money every year for the last 3 years. We are really committed
to service and we need to figure out how to at least break even. We have not been raising
the prices even though it would make sense to do that. We know that the prices that are
there, which are inexpensive compared to comparable programmes - we have looked at the
competition. We are a bargain in that way, particularly in what we offer and the quality of the
material. So it is as inexpensive as we can possibly make it and our hearts go out to you. It
is a burden to come up with that kind of money and we understand that. We do our best to
keep the costs to you down.

In response to a question as to whether Donna and David, still run Foundational courses
themselves:

Donna: We don’t. But we do teach - we teach all the time. We feel our job is to reach out to
people who don’t know about energy medicine yet, to turn people on and then they can go to
a foundational course.

David: We teach more basic introductory courses because we want people to understand
that it is possible to work with the energies in their bodies to make them feel better and be
healthier.

Donna: Sometimes we do teach advanced classes.

David: We teach on both ends - the beginner classes and the very advance classes. We do
come to the 2-year programme whenever we can.

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 238


In response to a question as to what they suggest for further education for those who are
unable to complete a Foundation Programme:

David: We have a lot of online courses. There is a course on the chakras, which will take you
deeper than what you had in this class. In this class you had an evening on it, where the
online course is a 4-day programme. We have a course on the Radiant Circuits that is
available online.

Donna: You never really get to the end of what you can know about energy, because the
truth is that energy is all there is. We aren’t solid, we are force fields of energy fields and so
it’s a joy to continue to learn and that goes for me too. I continue to learn.

David: One of the reasons why it never ends is because if you think you have the body’s
anatomy, then you have all the cells, and all the cells forming organs and then all the
different systems, the cardiovascular system, the respiratory system, the immune system.
Every one of those cells, every one of those organs, every one of those systems, is
governed by energies and so there are not only 9 energy systems - there are many, many
more. Nine is just the number that Donna has identified as that are most relevant to work
with. If you really master those 9, you can do a very effective Energy Medicine practice.
I want to say how proud we are of our Foundations class and our Foundations class
teachers. They have really gone the extra mile to learn this deeply.

One of the earlier questions asked about the life of a teacher and we talked about the life of
a practitioner. When people have finished the certification programme then they can take
additional training in how to teach Energy Medicine. Practising it, working on a body, is
different to teaching it to a group. All of the Foundations teachers have gone through that
training and some of them have been teaching us for 12 years.

How do all of the energy medicine techniques rank in helping the


energy flow and strengthening the energy?

For instance, meridians, chakras, the Aura, Radiant Circuits, the DER. It depends on what
is happening in your body. You can’t rank them because these are 9 energy systems that
are so intertwined and communicating with each other. But do the DER because that
touches on a little bit of all 9 systems - so just make sure you are doing the DER!

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 239


Energy Medicine Practice Checklist

In response to a question in the Module 3Q&A session re how many of the exercises should you
practise each day, the response was that you should do the DER every day but, other than that, each
day will be different according to how well you slept, how stressed you are etc, so you would do
different exercises according to how you are feeling on any one day. For example, on days when you
feel good and you feel you have a lot of time, do a lot of the exercises eg the DER, tracing meridians,
radiant circuits, Darth Vader breath, spleen exercises etc. On another day, if you’ve had a bad night’s
sleep, you might do less of the exercises eg just the DER and tracing your meridians.

- Daily Energy Routine Exercises (daily):


 The Four Thumps
 The Crossover Shoulder Pull
 The Cross Crawl
 The Wayne Cook Posture
 The Crown Pull
 Connecting Heaven and Earth
 The Zip-Up
 The Hook-Up
 Neurolymphatic Clearing

- Tracing Meridians (daily)

- Massage your gaits (daily if possible)

- The Spinal Flush (daily, if possible)

- Clearing, grounding and balancing:


 Holding Neurovascular Reflex Points (daily, if possible)
 The Blow Out technique
 Spoon your feet
 Connecting Heaven and Earth

- Grounding techniques:
 The Four Thumps
 The Wayne Cook posture
 The Crown Pull
 The Hook-up
 Smoothing Energy Down Your Legs
 Taking Down the Flame

- Homolateral Crossover Re-Patterning

- Flush Spleen Meridian often

- Connecting Heaven and Earth

- Darth Vader Breath on page 232

- Energy Medicine Dances

- Figure 8s

- Stress Remedies

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 240


 To relax Triple Warmer:
 Triple Warmer Smoothie
 Tracing Triple Warmer Meridian backwards
 Sedating Triple Warmer Meridian
 Scapula Squeeze Exercise

 To strengthen Spleen
 Flushing Spleen Meridian (if you are also calming Triple Warmer, do
this after you have calmed Triple Warmer)
 Tapping Spleen Neurolymphatic Reflex Points
 Cross my Heart

 To balance Triple Warmer and Spleen


 Triple Warmer/Spleen Hug

- Energy-testing

- Reset the Ileocecal and Houston Valves (recommended to do this regularly and to do
it before Freeing the Diaphragm) on page 138

- Freeing the Diaphragm (recommended to do this daily) on page 139

- Check the Muscle Meridian Chart once a day and, if you have any tenderness or pain
anywhere, experiment with sedating the appropriate meridian to see if you can take
your pain away. When you sedate meridians to take the pain away, it is far more
than taking the pain away - you are really bringing healing to an area that would
otherwise not get that healing, so it’s a really good thing to do

- Pain Relief and Release tools


 Working on the appropriate Neurolymphatic Reflex Points
 Siphoning energy
 Tracing Figure 8s
 Counter-clockwise clearing
 Breathing out the pain
 Stretching or pinching muscles
 Stretching the neck
 Zone tapping
 Sedating meridians
 Headache Isometric
 Pain chasing
 Using magnets for pain relief

- Chakras
 Chakra clearing and balancing
 At night, a great thing to do is to lay your hands on 2 of your chakras at the
same time, which connects them up
 Spinal Flush
 Testing chakras
 Clearing/balancing the main chakras
 Belt Flow Pull
 Clearing the Throat Chakra
 Taking Down the Flame

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 241


- Work with the Aura
 Testing for a detached or collapsed Aura
 Reverse Butterfly (for detached Aura)
 Butterfly (for collapsed Aura)
 Celtic Weave
 Pushing/Fluffing/Weaving the Aura
 Spinning magnets/crystals (to rebuild the Aura)
 The Zip-Up
 Energy Medicine Dance

- Radiant Circuits Activation


 Trace Radiant Circuits (daily if possible)
 Daily activities that bring me joy or deep feeling
 Techniques to activate Radiant Circuits
 Scapula Squeeze
 6-word meditation
 Trace hearts
 Baby pose
 Soul smile, breathe gratitude, approve and appreciate with your whole heart
 Dance to Figure 8s
 Trade a back scratch
 Triple Warmer/Spleen Regulator balancing
 Triple Warmer Smoothie
 Heaven Rushing In exercise
 Energy Medicine dance

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 242


Miscellaneous Questions and Answers

In response to a question from the Module 1 Question and Answer coaching call regarding
what effect there is between what we eat and energy, the answer was as follows:

Food becomes the energy within you. You get energy from the atmosphere around
you, the sun, your friends etc. That’s why it’s valuable to eat the right foods for you.
That’s why food energy-testing is valuable to find the foods that correspond to what
you need. Eat according to what the energy test shows you need - which may be
different to the 5 food categories of the standard dietary advice

In response to a question from the Module 7 Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David
regarding if Donna and David believe that diet has anything to do with a healthy energy field,
their answers were as follows:

Donna: Yes! Energy-testing your food and your vitamins can be so important,
especially if you are not sure that your diet is working well for you. Your food and
vitamins become your energy in your body that you can utilise, so it’s a very good
thing to eat well

David: Yes, your food is one of the primary sources of your energy, so you want
foods that are in harmony, that are compatible with your body’s energy system - and
that is often quite different from any formula that anyone has for what is a good diet.
What is good for you is not necessarily going to be good for someone else. Also,
what is good for you today, at, say, 3 pm may not be good for you tomorrow at 3 pm.
That is why Donna and I are obsessed with testing foods - so that we know what is in
harmony with what we need!

Donna: Every 2 hours your meridians are being juiced, which is why some things are
good for you only at certain times. For instance, I can’t eat eggs before 2 pm, but
any time after approximately 2 pm, I can eat eggs and they are good for me then. If
you are eating something which is not compatible with the meridian at that particular
time, it won’t feel good - that is why it is so good to energy test!

In response to a question from the Module 2 Live Question and Answer Call with Janel and
Michelle, regarding Donna often showing us how she can make someone ‘weak’ and if we
can inadvertently do this to ourselves, the answer was as follows:

Energy tries to find the balance within our bodies and it will take from whatever it
needs to take from. Our energies can take from a stronger energy in the body for
what it needs and so it makes that one energy weak - although it’s not really weak, it
just shifts the balance around. But you can become depleted in one area because
another area really needs it. You can learn about that through energy testing and,
when we do certain exercises, it kind of balances all of them. In one of the modules
we learn how all the energies relate to one another and how they take from one
another and how they give to one another. So, yes, it can happen within you as well

In response to a question from the Module 2 Live Question and Answer Call with Janel and
Michelle, regarding Donna saying that energy blockages in organs can exist a while before
an illness develops, so, if we don’t have any known illnesses or pain but we want to do a

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 243


general wellness check to see if there are any areas that could become troublesome in the
future, how could we do that to better do a preventative treatment, the answer was as
follows:

The DER is the best wellness technique because it allows the body to balance all of
the different energy systems. So that’s always a great place to start. We’re also
going to learn more about working with the Aura in Module 7 and, many times,
illnesses, before they get into the organs, have been in the Aura for a long time

But for now, just tune into yourself. Does something feel off, does something feel
wrong? Do you have an area of the body that hurts or is uncomfortable? If you do
feel that, then you could actually take one hand and put it on that area and put the
other hand up onto your Neurovasculars - and that can help to balance the energy in
that particular organ. And when you tune into yourself, sometimes you know that you
need a specific technique from the DER

One of the things I can tell sometimes, when I have an upset stomach, to me that is
an indication that I’m not grounded, so I’ll take a few minutes and tap on my
cheekbones because it helps me to ground through my Stomach Meridian. So a lot
of this is just tuning into yourself and asking yourself if there is a problem somewhere
and then seeing what comes to your mind. Your intuition is great at helping you with
this

Also, doing Figure 8s is what you can do for this right now. Figure 8s can also be
done over an organ if you know you have a problem with an organ, or you are
worried you might have a problem with an organ. Donna says never underestimate
the power of a Figure 8 - it’s extremely powerful and helps the body to balance the
energies in a particular location including the organs.

In response to a question from the Module 2 Live Question and Answer Call with Janel and
Michelle, regarding how do you know when your energy is off in order to help someone else
to fix their energy, the answer was as follows:

I’m not sure what this question means. Do you mean, if your energies are off are you
concerned that they are going to affect another person, or, do you want your
energies really balanced so you can be in a balanced state to best help someone
else?

If you want your energies to be balanced, you have to be grounded yourself, before
you offer help to someone else. So if you are going to be teaching someone the
DER, or showing them one of the exercises, do the DER yourself before that, so you
can be somewhat assured that your energies are in a balanced state before starting
helping balancing someone else’s energies

It’s not about ‘fixing their energy’ because it’s really just all energies get out of
balance. It’s normal for all of us to have some imbalance. It’s just about teaching
and re-educating the body to have healthy energy and to bring it back into a state to
really foster your well-being and your vitality

If you are worried that your energies have already affected someone else, you won’t
know if that is the case, and the best that we can all do is do our DER and try to be
the best that we can be. Our fields do definitely affect one another’s but, if you offer
whatever you are offering in love and from a place of grounded-ness, it’s going to be
OK

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 244


In response to a question from the Module 2 Live Question and Answer Call with Janel and
Michelle, regarding if the exercises in Module 1 and 2 can be done by a pregnant woman,
the answer was as follows:

You can do the DER and the clearing and grounding and balancing exercises. There
are no restrictions at all for these for a pregnant woman. In fact these are great things
to do for anybody who is pregnant

In response to a question from the Module 2 Live Question and Answer Call with Janel and
Michelle, regarding if there are any techniques for empaths, how to stop absorbing other
people’s energy and how to disentangle from this energy, the answer was as follows:

This is going to be covered in Module 7. It has a lot to do with the Aura. However,
you already know about Figure 8s. They make a weave and tighten the field around
you. Figure 8s strengthen that weave

Doing the Hook-Up can also be helpful because then you are more centred in
yourself. When you are centred in yourself, and also when you are grounded, this
helps you to be less vulnerable to picking up other people’s energies

Also, do the Zip-Up, which runs on the Central Meridian, as the Central Meridian is all
about vulnerability and exposure. If you are Zipped-Up, that is bulletproof protection
in itself

In response to a question from the Module 2 Live Question and Answer Call with Janel and
Michelle, regarding if someone is ill, do we need to be careful of trying to help them with
Energy Medicine when we are beginners in this field (ie might we harm them?), the answer
was as follows:

If someone is very ill, you have to realise that their system is fragile. You can
certainly help them to do some of the techniques, but I would just go very, very slow
and see how they feel. I would always start with grounding. Help them to spoon
their feet and rub their feet because that will help the energy work that you do do to
be a bit more efficient in working with the body’s energies. Then try a couple of
techniques with them and see how they feel. But I would always go slowly, don’t
rush through them and get feedback from the person as to how they are feeling
before doing any more work

In response to a question from the live Question and Answer Call with Lisa and Marjorie
after Modules 3 and 4, regarding if, as you age, your energy weakens/lessens, the response
was as follows:

I think that it’s no mystery that our pure energy at the age or 10 or 20 is going to be
different than when we are 70. But in terms of pure raw energy I don’t know if I
would use the word ‘weaken’

We are, at this point, Light Beings, so there is a curve to that - there is a beginning
and a growth and then an easing down

My feeling is that when we are growing, when we are young, we need a much more
explosive, powerful, sort of energy to really ripen into life. Then, when you get into

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 245


your 50s and 60s, most of the time we are more established as humans, so then we
are more coasting than ripening - and the energy we have and that we really need is
slower in some ways, because we’ve more become who we are

I am 57 and I expect to feel robust and healthy and happy. I don’t expect that I want
to run a marathon, but I still feel robust and healthy and I intend to feel that way until
the end - which hopefully will be 30 or 40 years from now! And look at Donna, she
has got younger and more vital in the 20 years that I’ve known her! She’s gone the
other way!

In response to a question from the live Question and Answer Call with Lisa and Marjorie
after Modules 3 and 4, regarding working with loved ones, as it seems like it is a lot harder,
the answer was as follows:

It is more difficult, because generally we have a vested interest in the outcome and
so to separate ourselves and get clear answers requires a lot more work. It helps if
you and the loved one both hold the points at the base of the skull - this helps with
the circuitry so your answers will be clearer. We are not neutral on how we want our
spouses and friends and partners to change - it’s just not a neutral territory. So if I
have a family member that is not feeling well I might work on them but I would
understand that I would not be neutral. So I would avoid thorny issues and keep it on
a non-professional level!

In response to a question from the live Question and Answer Call with Lisa and Marjorie
after Modules 3 and 4, regarding how overwhelming the sheer breadth of this course is and
what is the best way to handle it, the answer was as follows:

As a student, the beauty and mystery of Donna’s work is how broad it is. If you study
acupuncture you are dealing with one energy system - the meridians. And there are
straight ahead protocols and that’s what you do. However, with Energy Medicine, I
think the reason Donna’s work is so powerful is that we do have all these energy
systems that are all working at the same time - but that’s a lot of balls in the air to
keep track of. So most new students get kind of “aargh - how do I get all this
together?”

My advice, and this is what I did, because I got that same overwhelm that you are all
getting, is instead of trying to understand the whole thing, pick 2 to 4 things that seem
to relate most to what you would like help with and concentrate on them. Just do
those 2 or 3 exercises, read about them, do them, see how you feel and really
integrate that. Then, when you are ready, add one or 2 more and then play with
those for a while

So pick a small bite, chew it really, really, well and then take another bite. Little by
little, over time, it becomes a mountain! So back far away from trying to understand
the whole thing and just take a little time

A lot of time students will try to understand things in their head and get it all in their

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 246


head but, actually, life experience is what teaches the most. It’s like when you cook
a recipe and then you think, “I wonder what it would taste like with a bit of salt or
garlic?” You have to put one of those flavours in, cook it and see how that really
tastes to you, before you can see what else you might want to do. So back away
from trying to understand it so much in your head and actually taste some of it and
taste some of it over a little bit of time and see how that feels and let that inform what
you do next - rather than trying to keep it all up in your head

One of the students then contributed that she’d been doing the DER for over a year
and, while she never noticed a drastic change in any one day, she could say that
looking back her life now is radically different. She is much happier, she sees the
good in more things, she lives more in the moment and she is much calmer in
stressful situations. It has made a big enough difference that she plans to continue
doing the DER and tracing the meridians every day

So, sometimes, it’s a bit subtle - especially if you are starting out from a good level of
health. It’s more dramatic if you are not well and some things start to energetically
shift for you

In response to a question from the Question and Answer session with Donna and David after
Module 5 regarding how important it is to be hydrated, the answer was as follows:

That is very important. We get dehydrated very, very, fast - too quickly. I’ve had that
experience when somebody wasn’t getting strong and I knew they should and so I
gave them a glass of water and suddenly everything worked because you really need
water inside you everywhere

In response to a question from the live Q&A Coaching Call after Module 5 with Donna and
David regarding if it is possible to get a diagnosis over the phone, or if you have to be face-
to-face, the answer was as follows:

Diagnosis is not something we would want to even think about, but if somebody were
to call me and give me their symptoms, I would share with them what to do for it.
You can’t get a diagnosis over the phone. If someone describes their symptoms, you
could tell them things to try. If it’s face-to-face, if they are there in front of you, you
can try it then and see if it works and if it didn’t, try something else, because the
symptoms may be due to a whole variety of different energy patterns. We don’t
encourage phone sessions because it is so limited compared to a face-to-face
situation

In response to a question from the live Q&A Coaching Call after Module 5 with Donna and
David regarding what their thoughts were on distance energy treatments eg sending
treatments over a particular device or platform eg Skype, their answers were as follows:

Donna: I’ve seen it done and I’ve done it. Some people are really good with it and
some people have a harder time, but you do get better at it the more you do it. I’ve
had students lie on the ground and put their hand on the Earth and do it that way
because the Earth is very good at conducting energy

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 247


David: It’s a totally different paradigm. There is nothing in Western medicine that
would explain energy healing. Where people are familiar with the concept, is when
people pray for people, so that is in some way affecting other people’s
circumstances. How you explain that, whether there are supernatural God-like,
Angelic, forces coming into play, or you use a quantum physics model, where we
know tiny particles influence one another when they are separated by thousands of
miles and is there a form of that, that happens in distance healing, is a fascinating
question!

In response to a question from the live Q&A Coaching Call after Module 5 with Donna and
David from a questioner who said s/he works in a very energetically toxic environment, with
negative energetic people and what could Donna and David suggest to protect them from
these people, other than the DER, their answers were as follows:

Donna: I would do the Celtic Weave before you go to work, to strengthen your Aura
around your body. The Celtic Weave strengthens your Aura and, if your Aura is
strong, you are protected from toxic things coming through. I would also keep myself
Zipped-Up. If I felt like I was taking something on, I would Blow It Out and then Zip-
Up. If you are getting a lot of toxic things, do these techniques a few times in the
day, until your body builds up the habit all by itself. These things will really help to
improve the situation

David: Keeping the Central Meridian strong, which is the Zip-Up, is the inner version
of keeping your Aura strong. The Central Meridian goes through 5 of the major
chakras which go out to the Aura. Keep that strong and keep the Aura strong. When
you feel like you are picking something up, Blow it Out. Another thing is to keep
space in your body and Connecting Heaven and Earth is a really good one - the
stretching enables the energy to move and flow out. Pay attention to your grounding
and your Crown Chakra, so that energy can move up and down. All these things will
be helpful

Donna: Also, make sure that your energy is continually crossing over. Throughout
the day, just put your hand on the opposite shoulder, push in hard, and pull across
your body to the opposite hip. Do that several times, just to keep that energy
crossing over. You will then not be so vulnerable - and you will be pulling in the good
stuff

In response to a question from the Module 7 Questions and Answers with Donna and David
from a questioner who said that, as we are connected to the energies of our environment
and our communities, when the world receives a big shock, how can we remedy a shock like
that, what can we do ourselves, Donna and David’s answers were as follows:

David: So much of it is that by keeping your Aura balanced, by doing the Celtic
Weave, by keeping all your energy systems balanced, doing all these makes you
much more resilient and much less vulnerable. So, even though that auric band is
designed to connect and to resonate, it is going to be resonating with what is being
let in. So if what is being let in is the more positive - that’s the antenna part - that is
going to feed you. That doesn’t solve the world’s problems, but what it means is that

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 248


you can meet the world’s problems whole, with a full deck. So it doesn’t make those
lesser or easier, but it means that you can respond to them with everything you have

Donna: In the week after the US election (ie when Donald Trump was elected!), I saw
so many people in shock and almost in mourning. I was in shock, too. Their energies
looked so scattered and sometimes just almost gone. I found myself just doing lots
of Figure 8s over them, which was good for both me and them and it really helped.
One person said to me, after I had Figure 8-ed him, “It’s like I have the same PTSD I
had when the Vietnam War was going on. And I don’t know what just happened, but
I feel better!”

Another very good thing to do when you feel overloaded with all of the things going
on, is to do the Blow Out. Do it fast at least twice and then twice really slow and
controlled. Even though it looks like you are blowing things out, your Aura doesn’t
get smaller. Suddenly, you have space in your field around you and that is good for
you. Also, Spooning the Feet - which is about that Microcosmic Orbit that goes
around your body and hooks to the Earth and comes up over again. If you don’t
have that connect, if your polarities are off, when you spoon your feet it clears it and
your polarities get straightened up

In response to a question from the Module 7 Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David
regarding if you are able to use Energy Medicine over distance and, if so, does it work
without the person’s knowledge, Donna and David’s answers were as follows:

Donna: Yes you can use Energy Medicine over distance and using it without the
person’s knowledge is really interesting. If they are very filled up, with a lot going on
in their life, they may not be able to be receptive to you. That is why it seems to work
better if they know. But, it still can work

David: it’s a very large question because our Western concepts of space and time
don’t understand subtle energies, which are different from the electromagnetic
spectrum, and different from the weak and strong atomic forces. Subtle energies
have different properties and one of the properties is the quantum mechanics
property of non-locality, where something that happens in one place can affect
something that happens in another place

So that is a very odd concept, although we see evidence of it in many, many different
parts of our lives. There have been a lot of experiments that demonstrate that the
mind can impact physical objects from a distance

So it’s not so different from praying for someone. A lot of people use prayer as a way
to send very positive intentions and love to other people. Whether or not you can do
it without the other person’s awareness gets into an ethical issue - is it ethical for me
to try to influence the energies of a person that doesn’t know that I am doing it? One
case we had was where the husband didn’t believe in energy work at all, but his wife
very much believed it. She wanted to send him healing energy about a health
condition he had and she was concerned that if she told him she was doing it he
would go against it. So is it ethical for her to send that energy to him against his will?
Also, is it ethical for her to pray for him - which is a similar issue? We won’t try to
answer this ethical question for you!

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 249


In response to a question from the Module 7 Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David
regarding how the questioner can handle a deep energy disparity with her partner, making it
almost impossible to be in the same room with him and she feels deeply incompatible with
him yet can’t find the power to leave, if that were an option, Donna and David’s answers
were as follows:

Donna: that is a huge question. David and I have been together 40 years and we
were completely incompatible energetic wise. It took us time. We started working on
energy to be able to deal with that disparity. I decided to leave him because it just
wasn’t working and it appeared that David had the power and I didn’t. However, we
started doing the energy exercises and we have written a book called Energies of
Love about all these issues and to help you get on the same wavelength again. I
suggest that you start doing the exercises you have learned in this course a lot and
build up the habit so that your energies get stronger and you don’t take on your
partner’s energies. You might get more independent, which might make you get
along with your partner better!

David: You didn’t say if he was open to energy work or not. One of the things that
Donna and I do every day is we work on each other. It not only gets my energy into
a flow and Donna’s energy into a flow, but it brings our energies together. It
becomes a way of attuning to one another. Also you can do a Spinal Flush on him,
working the points on either side of the spine, you can do a Crown Pull for him, you
can cross energies for him - put your hand on his shoulder and really pull from his
back, dig your fingers in and drag across his body

Donna: If he is ‘open,’ doing these techniques is a way to start becoming more


compatible. If you don’t, if you have different values from each other, then your job is
to get stronger and stronger so that you do have the will power to leave

David: We don’t have any idea about what is going on in your relationship, but the
most important message we have for you is that there are so many ways that
couples are incompatible in terms of difficulty with communication, that if you get your
energies into harmony with one another, those incompatibilities drop away. You will
realise that there is an energetic bridge and, from that bridge, you can find ways to
communicate. You might want to take a look at that book, because that is what it is
all about!

Donna: You are learning in this class those same tools that you will find in that book,
but the focus is more on the couple in the book

In response to a question from the Module 7 Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David
regarding how you can become aware of all the energy patterns and what is the best
practice to increase awareness, Donna and David’s answers were as follows:

Donna: The best thing you can do is to do the DER at least a couple of times a day
until it becomes a habit and your body begins to feel better and better. Then you

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 250


become more aware. You will then have an awareness, just out of the blue, that, for
instance, you need to Hook-Up. The more you do it, the body becomes more
familiar. You get on the same wavelength with the energy, which is so intelligent, it is
so amazingly intelligent inside of you, and when you yourself as a physical being,
begin to resonate with that energy more, you become more and more aware. It will
happen without you trying and without any effort from you - except for the effort of
doing the DER

David: Like any relationship, the more you are tending to your body and focusing
your awareness on what is going on in your body, the deeper that relationship
becomes. The relationship with your energies is a more subtle relationship than with
a person, but it is also one that, by attending to it and listening to what your energies
are telling you, it is a way of cultivating that language and cultivating your ability to
converse with your body’s energies

In response to a question from the Module 7 Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David
regarding if you are wearing a watch or have electronics with you, does it affect the energies
while doing the exercises, Donna’s answer was as follows:

Different people are more affected and affected differently than other people. Our
energies are as unique as a thumb print. Over time, it would be really good to learn
these exercises so you can do them on your own, away from electronic equipment.
But, over time, if you do these exercises, you will be more immune to the electronics
bothering you. You will build up immunity and it will really help you. Some people
can wear a watch and it doesn’t bother them at all. If you are very sensitive to
electronics, don’t wear a watch! Find what works for you

In response to a question from the Module 7 Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David
asking David to comment on his experience using EFT with clients and how his knowledge
and experience with Energy Medicine plays into it, David’s response was as follows:

EFT, tapping, energy psychology, is a branch of Energy Medicine. Energy Medicine


is the larger field, in the same way as the relationship of conventional medicine is to
psychiatry. You have to go through medical school to be a psychiatrist, but then you
spend 4 more years in residencies and specializing in working with the mind

The relationship of Energy Medicine to energy psychology is similar, but it’s different
in the sense that Energy Medicine is a much, much, much, larger field, with much
more to learn. We have a 4-year certification programme for people - and people
have to study for 2 years before they can open a practice - whereas with energy
psychology and EFT you can learn that so quickly. You can learn the tapping points
online or over a weekend. To get really good at it, is a different story, because you
have to begin to understand what to focus on to get the results that you want, but
there are many areas where energy psychology will not get the results. For instance,
with depression, the energies are simply not crossing over. If the energies are not
crossing over it doesn’t mean the person is depressed but, if the person is
depressed, you know the energies are not crossing over, and even if you were to tap

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 251


on the issues for ever, it won’t work nearly as easily as if you change that with energy
techniques or with Homolateral Crossover.

So, if you are a therapist and you know and understand how the energies are
involved in depression, in anxiety, in PTSD, in all the kinds of conditions that people
come to a therapist to work with, then you are able to so much more quickly get them
to the point where the EFT is going to be the most effective to work on the specific
issues they have. It is a complex relationship and a lot more Energy Medicine people
are now learning EFT and vice versa.

Donna: David and I were just in France at an energy psychology conference and
there was Energy Medicine there on the conference programme

In response to a question from the Module 7 Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David
regarding someone who has improved emotionally and mentally since starting the course
and how is now calmer, happier and slower to anger, but feels worse physically and
exhaustion sometimes slams into them so hard that even doing energy work is a challenge,
the questioner asked if the benefits would eventually seep into their physical plane or if they
were doing something wrong, Donna and David’s answers were as follows:

Donna: You are not doing anything wrong. Every one of us starts at a different place
in Energy Medicine. You have had the lessons of Triple Warmer in this course and so
you know that Triple Warmer will sometimes fight change. Triple Warmer governs
habits and it was to our benefit that we had all these habits building up in our bodies
in evolution, so that we didn’t have to think things out every time. But that is now
problematic because Triple Warmer can fight the changes, even very good changes,
and that is what I believe you are experiencing

I am so sorry that you are experiencing that, but I will tell you that, for myself as well,
when I was very sick with multiple sclerosis, I really had to trust the process because
when I was sometimes shifting energy, I would get sick and would have to lie down.
So I understand this

I would suggest you do Triple Warmer exercises a lot - do the Triple Warmer
Smoothie before you even do the DER and anytime just by itself. Also, hold your
Neurovascular Points on your forehead every day, so it can begin to seep in. It will
eventually do this on its own, but you can help it seep in faster

David: One of the things that sometimes happens - but I’m not saying it’s happening
to you, because we don’t know you - but sometimes a person is on overdrive and
draining their life force, and then they start to do the energy exercises that balance
and centre them, and they discover their body just kind of takes a breath and slows
down and enjoys the ability to not be pushing so hard. But your experience then is
that you don’t have any energy! It’s like a re-calibration - the energy will come back.
That might also be why you are feeling happier - you are not pushing yourself and
draining your life force - that feels good, but also your body needs to rebalance and
re-stabilise

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 252


Donna: Do remember Spleen Meridian, how much it needs to be able to metabolise
everything that you are doing so that, physically, things will start to shift. I am such
an example of someone who has come such a long way away from being healthy!
That doesn’t mean things might not happen to me, but I know what to do now, so that
I can nip it in the bud. Any illness, any imbalance, I can heal so much quicker

One of the questions from the Live Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David after Module 8
was regarding how do you know if what you are feeling energetically is good, or needs some
energy tool applied to it. For example, if you feel a vibration-type energy, is that shifting
energy and doesn’t need any attention, so relax into it, or a sharper pain that might need
shifting - how do you know which is which? Donna’s response was as follows:

First of all, you begin to resonate with what is going on with your energy systems the
more you work in energy. Of course you know if you feel good energetically, but if
you feel something like a vibration and you wonder if it is energy moving, it is moving
- and if it doesn’t bring pain your way, I would not worry about it. But you could figure
out which meridian it’s on and does that meridian run through where that vibration is?
You could experiment a little and try sedating, because whenever you have too much
energy, and it isn’t moving out easily, then you want to sedate the acupressure points
for that meridian

One of the questions from the Live Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David after Module 8
was regarding if one’s energy systems are strong and healthy would that override the need
to uncover root causes of traumas and phobias etc. In other words, if we focus on
increasing the smooth flow of energy, without ‘the story’, would it naturally take care of ‘the
story’? Donna and David’s responses were as follows:

Donna: That is not a simple black and white question. If you were to go on and study
further with us, we teach how to uncover those stories and uncover the trauma and
move the energy of the trauma out. It is a reality that where somebody has been
really traumatised badly, yes, it always works to just get the energy flowing. But
sometimes it’s important to grasp what happened and so you can move the energy
out with deeper energy work

David: People who have been really traumatised, there is a lot going on and there
are a lot of ways that it’s necessary to understand the big picture and what is going
on in their lives and their bodies, but the basic energy methods do work to do a
deeper level healing - and so you have that going for you. But sometimes you do
indeed need to know what the trauma is and really approach it head on. In energy
psychology there is a variation of Energy Medicine that is particularly effective for
working with PTSD and other psychological disorders

One of the questions from the Live Q&A Coaching Call with Donna and David after Module 8
was from someone who didn’t know it before learning about Energy Medicine but now
realises they have always seen energy when they close their eyes. They asked how they
could begin to understand what all of that energy that they see means. Donna and David’s

© 2017 Innersource © Julie Bissmire Page 253


responses were as follows:

Donna: Growing up with seeing energy I had 30 years to make sense of it - you just
learn it over time, like learning a language. I’m not sure what you are seeing - I
assume you may be seeing colours. M y daughter, Titanya Dahlin’s, website may be
of interest to you - there is a link to it on our own web site. What happens to a lot of
people when they work with Energy Medicine, is that their senses become more
primed - they open up to things they weren’t attuned to before. What happened to
Titanya, about 6 years ago, she began to hear energy and she has really tested
herself against me and she has made a business of people getting colour readings
with her. She has an amazing understanding of colours and what they all mean

David: When you close your eyes and see colour and movement, there is a bunch of
things that that could be related to. It could be related to your eyes processing light
and it could be having a visual representation of how the energies are moving in your
body. It could be a visual representation of the energies in the room. So we don’t
have one answer, but pay attention to it and try to learn the language, try to pick up
correlation with what you are seeing and what is going on inside you or beyond you

Donna: Another thing is that other people I’ve known who have begun to see energy,
it often begins behind their eyes, they are seeing behind their eyes. If they work